Contents

Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series Instruction Manual PDF

1 of 462
1 of 462

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series Instruction Manual PDF

Introduction

This manual is a guide for using the Mitsubishi Electric CNC C80 Series.

This manual describes operations, production processes and maintenances for users who operate the Mitsubishi Electric CNC installed machine tool. Read this manual thoroughly before using CNC unit. Moreover study the "Precautions for Safety" on the next page before use to use the unit safely. Be sure to keep this manual always at hand.

CAUTION For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the machine tool builder (MTB) takes precedence over this manual. Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible". This manual is written on the assumption that all the applicable functions are included. Some of them, however, may not be available for your NC system. Refer to the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before use. Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each MTB for details on each machine tool. Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use. Do not connect NC system to the Internet-connected network. To maintain the safety of the NC system against unauthorized access from external devices via the network, take appropriate measures.

In this manual, the following abbreviations might be used. L system: Lathe system M system: Machining center system MTB: Machine tool builder

Also refer to the manuals on "Manual List" as necessary.

Manual List

Manuals related to M800/M80/E80/C80 Series are listed as follows.

These manuals are written on the assumption that all optional functions are added to the targeted model.

Some functions or screens may not be available depending on the machine or specifications set by MTB. (Confirm the

specifications before use.)

The manuals issued by MTB take precedence over these manuals.

Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents

M800/M80/E80 Series Instruction Manual

IB-1501274 Operation guide for NC

Explanation for screen operation, etc.

C80 Series Instruction Manual

IB-1501453 Operation guide for NC

Explanation for screen operation, etc.

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2)

IB-1501275 G code programming for lathe system

Basic functions, etc.

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2)

IB-1501276 G code programming for lathe system

Functions for multi-part system, high-accuracy function, etc.

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Programming Manual (Machining Center System) (1/2)

IB-1501277 G code programming for machining center system

Basic functions, etc.

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Programming Manual (Machining Center System) (2/2)

IB-1501278 G code programming for machining center system

Functions for multi-part system, high-accuracy function, etc.

M800/M80/E80 Series Alarm/Parameter Manual

IB-1501279 Alarms

Parameters

C80 Series Alarm/Parameter Manual

IB-1501560 Alarms

Parameters

Manuals for MTBs (NC)

Manuals for MTBs (drive section)

Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Specifications Manual (Function)

IB-1501505 Model selection

Outline of various functions

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series Specifications Manual (Hardware)

IB-1501506 Model selection

Specifications of hardware unit

M800W/M80W Series Connection and Setup Manual

IB-1501268 Detailed specifications of hardware unit

Installation, connection, wiring, setup (startup/adjustment)

M800S/M80/E80 Series Connection and Setup Manual

IB-1501269 Detailed specifications of hardware unit

Installation, connection, wiring, setup (startup/adjustment)

C80 Series Connection and Setup Manual

IB-1501452 Detailed specifications of hardware unit

Installation, connection, wiring, setup (startup/adjustment)

M800/M80/E80 Series PLC Development Manual

IB-1501270

Electrical design

I/O relation (assignment, setting, connection), field network

Development environment (PLC on-board, peripheral development environment), etc.

M800/M80/E80 Series PLC Programming Manual

IB-1501271

Electrical design

Sequence programming

PLC support functions, etc.

M800/M80/E80/C80 Series PLC Interface Manual

IB-1501272 Electrical design

Interface signals between NC and PLC

M800/M80/E80 Series Maintenance Manual

IB-1501273 Cleaning and replacement for each unit

Other items related to maintenance

C80 Series Maintenance Manual

IB-1501454 Cleaning and replacement for each unit

Other items related to maintenance

Manual IB No. Contents

MDS-E/EH Series Specifications Manual

IB-1501226 Specifications for power supply regeneration type

MDS-E/EH Series Instruction Manual

IB-1501229 Instruction for power supply regeneration type

MDS-EJ/EJH Series Specifications Manual

IB-1501232 Specifications for regenerative resistor type

MDS-EJ/EJH Series Instruction Manual

IB-1501235 Instruction for regenerative resistor type

MDS-EM/EMH Series Specifications Manual

IB-1501238 Specifications for multi-hybrid, power supply regeneration

type

MDS-EM/EMH Series Instruction Manual

IB-1501241 Instruction for multi-hybrid, power supply regeneration type

DATA BOOK IB-1501252 Specifications of servo drive unit, spindle drive unit, motor, etc.

Manuals for MTBs (Others)

For M800/M80/E80 Series

Manual No. Purpose and Contents

GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Hardware)

SH-081194 Outline of hardware such as part names, external dimensions,

installation, wiring, maintenance, etc. of GOTs

GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)

SH-081195 Outline of utilities such as screen display setting, operation

method, etc. of GOTs

GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Monitor)

SH-081196 Outline of each monitor function of GOTs

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products)

SH-081197 Outline of connection types and connection method between

GOT and Mitsubishi Electric connection devices

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

SH-081220 Outline of screen design method using screen creation

software GT Designer3

Manual No. Purpose and Contents

GOT2000/GOT1000 Series CC-Link Communication Unit User's Manual

IB-0800351 Explanation for handling CC-Link communication unit (for

GOT2000 series/GOT1000 series)

GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (Startup)

SH-080372E Explanation for system configuration, installation, etc. of PLC

development tool GX Developer

GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual

SH-080373E Explanation for operations using PLC development tool GX

Developer

GX Converter Version 1 Operating Manual

IB-0800004E Explanation for operations using data conversion tool GX

Converter

GX Works2 Installation Instructions BCN-P5999-0944 Explanation for the operating environment and installation

method of GX Works2

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)

SH-080779ENG

Explanation for the system configuration of GX Works2 and the functions common to Simple project and Structured project such as parameter setting, operation method for the online function

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)

SH-080780ENG Explanation for methods for such as creating and monitoring

programs in Simple project of GX Works2

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)

SH-080984ENG Explanation for methods for such as creating function blocks,

pasting function blocks to sequence programs, and operating FB library in Simple project of GX Works2

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

SH-080781ENG Explanation for methods for such as creating and monitoring

programs in Structured project of GX Works2

GX Works3 Installation Instructions BCN-P5999-0391 Explanation for the operating environment and installation

method of GX Works3

MELSEC-Q CC-Link System Master/ Local Module Users Manual

SH-080394E Explanation for system configuration, installation, wiring, etc.

of master/local modules for CC-Link system

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1)

SH-081198ENG Explanation for connection types and connection method

between GOT and other company's devicesGOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2)

SH-081199ENG

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/ Fieldbus Products, Peripherals)

SH-081200ENG Explanation for connection types and connection method

between GOT and microcomputers, MODBUS/fieldbus products, peripherals

GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual

SH-081201ENG Explanation for system configuration, screen configuration

and operation method of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2000

For C80 Series

Reference Manual for MTBs

Manual No. Purpose and Contents

MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual

SH-081262 Outline of system configuration, specifications, installation,

wiring, maintenance, etc.

MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module Users Manual (Startup)

SH-081263 Outline of specifications, procedures before operation,

troubleshooting, etc. for CPU module

MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module Users Manual (Application)

SH-081264 Outline of memory, functions, devices, parameters, etc. for

CPU module

MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network User's Manual (Application)

SH-081259 Explanation for functions, parameter settings, programming,

troubleshooting, etc. of the CC-Link IE Field Network function

QCPU Users Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

SH-080483 Outline of specifications, necessary knowledge to configure

the system and maintenance-related descriptions for Q series CPU module, etc.

GX Works3 Operating Manual SH-081215 Outline of functions, programming, etc.

Manual No. Purpose and Contents

M800/M80 Series Smart safety observation Specification manual

BNP-C3072-022 Explanation for smart safety observation function

C80 Series Smart safety observation Specification manual

BNP-C3077-022

M800/M80 Series CC-Link (Master/ Local) Specification manual

BNP-C3072-089 Explanation for CC-Link

M800/M80 Series PROFIBUS-DP Specification manual

BNP-C3072-118 Explanation for PROFIBUS-DP communication function

M800/M80 Series Interactive cycle insertion (Customization) Specification manual

BNP-C3072-121- 0003

Explanation for interactive cycle insertion

M800/M80 Series EtherNet/IP Specifications manual

BNP-C3072-263 Explanation for EtherNet/IP

M800/M80 Series CC-Link IE Field (Master/local) Specifications manual

BNP-C3072-283 Explanation for CC-Link IE Field

M800/M80 Series GOT Connection Specifications manual

BNP-C3072-314 Explanation for GOT connection

M800/M80 Series CC-Link IE Field Basic Specifications manual

BNP-C3072-337 Explanation for CC-Link IE Field Basic

Precautions for Safety

Always read the specifications issued by the MTB, this manual, related manuals and attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit. This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case, important information that must always be observed is described.

The following signs indicate prohibition and compulsory.

The meaning of each pictorial sign is as follows.

Mitsubishi Electric CNC is designed and manufactured solely for applications to machine tools to be used for industrial purpos- es. Do not use this product in any applications other than those specified above, especially those which are substantially influ- ential on the public interest or which are expected to have significant influence on human lives or properties.

Not applicable in this manual.

DANGER When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.

WARNING When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.

CAUTION When the user may be subject to bodily injury or when physical damage may occur if handling is mistaken.

This sign indicates prohibited behavior (must not do).

For example, "Keep fire away" is indicated by .

This sign indicates a thing that is critical (must do).

For example, "it must be grounded" is indicated by .

CAUTION

CAUTION rotate ob-

ject

CAUTION HOT

Danger Electric

shock risk

Danger explosive

Prohibited

Disassembly is pro-

hibited

KEEP FIRE AWAY

General instruction

Earth ground

For Safe Use

DANGER

WARNING

1. Items related to program development Do not assign any startup switch for C80 on GOT's touch key. If a communication fault (including cable discon- nection) occurs between GOT and CNC C80, the communication will be suspended and the GOT will become in- operative. In this case, even when you release your hands from the startup switch, CNC will fail to recognize the cutoff of startup signal, which may cause serious accidents.

2. Items related to operation If the operation start position is set from a block in the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. Please confirm that G and F modal and coordinate values are appropriate. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T and B commands before the block set as the start position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. If the program is run from the set block without carrying out these operations, there is a danger of interference with the machine or of machine operation at an unexpected speed, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators. Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface speed control moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc. In this case, the workpiece, etc. may jump out during machining, which may result in breakage of tools or machine tool or may cause damage to the operators.

CAUTION

1. Items related to product and manual

For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual issued by the ma- chine tool builder (MTB) takes precedence over this manual.

Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible"

This manual is written on the assumption that all the applicable functions are included. Some of them, however, may not be available for your NC system. Refer to the specifications issued by the machine tool builder before use.

Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each MTB for details on each machine tool.

Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.

Do not connect NC system to the Internet-connected network.

To maintain the safety of the NC system against unauthorized access from external devices via the network, take appropriate measures.

2. Items related to installation and assembly

Ground the signal cables to ensure stable system operation. Also ground the NC unit main frame, power distribu- tion panel and machine to one point, so they all have the same potential.

3. Items related to preparation before use

Always set the stored stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end.

Always turn the power OFF before connecting/disconnecting the input/output device cable. Failure to do so could damage the input/output device and NC unit.

4. Items related to screen operation

If the tool compensation amount or workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during automatic op- eration (including during single block stop), the changes will be valid from the command in next block or after sev- eral subsequent blocks.

All of the various data in the NC memory is erased when formatting. Be sure to use the transfer function to transfer all necessary data to another storage device before formatting.

Pay close attention to the sequence operation when carrying out forced data setting (forced output) in the I/F di- agnosis screen during machine operation.

The program including a character of any language other than the display language is not correctly displayed. Do not edit such a program. Any part of the program other than the comment part may also be changed if edited.

To prevent influence from data omission and data transformation in the communication circuit, always verify the data after inputting and outputting machining programs.

Do not change setup parameters without prior approval from the MTB.

5. Items related to programming

If there is no value after the G command, the operation will be the "G00" operation when the program is run due to key chattering, etc., during editing.

" ; ", "EOB", "%", and "EOR" are symbols used for explanation. The actual codes for ISO are "CR, LF" ("LF") and "%". "%" and "EOR" are represented by "%" in ISO. The programs created on the edit screen are stored in the NC memory in a "CR, LF" format, however, the programs created with external devices may be stored in an "LF" format. The actual codes for EIA are "EOB (End of Block)" and "EOR (End of Record)".

Do not change the fixed cycle program without prior approval from the MTB.

6. Items related to operation

Do not enter the machines movable range during automatic operation. During rotation, keep your hands, feet and face away from the spindle.

Carry out dry operation before actually machining, and confirm the machining program, tool offset and workpiece coordinate system offset.

If the operation start position is set from a block in the program and the program is started, the program before the set block is not executed. If there are coordinate system shift commands or M, S, T, and B commands before the block set as the starting position, carry out the required commands using the MDI, etc. There is a danger of interference with the machine if the operation is started from the set starting position block without carrying out these operations.

Program so the mirror image function is turned ON/OFF at the mirror image center. The mirror image center will deviate if the function is turned ON/OFF at a position other than the mirror image center.

7.Items related to faults and abnormalities

If the battery low warning is issued in the drive unit side, immediately replace the battery. Replace the batteries while applying the drive unit's control power.

If the axis overruns or emits an abnormal noise, immediately press the emergency stop button and stop the axis movement.

Turn OFF the power immediately if any smoke, abnormal noise or odor is generated from the controller, drive unit or motor.

8. Items related to maintenance

Incorrect connections may damage the devices. Always connect the cables to the indicated connectors.

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated according to specification on the connector. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

Do not connect the cable by pulling on the cable wire.

Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.

Dispose the spent battery according to local laws.

Dispose the spent cooling fan according to local laws.

Do not replace each control unit while the power is ON.

Do not replace the operation panel I/O unit while the power is ON.

Do not replace the cooling fan while the power is ON.

CAUTION

Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.

Read the manual carefully and pay careful attention to safety for the on-line operation (especially program change, forced stop or operation change) performed by connecting peripheral devices to the CNC CPU module during op- eration. Erroneous operation may cause machine breakage or accident.

Never try to disassemble or modify modules. It may cause product failure, operation failure, injury or fire.

Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone more than 25cm away in all direc- tions of C80. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction.

Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before installation or removing the module. Not doing so could result in electric shock, damage to the module or operation failure.

Do not install/remove the module on to/from base unit or terminal block more than 50 times, after the first use of the product. Mounting/dismounting over 50 times may cause an operation failure.

Do not drop or impact the battery to be installed to the module. That may damage the battery, causing battery liq- uid to leak in the battery. Do not use the dropped or impacted battery, but dispose of it.

Before touching the unit, always touch a metal with a ground section to discharge any static electricity in the hu- man body etc. If static electricity is not discharged, the breakdown and the malfunction of the unit are caused.

Do not directly touch the module's conductive parts and electronic components. Touching them could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module.

Do not touch the heat radiating fins of CNC CPU module while the power is ON and for a short time after the power is turned OFF. In this timing, these parts become very hot and may lead to burns. Remove the modules with close attention.

When connecting to a personal computer and a unit with the USB interface, an electric shock or a unit failure may occur. Operate these correctly according to the manual of a unit and a personal computer. Observe the following cautions when a personal computer in an AC power supply is used. (1) For a personal computer that uses a 3-pin power plug or power plug with a ground lead type, make sure to use

a plug socket including a ground input electrode or ground the earth lead, respectively. And, ensure to ground a personal computer and a unit with Class D or higher grounding (Ground resistance: 100 or less).

(2) For a personal computer that uses a 2-pin power plug without ground lead, make sure to connect the unit to the personal computer according to the following procedures. And, it is recommended to supply the same pow- er supply line to a personal computer and the unit. (a) Pull out the power plug of the personal computer from the AC outlet. (b) Confirm that the power plug of the personal computer has been pulled out from the AC outlet, and connect

USB cables, the extension cable or the bus connection cable of a GOT. (c) Insert the power plug of the personal computer into the AC outlet.

Before using this product after a long period of storage, performance check must be conducted. Otherwise con- tact the MTB of your machine tool.

CAUTION

The metal part becomes the high temperature.

9. Other items Mitsubishi Electric CNC C80, which is an open equipment, must be installed within a sealed metal control panel (IP54 or higher). C80 must also be used and stored under the conditions listed in the table of specifications below.

(*1) This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises. Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge withstand voltage for the equipment up to the rated 300V is 2500V.

(*2) This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used. Pollution level 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs; however, a temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally.

(*3) Do not use or store C80 under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m. Doing so can cause an operation failure.

(1) The following environment conditions are required for the layout design. No large amount of conductible dust, iron filings, oil mist, salt, or organic solvents No direct sunlight No strong electrical or magnetic fields No direct vibrations nor shocks on C80

CAUTION

Item Specification Ambient tempera- ture

During operation 0 to 55 C

During storage -25 to 75 C

Ambient Humidity During operation 5 to 95%RH, non-condensing

During storage 5 to 95%RH, non-condensing

Vibration resis- tance

Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2

Frequency Constant accel- eration

Half amplitude Sweep count

Under intermit- tent vibration

5 to 8.4Hz - 3.5mm 10 times each in X, Y, Z directions (For

80 min.) 8.4 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 -

Under continuous vibration

5 to 8.4Hz - 1.75mm

8.4 to 150Hz 4.9m/s2 -

Shock resistance 147m/s2, 3 times in each of 3 directions X, Y, Z

Operating atmosphere No corrosive gases nor inflammable gases

Altitude 2000m or less (*3)

Installation location Inside control panel

Overvoltage category (*1) II or less

Pollution level (*2) 2 or less

Note

Treatment of waste

The following two laws will apply when disposing of this product. Considerations must be made to each law. The

following laws are in effect in Japan. Thus, when using this product overseas, the local laws will have a priority. If

necessary, indicate or notify these laws to the final user of the product.

(1) Requirements for "Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources"

(a) Recycle as much of this product as possible when finished with use.

(b) When recycling, often parts are sorted into steel scraps and electric parts, etc., and sold to scrap contractors.

Mitsubishi recommends sorting the product and selling the members to appropriate contractors.

(2) Requirements for "Law for Treatment of Waste and Cleaning"

(a) Mitsubishi recommends recycling and selling the product when no longer needed according to item (1) above.

The user should make an effort to reduce waste in this manner.

(b) When disposing a product that cannot be resold, it shall be treated as a waste product.

(c) The treatment of industrial waste must be commissioned to a licensed industrial waste treatment contractor,

and appropriate measures, including a manifest control, must be taken.

(d) Batteries correspond to "primary batteries", and must be disposed of according to local disposal laws.

Disposal

(Note) This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users and

Annex II.

Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components

which can be recycled and/or reused.

This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your

household waste.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means that the battery or

accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be indicated as follows:

Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)

In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and accumulators.

Please, dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.

Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!

Trademarks

MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSEC iQ-R, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT,

CC-Link IE, CC-Link IE/field, EcoMonitorLight and SLMP are either trademarks or registered trademarks of

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other countries.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, SQL Server and Access are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

SD logo and SDHC logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of LLC.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other countries.

Intel and Pentium are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and/or

other countries.

MODBUS is either a trademark or a registered trademark of Schneider Electric USA, Inc. or the affiliated

companies in Japan and/or other countries.

EtherNet/IP is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association,Inc.

PROFIBUS-DP and PROFINET are either trademarks of Profibus International.

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation, the subsidiaries, or the affiliated companies in the United

States and /or other countries.

VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.

Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the

respective companies.

( /Japanese) ( A)

Handling of our product

(English)

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user

may be required to take adequate measures.

( /Korean)

(A )

.

Contents

1 Outline of Menu Items.................................................................................................................................. 1

2 Screen Operations ....................................................................................................................................... 7 2.1 Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT) .......................................................................................................................... 8

2.1.1 Screen Operation of GOT ................................................................................................................................ 8 2.1.2 Explanations of the Screens ............................................................................................................................ 9 2.1.3 Messages....................................................................................................................................................... 14 2.1.4 External memory interface ............................................................................................................................. 15

2.2 CNC Monitor2 Screen............................................................................................................................................. 16 2.2.1 Displayed Part System................................................................................................................................... 18 2.2.2 NC Status....................................................................................................................................................... 19 2.2.3 Operation mode/MDI status ........................................................................................................................... 20 2.2.4 Operation status............................................................................................................................................. 20 2.2.5 Alarms/Warnings............................................................................................................................................ 21 2.2.6 Operation messages ...................................................................................................................................... 21 2.2.7 Changing the Screen Theme Color................................................................................................................ 22 2.2.8 Screen Transition Diagram ............................................................................................................................ 23

2.3 Setting Data ............................................................................................................................................................ 24 2.3.1 Setting Numerals and Alphabetical Characters ............................................................................................. 24 2.3.2 Inputting Operations....................................................................................................................................... 25

2.4 Guidance Function.................................................................................................................................................. 27 2.4.1 Parameter Guidance ...................................................................................................................................... 27 2.4.2 Alarm Guidance ............................................................................................................................................. 29 2.4.3 G Code Guidance .......................................................................................................................................... 32

2.5 Menu List ................................................................................................................................................................ 35 2.6 Touchscreen Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 37

2.6.1 Basic Operation.............................................................................................................................................. 37 2.6.2 Software Keyboard......................................................................................................................................... 39 2.6.3 Operating the Screen by Touch Gestures...................................................................................................... 44

2.7 Menu Customization Function ................................................................................................................................ 48 2.8 Changing the Operation Level (Protect Setting Screen)......................................................................................... 50

3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables ........................................................................ 51 3.1 Inputting a Machining Program............................................................................................................................... 52 3.2 Creating and Editing a Machining Program ............................................................................................................ 52 3.3 Registering and Editing the MDI Program .............................................................................................................. 60 3.4 Registering and Editing the Fixed Cycle Program .................................................................................................. 62

3.4.1 Fixed Cycle Operation Parameters ................................................................................................................ 62 3.4.2 Transmitting and Erasing the Fixed Cycle Program....................................................................................... 62

3.5 Erasing a File.......................................................................................................................................................... 63 3.6 Editing Operations .................................................................................................................................................. 64

3.6.1 Changing the Display ..................................................................................................................................... 64 3.6.2 Displaying an Arbitrary Line ........................................................................................................................... 66 3.6.3 Rewriting Data................................................................................................................................................ 66 3.6.4 Inserting Data (Initial Data Overwrite Mode) .................................................................................................. 67 3.6.5 Overwriting Data (Initial Data Insertion Mode) ............................................................................................... 68 3.6.6 Deleting Data ................................................................................................................................................. 68 3.6.7 Searching for Character Strings..................................................................................................................... 70 3.6.8 Replacing Character Strings .......................................................................................................................... 72 3.6.9 Copying and Pasting Data ............................................................................................................................. 73 3.6.10 Undoing Program Changes.......................................................................................................................... 75

3.7 Program Editing Support Function.......................................................................................................................... 76 3.7.1 Performing Operation Search at the Cursor Position..................................................................................... 76 3.7.2 Adding Sequence No. (N No.) Automatically ................................................................................................. 77 3.7.3 G Code Guidance .......................................................................................................................................... 78 3.7.4 Playback Editing............................................................................................................................................. 79

3.8 Editing a Multi-part System Program ...................................................................................................................... 83 3.8.1 Multi-part System Simultaneous Program Editing.......................................................................................... 83 3.8.2 Special Program Editing Display for Synchronization between Part Systems ............................................... 89

3.9 Defining Variables................................................................................................................................................... 90 3.9.1 Common Variables......................................................................................................................................... 90 3.9.2 Local Variables............................................................................................................................................... 95

4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program ..................................................................................... 99 4.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program...................................................................................................................... 100 4.2 Selecting a Device, Directory and File.................................................................................................................. 105 4.3 Transferring a File................................................................................................................................................. 108 4.4 Comparing Files (Compare) ................................................................................................................................. 111 4.5 Erasing a File........................................................................................................................................................ 112 4.6 Changing a File Name (Rename) ......................................................................................................................... 113 4.7 Creating a Directory.............................................................................................................................................. 114 4.8 Other Functions .................................................................................................................................................... 115

4.8.1 Merging a File .............................................................................................................................................. 115 4.8.2 List of File Names ........................................................................................................................................ 116 4.8.3 Edit Lock B and C ........................................................................................................................................ 116 4.8.4 Program Display Lock .................................................................................................................................. 117 4.8.5 Data Protection Keys ................................................................................................................................... 117 4.8.6 Leading Zero ................................................................................................................................................ 118

4.9 The Batch Input/Output the Machining Program of NC Memory .......................................................................... 119

5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece.............................................................................................................. 123 5.1 Setting a Tool........................................................................................................................................................ 124 5.2 Registering a Tool (Tool Registration Screen)...................................................................................................... 124

5.2.1 Registering a Tool in the Magazine Pot ....................................................................................................... 126 5.2.2 Setting the PLC Command .......................................................................................................................... 126 5.2.3 Setting and Erasing the Tool No. of Spindle/Standby Tools ........................................................................ 127 5.2.4 Erasing the Tool Registration Data .............................................................................................................. 127

5.3 Measuring a Tool (Tool Measurement Screen) .................................................................................................... 128 5.3.1 Tool Measurement (M System).................................................................................................................... 128 5.3.2 Tool Measurement (L System)..................................................................................................................... 133

5.4 Setting Tool Compensation Amount (Tool Offset Screen).................................................................................... 144 5.4.1 Setting the Tool Compensation Data ........................................................................................................... 151 5.4.2 Switching the Input Method for the Tool Compensation Data...................................................................... 153 5.4.3 Erasing the Tool Compensation Data .......................................................................................................... 154 5.4.4 Copying and Pasting the Tool Compensation Data ..................................................................................... 155 5.4.5 Undoing Change of Tool Compensation Data ............................................................................................. 155 5.4.6 Disabling the Setting of Tool Compensation Amount................................................................................... 156 5.4.7 Measuring Tool Compensation Amount....................................................................................................... 157 5.4.8 Moving to designated Compensation Number ............................................................................................. 159

5.5 Setting the Tool Management Data (Tool Management Screen) ......................................................................... 160 5.5.1 List of Display Items ..................................................................................................................................... 162 5.5.2 Data Setting Range...................................................................................................................................... 167 5.5.3 Menu Configuration...................................................................................................................................... 171 5.5.4 Registering New Tool Management Data .................................................................................................... 175 5.5.5 Switching the Item Type of the Tool Management Data Detailed Portion.................................................... 175 5.5.6 Displaying Data by Designating Tool Management Data No. ...................................................................... 176 5.5.7 Displaying Data by Designating Tool No...................................................................................................... 177 5.5.8 Sorting the Data by Tool No......................................................................................................................... 178 5.5.9 Deleting the Tool Management Data ........................................................................................................... 179 5.5.10 Copying and Pasting the Tool Management Data ..................................................................................... 180 5.5.11 Specifying Display Format and Setting Range of Additional Information................................................... 182

5.6 Tool Life Management .......................................................................................................................................... 183 5.6.1 Displaying the Group List (M system: Tool life management I, II / L system: Tool life management II)....... 185 5.6.2 Displaying the Life Management Data in Group Units (M system) .............................................................. 189 5.6.3 Displaying the Life Management Data (L system: Tool life management I)................................................. 197 5.6.4 Displaying the Tool Life Management Data in Group Units (L system: Tool life Management II)................ 199

5.7 Setting and Measuring a Workpiece..................................................................................................................... 204 5.7.1 Workpiece Measurement (M System).......................................................................................................... 204

5.7.1.1 Carrying Out Surface Measurement.................................................................................................... 208 5.7.1.2 Carrying Out Hole Measurement......................................................................................................... 209 5.7.1.3 Carrying Out Width Measurement ....................................................................................................... 211 5.7.1.4 Carrying Out Rotation Measurement................................................................................................... 213 5.7.1.5 Performing Automatic Recontact When Contacting the Workpiece .................................................... 216

5.7.2 Workpiece Measurement (L System)........................................................................................................... 217 5.8 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System Offset ...................................................................................................... 223

5.8.1 Setting the Coordinate System Offset Amount ............................................................................................ 225 5.8.2 Erasing the Coordinate System Offset Amount ........................................................................................... 226 5.8.3 Setting the Workpiece Coordinate Origin..................................................................................................... 226 5.8.4 Changing the Coordinate System Display ................................................................................................... 227

5.9 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System Shift ......................................................................................................... 228 5.9.1 Manually Setting the Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Value................................................................. 232 5.9.2 Automatically Setting the Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Value.......................................................... 234

6 Setting Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 237 6.1 Setting User Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 238

6.1.1 Selecting the Parameter Number................................................................................................................. 240 6.1.2 Setting the Parameters ................................................................................................................................ 241 6.1.3 Copying and Pasting Parameters ................................................................................................................ 242 6.1.4 Parameter Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 243 6.1.5 Echoback ..................................................................................................................................................... 243 6.1.6 Ethernet parameter ...................................................................................................................................... 243 6.1.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................................. 243

6.2 Selecting High-accuracy Control Parameters (Machining Cond I Screen) ........................................................... 244

7 Setting Machine Movable Area ............................................................................................................... 249 7.1 Setting the Stored Stroke Limit ............................................................................................................................. 250

7.1.1 Stored Stroke Limit II.................................................................................................................................... 251 7.2 Chuck Barrier/Tailstock Barrier (L System) .......................................................................................................... 253

8 Other Setups............................................................................................................................................. 259 8.1 Integrated Time..................................................................................................................................................... 260

8.1.1 Integrated Time Display ............................................................................................................................... 260 8.1.2 Setting the Integrated Time.......................................................................................................................... 261 8.1.3 Setting the Time Display Selection .............................................................................................................. 262

8.2 Counter Setting..................................................................................................................................................... 263 8.3 Origin Set, Origin Cancel ...................................................................................................................................... 265 8.4 Manual Numerical Value Command ..................................................................................................................... 268 8.5 MDI Program Editing ............................................................................................................................................ 271 8.6 Thread Recutting Function ................................................................................................................................... 273

8.6.1 Storing the Thread Groove Position............................................................................................................. 275 8.6.2 Switching the Stored Thread Groove ON/OFF ............................................................................................ 276 8.6.3 Erasing the Stored Thread Groove Position ................................................................................................ 276

9 Machining a Workpiece ........................................................................................................................... 277 9.1 Operation Search.................................................................................................................................................. 278

9.1.1 Executing an Operation Search ................................................................................................................... 280 9.1.2 Changing Whether to Show or Hide the Comment Field ............................................................................. 281 9.1.3 Changing the Sorting Method ...................................................................................................................... 282

9.2 Checking the Movement under Machining (Monitor Screen)................................................................................ 283 9.2.1 Screen Layout .............................................................................................................................................. 283 9.2.2 Switching the Display Format....................................................................................................................... 294 9.2.3 Switching the Counter Types ....................................................................................................................... 295 9.2.4 Switching the Spindle No. to be Displayed on Counter................................................................................ 298 9.2.5 Operation of 2-part System Simultaneous Display ...................................................................................... 298 9.2.6 Counter All-axis Display ............................................................................................................................... 300 9.2.7 Modal Display............................................................................................................................................... 302 9.2.8 Program Tree Display .................................................................................................................................. 308 9.2.9 Integrated Time Display ............................................................................................................................... 309 9.2.10 Load Meter Display .................................................................................................................................... 309 9.2.11 Spindle, Standby Display ........................................................................................................................... 310 9.2.12 Tool Center Coordinate Display ................................................................................................................. 311 9.2.13 All Spindles' Rotation Speed Display ......................................................................................................... 313

9.3 Restart Search...................................................................................................................................................... 314 9.3.1 Main Screen ................................................................................................................................................. 318 9.3.2 Top Search Screen ...................................................................................................................................... 320 9.3.3 File Setting Screen....................................................................................................................................... 321 9.3.4 MSTB History Screen................................................................................................................................... 322 9.3.5 Operation Sequence for Program Restart.................................................................................................... 323 9.3.6 Executing Restart Search (Restart Type 1) ................................................................................................. 325 9.3.7 Executing Restart Search (Restart Type 2) ................................................................................................. 326 9.3.8 Returning to the Restart Position ................................................................................................................. 329 9.3.9 Executing the MSTB Commands ................................................................................................................. 331

9.4 Collation and Stop ................................................................................................................................................ 332

9.5 Correcting the Machining Program ....................................................................................................................... 336 9.5.1 Program Editing ........................................................................................................................................... 336 9.5.2 Buffer Correction .......................................................................................................................................... 342

10 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................... 347 10.1 Confirming the NC Message (Alarm Screen) ..................................................................................................... 348

10.1.1 Alarm History.............................................................................................................................................. 350 10.2 Checking Machine Status ................................................................................................................................... 352

10.2.1 System Configuration Screen .................................................................................................................... 352 10.2.2 Option Display Screen ............................................................................................................................... 353 10.2.3 Drive Monitor Screen (Servo Unit) ............................................................................................................. 354 10.2.4 Drive Monitor Screen (Spindle Unit)........................................................................................................... 359 10.2.5 Drive Monitor Screen (Power Supply Unit) ................................................................................................ 364 10.2.6 Drive Monitor Screen (Synchronous Error) ................................................................................................ 366 10.2.7 Clearing the Alarm History on Drive Monitor Screen ................................................................................. 367

10.3 Diagnosis Screens.............................................................................................................................................. 368 10.3.1 Self Diagnosis Screen................................................................................................................................ 368 10.3.2 Checking Alarms of Drive Unit ................................................................................................................... 371 10.3.3 Collecting the Data on the Diagnosis Data Collection Setting Screen ....................................................... 374

10.4 Advanced Diagnosis ........................................................................................................................................... 377 10.4.1 Displaying and Setting the PLC Device Data (I/F Diagnosis Screen) ........................................................ 377

10.4.1.1 Displaying the PLC Device Data ....................................................................................................... 379 10.4.1.2 Carrying Out Modal Output ............................................................................................................... 380 10.4.1.3 Carrying Out One-shot Output .......................................................................................................... 381

10.4.2 Writing and Reading the Data Using the NC Data Designation (NC Memory Diagnosis Screen) ............. 382 10.4.3 Collecting the NC Data (Data Sampling Screen) ....................................................................................... 384

10.5 Safety Observation ............................................................................................................................................. 385 10.5.1 Safety Observation Screen (Configuration Diagnosis)............................................................................... 385 10.5.2 Safety Observation Screen (Signal Monitor).............................................................................................. 387 10.5.3 Safety Observation Screen (Drive Monitor) ............................................................................................... 389 10.5.4 Safety Observation Screen (Version Display)............................................................................................ 392

11 Performing a Backup Operation ........................................................................................................... 393 11.1 Selecting a Device, Directory and File................................................................................................................ 398 11.2 Transferring a File............................................................................................................................................... 404 11.3 Comparing Files (Compare) ............................................................................................................................... 407 11.4 Erasing a File...................................................................................................................................................... 408 11.5 Changing a File Name (Rename) ....................................................................................................................... 409 11.6 Creating a Directory............................................................................................................................................ 410 11.7 Restrictions ......................................................................................................................................................... 411

11.7.1 Device Definition ........................................................................................................................................ 411 11.7.2 List Display................................................................................................................................................. 411 11.7.3 Program Name........................................................................................................................................... 411

11.8 Other Functions .................................................................................................................................................. 412 11.8.1 Merging a File ............................................................................................................................................ 412 11.8.2 List of File Names ...................................................................................................................................... 413 11.8.3 Edit Lock B and C ...................................................................................................................................... 414 11.8.4 Data Protection Keys ................................................................................................................................. 415 11.8.5 The Batch Input/Output the Machining Program of NC Memory................................................................ 415

11.9 Performing Backups of NC Memory Data........................................................................................................... 419

12 Appendix 1: List of Function Codes..................................................................................................... 423

13 Appendix 2: Other Functions for Reference........................................................................................ 425 13.1 F1-digit Feed....................................................................................................................................................... 426

14 Appendix 3: Daily Inspection of GOT................................................................................................... 429

1

1 IB-1501453-D

Outline of Menu Items

C80 Series Instruction Manual 1 Outline of Menu Items

2IB-1501453-D

1Outline of Menu Items This chapter explains the outline of the menus for each screen.

Refer to the corresponding section for detailed operation.

Monitor screen (Monitr)

Menus Details Reference This executes operation search. 9.1 Operation Search

This executes restart search. 9.3 Restart Search

This edits the searched machining program. 9.5 Correcting the Machining Program

This displays the tool compensation amount. A value can also be set for the tool compensation amount.

5.4 Setting Tool Compensation Amount (Tool Offset Screen)

This displays the workpiece coordinate system offset. A value can also be set for the workpiece coordinate system offset.

5.8 Setting Workpiece Coordinate Sys- tem Offset

This displays the workpiece coordinate system shift.

This menu is not displayed for M system, or when the pa- rameter "#11056 Workshift invalid" is set to "1".

5.9 Setting Workpiece Coordinate Sys- tem Shift

This displays the sub-menu to change the display type of the monitor screen.

9.2.2 Switching the Display Format

This displays the program modal. 9.2.7 Modal Display

This displays the program tree. 9.2.8 Program Tree Display

This displays the date, time and integrated time, etc. The date, time and integrated time, etc., can also be set.

8.1 Integrated Time

This displays the common variables. A value can also be set for the common variable.

3.9.1 Common Variables

This displays the local variables. 3.9.2 Local Variables

This corrects the buffer. 9.5.2 Buffer Correction

This sets and cancels the origin. 8.3 Origin Set, Origin Cancel

This executes collation and stop. 9.4 Collation and Stop

Search

Reserch

Edit

Offset

Coord

W-shift

Dsp sw.

Modal

Tree

Time

Com var

Loc var

P corr

G92 set

Col stp

C80 Series Instruction Manual 1 Outline of Menu Items

3 IB-1501453-D

This displays the spindle load, NC axis load, etc., with a bar graph. The display contents differ depending on MTB specifica- tion.

9.2.10 Load Meter Display

This displays the current spindle tool number and the tool num- ber that is standby to be used next. The display contents differ depending on MTB specification.

9.2.11 Spindle, Standby Display

Displays the tool tip coordinate, handle interruption amount

(tool axis movement), and tool tip speed.

This menu is displayed when any of the additional specifi- cations (tool center point control, tool length compensation along the tool axis, tool handle feed & interruption, inclined surface machining command, 3-dimensional tool radius compensation (tool's vertical-direction compensation) or 3- dimensional manual feed) is valid.

9.2.12 Tool Center Coordinate Display

This displays the command rotation speed and actual rotation speed values of all spindles.

9.2.13 All Spindles' Rotation Speed Dis- play

This switches the counter display to replace the currently dis- played axis.

9.2.4 Switching the Spindle No. to be Displayed on Counter

This enlarges the counter to display all axes. 9.2.6 Counter All-axis Display

An arbitrary value can be set in the relative position counter. 8.2 Counter Setting

This executes a manual numerical value command. 8.4 Manual Numerical Value Command

Setup screen (Setup)

Menus Details Reference This sets tool compensation amount. Depending on the setting of the parameter "#1037 cmdtyp", there are three types of tool compensation: tool compensation type I/II (M system only), and tool compensation type III. The number of tool compensation sets to be designated or displayed varies depending on the additional specifications.

5.4 Setting Tool Compensation Amount (Tool Offset Screen)

This executes tool measurement.

The distance from the basic point to the measurement point is

measured by moving the tool to the measurement point manu-

ally, and this value can be set as the tool offset amount.

This menu is displayed when the parameter "#8932 Hide measure scrn" is set to "0".

5.3 Measuring a Tool (Tool Measure- ment Screen)

This registers a tool. A tool No. is assigned to each tool to make the tools installed on the machine recognizable to the NC. The tool No. is registered corresponding to the magazine pot and spindle where that tool is installed, and the standby loca- tion.

5.2 Registering a Tool (Tool Registra- tion Screen)

Menus Details Reference

LdMeter

Sp-stby

TipDisp

All Sp

Next Ax

Cnt exp

Cnt set

MST

T-ofs

T-meas

T-reg

C80 Series Instruction Manual 1 Outline of Menu Items

4IB-1501453-D

This manages the tool life data. The life management data such as the tool usage is set and dis- played. There are two types of the tool life management method.

5.6 Tool Life Management

This sets the workpiece coordinate system offset. The offset value managed by NC can be set and displayed.

5.8 Setting Workpiece Coordinate Sys- tem Offset

This executes workpiece measurement, it also sets and mea-

sures the workpiece coordinate system shift.

This menu appears under any of the following conditions:

- The parameter "#8932 Hide measure scrn" is set to "0".

- The parameter "#11056 Workshift invalid" is set to "0" for

L system.

5.9 Setting Workpiece Coordinate Sys- tem Shift

This sets and displays the management data for each tool. These data are relevant to which displayed on the [T-ofs] or [T- life] screen, that can be set the tool information. Thus the mu- tually-referenced data can be set and displayed on this screen.

5.5 Setting the Tool Management Data (Tool Management Screen)

This edits an MDI program. The pop-up window appears to display the MDI program con- tents by pressing main menu [MDI].

8.5 MDI Program Editing

This is to set the relative value counter. This displays the pop-up window of the relative position counter to execute the counter setting.

8.2 Counter Setting

This sets an arbitrary value for S, M, T and B. Manual numerical value command is set and executed by in- putting an address key, such as S, M, T and B.

8.4 Manual Numerical Value Command

This sets the user parameters. The parameter can be set and displayed by switching types.

6.1 Setting User Parameters

This stores the thread groove position to enable re-thread ma-

chining.

This menu is not displayed when the additional specifica- tion for thread recutting is not added.

8.6 Thread Recutting Function

This sets the high-accuracy parameter which meets the ma-

chining purpose or machining process.

This menu is not displayed when the additional specifica- tions related to high-accuracy control are not added.

6.2 Selecting High-accuracy Control Parameters (Machining Cond I Screen)

This sets and displays the chuck barrier and tailstock barrier.

For M system, this menu is not displayed.

7.2 Chuck Barrier/Tailstock Barrier (L System)

Menus Details Reference

T-life

Coord

W-meas

T-Mng.

MDI

Cnt set

MST

User

Storage

MacCond

Barrier

C80 Series Instruction Manual 1 Outline of Menu Items

5 IB-1501453-D

Edit screen

Menus Details Reference This edits a machining program. 3 Inputting a Machining Program and

Defining Variables

This inputs and outputs the program between the NC internal

memory and the external input/output device.

This menu is not displayed when the parameter "#8923 Hide Edit-IO menu" is set to "1".

4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

Diagnose screen (Diagn)

Menus Details Reference This displays the hardware and software (software No. and version) configurations.

10.2.1 System Configuration Screen

This displays the details of the additional specifications reg- istered in the NC memory.

10.2.2 Option Display Screen

This sets and displays input/output signals of the ladder program.

10.4.1 Displaying and Setting the PLC De- vice Data (I/F Diagnosis Screen)

This displays drive diagnostic information (servo/spindle/ power supply unit).

10.2.3 Drive Monitor Screen (Servo Unit)

10.2.4 Drive Monitor Screen (Spindle Unit)

10.2.5 Drive Monitor Screen (Power Supply Unit)

10.2.6 Drive Monitor Screen (Synchronous Error)

10.2.7 Clearing the Alarm History on Drive Monitor Screen

This sets and displays NC internal data. 10.4.2 Writing and Reading the Data Using the NC Data Designation (NC Memory Di- agnosis Screen)

This displays a list of currently occurring alarms and their messages.

10.1 Confirming the NC Message (Alarm Screen)

This displays the status of the hardware and operation stop.

10.3.1 Self Diagnosis Screen

This displays the hardware and operation stop state. 10.4.3 Collecting the NC Data (Data Sam- pling Screen)

This executes the diagnosis related to functional safety.

This menu is displayed when the parameter "#1481 Enable S-safety" (Enable smart safety observation) is set to "1".

10.5 Safety Observation

Edit

I/O

Config

Option

I/F dia

Drv mon

Mem dia

Alarm

Selfdia

NC Smp

Safety

C80 Series Instruction Manual 1 Outline of Menu Items

6IB-1501453-D

Maintenance screen (Mainte)

Menus Details Reference This performs NC memory format, absolute position parameter setting and maintenance data backup.

10.3.2 Checking Alarms of Drive Unit

10.3.3 Collecting the Data on the Diag- nosis Data Collection Setting Screen

This sets and displays user parameters and machine parame- ters.

6 Setting Parameters

This inputs and outputs the various data between the NC mem- ory and the external input/output device.

11 Performing a Backup Operation

Mainte

Param

I/O

2

7 IB-1501453-D

Screen Operations

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

8IB-1501453-D

2Screen Operations 2.1 Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT) 2.1.1 Screen Operation of GOT

At the start, use one of the following methods to display CNC monitor2 screen on a GOT.

Press (CNC monitor2) button on the Utility screen.

Press the "special function switch" (CNC monitor2) assigned to the user-customized screen. (*1)

(*1) For details on the setting, refer to the instruction manual issued by the MTB.

(1) Press the screen at the top left.

(2) Press [Monitor] tab.

How to display the utility screen

Utility screen

User-customized screen (*1)

CNC monitor2 screen CNC monitor2

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

9 IB-1501453-D

2.1.2 Explanations of the Screens

XGA

SVGA

(1)(2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

10IB-1501453-D

VGA

The function window appears at the top of the screen by pressing .

This window shows messages and machine status. You can also switch the CNCs through the window.

For some errors, such as "Communication error", the window appears automatically upon the occurrence.

If you perform the following operations while the function window is displayed, they will be done after the window is closed.

- You touch outside of the function window.

- The operation by the keyboard or mouse is attempted to be made.

(1) When inputting keys on the GOT with VGA resolutions, use the software keyboard. For details, refer to "2.6.2 Software Keyboard".

Press this button to display the function window.

(1)

(7)

(3)(4) (5)

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

11 IB-1501453-D

Display Items

Display items Details (1) Monitor area Displays the image output from CNC.

By touching the monitor area, the operations such as a screen transition can be per- formed. For details, refer to "2.2 CNC Monitor2 Screen". The display language in this area depends on the CNC parameter setting.

(2) Title display Displays the title of the CNC monitor.

(3) Connected CNC display Displays the network No., PC No. and unit name of the currently connected CNC. The unit name depends on the CNC parameter setting.

When a message which consists of two lines is displayed on the GOT with VGA resolutions, the information of connected CNC is not displayed.

(4) Message display Displays the messages and warnings. For details, refer to "2.1.3 Messages".

(5) Channel selection but- ton

Displays the currently selected channel No. Press this button to display the communication setting window. When you press this button while the connection is established, the connection will be canceled.

CNC changeover button Changes the CNC which is connected.

Press this button to switch the currently Ethernet-connected CNC to that of the next setting No. If the current CNC has the last setting No., the No.1 CNC is connected to the GOT by pressing the button. If the connected channel has one or no Ethernet connection setting, this button is

grayed and unavailable.

Return button Pressing this button takes you back to the application caller screen.

(6) Key board area By pressing keys, the key codes will be sent to the CNC.

(7) button Press this button to display the function window while the window is hidden. Press the button to hide the function window while the window is displayed. When the operation right is not obtained, the color of the button becomes yellow. In this case, you can display or hide the function window in the same manner.

button Pressing this button takes you back to the application caller screen.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

12IB-1501453-D

The following keys are provided on GOT keyboard.

These keys are displayed on the GOT with XGA or SVGA resolutions.

Key type Key Operation Data setting key A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N,

O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z These keys are pressed to set alphabetic characters, nu- merals and operation symbols, etc.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + -

= / . ; EOB etc.

Screen switching keys (*1)

Pressing the respective keys transits corresponding screen (Monitor, Edit, Setup, Diagnosis or Maintenance screen).

Frame switching keys Displayed frame on the parameter guidance screen etc. can be switched to the previous or the next frame with these keys.

Menu list key This is function that displays each screen's menu configu- ration as a list.

Help key This displays the operation guidance, parameter guidance and alarm guidance corresponding to the current opera- tion.

System switching key When using a multi-part system NC, this displays the data of the next part system. The screen does not change if it is common to part systems or when only one part system is used.

Page up/down keys Page up key

When the displayed contents cover several pages, this displays the contents of the previous page.

Page down key When the displayed contents cover several pages, this displays the contents of the next page.

Cursor keys This moves the cursor up or down one when setting data in the screen display items.

This moves the data input cursor one character to the left or right in the data setting area.

This moves the cursor one item to the left or right when se-

lecting data in the screen display items.

at cursor left end: Moves to the right end of previous

line.

at cursor right end: Moves to left end of next line.

Data correction keys (DELETE)

This deletes the character just before the cursor position in the data setting area. When a program is being edited, the character of the cur- sor position is deleted. The data on the right side of the cursor will move to the left for one character.

Data delete key

(INSERT) This inputs the data insertion mode. When a data setting key is pressed, a character is inserted in front of the cur- rent cursor position. The overwrite mode is entered when the [DELETE], [C.B CAN], [INPUT], cursor or TAB, etc., keys are pressed, or when the screen is changed.

Data insert key

(C.B CAN) This cancels the setting in the data setting area.

Shift key (*2) (SHIFT)

This validates the setting on the lower line of the data set- ting key.

When any key other than the lower-case letter input key is pressed while the shift key is valid, the setting returns to the status with the shift key invalid.

Lower-case letter input key (*2) This changes upper/lower-case of alphabet. The key

is highlighted when the lower-case-letter-setting is valid. The setting is retained until the key is pressed again.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

13 IB-1501453-D

(*1) These keys are displayed only on the GOT with XGA resolutions.

(*2) The status of the shift key or the lower-case letter input key is valid on the GOT keyboard operation.

It is not compatible with the shift key or the lower-case letter input key on the software keyboard of the CNC monitor

area, or the SHIFT key or the CapsLock key on a USB keyboard. These keys don't affect each other.

INPUT key (INPUT)

This fixes the data in the data setting area, and writes it to the internal data.

Key type Key Operation

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

14IB-1501453-D

2.1.3 Messages

The following tables show the messages displayed at the top of the screen.

(*1) These messages do not appear when the parameter "#1251 set23/bit3" (Non-display of completion message (display

unit (GOT))) is set to "1". This parameter is obtained when CNC monitor2 starts to communicate with CNC. The pa-

rameter is valid for the project which is created by "GT Designer3" Ver. 1.195D or later.

Operation messages

Display Details Select a channel. This message appears at the first screen transition after power ON without connec-

tion setting. Select the channel which contains the CNC to connect.

Results messages

Display Details Connection complete. (*1) The connection is completed. The monitor screen is displayed.

Connection complete. GOT and CNC language are different. Con- firm the display language setting. (*1)

The connection is completed. The monitor screen is displayed. However, the display language is different between GOT and CNC. Confirm the display language setting.

Succeeded in acquiring the opera- tion right. (*1)

The operation right of CNC is obtained. CNC operations are available.

Failed to acquire the operation right.

The operation right of CNC could not be obtained.

Unable to move to the designated screen.

The CNC could not transit to the designated screen. The monitor screen is not dis- played. Review the drawing data setting. The designated screen may not exist in the CNC or the CNC designation may be wrong.

Unable to move to the designated system.

The CNC could not transit to the designated part system. The monitor screen is not displayed. Review the drawing data setting. The designated part system may not exist in the CNC. This message will not be displayed if an error that you cannot transit to the desig- nated screen is occurring.

The Ethernet settings of the moni- toring target CNC are not correct.

The setting of the designated access point cannot be found. Review the drawing data setting.

Unable to do drawing. Use the lat- est OS.

Drawing cannot be done because the version of the CNC OS and that of this ap- plication do not match. Install the latest OS.

State display message

Display Details Communication error This message appears when the GOT cannot connect to the CNC, or cannot com-

municate with the connected CNC. Confirm the connection setting and the state of the cables. When the connection with the CNC is returned, the message "Connection com- plete" will be displayed.

Connecting The connection with the CNC is being performed. Wait for a moment.

Right of operation is being ac- quired.

The operation right for the CNC is being obtained. Wait for a moment.

The file is being accessed. The file is being accessed. Wait until it is completed.

Another display is being operated. You do not have the exclusive authorization.

The file is being accessed by an- other display. Unable to get the operation right before end of process.

The file access such as copying and comparison is being performed between the CNC and the other display unit. Due to the state that the operation right cannot be obtained, wait until it is completed.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

15 IB-1501453-D

2.1.4 External memory interface

The external memory interfaces are mounted on the GOT.

Using the front-side USB memory interface, the input/output operations of the data such as machining programs are avail-

able.

For details on the I/O operation, refer to "Chapter 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program" and " Chapter 11 Per-

forming a Backup Operation".

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

16IB-1501453-D

2.2 CNC Monitor2 Screen

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6) (7) (8) (9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13) (14)

(15) (16)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

17 IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) Unit name/icon display The currently displayed unit name (name set in the parameter "#1135 unt_nm") is dis-

played. When the unit name is not set, it is not displayed.

(2) Part system name When you use the multi-part system, the name of currently displayed part system (name set in the parameter "#1169 part system name", or name set in the parameter "#12059 SBS_name" for operating as the sub part system) is displayed. The part system name is not displayed for the 1-part system. When the values are not set in the parameter, "$ + (part system number)" is displayed. (Example) $2 for the 2nd part system. When the values are not set in the parameter for the name of sub part system, "SUB + (part system number)" is displayed. (Example) SUB2 for the 2nd part system.

(3) NC Status The current NC status is displayed. When the status is multiple, the high-priority con- tents are displayed.

(4) Operation mode/MDI status

The displayed part system's operation status is displayed. The MDI status is also dis- played when the MDI operation mode is selected.

(5) Screen group The currently selected screen group is displayed.

(6) Operation status The NC operation status is displayed.

(7) Alarm message The highest-priority message among the currently occurring alarms or warnings is dis- played.

(8) Operation message The operation message is displayed.

(9) S/W Key button When the button is touched, the software keyboard is displayed.

(10) Time The current time is displayed. (hour:minute)

(11) Host connected status This appears in the form of an icon when the parameter "#8931 Display/Set limit" is "0"

or "1", and the other host PC or display unit is connected.

(12) Menu return button The displayed screen operation menu is switched to the screen selection menu of the current screen group. This is also used to cancel the menu operations of the displayed screen.

(13) Menu change button When all menus cannot be displayed at a time, the menus other than currently dis- played menus are displayed.

(14) Menus This is used to switch the screen, select the screen specific operation, etc.

(15) Window name Then name of currently displayed window is displayed.

(16) Close button When the button is touched, the window is closed.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

18IB-1501453-D

2.2.1 Displayed Part System

Press key to change the displayed part system.

The displayed part system No. is counted up by one each time the key is pressed. If the displayed part system No. exceeds

the parameter "#11055 Disp. sysno", the displayed part system No. returns to "1".

Displayed part system will change when the part system name on the touchscreen is pressed. The displayed part system

No. is counted up by one each time the key is pressed. If the displayed part system No. exceeds the parameter "#11055

Disp. sysno", the displayed part system No. returns to "1".

The operation to change the displayed part system by the key or touchscreen is restricted by the setting of parameter

"#11035 Sys. change limit".

The color combination for the top left of the screen can be changed with the setting of parameters "#8942 $1 color" to

"#8945 $4 color", "#8962 $5 color" to "#8964 $7 color". Each part system can have a unique color combination which makes

easy to understand the displayed part system.

When the part system is changed, the color of the upper left of the screen changes according to the setting with each pa-

rameter. A color set with "#8942 $1 color" will be displayed for the 1st part system.

When the color of displayed part system is changed, the display of part system name changes to the button image.

[Setting example] When "1" is set to the parameter "#8942 $1 color", "2" is set to the parameter "#8943 $2 color", and "0"

is set to the parameter "#11060 Screen theme color".

Changing the part system with key

Changing the part system with a touchscreen

Restrictions when changing the displayed part system

Setting the color of displayed part system

2nd part system: Pink

1st part system: Theme color

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

19 IB-1501453-D

(1) When "1" is set, the color is changed depending on the setting of the parameter "#11060 Screen theme color".

When the part system operates, which is set to sub part system with the parameter "#12049 SBS_no", the sub part system

name can be displayed as the part system name. The name can be set with parameter "#12059 SBS_name".

Display area for the part system names shown in the following figures can switch main/sub part system display according

to NC operation status.

2.2.2 NC Status

The display area for NC status indicates current NC operation status. (nothing is displayed in normal condition.)

When the NC operates with three or more status, the higher-priority two status are displayed. (The items in the following

table are listed in order of priority.)

While any status is being displayed, this indicator flashes at intervals of approximately 1 second.

Displaying the sub part system name

[1-part system display] [2-part system display]

Display position Display items Meaning Left side PR The parameter has changed, and it requires turning the power ON again. The

parameter will be validated after turning the power ON.

Right side AT Indicates when auto tuning is valid. In this case, the automatic start is disabled.

HC Indicates when the high cycle sampling is valid.

RN Indicates when selecting machining surface.

BT Indicates when backlash auto adjustment is ON.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

20IB-1501453-D

2.2.3 Operation mode/MDI status

The displayed part system operation mode and MDI status are displayed.

When the operation mode or MDI status is changed, the display changes as follows.

2.2.4 Operation status

The operation status displays the currently selected NC operation status for each part system. (The maximum number of

the part system which can be displayed.)

The inverted number expressing the part system No. is not displayed for 1-part system.

Display Details Details MEMORY Memory operation Automatic operation is based on programs stored in the memory.

TAPE Tape mode This mode is displayed when FTP high-speed program server mode operation (additional specification) is performed.

MDI NON No MDI setting Automatic operation is performed with the program set in the MDI screen.

MDI SET MDI setting completed

MDI RUN MDI running

JOG Jog The jog feed mode enables the axis to be moved by hand consecutively at the feed rate set by using the MANUAL FEED RATE switch.

HANDLE Manual handle The handle feed mode enables the axis to be moved by turning the manual handle. The travel distance per graduation of the handle depends on how the "HANDLE/INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION" switch is set.

STEP Step The step feed mode enables the axis to be moved by hand at feed rate when the "FEED AXIS SELECT" switch is ON. The travel distance per graduation of the handle depends on how the "HANDLE/INCREMENTAL MAGNIFICATION" switch is set.

MANUAL Manual arbitrary feed This mode enables to move manually with arbitrary amount or arbitrary posi- tioning position.

ZERO-RTN Reference position re- turn

This mode enables a controlled axis to be returned manually to the defined po- sition unique to the machine (reference position).

INIT-SET Automatic dog-less ref- erence position return

This mode enables this mode to manually push against the machine end stop- per and carry out zero point return.

RAPID Rapid traverse The rapid traverse feed mode enables the machine to be moved consecutively at rapid traverse rate manually.

JOG+HND Jog + Handle This is the jog and handle synchronous feed mode.

RAP+HND Rapid traverse + Han- dle

The rapid traverse and handle can be used simultaneously.

NO MODE No operation mode The operation mode is not selected.

Symbol Details Character color Background color EMG In emergency stop White Red

RST Resetting NC White Dark gray

BST In block stop White Dark gray

HLD Operation halted White Dark gray

SYN Synchronizing White Dark gray

CRS Cross conversion waiting White Dark gray

AUT In automatic operation White Dark gray

RDY Operation completed state Black Green

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

21 IB-1501453-D

2.2.5 Alarms/Warnings

When an alarm or warning occurs, the alarm No. and alarm message character string are displayed.

(Example) Warning message display

2.2.6 Operation messages

(Example)

The operation message can be reset by pressing any key.

SYS2 M01 No operation mode

Type Details Character color Background color NC alarm message The operation alarm, program error, MCP

alarm, servo alarm, or system alarm which is currently occurred is displayed.

White Red

NC warning message Black Yellow

Search completed

Type Details Character color Background color Operation messages This displays the messages for operation. Black Yellowish green

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

22IB-1501453-D

2.2.7 Changing the Screen Theme Color

The theme color (display color) of the entire screen can be changed with the setting of the parameter "#11060 Screen theme

color".

[Parameter "#11060 Screen theme color" is set to "0" (standard color (gray tone)]

[Parameter "#11060 Screen theme color" is set to "1" (blue tone)]

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

23 IB-1501453-D

2.2.8 Screen Transition Diagram

The screen is configured of operation groups. The screen selection can be done by switching the tab on the top of the

screen.

(1) The display contents differ depending on MTB settings.

(2) You can freely relocate the main menus of the monitor (Monitr), setup (Setup) and edit (Edit) screens. For details, refer to "2.7 Menu Customization Function".

Note

Search Reserch Edit Offset Coord W-shift Dsp sw.

Modal Tree Time Com var Loc var P corr G92 set Col stp LdMeter

Sp-stby TipDisp All Sp Next Ax Cnt exp Cnt set MST

T-ofs T-meas T-reg T-life Coord W-meas T-Mng. MDI Cnt set MST

User MacCond

Barrier

Process param

Fix cycle

Ctrl param 1

Ctrl param 2

Para No search

Area copy

Area paste

Next axis

Close

Ethrnet param

Axis param

Barrier data

Hi-prec param

Hi-prec axis

Operate param

Edit I/O

Config Option I/F dia Drv mon Mem dia Alarm Selfdia NC Smp Safety

S/W config

H/W config

Servo unit

Spindle unit

Power unit

Synchro error

Alarm his clr

Next axis

Mainte Param I/O

Process param

Ctrl param 1

Ctrl param 2

Axis param

Barrier data

Para No search

Area copy

Area paste

Ethrnet param

Operate param

BaseSys param

BaseAx spec

BaseCom param

Axis spec

Zp-rtn param

Abs pos param

Servo param

Spindle spec

Spindle param

RotAxis param

PLC timer

PLC inc timer

PLC counter

PLC constnt

Bit select

Er comp param

Er comp data

Macro list

Posn switch

Open param 1

Open param 2

PLCIndx param

Posn sw. PLC

M on

itr S

et u

p E

di t

D ia

gn M

ai nt

e

Menu select

Next axis

Next system

Menu select

SafeCom param

Safety Axis

Safety Spindle

SafeI/O assign

Multi- CPU prm

Strorage

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

24IB-1501453-D

2.3 Setting Data 2.3.1 Setting Numerals and Alphabetical Characters

The data is basically set with the following methods:

(1) Menu selection

(2) No. selection

(3) Cursor movement

(4) Data key input

(5) [INPUT] key input

(1) The contents in the data setting area are only displayed until the [INPUT] key is pressed. These contents are invalidated if the screen is changed. The data is written into the memory when the [INPUT] key is pressed.

(2) Special settings may be required depending on the data type. Refer to each item.

(3) The cursor may move to the right of the display item depending on the data type.

(4) If an illegal key is set, an error occurs when [INPUT] is pressed. Reset the correct data.

The key is input at the position where the cursor is displayed. If a cursor is not displayed, the key input is invalid.

When a key is input, the data appears at the cursor position, and the cursor moves one character space to the right.

[ ]/[] keys: Moves the cursor one character to the left or right.

[INSERT] key: Enters the insert mode.

The mode returns to the overwrite mode when the [DELETE], [C.B CAN] keys are pressed, or when the screen is changed.

[DELETE] key: Deletes the character in front of the cursor.

[C.B] key: Deletes all characters in the data setting area.

If a cursor is displayed on the screen, data is set in the data setting area and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the data appears

at the cursor position on the screen. The cursor moves to the next position.

The following keys can be used to move the cursor with the cursor keys.

: Moves the cursor to the previous line.

: Moves the cursor to the next line.

: Moves the cursor one item to the left.

: Moves the cursor one item to the right.

Operation method

Operations in the data setting area

Cursor operations on the screen

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

25 IB-1501453-D

2.3.2 Inputting Operations

In addition to the method of directly inputting numeric data for specific data settings, a method to input the operation results

using four rules operators and function symbols can be used.

Numeric values, function symbols, operators and parentheses ( ) are combined and set in the data setting area.

The operation results appear when the [INPUT] key is pressed. Data for the currently selected setting item will be set when

[INPUT] key is pressed again. The contents in the data setting area are erased.

Division: Zero division causes an error.

Square root: If the value in the parentheses is negative, an error occurs.

Trigonometric function: The unit of angle is degree ().

Arc tangent: -90 < operation results < 90.

Input method

Examples of operator settings, and results Operation Setting example Operation results

Addition =100+50 150

Subtraction =100-50 50

Multiplication =12.3*4 49.2

Division =100/3 33.3333333

Function =1.2 * (2.5 + SQRT(4)) 5.4

Function symbols, setting examples and results Function Function symbol Setting example Operation results

Absolute value ABS =ABS(50 - 60) 10

Square root SQRT =SQRT(3) 1.7320508

Sine SIN =SIN(30) 0.5

Cosine COS =COS(15) 0.9659258

Tangent TAN =TAN(45) 1

Arc tangent ATAN =ATAN(1.3) 52.431408

Operation examples (1) Set as shown below, and press the [INPUT] key.

=12*20 [INPUT] The operation results appear in the data setting area. 240

(2) Press the [INPUT] key again. Data for the selected setting item is set. The result is displayed on the screen. The cursor moves to the next position.

Notes for using operators and functions

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

26IB-1501453-D

(1) Always use "=" for the first character.

(2) Do not use the following characters as the second character or last character.

Invalid as second character: * , /, )

Invalid as last character: * , /, (, +, -

(3) Make sure that the left parentheses and right parentheses are balanced.

(4) The 360 limit does not apply on the angle. SIN (500) is interpreted as SIN (140).

(5) While the monitor screen or the setup screen displaying, if the axis name address, M, S, T, 2nd miscellaneous function code (B, etc.) is pressed when "=" is set in data setting area as the first character, the operation input is given to priority. So, the window does not open, and the cursor does not move.

(6) The exponential setting, like "1.23E-4", cannot be used. The operation result is not displayed with exponential.

(7) It is not possible to set characters exceeding the number of characters which can be input to the data setting area.

(8) It is not possible to omit "0" before the decimal point, like ".5", when operation inputting. An error will occur.

(9) The accuracy is guaranteed for the calculation with 15 digits or less. The calculation with over 15 digits does not guar- antee its accuracy.

(10) The operator or the function which does not exist in the above-mentioned, such as "ASIN", cannot be used. The oper- ation message "Setting error" appears, and the display of the data setting area does not change.

(11) Regardless of the input setting unit and metric system/inch system, the digit numbers below the decimal point of the operation result is seven digits or less.

Restrictions

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

27 IB-1501453-D

2.4 Guidance Function 2.4.1 Parameter Guidance

The parameter guidance function displays the details of the parameters according to the state of the screen currently being

displayed.

The parameter/alarm guidance window is displayed with the following type of configuration.

If the [?] key is pressed on any screen, the guidance window will open. If a pop-up window other than the guidance window

is open, the guidance window will open over the currently opened pop-up window. In this case, the menu state does not

change. If [?] key or [CANCEL] key is pressed again when the guidance window is open, the guidance window will close

and the screen will return to the previous state in which the [?] key was pressed.

Screen Configuration

Operation method

Displaying the parameter guidance (Example: "#8005 ZONE r") (1) Press the menu [Param] on maintenance screen. The parameter screen is displayed.

(2) Press the [] key, and move the cursor to "#8005 ZONE r" parameter.

(3) Press the [?] key. The guidance window is opened, and the detail of "#8005 ZONE r" parameter is displayed.

The parameter No., name, details and setting range are displayed.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

28IB-1501453-D

(1) The contents of the parameter "#8004 SPEED" (the previous parameter on the parameter screen) are displayed by

pressing the key. However, when the key is pressed on the first parameter of each parameter type, the dis-

played contents do not change. The contents of the parameter "#8006 ZONE d" (next parameter on the parameter

screen) are displayed by pressing the key. However, when the key is pressed on the last parameter of each

parameter type, the displayed contents do not change.

Pressing the [] or [] key scrolls the explanation contents of the parameter guidance in a page unit. When the [] key is pressed while the last line is displayed, next guidance appears. When the [] key is pressed while the top line is displayed, the previous guidance appears.

However, when the [] key is pressed while the first parameter guidance is displayed, or when the [] key is pressed while the last parameter guidance is displayed, the display does not change.

(2) The contents of the first parameter for the fixed cycle parameter are displayed by pressing the key. While the pa-

rameter guidance window is displayed, the displayed parameter contents are recorded for each parameter type. When

the parameter type is changed with / key, the contents of the previously displayed parameter are displayed.

(3) When the parameter No. could not be acquired (when the cursor was non-display or was on a blank or comment line), the top of parameter guidance for each parameter appears.

(4) The parameters whose contents/setting range are similar or same are collectively displayed. (Example: PLC integrated timer)

(1) If the [?] key is pressed when alarm occurs, the alarm guidance window will open.

(2) Once the guidance data is read, the guidance can be displayed even when the memory card is removed.

(3) Press the [?] key on a screen other than [Mainte] - [Param] and [Setup] - [User] when an alarm is not being occurred, and the head parameter guidance of parameters is displayed.

Precautions

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

29 IB-1501453-D

2.4.2 Alarm Guidance

The alarm guidance is the function that displays message, details and remedy for the currently occurring alarms.

The alarm guidance is displayed in "alarm" tab on "parameter/alarm guidance window".

The "alarm" tab is on the rightmost end of the guidance window.

A scroll bar appears when details and remedy, etc. do not fit in one page.

All alarms are displayed for alarm guidance regardless of part system.

If the [?] key or the key is pressed on any screen when an alarm occurs, the alarm guidance window will open.

If a pop-up window other than the guidance window is open, the guidance window will open over the currently opened pop-

up window. In this case, the menu state does not change. If [?] key or [CANCEL] key is pressed again when the guidance

window is open, the guidance window will close and the screen will return to the previous state in which the [?] key was

pressed.

(1) is displayed only on the software keyboard. For details, refer to "2.6.2 Software Keyboard".

Screen Configuration

Display items

Display items Details (1) Messages This displays the currently occurring "NC alarm" and "PLC alarm message".

The displayed content is same as the content displayed in the alarm message of the diagnosis screen.

(2) Number of page This displays "order of priority / total number of occurring alarms".

(3) Details/Remedy, etc. This displays detail and remedy, etc. for alarm message.

Operation method

(1)

(2)

(3)

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

30IB-1501453-D

(1) is displayed only on the software keyboard. For details, refer to "2.6.2 Software Keyboard".

(2) Pressing the or key scrolls the explanation contents by page.

(3) Pressing the [] or [] key scrolls the explanation contents in a line unit.

(4) When each parameter tab, such as the parameter, fixed cycle parameter, etc., is opened with the key, the contents

of first parameter in each parameter tab is displayed.

(5) The alarm guidance is executed for the alarm that occurs when the [?] key or the key has been pressed. Therefore,

the guidance is not displayed for the alarm that has been handled or has occurred while the alarm guidance is displayed.

(6) If the [?] key is pressed when an alarm is not occurring, the parameter guidance appears. In this state, if the "alarm" tab

is selected with the key, nothing is displayed in the alarm guidance panel. (These columns are blank.)

(7) All the explanations of the alarm having the same error class and No. are displayed in the details column.

(8) When no alarm or only one alarm occurs, the arrow next to the page number is not displayed.

Displaying the alarm guidance (1)

Press the [?] key or the key during occurring

alarm on monitor screen. (Example) When "H/W stroke end axis exists" and another alarm occur.

The guidance window is opened while "alarm" tab is val- id. The alarm details and remedy are displayed for "H/W stroke end axis exists".

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

31 IB-1501453-D

(1) Up to 18 alarm or warning messages can be displayed for alarm guidance from highest priority.

(2) Even if the [], [], [|] or [|] key is pressed when only one alarm occurs, the screen display is not switched.

(1) The alarm guidance of stop code and operator message is not displayed.

(2) The PLC device information, which is displayed for the PLC alarm message guidance, displays the PLC device status when the alarm guidance is displayed. Accordingly, even if the device value changes when the alarm guidance is being displayed, the displayed PLC device information is not updated automatically. To update the information, close the alarm guidance once and display it again by pressing the [?] key again. However, when the PLC device information is redisplayed with [], [], [|-] or [|] key at occurrence of multiple alarms, the PLC device information is updated.

(3) Once the guidance data is read, the guidance can be displayed even when the memory card is removed.

Changing the alarm guidance (1) Press the [] key or [|] key when the alarm guid-

ance is displayed. The alarm guidance with one priority lower than the cur- rent alarm guidance is displayed. If the [] key or [|] key is pressed when the lowest pri- ority alarm is displayed, the alarm with the highest prior- ity is displayed. (Example) When 3 alarms occur.

(2) Press the [] key or [|] key when the alarm guid- ance is displayed.

The alarm guidance with one priority higher than the cur- rent alarm guidance is displayed. If the [] key or [|] key is pressed when the highest pri- ority alarm is displayed, the alarm with the lowest priority is displayed. (Example) When 3 alarms occur.

Precautions

(1/3) (2/3) (3/3)

(1/3) (3/3)(2/3)

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

32IB-1501453-D

2.4.3 G Code Guidance

G code guidance is a function that shows the command format details or the outline of its operation for the G code being

edited while creating or editing the machining program. With this function, the G code format can be confirmed immediately.

G code guidance is also displayed in the same manner even when MDI program is displayed.

The contents displayed on the G code guidance area depends on the cursor position on the edit screen, and is refreshed

when moving the cursor.

The G code that meets following conditions are displayed in this area.

G code that exists between the head of block and cursor position including the cursor position.

G code that exists immediately before the cursor if multiple G codes meet the above condition.

Specific example The guidance is not refreshed because the cursor is out of the block.

The guidance for G17 is displayed.

The guidance for G91 is displayed.

The guidance for G00 is displayed because G00 is the nearest G code to the cursor.

G91 G17 ;

G91 G17 ;

G91 G17 ;

G91 G00 X100. Y 100. ;

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

33 IB-1501453-D

With G code guidance function, the commands having "G" followed by 1 or more numbers are regarded as the G code.

Thus, when "G" that is located immediately before the cursor is within the comment, the guidance will not be refreshed. In

the same manner, when a G code is commanded using variables such as "G#100" or "G#500", etc. but numbers, the guid-

ance will not be refreshed.

The G code that can be displayed in the guidance area is as follows.

Gnnnnnnnn.m L ll ("n", "m", and "l" are arbitrary number.)

(1) As for the G codes not included in the specifications, the guidance is not displayed even if the above condition is met.

G codes displayed in the G code guidance area

Commanded value Number of valid digits Remarks n (integer) 1 to 8 digit When including "0" before integer command value, unnecessary "0" is

ignored.

m (decimal places) 0 to 1 digit -

l (value commanded using "L")

0 to 2 digit This is valid when "L" exists immediately after the integer command value or decimal command value and is followed by a command value. If the command with "L" address precedes G code, the "L" command will not be described in the guidance.

"G" included in the comment "GCODE" is ignored, thus, G code guidance is not refreshed.

"G" included in the command "GOTO" is ignored, thus, G code guidance is not refreshed.

G code "G120" is not included in the specifications, thus, G code guidance is not refreshed.

The guidance for G31.1 is displayed.

Commanded value exceeds the number of valid digits, thus, G code guidance is not refreshed.

The guidance not for "G10 L50" but "G10" is displayed.

Note

G00 X100. (GCODE) ;

N11 GOTO1 2 ;

G91 G120 X100. Y100. ;

G00000031.1 ;

G00000031.10 ;

L50 G10 ;

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

34IB-1501453-D

(1) G code guidance may be refreshed when the cursor is located near the comment.

(2) When the cursor is located at the axis address, etc., the guidance for the nearest G code is displayed even if the address has no relationship with the G code.

(3) When moving the cursor to the block with no G code as follows, the contents of the G code guidance will differ depending on the cursor's route even if the cursor is in the same block.

(4) G code could not function though the guidance is displayed.

(5) Basically, the G code format in the G code guidance is displayed using the format of 3-axis specifications of X, Y, and Z.

(6) Whichever plane is selected among the plane selection functions G17 to G19, the display data in the guidance is dis- played using X-Y plane (G17) format.

(7) When the G code command includes an address that has two or more meanings, both contents is displayed.

(8) G code guidance will not be refreshed while the character string is searched or replaced.

(9) If "cmdtyp" varies in each part system for the L system, the display is switched to the guidance of the corresponding part system when the part system is changed during the G code guidance display.

Precautions for G code guidance

(Example) The guidance for G01 is displayed.

(Example) G code that has a relationship with "X100." is "G01", however, G code guidance for "G90" is displayed.

(Example) When the cursor is moved by the route "a", the guidance for G01 which is displayed last in N01 block is also displayed in N02 block. When the cursor is moved by the route "b", the guidance for G02 which is displayed last in N03 block is also displayed in N02 block.

( PROG01 ) ;

G01 G90 X100. ;

N01 G91 G01 X100. F1000

N02 100. Z100. ... a

N03 G02 X50. Y50. R50. ;

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

35 IB-1501453-D

2.5 Menu List The menu list is a function that displays each screen's menu configuration as a list. The Menu list window opens when the

key is pressed on each screen.

If a pop-up window other than the menu list is displayed, the Menu list window appears above the displayed pop-up window.

The menu does not change in this case.

If the or key is pressed again while the Menu list window is open, the Menu list window closes, and the state

before the key was pressed is recovered.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Screen name The screen name is displayed.

(Example) Monitr/Setup

(2) Menu name A list of the menu names (functions) included on each screen is displayed. (Example) Search/Reserch

(3) Function outline display area

An outline of the currently selected menu name (function) is displayed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

36IB-1501453-D

When using the touchscreen display, touching it once activates the menu where you touched. And then touch the menu

again or press the [INPUT] key to display the menu screen.

Operation method (1)

Press the key. The Menu list window appears showing the selected screen's menu list at the top.

If you press the key while editing the file on the

edit screen, a prompt to confirm whether to save the program appears before Menu list window opens.

(2) Using the [], [], [], [], and page keys, move the cursor to the menu for which the function outline is to be displayed. The cursor does not move to the group name.

The function outline for the selected menu appears. The function outline does not appear if a menu with no name is selected.

Each cursor key moves as follows. [] key: The cursor moves up. [] key: The cursor moves down. [] key: The cursor moves to the right. [] key: The cursor moves to the left.

key: The screen scrolls down.

key: The screen scrolls up.

Pressing the [|] key also moves the cursor in the same way as the [] key. Pressing the [|] key also moves the cursor in

the same way as the [] key.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key. The selected menu function can be moved to directly. The menu is not moved to if a menu with no name is se- lected. The Menu list window closes after moving.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

37 IB-1501453-D

2.6 Touchscreen Functions Touchscreen operation is available with a touchscreen display.

2.6.1 Basic Operation

Display items

Display items Details (1) System change This switches from the current part system to the next part system.

(2) Function change A selected screen will open. As in the case with a screen change by key inputting, if a pop-up window is dis- played, close it before changing screens. If there is a file under editing, confirm if the file is saved before changing screens.

(3) Menu operation cancel The displayed screen operation menu is switched to the screen selection menu of the current screen group. This is also used to cancel the menu operations of the dis- played screen.

(4) Software keyboard display This displays the software keyboard on the screen.

(5) Menu change to the next This switches to the next menu if available.

(6) Menu selection When a menu is selected by touching, the menu's process is executed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

38IB-1501453-D

If you touch [] or [] of the scroll bar, the screen is scrolled up or down by one line. Also, if you touch the empty portion

of the scroll bar, the page is switched to the next page or previous page.

Pages cannot be changed by dragging the slider.

(*1) For the workpiece coordinate system offset window and local variable window on the monitor screen as well as coor-

dinate system offset frame and T code list window on the setup screen, the page changes to the previous page when

[] of scroll bar is touched, and the page changes to the next page when [] of scroll bar is touched. (It is not possible

to scroll in a line unit.)

Page changing area by scroll bar

(*1)

Scrolls up one line

Changes to previous page

Does not change the page from the current page

Scrolls down one line

Changes to next page

Changes to previous page

Does not change the page from the current page

Changes to next page

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

39 IB-1501453-D

2.6.2 Software Keyboard

With the software keyboard, a key input is possible by a key menu on the software keyboard which is displayed on the

screen. Software keyboard is displayed if [S/W Key] button is touched in each screen. In this case, screen or menu status

will not change. Software keyboard is always displayed on the front screen. When the [CLOSE] key on the software key-

board is touched, the software keyboard will be closed.

Software keyboard is displayed automatically in a necessary state in accordance with the setting of the parameter "#11010

Software keyboard".

During the software keyboard is displayed, the [S/W Key] button is inverted.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

40IB-1501453-D

When the parameter "#11010 Software keyboard" is set to "4", the "Y/N" window is displayed instead of the software key-

board at the time of Yes/No confirmation. This "Y/N" window is automatically closed after either Y or N key is input. In this

case, the software keyboard which was displayed before Yes/No confirmation will not appear.

[Numerical keypad display] [All keys display]

Y/N window

(1) (6)

(5)

(7)

(4)

(4)

(12)

(11)

(10) (9)

(8)

(2)

(3)

(13)

(16)

(17) (15) (14)

(3)

(4)

(3)

(8)

(11)

(9)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

41 IB-1501453-D

(*1) For details on the behavior of this button, refer to the device No. X2F0 (signal name: BOARD RESET, signal abbrevi-

ation: BRST) in "M800/M80/C80 Series PLC Interface Manual".

If the software keyboard is displayed while the input area exists on the screen, the input area of the software keyboard is

displayed in the enable state. When the data setting key or data correction key is selected while the input area is enabled,

enter a key in the input area of the software keyboard, and use the [INPUT] key to enter data in the screen.

Furthermore, if the software keyboard is displayed to edit a program file when the input area does not exist on the screen

or while the editing window or MDI editing window is being displayed, the input area of the software keyboard is displayed

into the disable state. In this case, directly enter a key in the screen.

When you enter a key to type the password, an asterisk "*" appears in the input area of the software keyboard.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Input section This displays a character string according to the keys touched by the operator.

(2) Lower-case letter input key

This changes upper/lower-case of alphabet. The [ABC../abc..] key is highlighted when the lower-case-letter-setting is valid.

(3) Data setting keys This enters characters in the input area or screen.

(4) Window operation keys [LIST]: This displays the menu list window. [?]: This displays the parameter/guidance window. [SHIFT] key + [LIST]: Switches the prototype screen and mass production screen.

: This changes active windows.

(5) RESET key This resets the NC. (*1)

(6) SFP key Not available.

(7) F0 key Not available.

(8) Page up/down keys This displays the contents in the previous/next page. When the numerical keypad display keyboard is displayed automatically at the time of Yes/No confirmation, [Y]/[N] keys are displayed instead of page up/down keys.

(9) Cursor keys If data is set in the display items on the screen, the cursor is moved to vertically/horizon- tally.

(10) Blank key This enters a blank.

(11) Data correction keys [INSERT]:The mode changes to data insertion mode, and characters are input at the current cursor position when data setting key is pressed. When [DELETE], [C.B CAN], [INPUT], cursor key, or tab key, etc. is pressed, or when the screen is changed to another, the mode returns to overwriting mode. [DELETE]: This deletes a letter before the cursor position. [C.B]: This cancels the settings in the input area. [CAN]: This cancels.

(12) Display position switch This switches the display position of the software keyboard.

(13) Block end key This enters ";".

(14) INPUT key This confirms the data entered in the input area or screen.

(15) SHIFT key This validates the setting on the lower line of the data setting key. Once [SHIFT] key is selected, it will be valid until another key is pressed or the software keyboard is closed. Menus are displayed in highlight while [SHIFT] key is valid.

(16) CLOSE key This closes the software keyboard.

(17) Key display switch key This switches numerical keypad display/all keys display.

Input area of software keyboard

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

42IB-1501453-D

Touching the [S/W Key] button on the lower left of the screen allows you to display the software keyboard on the screen.

Touching the [ALLKEY] key on the software keyboard allows you to switch the software keyboard view mode between "nu-

meric keypad view" and "all key view". "Numeric keypad view" is specified by default.

Touching the or key on the top of the software keyboard allows you to move the software keyboard display po-

sition to the left or right.

(1) When the key is pressed, the software keyboard moves to the left.

(2) If the key is pressed when the [S/W Key] button appears on the left of the screen or if the key is pressed when the [S/W Key] button appears on the right of the screen, the software keyboard does not move.

Displaying/closing the software keyboard

(1) Touch the [S/W Key] button. The software keyboard is displayed on the front screen. The [S/W Key] button is highlighted.

(2) Touch the [CLOSE] key. Or, touch the [S/W Key] button again.

The software keyboard will close.

Switching the view mode (all keys display/numerical keypad display)

(1) Touch the [S/W Key] button. The software keyboard is displayed on the left side of the screen. The software keyboard is displayed as a numerical key- pad.

(2) Touch the [ALLKEY] key at the bottom of the soft- ware keyboard.

All keys, including alphabet character keys, are dis- played. The [ALLKEY] key is highlighted.

(3) Touch the [ALLKEY] key at the bottom of the soft- ware keyboard.

The display is switched to the numerical keypad only. The [ALLKEY] key is unhighlighted.

Changing the display position

(1) Touch the [S/W Key] button. The software keyboard is displayed on the left side of the screen. The [S/W Key] button is highlighted.

(2) Touch the key located at the upper right corner of the software keyboard.

The software keyboard moves to the right, and it ap- pears on the center of the screen.

(3) Touch the key located at the upper right corner of the software keyboard.

The software keyboard moves to the right, and appears on the right side of the screen.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

43 IB-1501453-D

If displaying the software keyboard while input area is being displayed on a screen, such as in the case where the operation

search window or setup screen is being displayed, the software keyboard input area will be valid. At this time, the key se-

lected on the software keyboard is temporarily displayed in the software keyboard input area, and then is input and set in

the screen by selecting the [INPUT] key.

(Example) Set the value in T tool compensation amount

(1) It is possible to make an operation input in the entry field of the software keyboard. For details on settings and opera- tions, refer to "2.3.2 Inputting Operations".

(2) If 20 or more characters are entered in the entry field of the software keyboard, character strings displayed in the input area are scrolled in sequence.

(3) If you touch the [] or [] key while the input area of the software keyboard is enabled, the cursor will move in the relevant direction in the entry field.

If software keyboard is displayed while edit window is displayed for program editing or input area is not displayed on a

screen, or when the monitor screen main menu is displayed, software keyboard input area will be invalid. At this time, the

key selected on the software keyboard is directly input to the screen.

Entering data when the input area is enabled

(1) Display T compensation tab on the setup screen and touch the [S/W Key] button.

The software keyboard is displayed on the left side of the screen. Software keyboard input area will be invalid.

(2) Touch the [], [], [|], [|] keys to move the cursor to an arbitrary position.

The cursor for tool compensation amount is moved.

(3) Touch the data setting key and enter the value. Example: 15

"15" is displayed in the software keyboard input area.

(4) Touch the [INPUT] key. "15" is input at the tool compensation amount cursor po- sition.

Entering data when the input area is disabled

(1) Display the edit window on the monitor screen and touch the [S/W Key] button.

Software keyboard is displayed. Software keyboard input area will be invalid.

(2) Touch the [], [], [|], [|] keys to move the cursor to an arbitrary position.

The cursor for the edit window is moved.

(3) Touch the data setting key and enter the value. "G28" is displayed in the edit window.

Example: G28

(4) Touch the [INPUT] key. "G28" which has been input in the edit window is con- firmed.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

44IB-1501453-D

2.6.3 Operating the Screen by Touch Gestures

The screen can also be operated by touch gestures.

This function can be used with the project which is created by "GT Designer3" Ver. 1.195D or later.

(1) Changing the menu display (Right-/left-flick) If you flick the menu horizontally (quickly run your fingertip horizontally along the screen), the menu changes to the pre- vious or next menu.

(2) Scrolling the displayed data (Up/down flick, drag) If you flick the screen vertically (quickly run your fingertip across the screen) to edit a program or process various table data items such as the compensation amount and common variable, or you drag the screen (touch the surface and move your finger without up and down losing contact), the displayed data is scrolled.

(3) Changing a page (Right- or left-flick) If you flick a page horizontally (quickly run your fingertip horizontally along the screen) to display the workpiece coordi- nate system offset or guidances such as the alarm and parameter guidances, the page changes to the right or left page.

(4) Displaying the next axis/next part system with right- or left-flick If you flick (quickly run your fingertip horizontally along the screen) horizontally on the parameter screen, etc., the axis or part system to be displayed can be switched.

(5) Selecting or determining a file (Double-tap) If you double-tap a target file on the file list screen, operations such as "Search execution", "Open file", and "Erase file" can be performed in the same way as when the [INPUT] key is pressed. However, the value of the input section is ig- nored.

[Gesture operation enabled judgment]

When you move your fingertip from the gesture-enabled range to the outside while keeping your finger touching the screen,

the gesture operation is enabled until you take your finger off the screen. If you first touch the outside of the gesture-enabled

range, the gesture operation is disabled until you take your finger off the screen, even when you move your fingertip in the

gesture-enabled area.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

45 IB-1501453-D

If you flick the menu horizontally (quickly run your fingertip horizontally along the screen), the menu slides, and changes to

the previous or next menu.

(Example)

If you flick the screen vertically (quickly run your fingertip across the screen) to edit the operation, setup, or editing program

or process various table data items such as the compensation amount and common variable, or you drag the screen ver-

tically (touch the surface and move your finger vertically without losing contact), the displayed data is scrolled.

(Example) Scroll by vertical flick

(Example) Scroll by vertical drag

Changing the menu display

Scrolling the displayed data

Flick

Flick

Move with your finger touched.

Move with your finger touched.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

46IB-1501453-D

If you flick a page horizontally (quickly run your fingertip along the screen) to display the workpiece coordinate system offset

or guidance such as the alarm and parameter guidance, the page changes to the right or left page.

(Example) Page changing for workpiece coordinate system offset

(Example) Page changing for parameter guidance

Changing a page

A workpiece coordinate system offset (G54- G56) is being displayed.

Changed to the next workpiece coordinate system offset (G57-G59) page.

A parameter guidance (#2001) is being displayed.

Changed to the next guidance (#2002) page.

Flick

Flick

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

47 IB-1501453-D

On the screen where you can switch the axes being displayed with the menu [Next axis] such as the axis parameter screen,

flick (quickly run your fingertip across the screen) horizontally to switch an axis or a part system to be displayed.

(Example) Displaying the next axis of the axes' parameters.

If you double-tap a target file on a screen that displays a file list, for example, on the Operate search screen, operation is

performed in the same way as when the [INPUT] key is pressed.

(Example) Double-tap on [Monitr] - [Search]

(1) The subsequent operation varies depending on the target you double-tapped. When the target is a file: The selected file name is specified. When the target is a folder: The list of files in the selected folder is displayed.

Switching axis or part system

The axis parameters (X, Y and Z axes) are displayed.

The next axes (A, U and V axes) are displayed.

Selecting or determining a file

The Search screen is being displayed. Search is executed.

Flick

Double-tap a file.

Operation search will be carried out.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

48IB-1501453-D

2.7 Menu Customization Function You can freely relocate the main menus of the monitor (Monitr), setup (Setup) and edit (Edit) screens.

This function enables to place the often-used keys in the first page.

It can be used when a parameter "#11032 Menu sel para lkof" (Validate menu selection parameter setting) is set to "2".

MTB password is required when it is set to "1".

The main menu of monitor screen, setup screen and edit screen correspond to the following parameters:

Main menu for monitor screen: "#10501 Monitr main menu 1" to "#10530 Monitr main menu 30"

Main menu for setup screen: "#10551 Setup main menu 1" to "#10580 Setup main menu 30"

Main menu for edit screen: "#10601 Edit main menu 1" to "#10630 Edit main menu 30"

Refer to "Alarm/Parameter Manual" for details.

Main menu for monitor screen is changed as follows.

The figure below is the default layout.

Setting example

Menu on page 1

Menu on page 2

Menu on page 3

(1) Set the parameters "#10501 Monitr main menu 1" to "#10530 Monitr main menu 30" as shown in the right.

#10501 3 (Edit)

#10503 1 (Search)

#10506 11 (Modal)

#10510 1 (Not display)

#10513 7 (Coord)

#10519 -1 (Not display)

#10525 3 (Edit)

#10527 16 (P corr)

Set "0" to the parameters other than the listed above.

(2) Turn the power ON again The new layout of the monitor screen's main menu is displayed.

#10501 #10502 #10503 #10504 #10505 #10506 #10507 #10508 #10509 #10510

#10511 #10512 #10513 #10514 #10515 #10516 #10517 #10518 #10519 #10520

#10521 #10522 #10523 #10524 #10525 #10526 #10527 #10528 #10529 #10530

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

49 IB-1501453-D

(1) When you set the number which the main menu is not allocated with the menu selection parameter, the menu is not displayed. Menu which is set with other menu non-display parameter ("#8923 Hide Edit-IO menu", "#8932 Hide measure scrn") is also not displayed even if it is set with the menu selection parameter.

(2) A menu selection parameter setting will be reflected to the menu list.

(3) Menus which are allocated to the short cut key (it is enabled after the axis address is input), such as [Counter Set] and [MST], become valid by pressing a short-cut key even if they are set as "Not display".

(4) When the parameter "#11032 Menu sel para lkof" (Menu select param setting enabled) is set to "0", the menu [Menu select] is not displayed.

(5) When the parameter "#11032 Menu sel para lkof (Menu select param setting enabled)" is set to "1" and the MTB pass- word is not entered, the menu [Menu select] appears, but the menu select param setting screen does not appear even if you press the menu.

Menu on page 1

Menu on page 2

Menu on page 3

Precautions

C80 Series Instruction Manual 2 Screen Operations

50IB-1501453-D

2.8 Changing the Operation Level (Protect Setting Screen)

Operating the maintenance screen reduces a phenomenon in which defective workpieces run out due to an operation mis-

take, by implementing a restriction with seven operation levels. The operation level varies depending on the MTB specifi-

cations. Refer to the instruction manual issued by the MTB for details.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Current operation level Displays the current operation level.

(2) Passwords at operation levels 4 to 6

Displays the passwords of operation levels 4 to 6 with "*****".

(3) Protection level of each data item

Displays the protection level of each data item. The data set below the current operation level can be changed as needed. Changing the protection level displays the message "Pro lev change" at the upper right. Change: Specify the protection level to change data (including a case to input a file). Output: Specify the protection level to output a file.

Mainte Mainte

(1)

(2)

(3)

3

51 IB-1501453-D

Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

52IB-1501453-D

3Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables This chapter explains creating and editing the machining program. Generally, operations are performed on the edit (Edit)

screen.

Refer to "Programming Manual" for details on G code programming.

3.1 Inputting a Machining Program When using the program created by external device, input it to NC by using program input/output function. For information

on the data input/output function, refer to "4.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program".

3.2 Creating and Editing a Machining Program

The program editing function performs add, delete and change in the NC memory.

This function is used for machining program, MDI program and fixed cycle program.

On the edit screen, editing (add, erase, change) and cursor position search can be performed.

There are 3 types of display as shown below:

Selected display type is retained after screen transition.

The tab under the editing area is switched depending on the selected display type.

Some tabs may not be displayed depending on the specifications.

For details on switching the display type, refer to "3.6.1 Changing the Display".

You can edit the program on the monitor screen as well. For details, refer to "9.5 Correcting the Machining Program".

Multi-program display type Enables you to edit two programs using each editing area.

G-code guidance display type Enables you to edit a program referring to the G code guidance.

Playback display type Enables you to edit a program trying sample machining.

CAUTION The program including a character of any language other than the display language is not correctly displayed. Do not edit such a program. Any part of the program other than the comment part may also be changed if edited.

Edit Edit

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

53 IB-1501453-D

Multi-program display type

G-code guidance display type

(2) (3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(1)

(7)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

54IB-1501453-D

Playback display type

Display items

Display items Details (1) Path display The path of the currently opened program file is displayed.

(Example) Memory:/program

When the path is too long, the characters exceeding the 37 characters (1-byte code) cannot be displayed.

(2) N No. incremental value dis- play

This displays an automatic additional value of sequence No.

Current edit display "Editing" This displays when performing edit operations after displaying the program.

Insert mode display "INS"

The overwrite mode and insert mode are switched by pressing the [INSERT] key. This is displayed when the insert mode is selected.

(3) Program name display This displays the file name of the program currently being edited.

This displays "MDI" when the MDI program name is being edited.

(4) Top line of the displayed pro-

gram

This displays the top line of the displayed program.

(5) Line number This displays the last 3 digits of the program line number. When over two or more lines are displayed on the screen because one line is long, the line No. does not attach to the beginning of the next line.

Program display This displays the contents of the program (machining program, MDI program) currently being edited. The line that the cursor is on is highlighted.

(6) Input section This inputs the program line number and search character string.

(7) G code guidance display This displays G code guidance. For details, refer to "2.4.3 G Code Guidance".

(8) Playback display This displays playback status. For details, refer to "3.7.4 Playback Editing".

(8)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

55 IB-1501453-D

Menus

Menus Details This edits and references the existing programs. When the program number is designated and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the program contents appear and can be edited.

This creates a new program. When the program number is set and the [INPUT] key is pressed, new comment or program contents can be created.

This edits the MDI program. When this menu key is pressed, the MDI program appears and can be edited.

When the line number is set and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the program data for the set number and later is displayed on the screen. The cursor moves to the set line number.

The area that can be edited is switched between the left and right areas.

This menu can be selected for the multi-program display type.

The display type (multi-program display, G code guidance display, and playback display) is switched.

A blank line is inserted so that the timing synchronization symbols (the timing synchronization opera-

tions of the machining program) are aligned horizontally.

This menu is grayed out and non-selectable in the following cases. - When the parameter "#1285 ext21/bit0" (Multi-part system program management) is set to "0" (in-

valid). - When the program numbers displayed in the left and right editing areas are different.

An operation search is carried out for the currently opened program with the block located by the cursor

at the top.

When the operation search is completed, the display switches to the monitor screen.

If the parameter "#1285 ext21/bit0" (Multi-part system program management) is set to "1" (valid), or the program is being edited, this menu is grayed out and non-selectable.

When the character string is designated and the [INPUT] key is pressed, that character string is searched for.

If the character string to be searched for and the character string to be replaced are separated with a "/" and designated, when the [INPUT] key is pressed, the character string is replaced.

This copies the designated line (multiple lines can be copied.)

This copies the character string designated by the cursor (multiple lines can be copied.)

This inserts the most recently copied contents to the line before the cursor or the position before the cursor.

This erases the designated line (multiple lines can be erased).

This returns the contents of the program to that prior to saving and display. This menu cannot be selected when parameter "#8910 Edit undo" is set to "0".

When the parameter "#8939 Undo confirm msg" is set to "1", the menu is highlighted while the op- eration message is displayed.

The sequence No. can be added automatically by pressing the [INPUT] key after designating an ad- ditional value.

This registers the MDI program in the memory. This can be performed only when the MDI program is displayed.

Open

Open (New)

MDI

Line jump

<--> change

Display change

Synchro view

Cursor OP srch

String search

String replace

Line copy

Char copy

Paste

Line clear

Undo

N auto add

MDI regist

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

56IB-1501453-D

Sub-menus of [Open]/[Open (New)]/[Erase file] menus

(*1) When the multi-part system program management is enabled (#1285 ext21/bit0 = 1) for the device [Memory], the last

updated date/time of the file is not displayed.

This deletes the programs. When the name of the program to be erased is designated, the designated file is deleted.

The axis to be displayed in the playback editing is switched from the first to fifth axes and among the sixth and further axes.

This menu is enabled if the playback editing (L system) is enabled and the number of axes is 6 or more.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Menus Details This selects NC memory.

This select the expanded area of NC memory. This menu is grayed out and non-selectable, when the specification of program memory capacity 1000kB[2560m] or 2000kB[5120m] is invalid.

This moves the cursor to the top line.

This moves the cursor to the last line.

This closes the pop-up window and return to the edit screen.

Pressing this menu switches display/non-display status and the display contents of the "Date/Comment" column of the program list as follows:

Program comment -> the last updated date/time of the file (*1) -> not displayed

This updates the list contents. (The latest contents of the currently selected device and directory are listed.)

This changes the method that the list is sorted.

Menus Details

Erase file

Pback next ax

File close

Memory

Memory2

Top jump

Bottom jump

Close

Comment switch

List update

Sort change

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

57 IB-1501453-D

(1) If an existing program number is designated, it causes an error.

(2) The part enclosed in parentheses ( ) in the head block of the program is used as a comment.

(3) If an existing file is set, the message "Designated file already exists" appears.

(4) Single-byte digits, single-byte uppercase alphabet characters, and Windows-recognizable single-byte symbols are available for the file name or directory name. Therefore, a double-byte code file name such as a Japanese file name cannot be used. Characters which cannot be used: \ / : , * ? < > | a to z and space Also, the followings cannot be treated as file names:

File name with extension "$$$", "$$0", "$$1", "$$2", "$$3", "$$4", "$$5", "$$6", "$$7", "$$8", or "$$9"

"0" (File named "single-byte zero")

(5) A program, which has a file name consisting of 33 or more characters, cannot be newly created.

(6) If the parameter "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1" and the file name is designated only by digits, the existing file, edit lock B, and edit lock C are checked by deleting "0" at the head. For details, refer to "4.8.6 Leading Zero".

Operation method (Creating a new machining program) (1) Press the menu [Open (New)] on the edit screen.

(2) Select the device. (Example) Menu [Memory]

The selected device name and directory (memory: /pro- gram) appear in the device name and directory display columns. For the devices other than NC memory, root directory is selected. The device on the side being edited is displayed first. If a file is not opened, NC memory will be opened.

(3) (In case of the device other than NC memory.)

Press [], [], , or key to move the cursor

to the directory with the machining program or the di- rectory to be newly created. If the list contents differ from the actual device or di- rectory, press the menu [List Update].

(4) (For the devices other than NC memory) Press the [INPUT] key.

Moves into the directory.

(5) Enter the program file name to be newly created.

(6) Press the [INPUT] key. When new creation is enabled, an EOR-only program is created. The list display is closed.

(7) Edit the machining program. Refer to "3.6 Editing Operations".

(8) Press the [INPUT] key. The edited machining program is saved to the device.

Precautions for creating a new machining program

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

58IB-1501453-D

Operation method (editing machining program) (1) Press the menu [Open] on the edit screen.

(2) Select the device. (Example) Menu [Memory]

The selected device name and directory (memory: /pro- gram) appear in the device name and directory display columns. For the devices other than NC memory, root directory is selected. The device on the side being edited is displayed first. If a file is not opened, NC memory will be opened.

(3) (In case of the device other than NC memory.)

Press [], [], , or key to move the cursor

to the directory with the machining program or the di- rectory to be newly created. If the list contents differ from the actual device or di- rectory, press the menu [List Update].

(4) (For the devices other than NC memory) Press the [INPUT] key.

Moves into the directory.

(5) Press [], [], , or key to move the cursor

to the machining program to be edited. The name of the machining program to be edited can be input in the input area.

(6) Press the [INPUT] key. If the program name has been entered in the input ar- ea, the program contents is displayed.

The program appears at the top if the file can be opened. The cursor moves to the head character of the program. The mode changes to the overwrite mode. (When it is the initial insert mode, "INS" is displayed to the right of the file name and the mode changes to the insert mode.) The list display is closed.

(7) Edit the machining program. Refer to "3.6 Editing Operations".

(8) Press the [INPUT] key. The edited machining program is saved to the device.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

59 IB-1501453-D

(1) An error occurs if a nonexistent program No. is set.

(2) If the selected program is running or program restarting, it can be displayed but not edited. An error occurs when the data is set or the [INPUT] key is pressed.

(3) The fixed cycle program list is displayed when the parameter "#1166 fixpro" is set to "1".

(4) Editable size differs depending on each device. When the editable size is exceeded, the operation message "Can't edit because of size over" appears.

(5) "Loading" is displayed in flickering until the file is opened.

(6) Editing is not possible for a program with 33 or more file name characters.

(7) When the program in search was edited, the program is searched again as follows depending on the last operation.

Search -> Edit: The position in which ONB is displayed is searched again.

Search -> Reset 1-> Edit: The program top is searched again.

Search -> Reset 2-> Edit: The search is not executed. If a program was added or deleted, the search position may shift.

Search -> Reset & Rewind -> Edit: The program top is searched again.

(8) If the protection level ("Program edit" data output) designated on the protection setting screen is higher than the current operation level, the machining program cannot be opened (message "data protection" is displayed). However, if the pro- tection level is set to a higher value on the protection setting screen while a machining program remains opened, the machining program is kept opened even after the display has returned to the edit screen. To hide the machining program after changing the protection level, press the menu [Close] to close the machining program, and change the protection level on the protection setting screen. For details, refer to "2.8 Changing the Operation Level (Protect Setting Screen)".

(9) Display will be changed as follows depending on the value set in the user parameter "#19006 EOR Disable".

When a file including "%" is opened in the edit screen, characters up to "%" will be displayed. By saving the file, characters after "%" will be discarded.

When a file not including "%" is opened, "%" will be displayed at the end of the edit screen. By saving the file, "%" will also be saved.

The contents of a file is displayed on the edit screen as it is.

When a file whose last character is other than "%" is opened, "%" will be displayed at the end of the edit screen. "%" will be saved by saving the file. For example, if the end of the file is "%" + "CRLF", an extra "%" will be added at the end.

"Line copy" and "Line clear" can be made at the lines other than the last line which includes "%".

Precautions for editing machining program

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

60IB-1501453-D

3.3 Registering and Editing the MDI Program

(1) Before starting MDI operation, confirm that the MDI settings are completed. If "Editing" or "MDI no setting" is displayed, the MDI operation cannot be started. When the [INPUT] key is pressed, the head block will be searched, and the message "MDI Set ended" will appear. The setting will then be completed. If the cursor is moved without editing, the block indicated by the cursor will be searched for when the [INPUT] key is pressed.

(2) If the [INPUT] key is pressed when the number of MDI program characters including EOB (;) and EOR (%) exceeds 2000, "Memory capacity over" message will appear and the MDI program will not be searched for execution. Note that the contents edited after the MDI program is saved last will not be saved in the NC.

(3) When the parameter "#1288 ext24/bit0" (MDI program clear) is set to "1", the MDI programs are cleared when MDI op- eration ends, the power is turned ON again, reset is input and emergency stop is canceled, and only % programs are saved.

When the parameter "#1285 ext21/bit0" (Multi-part system program management) is set to "1" (valid), the MDI program of the part system in which MDI operation ends or the reset signal issues is cleared.

The MDI programs before editing is cleared during the MDI program editing.

Reset input refers to NC reset 1, NC reset 2 and reset & rewind.

MDI program clear is performed regardless of operation mode.

When MDI program is cleared during the character string replacement confirmation waiting or line clear confirmation waiting, the character string replacement or line clear is canceled and each menu highlight returns to normal.

When MDI program is cleared after the range of the target block for line copy and line clear has been set, the desig- nated machining program is de-highlighted.

Operation method for editing MDI program (1) Press the menu [MDI] on the edit screen. The menu is highlighted.

The MDI program is displayed from the head of the edit- ing side.The cursor moves to the head character of the program. The cursor moves to the head character of the program. The mode changes to the overwrite mode. (When it is the initial insert mode, "INS" is displayed to the right of the file name and the mode changes to the insert mode.)

(2) Edit the MDI program. Refer to "3.6 Editing Operations".

Edit Edit

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

61 IB-1501453-D

(1) The program is registered as a general program of NC memory. When the fixed cycle or MTB macro is selected with the parameter "#1166 fixpro" (Fixed cycleediting), the program can- not be registered. The "Save not possible" message appears.

(2) Program cannot be registered while "Editing" is being displayed. The "Save not possible" message appears. Press the [INPUT] key to be "MDI Set ended".

(3) When the general program remaining capacity is less than the value of MDI program to be registered, the program can- not be registered. The "Memory over" message appears.

(4) When the number of remaining general programs is zero, the program cannot be registered. The "Program entry over" message appears.

(5) When the [INPUT] key is pressed without entering the program name, "Setting error" occurs.

(6) If the program name is input with only numbers when the parameter "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", the number without the leading zero is registered as the program name. However, when a number without a leading zero is outside the range 1 to 99999999, the leading zero is not deleted.

(7) If the input program name already exists in the NC memory, the MDI program cannot be registered during the operation or program restart. The operation message "Executing automatic operation" or "Program restarting" appears. If the program name is input with only numbers when the parameter "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", the pro- gram is checked with the leading zero deleted. (Example: If the MDI registration is specified as "0001" when the program "1" is in automatic operation, the "Executing automatic operation" message appears and the registration cannot be performed.)

(8) When the input program name already exists in the NC memory and it is not being in operation, the "Overwrite this file?(Y/N)" message appears. When the [Y] or [INPUT] key is input, the program name is overwritten, and when a key other than those is pressed, the registration is canceled. If the program name is input with only numbers when the parameter "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", the program is checked with the leading zero deleted. (Example: If the MDI registration is specified as "0002" when the program "2" already exists in the NC memory and it is not in the operation, the "Overwrite this file?(Y/N)" message appears.)

(9) When the program name to be input is subject to edit lock (edit lock B: 8000 to 9999, edit lock C: 9000 to 9999), the message "Edit lock B" or "Edit lock C" appears, and the program name cannot be registered. If the program name is input with only numbers when the parameter "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", the program is checked with the leading zero deleted. (Example: If the MDI registration is specified as "008000" when the edit lock B is valid, the "Edit lock B" message appears and the program cannot be registered.)

Operation method for registering MDI program (1) Press the menu [MDI] on the edit screen.

(2) Select the program to register, and then press the [INPUT] key.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

62IB-1501453-D

3.4 Registering and Editing the Fixed Cycle Program The subprogram for the fixed cycle can be input, output and edited.

(1) Since the G.1 command is used to perform the movement of a fixed cycle program, do not edit the contents of the pro- gram being described before the G.1 command. Do not delete the contents or do not insert any other commands than the G.1 command. If you edit the program in such a manner, the fixed cycle program is not performed properly.

(2) When a fixed cycle program is executed, the modal information of the dedicated group 01 is used. This intends that the modal of the main program, which calls the fixed cycle program, is not influenced by the fixed cycle program. Therefore, you can edit the fixed cycle program without considering the modal of the main program. In the fixed cycle program, the modal of the group 01 after the G.1 command is "G00".

Refer to "Programming Manual" for details on the fixed cycle program.

3.4.1 Fixed Cycle Operation Parameters

To input/output or edit the data of each fixed cycle subprogram, use the Data I/O and edit screens in the same way as when

creating usual user-created work programs. In this case, the parameters must have been set. Set "1" in parameter "#1166

fixpro". If this parameter is valid, the IN/OUT and edit screens are usable only for operating a fixed cycle control subpro-

gram. During this period, program file displays only fixed cycle programs. Thus, after the fixed cycle program operation,

return the parameter to "0".

(1) Parameter "#1166 fixpro" will be set to "0" when the power is turned OFF.

3.4.2 Transmitting and Erasing the Fixed Cycle Program

Transmit/erase the fixed cycle program from the Data I/O screen. Check that fixed the parameter "#1166 fixpro" is valid.

The operating procedure is the same as a user machining program.

CAUTION Do not change the fixed cycle program without prior approval from the MTB.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

63 IB-1501453-D

3.5 Erasing a File

(1) The file is not erased in the following cases.

The file that is to be erased is currently being used in automatic operation.

The file that is to be erased is subject to edit lock B or C.

Data protection is valid.

The file to be erased is in the "program restarting" state.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Erase file] on the edit screen.

(2) Select the device. (Example) Menu [Memory]

The selected device name and directory (memory: /pro- gram) appear in the device name and directory display columns. For the devices other than NC memory, root directory is selected. The device on the side being edited is displayed first. If a file is not opened, NC memory will be opened.

(3) (In case of the device other than NC memory.)

Press the [], [], , or key to move the cur-

sor to the directory with the machining program or the directory to be newly created. If the list contents differ from the actual device or di- rectory, press the menu [List Update].

(4) (For the devices other than NC memory) Press the [INPUT] key.

Moves into the directory.

(5) Press [], [], , or key to move the cursor

to the machining program to be edited. The name of the machining program to be erased can be input in the input area.

(6) Press the [INPUT] key. When a name of machining program is inputted in the input area, the confirmation message appears.

(7) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. Press the [N] key to cancel.

Edit Edit

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

64IB-1501453-D

3.6 Editing Operations

When the program is edited, the key input data is directly written into the program display area. All data is overwritten from

the cursor position. "Editing" appears on the right side of the file name display once input is started.

Press the [INPUT] key to save the program to the device and clear the "Editing" message.

The editing operations from when the file is actually opened are explained in this and the following sections.

These editing operations are common for the machining program and MDI program.

(1) The initial mode (overwrite/insert) at start of editing and the [DELETE] key operation (DELETE/BackSpace) can be se- lected with the parameters. The operation with overwrite mode and DELETE operation is explained in this manual un- less otherwise specified.

3.6.1 Changing the Display

Switching the active area is possible only when the multi-program display type is selected.

Press the [<--> change] key to switch the active area between the left and right window.

Press the menu [Displaychange] to switch the display type.

The same operation can be performed with the key.

The display is switched in the order of multi-program display type -> G code guidance display type -> playback display type

-> multi-program display type...

(1) Press to switch in the inverse order.

(2) Some tabs may not be displayed depending on the specifications. When only the edit tab is displayed, the menu [Dis- playchange] cannot be selected.

CAUTION If there is no value after the G command, the operation will be the "G00" operation when the program is run due to key chattering, etc., during editing.

Switching the active area

Switching the display type

Edit Edit

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

65 IB-1501453-D

key: This displays one page of preceding lines of the current top line.

When there is less than one page of data, a page of data will be displayed including the data currently displayed. The cursor moves to the last line of the screen.

key: This displays one page of following lines of the current bottom line.

The cursor moves to the top line of the screen.

The cursor will move up one line in the program each time the cursor key ([], []) is pressed.

If the [] key is pressed at the top line of the program display area, the program will scroll up one line. If the [] key is pressed

at the end, the program will scroll down one line.

When a block is displayed over 2 or more lines, [], [] keys move the cursor by block unit.

[|] key : Moves to the start of the word where the cursor is currently positioned.

If the cursor is at the start of a word, it moves to the start of the previous word.

[|] key : Moves to the word after the word where the cursor is currently positioned.

The program is split by word unit and displayed.

Changing the display using the page up/down keys ( : Previous page, : Next page)

Changing the display with the cursor key

Move the cursor using the tab keys ( [|]: back tab/ [|]: tab)

Split display by word unit

Cursor moves in same display.

Display scrolls without moving cursor position.

1:N1 G28 X0. Y0. Z0.; 2:N2 G92 X0. Y0. Z0.; 3:N3 G00 X-300. Y-300. Z-300.; 4:N4 G01 X-200. Y-200. F2000;

11:N11; 12:N12 Z300.; 13:Y200.; 14:;

3 N3 G00 X-300. Y-300. Z-300.; 4 N4 G01 X-200. Y-200. F2000; : :

Current cursor position Cursor destination when | key pressed Cursor destination when | key

pressed Cursor destination when | key pressed again

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

66IB-1501453-D

3.6.2 Displaying an Arbitrary Line

(1) When "0" is input, the cursor moves to the first line.

(2) When "E" is input, the cursor moves to the end.

3.6.3 Rewriting Data

(1) When the cursor is on or one place to the right of EOB (;), input data is inserted even if not in input mode (refer to "3.6.5 Overwriting Data (Initial Data Insertion Mode)".)

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Line jump].

(2) Input the line No. (Example) 6 [INPUT]

The program appears with the designated line No. at the head.

Operation method (Initial data overwrite mode) (1) Move the cursor to the position where data is to be in-

serted. The cursor can be moved to one place to the right of EOB (;).

(2) Set the data. The message "Editing" appears when setting is started. The data is set from the position of the cursor. Data at the area is overwritten. The cursor moves one space (character) at a time to the right as the data is set.

(3) When the setting is completed, press the [INPUT] key.

EOB (;) is added to the set data and the data is fixed. When newly creating data, the cursor moves to the head of the next line. When changing existing data, the cursor does not move.

Operation method (Initial data insertion mode) (1) Move the cursor to the position where data is to be in-

serted. The cursor can be moved to one place to the right of EOB (;).

(2) Set the data. The message "Editing" appears when setting is started. The data is set from the position of the cursor. The data from the cursor position moves to the right. The cursor moves one space (character) at a time to the right as the data is set.

(3) When the setting is completed, press the [INPUT] key.

The set data is fixed. The cursor does not move, but if there is no EOB (;) at the end of the line, it will be added. Then, the cursor moves to the next line. The message "Editing" disappears.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

67 IB-1501453-D

(1) When changing to another function such as the program check, or to another screen such as the monitor screen when "Editing" displays, the operation message "Save current file?(Y/N)" displays. If [N] key is pressed changing to the other screen once, and the edit screen is selected again, the program before editing operation will be displayed. (Edited con- tents will be invalid.)

(2) When changing to another function such as the program check, or to another screen such as the monitor screen when "Editing" displays, the operation message "Save current file?(Y/N)" displays. If the file could not be saved due to "Mem- ory over", etc., even the [Y] key is pressed, the error message displays and the screen is not changed. The screen dis- play varies depending on the succeeding operation (a) or (b) as follows. When the file could not be saved and the error message displays due to "Memory over", etc., even the [INPUT] key is pressed before the screen change operation, the screen display also varies depending on the succeeding operation (a) or (b) as follows.

(a) When changing to another function such as the program check, or to another screen such as the monitor screen without editing, the screen transition is performed without displaying the operation message. If the display returns to the program edit screen again, the previously saved contents are displayed.

(b) When changing to another function such as the program check, or to another screen such as the monitor screen after editing (data setting key operation, data correction key operation, or the menu [Paste], [Line clear] or [String replace] operation), the operation message "Save current file?(Y/N)" is displayed.

(3) Up to 255 characters can be input in one block.

(4) "Saving" is displayed in flickering during saving.

3.6.4 Inserting Data (Initial Data Overwrite Mode)

(1) Up to 256 characters can be set in one line.

(2) The insertion mode will be finished if a key such as [DELETE], [C.B], [CAN], [INPUT], [], [], [], [], [|], [|],

or pressed.

(3) For normal editing, EOB(;) is added to a row without EOB(;), and the cursor moves to the next line. A row with EOB(;) is skipped, and the cursor moves to the next line. (No cursor movement.)

Precautions

Operation method (1) Move the cursor to the position where data is to be in-

serted.

(2) Press the [INSERT] key. The mode changes to the insertion mode. "INS" appears to the right of the file name. The cursor changes to '|'.

(3) Set the data.

(4) When the setting is completed, press the [INPUT] key.

The set data is fixed. The cursor does not move, but if there is no EOB (;) at the end of the line, it will be added. Then, the cursor moves to the next line. The mode returns to the overwrite mode, and the mes- sage "Editing" disappears.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

68IB-1501453-D

3.6.5 Overwriting Data (Initial Data Insertion Mode)

(1) The insertion mode will be finished if a key such as [DELETE], [C.B], [CAN], [INPUT], [], [], [], [], [|], [|],

or pressed.

(2) For normal editing, EOB(;) is added to a row without EOB(;), and the cursor moves to the next line. A row with EOB(;) is skipped, and the cursor moves to the next line. (No cursor movement.)

3.6.6 Deleting Data

Operation method (1) Move the cursor to the position where data is to be in-

serted.

(2) Press the [INSERT] key. The mode changes to the overwrite mode. "INS" appears to the right of the file name. The cursor changes to ''.

(3) Set the data. The data is set from the position of the cursor. Data at the area is overwritten. The cursor moves one space (character) at a time to the right as the data is set.

(4) When the setting is completed, press the [INPUT] key.

The set data is fixed. The mode returns to the insertion mode, "INS" is dis- played in the right side of the file name, and the message "Editing" disappears. The cursor returns to '|'.

Operation method (Deleting one character) (Deleting by DELETE key action ("#8967 DELETE key action" is set to "0")) (1) Move the cursor to the character to be deleted.

(2) Press the [DELETE] key. 1 character is deleted at the cursor position, and "Edit- ing" appears. The data from the cursor position moves to the left. When this key is held down, the characters can be delet- ed one at a time.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key. The edited machining program is saved to the device and "Editing" disappears.

Operation method (Deleting one character) (Deleting by BackSpace key action ("#8967 DELETE key action" is set to "1"))

(1) Move the cursor to the right side of the character to be deleted.

(2) Press the [DELETE] key. 1 character at the left side of the cursor position is delet- ed, and "Editing" appears. The data from the cursor po- sition moves to the left. When this key is held down, the characters can be delet- ed one at a time.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key. The edited machining program is saved to the device and "Editing" disappears.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

69 IB-1501453-D

(1) In the case where the block for the deleted line covers multiple lines, these lines are also deleted.

(2) Last line only with "%" cannot be deleted.

(3) "Executing" is displayed during line clear. The message flashes every second.

(1) If the [INPUT] key is pressed without setting a line No., the line where the cursor is will be deleted.

(2) If the last line of the file is the range to be deleted, the last line can be designated as "E".

(3) "Executing" is displayed in flickering during line clear.

Operation method (Deleting one line) (1) Move the cursor to the line to be erased.

(2) Press the [C.B] key. 1 line is deleted at the cursor position, and "Editing" ap- pears. The lines following the cursor position are shifted upward. The cursor position does not change. When this key is held down, the line can be deleted one at a time.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key. The edited machining program is saved to the device and "Editing" disappears.

Operation method (Deleting designated lines) (1) Press the menu [Line clear].

(2) Designate the deletion range. The background color for the range to be deleted turns light blue.

(Example) From line 8 to line 10 8/10 [INPUT]

When deleting 1 line, it is also possible to make a se- lection using the [], [] keys and designate by press- ing the [INPUT] key.

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. Press the [N] key not to delete.

(Example) From 8th line to last line: 8/E

From 1st line to last line: /E

Operation method (Deleting several lines (one screen of data) displayed on a screen) (1) Press the [CAN] key. The editing data (machining program) for one screen is

deleted and "Editing" appears.

(2) Press the [INPUT] key. The edited machining program is saved to the device and "Editing" disappears.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

70IB-1501453-D

3.6.7 Searching for Character Strings

(1) "Executing" is displayed in flickering during string search.

Character strings to be searched for can be marked in colors.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [String search].

(2) Set the character string to be searched for, and press the [INPUT] key. (Example) G20 [INPUT]

The character string is searched downward from the character after the current cursor position. If the character string is discovered, the cursor moves to the start of that character string. A message appears if there is no character string appli- cable to the program. Marking can be performed by adding an option to the character string being searched for. (Example) G20/MR :G20 are marked in red. (Refer to "Marking function" described later for further details.)

(3) To continue searching, press the [INPUT] key again. The next corresponding character string is searched for.

The search finishes when the end of the program is

reached.

It is not possible to return to the head of the program and resume the search. To search from the head of the program, move the cursor to the top line and carry out the search operation again.

(4) To end the search, press the menu key. The menu highlight returns to normal, and the character string in the input area disappears. The search mode is held until the menu key is pressed. (The character string remains in the input area.)

Marking function

Argument character string format

Details Marking color

Search character string The cursor moves to the character string searched for. None

Search character string/MR The cursor moves to the character string searched for. All displayed searched character strings are marked in red.

Red

Search character string/MB The cursor moves to the character string searched for. All displayed searched character strings are marked in blue.

Blue

Search character string/MG The cursor moves to the character string searched for. All displayed searched character strings are marked in green.

Green

/MC The marking for all marked character strings is cleared. -

/MCR The marking for character strings marked in red is cleared. -

/MCB The marking for character strings marked in blue is cleared. -

/MCG The marking for character strings marked in green is cleared. -

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

71 IB-1501453-D

(1) The marking status is maintained when another program is opened while character strings are still marked.

(2) If the input mistake check warning function is enabled while character strings are still marked, the marking is given pri- ority in the case where the input mistake location and the marked display overlap.

(3) In the case where the search marking and input mistake check warning function are displayed simultaneously, the mark- ing is cleared and the input mistake warning display remains.

(4) With the multi-program display type, the search and marking is valid only in the area where the search and marking is carried out.

(5) With the multi-program display type, the character string and color to be marked are not synchronized in the each editing area.

(6) The marked status is maintained until the NC power is turned OFF.

(1) If the designated character string cannot be found, the operation message "Designated character string not found" ap- pears.

(2) A search is performed for a character string containing the designated character string, irrespective of the characters before and after. As a result, if "G2" is designated, G20 - G29 and G200 etc. will also be the subject of a search. Character string data setting example

Important points when performing search

Designated character string Search character string example N10 Character strings that include "N10" such as "N10" and "N100".

N10 X100. Character string "N10 X100."

X-012.34 Character string "X-012.34" (A search is not performed for "X-12.34".)

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

72IB-1501453-D

3.6.8 Replacing Character Strings

A character string in a program can be searched for and replaced.

The following three methods can be used.

The applicable character string is searched for and replaced one by one. (To search for the next character string, press the [INPUT] key.)

All applicable character strings in the program are replaced in a batch. (Designate "/G" when setting.)

The program character strings from the current cursor position to the last line are to be replaced in a batch. (Designate "/ E" when setting.)

(*1) When batch replacing for all the character strings in the program, add "/G" to the above setting.

Character string to be searched/character string to be replaced/G

(Example) G02/G03/G

During batch replacement, after replacing all character strings to the end of the program, the process ends while show-

ing the last character string replaced. Note that the replacement mode is held, and the character string remains in the

input area.

(1) If the program character strings from the current cursor position to the last line are to be replaced in a batch, add "/E" to the above setting. Character string to be searched/character string to be replaced/E (Example) G02/G03/E

(2) With the multi-program display type, the replacement on the side which is not being edited is not performed.

(3) "Executing" is displayed in flickering during the replacement.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [String replace].

(2) Designate the character string to be searched and replaced.

The character string is searched downward from the next character where the cursor is currently located. When the character string is found, the cursor moves to the first character of that string, and the operation mes- sage "Replace?(Y/N)" appears. If any character string is not found in the program, the cursor does not move.

(Example) Searching for "G02" to replace with "G03"

G02/G03 [INPUT] (*1)

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. Press the [N] key not to replace.

The character string is replaced, and a search is per- formed for the next applicable character string. (If a batch replacement is performed, a search is not made as the replace operation has been completed.) The operation message "Designated character string not found" appears when the end of the program is reached. "Editing" appears if replace is performed.

(4) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key again if continuing the search/replace.

The same operation as above is performed.

(5) To end search/replace, press the [String replace]. The menu highlight returns to normal, and the character string in the input area disappears. The replacement mode is held until the menu key is pressed. (The character string remains in the setting area.)

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

73 IB-1501453-D

3.6.9 Copying and Pasting Data

(1) If [INPUT] key is input without setting a line No., the line where the cursor is at is copied.

(2) The highlight of the copy target lines disappears when editing operations are resumed.

(3) If the file is edited, or turned back to the previous saved status by pressing the menu [Undo] after the Line copy menu is pressed, the data copied in the line is canceled.

(4) If the last line of the file is the range to be copied, the last line can be designated as "E". (Example) From 8th line to last line: 8/E

(5) The copied data is maintained while the copy source file is opened even if the display type or editing area is switched to another one. The data will be discarded after screen transition.

(1) Characters of up to 500 bytes can be copied at a time. When the size of the selected characters exceeds 500 bytes, the message "Can not copy more" appears and the cursor does not move.

(2) The Copying will be canceled, if the [], [], [], [], [|] or [|] key is pressed before pressing the [INPUT] key.

(3) Light blue background for copy range will disappear when editing operation is resumed.

(4) As long as the original file is opened, the copied content will be saved even if you change the display type or shift the display left and right side. The data will be discarded after screen transition.

Operation method (Copying a line) (1) Press the menu [Line copy].

(2) Designate the copy range. (Example) From line 8 to line 10 8/10 [INPUT]

The background color for the range to be copied turns light blue.

When copying 1 line, it is also possible to make a se- lection using the [] or [] key and designate by pressing the [INPUT] key.

Operation method (Copying character) (1) Move the cursor to the head character to be copied.

(2) Press the menu [Char copy].

(3) Move the cursor to the end character to be copied, and press the [INPUT] key.

The background color for the range to be copied turns light blue. The range is fixed by pressing the [INPUT] key.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

74IB-1501453-D

(1) With multi-program display type, data can be copied and pasted between the each editing areas by pressing the [<--> change] key.

(2) "Executing" is displayed in flickering during pasting.

Operation method (Pasting the copied data) (1) Move the cursor to the line where the data is to be

pasted.

(2) Press the menu [Paste].

The copied data is inserted upward on the line where the

cursor is positioned.

The copied data is inserted in front of the cursor position.

In the overwrite mode, the data is inserted in front of the cursor position as well.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

75 IB-1501453-D

3.6.10 Undoing Program Changes

This is used to return the program to the form when [INPUT] was last pressed to save. This operation is valid for the oper-

ation of "Rewriting program", "Insert", "Delete", "Line Paste", "Line Clear", "Character String Replace" and "Undo" functions.

(1) This function is only valid when parameter "#8910 Edit undo" is set to "1".

(2) When returned to the previous status, the cursor will move to the head line.

(3) With the multi-program display type, returning to the previous contents is valid only in the active area.

(4) When undoing is performed, the copied data will be canceled.

(5) "Executing" is displayed in flickering during undoing.

(6) When the parameter"#8939 Undo confirm msg" is set to "1", if [Undo] is pressed, the menu is highlighted and the oper- ation message "OK?(Y/N)" appears. The program returns to the previous status by pressing [Y] or [INPUT] key. If other key is pressed, the operation is canceled. When the operation is canceled, the menu highlight returns to normal and the message is deleted.

(7) When the program does not return to the previous status by pressing [Undo], [Undo] is not highlighted and the operation message "Data protect" or "Executing automatic operation" appears.

Operation method (1) Change the operation to memory mode, and then

press the main menu [Edit].

(2) Move the cursor to the position to be corrected, and input a character. (Example) 135 If [Undo] is pressed during "Editing", the system will be returned to the state saved last.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key. The edited machining program is saved to the device. The message "Editing" disappears.

(4) Press the menu [Undo]. The contents of the file return to the same condition as when the editing was started. These contents of the file are saved to the device.

(5) Press the menu [Undo] again. The contents of the file return to the same condition as when the file was saved in the procedure (3). These contents of the file are saved to the device.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

76IB-1501453-D

3.7 Program Editing Support Function

3.7.1 Performing Operation Search at the Cursor Position

By pressing the menu [Cursor OP srch] when the device is in the normal status (not being in status such as editing or char-

acter searching, etc.), operation search of the selected part system is carried out starting.

(1) When the parameter "#1285 ext21/bit0" (Multi-part system program management) is set to "1" (valid), the menu [Cursor OP srch] is disabled and the cursor operation search cannot be performed.

(2) During program editing, the menu [Cursor OP srch] is disabled and the cursor operation search cannot be performed.

(3) During the MDI program is displayed, the menu [Cursor OP srch] is disabled and the cursor operation search cannot be performed.

(4) During automatic operation or restart search by selected part system, the cursor operation search cannot be performed displaying the messages "Executing automatic operation" and "Program restarting" for each status. In such cases, the display does not transit to the monitor screen. However, it is enabled when the parameter "#11039 Cusr pos srch typ" is set to "1" even if the operation is under single block stop. For details, refer to "Search during single block stop" in "9.5.1 Program Editing".

(5) During automatic operation or restart search by other than the selected part system, the cursor operation search can be performed, and the messages "Executing automatic operation" and "Program restarting" will not appear. In this case, the display transits to the monitor screen.

(1) Select the part system that the cursor operation search is performed.

(2) Open the program on the edit screen. The program edit window appears.

(3) Move the cursor to the block to be carried out the cur- sor operation search.

(4) Press the menu [Cursor OP srch]. Operation search is carried out starting from the block that the cursor is positioned. During the search "Searing" will display blinking. After search is completed, the display returns to the monitor screen.

Edit Edit

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

77 IB-1501453-D

3.7.2 Adding Sequence No. (N No.) Automatically

When the sequence No. (N No.) is input once, the sequence No. to which a constant value is added can be automatically

added to each block of the machining program.

The added sequence No. data is to N2 to N99999999.

(1) When the menu [N auto add] is pressed again while the menu is highlighting, N No. additional value display column is cleared, and N No. automatic addition is canceled.

(2) The setting range is 1 to 1000. When "01" is input, "1" is set. When "0" is input, this function is canceled. When an illegal value or 9 characters or more is input, an error will occur.

(3) When "0" is input, this function is canceled.

(4) When an illegal value or 9 characters or more is input and [INPUT] is pressed, the "Setting error" appears.

(5) The incremental value can be set even when the machining program has been not opened. Even if the machining pro- gram is opened again, the incremental value is not invalid.

(6) The incremental value is not cleared with the screen transition.

(7) Even if the same N No. exists by automatic addition, an error will not occur.

(8) The system separately has N No. in a right area and left area of the edit screen.

(9) When the previous block is leading zero like "N010", N No. automatic addition can be executed. However, "0" is not added, and "N10" is displayed.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [N auto add].

(2) Input the incremental value. (Example) 10 [INPUT]

(3) Press the menu [Open (New)], then press the menu [Memory].

(4) Input a file name not used, then press the [INPUT] key. (Example) 101

(5) Input a program with N No. (Example) N100G28XYZ

(3) Press the menu [Open], then press the menu [Memory].

(4) Select a file, then press the [INPUT] key.

(5) Move the cursor to the position where data is to be inserted. Press the [INSERT] key.

(6) Input " ; " (EOB).

(7) Input the second block data and " ; " (EOB). (Example) G92X0.Y0.Z0.;

(8) Press the [INPUT] key.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

78IB-1501453-D

(1) When the previous block has N No. (When the cursor is located at the last character in the overwrite mode.)

(2) When the previous block has N No. (When the insertion mode)

(1) When the previous block has no N No.

(2) When the head of previous block has no N No.

Usually

When any comment has been added

When the previous block has a space

(3) When the N No. of previous block is over 9 characters.

(4) When limits of total characters display per block is exceeded.

(5) When the N No. is over 100000000.

(6) When the N No. automatic additional value is not set.

(7) When the display character string in overwrite mode is interrupted.

3.7.3 G Code Guidance

For details, refer to "2.4.3 G Code Guidance".

Example when N No. is added

Example when N No. is not added

N100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; -> Input ";" -> N100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0;N110; N100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; -> Input ";" -> N100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;N110; N100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; -> Input ";" -> N100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;N110;

->->

->-> Input ";"

Input ";"

G00X10.% -> Input ";" -> G00X10.;%

G00N100X10.% -> Input ";" -> G00N100X10.;%

(N100)G00N100X10.%-> Input ";" -> (N100)G00N100X10.;%

N100G00N100X10.% -> Input ";" -> N100G00N100X10.;%

N000001000% -> Input ";" -> N000001000;%

N100 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ; -> Input ";" -> N100 G28 X0;Y0 Z0 ;

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

79 IB-1501453-D

3.7.4 Playback Editing

The playback function enables creation of a program while trying sample machining by manual (handle or jog) feed or me-

chanical handle feed. A machining program can be created with movement distance data obtained by manual operation

used as programmed command values.

The playback counter and valid address key (X, Y, U, V, etc.) are different depending on the parameter "#1076 AbsInc"

(ABS/INC address) setting. A parameter "#1076 Abslnc" can be set individually for each part system.

#1076 AbsInc (For L system only) #1126 PB_G90 Reference M system (This setting is meaningless.) 0 (Incremental position) Absolute command/incremental

command depending on G com- mand

1 (Absolute position)

L system 0 (Absolute command/incremental com- mand with G command)

(This setting is meaning- less.)

1 (Absolute command/incremental com- mand with address code)

Absolute command/incremental command depending on address code

Edit Edit

(1)

(3)

(2)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

80IB-1501453-D

(*1) The displayed title and playback movement amount are as follows.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Machine position count-

er This displays the machine position counter. Up to max. number of axes in a part system can be displayed. M system: Max. eight axes L system: Max. five axes, the sixth axis or later is switched by the menu [Next axis].

When the rotary axis (except for all coordinate linear type), the display range is 0.000 to 359.999.

(2) Playback counter This displays the playback movement amount (axis movement value). When the absolute command or incremental command depends on G command, the title and playback movement amount differs according to the parameter "#1126 PB_G90". (*1)

When the absolute command or incremental command depends on address code, both titles are displayed. Up to max. number of axes in a part system can be displayed. M system: Max. eight axes L system: Max. five axes, the sixth axis or later is switched by the menu [Pback next ax].

When the rotary axis (except for all coordinate linear type), the display range is as be- low: For INC (Rotary type short-cut disabled, workpiece coordinate linear type): -359.999 to 359.999 For INC (Rotary type short-cut enabled: -180.000 to 179.999 For ABS: 0.000to 359.999

(3) Playback editing input area

The contents of playback editing is input. When the axis address keys such as X and Y are input, the playback counter value currently displayed is input after the axis address.

#1126 PB_G90 Title Playback movement amount 0 (Incremental position) Playback: INC Playback movement amount before axis moves + axis

movement amount

1 (Absolute position) Playback: ABS The program position + manual interrupt amount

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

81 IB-1501453-D

Operation method (Absolute command/incremental command with G command) (1) Set "#1126 PB_G90" to "0" on the parameter screen. Incremental value mode is set.

(2) Press the main menu [Edit] on the edit screen, and

press [Displaychange]. The "playback display type" is displayed. The menu [<--> change] cannot be used. When the incremental value is set, the initial value is "0".

(3) Open the program pressing [Edit] and [Open] on the edit screen.

The selected program is displayed in right area.

When the program is displayed on the right side, the playback edit is displayed on the right side. When the incremental value is set, playback move-

ment amount will be cleared to "0" for all axes.

(4) Move the axis during manual mode. The axis movement amount is displayed in playback movement amount. When the absolute position is set, "the program position + manual interrupt amount" is displayed as the playback movement amount. In the incremental value mode, the axis movement amount by manual mode is added to currently playback movement amount.

(5) Input the data such as the G codes in the area for playback editing.

The alphanumeric characters, [], [] and [DELETE] keys can be input in the area for playback editing.

If the [C.B] key is pressed, all the data in the play- back editing area is deleted. When the [] or [] key is pressed, the program cur-

sor in the program editing area will move. When the page up key or page down key is pressed,

the program in the program editing area will scroll. When the menu key is pressed, the process corre-

sponding to the program editing area will run. When the cursor appears on input area of the pro- gram editing area by pressing [Line jump], [Line co- py], [Line clear], [String search], [String replace], [MDI registration] or [N auto add], the key input is made to the input area of the program editing area. When window is displayed by pressing [Open], [Open(New)] or [Erase file], the key input is made to the currently displayed window. The program cursor in the program editing area can-

not move left and right, but can move only up and down.

(6) Press the axis address key such as [X] or [Y]. The playback movement amount is input after the axis address in the playback editing area. If the axis address key is pressed while the playback movement amount is being changed, the playback movement amount at the time the key was pressed will be input.

When inputting a comment, etc., the characters that are the same as the axis address will all be handled as the axis address.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

82IB-1501453-D

(1) Playback editing of a program in automatic operation or program restart is not possible.

(2) Up to 95 characters can be edited in the playback editing area.

(3) If the program created by playback editing is not suffixed by "EOB(;)", it is automatically added by [INPUT].

(4) If the screen/part system is changed or the program file is opened when the input program is in the playback edit area, the program being edited will be aborted. The playback absolute counter has the G92 coordinate system preset re- leased, and returns to "program position + manual interrupt amount". The playback increase counter is cleared to "0".

(5) Other files can be opened during playback editing. Playback editing can be continued even when other file is opened. However, if an incremental value is designated, the playback movement amount will be cleared to "0" for all axes. A new file can be created and edited, and MDI editing carried out in the same manner.

(6) If the program being playback edited automatically starts, playback editing cannot be continued.

(7) The playback movement amount after playback editing will differ according to the parameter "#1126 PB_G90" state and the commanded G code. The playback movement amount after [INPUT] is pressed is calculated for each block that has been playback edited.

(8) Do not set the same address to the parameter "#1013 axname" and "#1014 incax". If the same address is set, the ab- solute counter has priority. (However, the same address as the address used in other part system can be specified.)

(9) The playback editing cannot be enabled for an axis of auxiliary axis state. When an axis address of auxiliary axis state is input, a setting error will occur.

(7) Press the [INPUT] key. The program in the playback editing area will be inserted at the block before the cursor position in the right area, is saved. When there is no "EOB" (;) at the end of the character string, it is added automatically. The cursor moves to the line head being cleared the content of the playback edit. For an absolute position, the playback movement amount will not change. For an incremental value, the difference of the axis com- mand value for the axis used in step (6) and the playback movement amount will remain as the playback move- ment amount. The program in the program editing area is saved.

Operation method (Absolute command/incremental command with address code) (1) Confirm that the parameter "#1076 AbsInc" is "1".

(2) Edit a program the same as the procedure (2) to (7) of "Absolute command/incremental command with G command".

Notes for playback editing

X axis playback movement amount

before editing

Details to be playback edited

X axis playback movement amount after [INPUT]

For an absolute position For an incremental position X 100.000 G01 X10.; X 100.000 X 90.000

The program position + manual interrupt amount is inserted as the playback movement amount.

The difference of the axis com- mand value (X10.) and playback movement amount before [INPUT] (X100.) is inserted as the playback movement amount.

G92 X10.; X 10.000 X 0.000

The command value (X10.) fol- lowing G92 is inserted as the playback movement amount.

Regardless of the command value following G92, "0" is inserted as the playback movement amount.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

83 IB-1501453-D

3.8 Editing a Multi-part System Program The parameter "#1285 ext21/bit0" (Multi-part system program management) sets this function valid or invalid.

This function can be used when [Memory] is selected as a device.

3.8.1 Multi-part System Simultaneous Program Editing

When the parameter "#8977 Multi-$ simul edit" is set to "1" (valid), if you perform the operation (*1) to open a machining

program in NC memory on the edit screen, the specified machining program of the displayed part system in the currently

selected editing area and the machining program (*2) of the same name in another part system in the deselected editing

area are opened simultaneously in the right and left panes.

(*1) To open a machining program, follow the steps shown below. The details on each operation are described in the table

later.

Select menu [Edit] - [Open] to open an existing machining program.

Select menu [Edit] - [Open(New)] to create and open a new machining program.

The parameter "#8938 Edit-Not show Prg" is set to "0" and the display changes to the edit screen after operation search has been carried out. Then, the searched machining program is opened automatically.

(*2) The machining program that satisfies the following conditions is opened in the deselected editing area.

Machining program in another part system of the same name as for the machining program that is to be opened in the currently selected editing area

If any machining program that satisfies machining program conditions is not registered in the smallest part system other than the currently selected part system, no machining program is opened in the deselected editing area. Then, the machining program opened in the deselected editing area is closed.

(1) If a machining program in NC memory is opened while the parameter "#8977 Multi-$ simul edit" is set to "1" (valid), the machining program opened in the deselected editing area is closed.

(2) The multi-part system simultaneous program editing is also available for MTB macro program and MDI.

(3) When the machining program for multi-part system simultaneous program editing is opened while the display type is not set to the multi-program display type, if the display type is changed to the multi-program display type, the machining program that is in another part system, of the same name as for the machining program opened in the currently selected editing area is displayed in the deselected editing area.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

84IB-1501453-D

(*1) For part systems other than the 1st part system, the 2nd part system is described as a typical one.

(*2) The operation message "Create new file?(Y/N)" appears. If "N" is selected, the message "A file does not exist" appears,

and the target file is not opened. If "Y" is selected while the remaining number of registered machining programs is "0",

the message "Program entry over" appears, and no machining program is displayed.

When the parameter "#1285 ext21/bit2" (Multi-part system program generation and operation) is ON, "Create new

file?(Y/N)" does not appear and the file will not be opened.

(*1) For part systems other than the 1st part system, the 2nd part system is described as a typical one.

Operation to select the menu [Edit] - [Open] and open an existing machining program (Case in which the 1st part sys- tem is set as the displayed part system)

: Machining program registered : No machining program registered

$1 $2 (*1) Operation A programs in the 1st part system is displayed in the currently selected editing area, and

that in the 2nd part system is simultaneously displayed in the deselected editing area.

This displays a machining program in the 1st part system in the currently selected editing area. Then, if the machining program is opened in the deselected editing area, it is closed.

A confirmation message (*2) is then displayed. Selecting "Y" creates and displays a new empty file in the 1st part system in the currently selected editing area. Machining programs in the 2nd part system are displayed in the deselected editing area.

If the designated machining program does not exist in all part systems, the message "Des- ignated file does not exist" appears, that machining program is not displayed.

Operation to select the menu [Edit] - [Open (New)] and open an existing machining program (Case in which the 1st part system is set as the displayed part system)

Multi-part system program gen- eration and operation

(#1285 ext21 bit2)

Operation

ON (Newly creates only a machin- ing program in the displayed part system.)

This displays machining programs in the 1st part system in the currently selected

editing area.

When machining programs exist in the 2nd part system, they are simultaneously

displayed in the deselected editing area. (*1)

When no machining programs exist in the 2nd part system, the machining programs

opened in the deselected editing area are closed. (*1)

OFF (Collectively creates new ma- chining programs in all the part systems.)

When no machining programs exist in all the part systems, a machining program in

the 1st part system is displayed in the currently selected editing area and a machin-

ing program in the 2nd part system is displayed in the deselected editing area si-

multaneously. (*1)

When the machining programs in the 2nd part system exist, the message "Desig-

nated file already exists" appears and the file cannot be opened. (*1)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

85 IB-1501453-D

For the conditions other than the above, no operation is performed.

(*1) For part systems other than the 1st part system, the 2nd part system is described as a typical one.

(1) If the searched machining program is not registered in the displayed part system, it is not opened. When the searched machining program is registered only in the displayed part system, no file is opened in the deselected editing area.

Perform the following procedure to open the machining program, "100", under the following conditions.

The parameter "#8977 Multi-$ simul edit" is set to "1" (valid).

The machining program, "100", is registered in all part systems of NC memory.

Operation to automatically open the searched machining program (When the 1st part system is set as the displayed part system)

Currently selected editing area

Deselected editing area Operation

A machining pro- gram is not opened.

A machining program is not opened.

A machining programs in the 1st part system is displayed in the currently selected editing area, and that in the 2nd part system is simultaneously displayed in the deselected editing area. (*1)

Operation method (Opening the existing machining programs of the same name in all part systems (When the 1st part system is set as the displayed part system))

(1) Press the menu [Open]. The list appears as a pop-up window.

(2) Use the [], [], [], and [] keys to align the cursor with the target machining program (100), and press the [INPUT] key. The same operation can also be performed by input- ting the machining program name (100) to be edited in the input section and pressing the [INPUT] key.

The machining program "100" in the 1st part system is displayed in the currently selected editing area, and the machining program "100" in the 2nd part system is dis- played in the deselected editing area.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

86IB-1501453-D

Perform the following procedure to open the machining program, "200", under the following conditions.

The parameter "#8977 Multi-$ simul edit" is set to "1" (valid).

The machining program, "200", is registered in the 1st and 4th part systems of NC memory.

Perform the following procedure to open the machining program, "300", under the following conditions.

The parameter "#8977 Multi-$ simul edit" is set to "1" (valid).

The machining program, "300", is registered in the 1st part system of NC memory.

Operation method (Opening the existing machining programs of the same name in the 1st and 4th part systems (When the 1st part system is set as the displayed part system))

(1) Press the menu [Open]. The list appears as a pop-up window.

(2) Use the [], [], [], and [] keys to align the cursor with the target machining program (200), and press the [INPUT] key. The same operation can also be performed by input- ting the machining program name (200) to be edited in the input section and pressing the [INPUT] key.

The machining program "200" in the 1st part system is displayed in the currently selected editing area, and the machining program "200" in the 4th part system is dis- played in the deselected editing area.

Operation method (Opening the existing machining programs only in the 1st part system (When the 1st part system is set as the displayed part system))

(1) Press the menu [Open]. The list appears as a pop-up window.

(2) Use the [], [], [], and [] keys to align the cursor with the target machining program (300), and press the [INPUT] key. The same operation can also be performed by input- ting the machining program name (300) to be edited in the input section and pressing the [INPUT] key.

The machining program "300" in the 1st part system is displayed in the currently selected editing area, and the machining program opened in the deselected editing area is closed.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

87 IB-1501453-D

Perform the following procedure to open the machining program, "400", under the following conditions.

The parameter "#8977 Multi-$ simul edit" is set to "1" (valid).

The machining program, "400", is registered in the 3rd part system of NC memory.

Perform the following procedure to create a new machining program, "500", under the following conditions.

The parameter "#8977 Multi-$ simul edit" is set to "1" (valid).

The parameter "#1285 ext21/bit2" is set to "1" (to newly create only machining programs in the displayed part system).

Operation method (Opening the existing machining programs only in the 3rd part system (When the parameter "#1285 ext21/bit2" is set OFF and the 1st part system is set as the displayed part system))

(1) Press the menu [Open]. The list appears as a pop-up window.

(2) Use the [], [], [], and [] keys to align the cursor with the target machining program (400), and press the [INPUT] key. The same operation can also be performed by input- ting the machining program name (400) to be edited in the input section and pressing the [INPUT] key.

The operation message "Create new file?(Y/N)" ap- pears.

(3) Press the [Y] key. The machining program, "400", is newly created in the 1st part system. The machining program "400" in the 1st part system is displayed in the currently selected editing area, and the machining program "400" in the 3rd part system is dis- played in the deselected editing area.

Operation method (Creating a new machining program (When the parameter "#1285 ext21/bit2" is set ON and the 1st part system is set as the displayed part system))

(1) Press the menu [Open(New)]. The list appears as a pop-up window.

(2) Input the machining program name (500) to be newly created in the input section, then press the [INPUT] key.

The machining program "500" in the 1st part system is displayed in the currently selected editing area, and the machining program opened in the deselected editing area is closed.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

88IB-1501453-D

Perform the following procedure to create a new machining program, "600", under the following conditions.

The parameter "#8977 Multi-$ simul edit" is set to "1" (valid).

The parameter "#1285 ext21/bit2" is set to "0" (to collectively create new machining programs in all part systems).

If the menu [Open], [Open(New)], or [MDI] is pressed during editing of a machining program while the parameter "#8977

Multi-$ simul edit" is set to "1" (valid), whether to save both the contents of the currently selected editing area and those of

the deselected editing area is confirmed regardless of whether the machining program to be opened actually is targeted for

multi-part system simultaneous program editing.

Operation method (Creating a new machining program (When the parameter "#1285 ext21/bit2" is set OFF and the 1st part system is set as the displayed part system))

(1) Press the menu [Open(New)]. The list appears as a pop-up window.

(2) Input the machining program name (600) to be newly created in the input section, then press the [INPUT] key.

The machining program "600" in the 1st part system is displayed in the currently selected editing area, and the machining program "600" in the 2nd part system is dis- played in the deselected editing area.

Operation to be performed when the menu [Open], [Open(New)], or [MDI] is pressed while editing a machining pro- gram

Currently selected editing area

Deselected editing area

Operation

Not editing Not editing The operation of the pressed menu is performed.

Editing Not editing (1) The operation message "Save current file?(Y/N)" is displayed.

(2) After any key has been pressed, the operation of the pressed menu is performed.

Not editing Editing (1) The message "Save right side file?(Y/N)" ("Save left side file?(Y/N)") is displayed.

(2) After any key has been pressed, the operation of the pressed menu is performed.

Editing Editing (1) The operation message "Save current file?(Y/N)" is displayed.

(2) After any key has been pressed, the operation message "Save right side file?(Y/N)" ("Save left side file?(Y/N)") is displayed.

(3) After any key has been pressed, the operation of the pressed menu is performed.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

89 IB-1501453-D

3.8.2 Special Program Editing Display for Synchronization between Part Systems

Pressing the menu [Synchro view] enables synchronized display of the left- and right-side programs aligned when the fol-

lowing conditions are satisfied:

The parameter "#1285 ext21/bit0" (Multi-part system program management) is set to "1" (valid).

Multi-program display type is selected.

The left and right edit areas are displaying the same named programs of different part systems stored on the NC memory.

(1) The synchronous display is also available for MTB macro program and MDI.

(2) Editing can be performed in the selected editing area, and the synchronous display is disabled when "Editing" is being displayed. The synchronous display becomes enabled again when the edited contents are determined.

(3) Blank lines, which are inserted automatically to align the left- and right-side programs for the synchronization position, cannot be pasted with the menu [Paste] operation when the blank lines are specified as the copying range with the menu [Copy] operation.

(4) The editable machining program size is up to 240 KB per part system.

When the menu [Synchro view] is pressed in the state where a machining program exceeding 240 KB is opened, the "Can't edit because of size over" message is displayed and the synchronous display cannot be performed.

When a file exceeding 240 KB is opened with [Synchro view] highlighted, the "Can't edit because of size over" opera- tion message is displayed and the machining program cannot be opened.

(5) The state where the [Synchro view] is highlight is held until the power is turned OFF and ON, a machining program for which the synchronous display is not available is opened, or the display type is changed to other than "Multi-program display type".

[Display during synchronous view]

Edit Edit

Press

the [Synchro view]

menu

Note

The line is displayed with the line No. includes blank lines.

The line with the timing synchronization symbols is highlighted (with green color).

The line with the timing synchronization symbol which does not have the synchronizing target is not highlighted.

Cursor line is not highlighted.

Blank lines are inserted to align the left- and

right-side synchronization position.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

90IB-1501453-D

3.9 Defining Variables Refer to "Programming Manual" for more details on variables.

3.9.1 Common Variables

Select [Com var] on the monitor (Monitr) screen to set or display the details of the common variables.

If there is a common variable command (*1) in the machining program, the variable value (variable name) set when the

block is executed is displayed.

The number of common variable sets differs according to the specifications.

(*1) The variable names can be set for common variables #500 to #599.

Monitr Com var

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

91 IB-1501453-D

(*1) Address #400s common variable can be used only when the sets of common variable is "700 sets or more" and the

parameter "#1336 #400_Valtype" is "1".

(*2) When the parameter "#1316 CrossCom" is set to "1", the common variables #100100 to #700199 can be used common

to part systems. The variables shown in the table below can be used common to part systems.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Variable number This is the common variable No.

There are common variable 1(common to part systems) and common variable 2 (for each part system) (Refer to the table below). The #100 variables appear at the head when the power is turned ON. If "#1052 MemVal" is set to "1" (Designate No. of common variable common to part sys- tems), "*" is attached to the variable that is common to part systems. (Note that if there is only one part system, "*" will not appear.)

Part system Number of sets Common variable 1 (common to part sys-

tems)

Common variable 2 (for each part system)

One part system 700 sets 400 to 999 (*1) 100100 to 700199 (*2)

100 to 199

Multi-part system (n = number of part systems)

600+100n set(s)

400 to 999 (*1) 100100 to 700199 (*2)

100 to 199 n

(2) Variable value The setting range is -999,999,999 to 999,999,999 or blank.

An exponential is displayed when 7 digits are set in the integer section and 5 digits or

more are set in the decimal section.

(Example) 1234567 -> 1.2346E+006, 0.00001 -> 1.0000E-005

The minimum setting unit that can be set is 1.0000E-099 (99 digits below decimal point).

When the setting is "blank", the setting will be handled as "0" in the calculations. However, when the conditional expressions EQ or NE are used, the blank will not be handled as "0".

(3) Variable name A variable name can be assigned for #500 to #599.

Two-byte characters such as Chinese character can be displayed, however, only sym-

bols and alphanumeric characters can be input on the screen. The maximum number

of one-byte characters is 10.

(4) Input section This displays details of the key input.

Common variables 1 (When "#1316 CrossCom" = "1") #100100 to #100199 Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 1st part system

#200100 to #200199 Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 2nd part system

#300100 to #300199 Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 3rd part system

#400100 to #400199 Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 4th part system

#500100 to #500199 Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 5th part system

#600100 to #600199 Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 6th part system

#700100 to #700199 Equivalent to # 100 to #199 in 7th part system

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

92IB-1501453-D

Menus

Menus Details This executes an absolute input. If "#8930 Disable=INPUT:var" is set to "1", this menu cannot be selected.

This executes an incremental input.

This designates the variable No. to be displayed at the head. Common variable 1 (common to part systems) #400 to #999, common variable 1 (common to part sys- tems) #100100 to #800199, and common variable 2 (for each part system) #100 to #199 are displayed in each area. When another area is displayed, press this menu and specify the common variable No.

This returns the last rewritten data to its previous value. This menu key is valid for "Data Input", "Paste" and "Undo" operations. Note that return to the original value is not possible after variable clear and comment clear operations.

When the parameter "#8939 Undo confirm msg" is set to "1", the menu is highlighted while the op- eration message is displayed.

This copies the variable value and variable name at the cursor position.

This pastes the copied variable value and variable name.

This clears the variable value(s) at the cursor position or in the designated range.

The contents are not cleared to "0". The state with no data is entered.

This clears the variable name(s) at the cursor position or in the designated range.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Operation method (Setting "135.000" in variable No. 102) (1) Press the menu [Var No search].

(2) Designate the variable No. 102 [INPUT]

The cursor can be moved to 102 using the [], [], , or key.

(3) Input a numeric value. 135 [INPUT]

The value can also be designated by pressing the menu [=Input] instead of the [INPUT] key. The value can also be input as an exponential. (1.35E2 [INPUT] or 1.35E2 [=Input].)

Operation method (Adding "1.234" to variable No. 102) (1) Select common variable 102 with the same proce-

dure as steps (1) and (2) above.

(2) Input a numeric value. 1.234 [+Input]

The input value added to the original value is displayed. (Example) If the original value is 135.000, 136.234 ap- pears. (135.000 + 1.234 = 136.234)

=Input

+Input

Var No search

Undo

Copy

Paste

Variabl clear

Name clear

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

93 IB-1501453-D

(1) The variable name can be set only for variable No. 100 to 199 or 500 to 599.

(1) The variable at the cursor position will become the target of the erasing if the [INPUT] key is pressed without designating a variable No.

(2) The variables in the range below are the erasing target when /E is designated.

(3) If you include a variable between 100s and 500s in the range designation, the erasing is not performed. (Example) When you set "110/510", "setting error" is displayed and the variables are not erased.

Operation method (Setting "COUNTER" as the variable name for variable No. 509) (1) Select common variable 509 with the same procedure as steps (1) and (2) above.

(2) Press the key.

(3) Input the variable name. COUNTER [INPUT]

Operation method (Copying and pasting the common variable) (1) Select the variable to be copied.

One of the following methods can be used to select the variable.

Using the cursor movement key [], [], , or , move the cursor to the variable to be selected.

Press [Var No search] and set the variable No. in the input area, and press the [INPUT] key.

(2) Press the menu [Copy].

(3) Select the variable to be pasted, and press the menu [Paste].

The copied variable is held until a variable is newly copied.

Operation method (Erasing the variable value for variable number 102 to 104) (1) Press the menu [Variabl clear].

(2) Input the No. (range) of the variable to be erased. 102/104 [INPUT]

To erase only one variable, input one variable No. (102 [INPUT])

(3) Press the [Y] key.

Input example Erasing range Supplement 100/E 100 to 199

100100 to 100199 (when the displayed part system is 1)

Only common variable in the displayed part system is cleared.

400/E 400 to 999 100100 to 800199 900000 to 907399

Range to be cleared varies depending on the num- ber of common variable sets.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

94IB-1501453-D

(1) The variable at the cursor position will become the target of the erasing if the [INPUT] key is pressed without designating a variable No.

(2) The variables in the range below are the erasing target when /E is designated.

Methods to switch the display areas are as follows.

(1) Use the menu [Var No search].

(2) Use the page up/down keys.

If you press the next page key during displaying the last page of the area, the first page of the next area will be dis- played.

If you press the previous page key during displaying the first page of the area, the last page of the previous area will be displayed. (Example) If you press the next page key during displaying the last page of the common variable 2 (for each part sys- tem) (#100 -), the first page of the common variable 1 (common to part systems) (#500 -) will be displayed.

(3) Use a cursor key

When a cursor key is placed at the biggest variable No. in the area, the first page in the next area will be displayed by pressing [] or [|].

When a cursor key is placed at the first variable No. in the area, the biggest variable No. in the previous area will be displayed at the top by pressing [] or [|].

(4) Use a scroll bar

The first page of the next area will be displayed by pressing , while the last page of the area is displayed.

The biggest variable No. in the previous area is displayed at the head by pressing , while the first page is displayed.

Variable numbers cannot be displayed continuously if another display area is inserted in between.

Operation method (Erasing the variable name for variable No. 509) (1) Press the menu [Name clear].

(2) Select the variable , and press the [INPUT] key. 509 [INPUT]

(3) Press the [Y] key. The variable name for 509 only is erased. The variable value is not erased.

Input example Erasing range Supplement 100/E 100 to 199 Only variable name in the displayed part system is

cleared.

500/E 500 to 599

Switching the variable No.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

95 IB-1501453-D

3.9.2 Local Variables

Select [Loc var] on the monitor (Monitr) screen, and the details of the local variables are displayed.

Local variables 1 to 33 are prepared for each user macro subprogram call level. Up to 33 local variable data items are dis-

played on one level. A 5-level configuration from level 0 to level 4 is used in page order. If there is a local variable command

or an argument designation called by the user macro subprogram in the block, and that block is executed first, the set vari-

able value (variable name) will be displayed.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Execution level This displays the nest level of the subprogram control called by the user macro.

0: Not in user macro call state 1: User macro call level 1 2: User macro call level 2 3: User macro call level 3 4: User macro call level 4

(2) Display level This displays the nest level of the local variable displayed in the area.

(3) Variable number This displays the local variable No. The alphabetic character before the local variable No. is the argument code. G, L, N, O, P cannot be used as arguments, and thus not displayed. There are 33 local variables (1 to 33) for each user macro subprogram call level.

(4) Variable value This displays the local variable value. If the variable data is "blank", the display will be blank. An exponential is displayed when a 7 digits are set in the integer section and 5 digits or more as set in the decimal section. (Example)1234567 -> 1.2346E+006, 0.00001 -> 1.0000E-005

When the setting is "blank", the setting will be handled as "0" in the calculations. However, when the conditional expressions EQ or NE are used, the blank will not be handled as "0".

Monitr Loc var

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

96IB-1501453-D

The local variables are not erased when reset or when the power is turned OFF. They are erased at macro call.

When the current display level is 0

When the menu [Display level + ] is pressed again, the display level changes in the order of 2 -> 3 -> 4 -> 0 -> 1 -> 2 ->

and so forth.

When the current display level is 2

When the menu [Display level - ] is pressed again, the display level changes in the order of 0 -> 4 -> 3 -> 2 -> 1 -> 0 ->

and so forth.

Menus

Menus Details This lowers the local variable display level one by one. If this menu is pressed when the display level is 0, the level changes to display level 4.

This increases the local variable display level one by one. If this menu is pressed when the display level is 4, the level changes to display level 0.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Relation of user macro subprogram call execution level and display level

Precautions

Operation method (Displaying the next level)

(1) Press the menu [Display level + ]. The level 1 local variables appear from the head.

Operation method (Displaying the previous level)

(1) Press the menu [Display level - ]. The level 1 local variables appear from the head.

Display level-

Display level+

Close

Main (level 0) O1 (level 1) O10 (level 2) O100 (level 3) O1000 (level 4)

#1=0.1 #2=0.2 #3=0.3 : G65 P1A1.B2.C3.; : M02;

: G65 P10A10.B20. C30.; : M02;

: G65 P100A100. B200.; : M99;

: G65 P1000A1000. B2000.; : M99;

: M99;

Local variable 1 0.1000 2 0.2000 3 0.3000 : 33

Local variable 1 1.0000 2 2.0000 3 3.0000 : 33

Local variable 1 10.0000 2 20.0000 3 30.0000 : 33

Local variable 1 100.0000 2 200.0000 3 300.0000 : 33

Local variable 1 1000.0000 2 2000.0000 3 3000.0000 : 33

Level 0 display

Level 1 display

Level 2 display

Level 3 display

Level 4 display

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

97 IB-1501453-D

The displayed local variable No. changes when the page up/down keys (previous page , next page ) are pressed.

Operation method (Changing the displayed variable No.)

#1 : #12

#13 : #24

#25 : #33

PAGE

PAGE

Local variable display

C80 Series Instruction Manual 3 Inputting a Machining Program and Defining Variables

98IB-1501453-D

4

99 IB-1501453-D

Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

100IB-1501453-D

4Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program This chapter explains the details of Inputting and outputting the machining program mainly based on the menu [I/O] on the

Edit screen.

This operation can be performed with the menu [I/O] on the Maintenance (Mainte) screen as well.

4.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program

The machining program can input/output between the NC internal memory and the external input/output device on the Edit

screen.

(1) When the program input/output function is used, set the parameter "#8923 Hide Edit-IO menu" to "0".

This function applies to the following devices.

Memory

Memory2

Memory card (Mount on the back-side SD card drive of GOT)

USB memory (Mount on the front-side USB drive of GOT)

Edit I/O

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

101 IB-1501453-D

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(1)

(5)

(6)

(7)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

102IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) Device, directory, file

name setting area This sets the device, directory, and file name for which the transmission, compare, and erase functions are used. When the number of characters exceeds the display possi- ble number (directory: 63 in three lines, file name: 42 in two lines), the excess is not displayed. As for the device and directory, the setting values are retained even when the power is turned OFF.

(2) Input/compare data dis- play

This displays data that is being transferred or compared. If an error occurs while com- paring data, the block for which the error occurred is displayed.

(3) Guidance display area This displays the device name shortcut key.

(4) Process progress dis- play section

This displays the details and data input/output direction for the process currently being performed.

(5) Capacity display section (*1)(*2)

This displays the file (machining program) registration count information and memory

capacity information for the selected device.

Prog entry: Displays the number of programs that are already registered as the user's machining programs. Remain: This displays the remaining number of programs that can be registered. When memory is selected as the device, the total of the number of programs regis- tered and the remainder is the maximum number of registrations set in the specifica- tions.

Memory size: Displays the capacity that is already registered as the user's machining programs. Remain: Displays the remaining capacity that can be registered. When memory is selected, the total of the memory capacity and the remaining ca- pacity is used as the maximum memory capacity defined in the specifications.

(6) List display section This displays the directory contents list (directory and file name) of the device A or B

where the cursor is currently located.

Up to 32 characters can be displayed in the "File name" column by pressing the menu [Comment switch] not to display the "Date/Comment" column.

File name:

When "Memory" is selected for the device, this displays the file name (program No.) of the machining programs already registered. The file names are displayed in order from the smallest number, from 1 to 99999999. When a device other than memory is selected, this displays the file name and di-

rectory to be included in the directory that is set in the current setting column. When the number of characters exceeds the maximum (13 characters with the

comment column, 32 characters without the comment column), the excess is in- dicated as "*".

Size:

This displays the size of each file. (The number of characters in the machining program when the memory is selected for the device.) When directory is selected, this displays "DIR".

Date/Comment:

This displays the comment (up to 19 alphanumeric characters and symbols) of each file. The date which the file is updated is displayed for the memory card or USB mem-

ory. When the comment of the NC memory exceeds the number of display characters

(19 characters), the exceeded part is not displayed. The excess is not abbreviat- ed to "*".

(7) Input section This displays the input key.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

103 IB-1501453-D

(*1) Some items may not be displayed depending on the device.

(*2) When the device is not mounted, a registration count and a memory capacity are not displayed and an empty list is

displayed.

(1) As for the device and directory, the setting values are retained even when the power is turned OFF. However, by se- lecting directory, when the number of characters in the directory path (full path) from the root directory exceeds 100, the directory path is not retained, but a previously set directory path containing 100 characters or less retained. When the device is "Memory", the initial directory display is "Program".

: Displayed : Not displayed

Display item/Device Memory Memory2 Memory card USB memory Number of programs registered

Remain

Number of memory characters

Remain

List

Menus

Menus Details This sets the device, directory and file name for which input/output operations are performed.

This copies the file in file setting column A (transfer origin) to the file setting column B (transfer destina- tion). (The transfer origin file is not changed.)

This copies the file in file setting column B (transfer origin) to the file setting column A (transfer destina- tion). (The transfer origin file is not changed.)

This compares the files in file setting column A and file setting column B.

This erases the selected file in file setting column.

This changes the name of the file in file setting column A to that of in file setting column B.

The same device must be selected for A and B.

This creates a new directory in the selected file setting column. The directory can be created when the memory card or the USB memory is selected for the device.

This adds the contents of the file in file setting column B to that of in file setting column A. (The file in file setting column B is not changed.)

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

This interrupts the process (transfer, compare, etc.) during its execution.

Note

File set

Trnsfr A->B

Trnsfr B->A

Compare A:B

Erase

Rename A->B

Dir create

Merge A->B

Close

Stop

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

104IB-1501453-D

Sub-menus of [File set] menu

(*1) When the selected device is [Memory card] or [USB Memory], the program comment is not displayed.

(*2) When the multi-part system program management is enabled (#1285 ext21/bit0 = 1) for the device [Memory], the last

updated date/time of the file is not displayed.

It is necessary to enable the areas including device, directory, and file name in the file setting column A or B in order to set

those items.

Change the display area using the [], [], direction cursor keys or the [|], [|] tab keys.

For the touchscreen display, it is also possible to change the invalid area by touching the display area.

Menus Details This selects NC memory.

This selects the back-side SD card of GOT.

This select the expanded area of NC memory. This menu is grayed out and non-selectable, when the specification of program memory capacity 1000kB[2560m] or 2000kB[5120m] is invalid.

This selects USB memory.

This moves the cursor to the top line.

This moves the cursor to the last line.

Pressing this menu switches display/non-display status and the display contents of the "Date/Comment" column of the program list as follows:

Program comment (*1) -> the last updated date/time of the file (*2) -> not displayed

This transfers a machining program as one file.

This transfers multiple programs as one file.

This updates the list contents. (The latest contents of the currently selected device and directory are list- ed.)

This changes the method that the list is sorted.

This returns to the main menu.

Switching the valid area

Memory

Memory card

Memory2

USB Memory

Top jump

Bottom jump

Comment switch

Program

Program all

List update

Sort change

Retn

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

105 IB-1501453-D

4.2 Selecting a Device, Directory and File

This section explains the file device, directory, and file name specification methods for the file transfer and erase commands

etc. performed on the I/O screen of the edit (Edit) screen.

(1) The device can be selected using the sub-menu or shortcut keys. (The devices that can be used will differ depending on the specifications.)

(2) One of the following methods can be used to designate the directory (for devices other than the NC memory) and file name.

Designate the directory path or file name in the input area and press the [INPUT] key. Move the cursor in the list display section to the target directory or file name and press the [INPUT] key.

A wildcard (*) can be used for the file name.

(1) When the number of characters of directory path (full path) exceeds 128, changing directories cannot be performed.

(1) During directory and file name setting, the designated directory, path or file name will be set, even if it does not actually exist. This will not cause an error. Note that the previously set directory is overwritten.

(2) When selecting a fixed cycle program, it is necessary to set the parameter "#1166 fixpro". Furthermore, select "Memory" for the device, and "Program" for the directory.

File operation procedure

Outline of device, directory, and file name designating methods

Device Designation target file Designation method Device Directory File name

NC memory Machining program User macro program Fixed cycle program

Select from the submenu (Default)

Key input in the input area, then press the [INPUT] key.

Designate using the shortcut key.

Select from the list.

Device other than the NC memory

All files Select from the submenu Key input in the input area, then press the [INPUT] key.

Key input in the input area, then press the [INPUT] key.

Designate using the shortcut key.

Select from the list. Select from the list.

Notes when selecting a file

Edit I/O

Select device where the file subject to the operation exists.

Specify the directory

Specify the file.

a Select using the shortcut keys or sub -menu.

Select a path from the list, or input using the keys.

Select a file from the list, or input using the keys.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

106IB-1501453-D

A wildcard (*) can be used for the file name.

By using a wildcard, multiple files can be transferred, compared, and erased at one time.

(Example 1) When programs 1 to 1000 exist in the NC memory.

Designate "*" in the file name: The target program is "1 to 1000".

Designate "*.*" in the file name: There is no target program.

Designate "1*" in the file name: The target program is "1, 10 to 19, 100 to 199, 1000".

Designate "1*.*" in the file name: There is no target program.

Designate "*1" in the file name: The target program is that where the position of the 1 is "1".

Designate "*1*" in the file name: The target program is all of the programs containing "1".

Designate "1*1" in the file name: The target program is "11, 111, 121, 131, 141, 151, 161, 171, 181, 191".

(Example 2) When programs 1.PRG to 1000.PRG, and 1 to 1000 exist in the USB memory.

Designate "*" in the file name: The target program is "1 to 1000".

Designate "*.*" in the file name: The target program is "1.PRG to 1000.PRG".

Designate "1*" in the file name: The target program is "1, 10 to 19, 100 to 199, 1000".

Designate "1*.*" in the file name: The target program is "1.PRG, 10.PRG to 19.PRG, 100.PRG to 199.PRG,

1000.PRG".

Operation method (Selecting an NC memory program) (1) Press the [M] short cut key. on the I/O screen of the

edit screen. The device name changes to "Memory". "Program" appears in the directory.

(2) Press the menu [File set]. The NC memory program list and input area appear.

By pressing the operation menu at this point, it is pos- sible to change the device. When the menu [Program] or [Program all] is select- ed, the setting of "File name" column is cleared. Only when the device functions as the memory, the menu [Program] or [Program all] is valid.

(3) Move the cursor to the file name to be selected, and

set.

[], [] [INPUT]

(3) Input the file name.

10013 [INPUT]

Designating multiple files

(1, 11, 21, 31, 101, 111, 981, 991)

(1, 10 to 19, 21, 31, 100 to 199, 201, 210, 981, 991,1000)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

107 IB-1501453-D

Operation method (Selecting a file from a device other than the NC memory) (1) Press a device selection shortcut key on the I/O

screen of the edit screen.

(Example) [N]

The device name changes to "USB memory". The root directory (/) appears in the directory.

(2) Press the menu [File set]. The program list of the USB memory and the input area appear.

By pressing the operation menu at this point, it is pos- sible to change the device. Only when the device functions as the memory, the menu [Program] or [Program all] is valid.

(3) Move the cursor to the directory to be selected and

set.

[], [] [INPUT]

Repeat this operation until the cursor arrives at the

target directory.

Next, refer to operation (4).

The directory selected in the directory column appears. The contents of the selected directory appear in the list. Select ".." to move to one directory above. There is no change when "." is selected.

(3) Input the directory path.

(Example) /PRG/PRECUT [INPUT]

The input directory path appears in the directory column.

(4) Move the cursor to the file name to be selected, and

set.

[], [] [INPUT]

(4) Input the file name.

10013.PRG [INPUT]

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

108IB-1501453-D

4.3 Transferring a File

This section explains the method used to transfer files between different devices, or between the same device on the I/O

screen of the edit (Edit) screen.

Refer to "4.2 Selecting a Device, Directory and File" for details of the device, directory, and file specification method.

Operation method (1) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column

A on the I/O screen of the edit screen.

(2) Designate the transfer source device, directory and file name.

The designated file displays in file setting column A. A wildcard "*" can be used for the file name to designate multiple files.

(3) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column B.

(4) Designate the transfer destination device, directory and file name.

(5) Press the menu [Trnsfr A->B]. Press the menu [Trnsfr B->A] when transferring from device B to device A.

(6) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. File transfer is commenced. The process progress dis- play area displays message indicating that transfer is in progress, and also indicates the transfer direction. The data being merged appears in the input/comparison data display area input data display column. A message appears indicating a transfer completion af- ter transfer has been completed.

CAUTION

" ; ", "EOB", "%", and "EOR" are symbols used for explanation. The actual codes for ISO are "CR, LF" ("LF") and "%". "%" and "EOR" are represented by "%" in ISO. The programs created on the edit screen are stored in the NC memory in a "CR, LF" format, however, the programs created with external devices may be stored in an "LF" for- mat. The actual codes for EIA are "EOB (End of Block)" and "EOR (End of Record)".

To prevent influence from data omission and data transformation in the communication circuit, always verify the data after inputting and outputting machining programs.

Edit I/O

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

109 IB-1501453-D

Notes related to transferring in general (1) Depending on the type of file, some data cannot be transferred during automatic operation. Do not transfer during

automatic operation.

(2) When the capacity of the transfer destination is reached during file transfer, only the data transferred up to that point is registered as a file, and an error will occur.

(3) During input to the NC memory or comparison, if the file format size on the NC memory side differs from the other side file format size (when the maximum number of registrations differs between the NC memory and the other side), processing is carried out matched to the smaller size.

(4) Do not perform any file operation on the transfer source and destination files during the file transfer. The file may be damaged with the file operation.

Notes when transferring machining program files (1) The transfer speed is slower if there are many registrations.

(2) The size of one block of the machining program should be 250 characters or less.

(3) The characters that can be used for the file name and directory path are 1-byte number, 1-byte capital alphabetical letters, and 1-byte symbols recognized by the system. Note that the following characters cannot be used. |, /, :, "," (comma), *, ?, ", <, >, a to z (small letters), space Up to 32 characters are allowed for the file name to create in or transfer to NC memory.

(4) If the file whose name includes lower case alphabet is transferred to NC memory, the lower case letter will be con- verted into the capital letter.

(5) When the MTB macro and fixed cycle program are input, change the program type with the parameter (#1166 fixpro). Also, set the device and directory as follows.

Device: Memory, Directory: Program

(6) With machining program created by the MELDAS500 Series or earlier model, "EOB" is registered as "LF". However, when these programs are stored in the C80 Series NC memory, "EOB" will be converted to "CR LF", and the number of characters will increase. Thus, when all of the machining programs output from an MELDAS500 Series or earlier model, having the same specifications as the maximum memory capacity, are stored in the C80 Series NC memory, the memory capacity may be exceeded.

(7) When the file to be transferred (input) is running or in "program restarting" mode, the operation message "Executing automatic operation" or "Program restarting" is displayed and file will not be transferred (input).

(8) When "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", if a file name consisting only of numerical figures is input, "0" at the head of the file name is deleted to be checked. However, if the file name is out of the range between 1 and 99999999, the leading "0" is not deleted. This also applies to MTB macros. Therefore, for example, while the program "1" is in automatic operation, if a file name to transfer (input) is named "0001", the operation message "Executing automatic operation" appears, and transfer cannot be carried out. In the case of fixed cycles, regardless of the setting of "#8936 Delete leading 0", the name of the file to transfer must be 9 digits, and it must not start from "0". Attempting to transfer a file whose name does not satisfy the conditions above will cause an error.

(9) If the file to be transferred (input) is targeted for edit lock (edit lock B: 8000 to 9999 or edit lock C: 9000 to 9999), the operation message "Edit lock B" or "Edit lock C" is displayed, causing a transfer failure. If "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1" and the program name consisting only of numerical figures is input, "0" at the head will be deleted and checking will be performed. (Example: If the transferring (inputting) file name is "008000", the operation message "Edit lock B" appears and it cannot be transferred.)

(10) When the multi-part system program management is valid (#1285 ext21/bit0 =1) and "#1285 ext21/bit2" (Multi-part system program generation and operation) is set to "1", the file transfer to the device [Memory] from the other device is executed with the machining programs in only displayed part system. In other cases, the machining programs are transfered across all part systems in batch.

(11) When the multi-part system program management is valid (#1285 ext21/bit0 =1) and "#1286 ext22/bit5" (Selection of multi-part system program input/output method) is set to "1", the file transfer from the device [Memory] to the other device is executed with the machining programs in only displayed part system. In other cases, the machining pro- grams are transfered across all part systems in batch.

Precautions

(Example 1) If a format size of 200 files is input for a format size of 1000 NC files, 200 files are registered.

(Example 2) If 1000 files are input to the NC that formatted for 200 files, the files up to the 200th file can be regis- tered and an error message appears. (The remaining files are not registered.)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

110IB-1501453-D

(12) The transfer range from the external device other than serial to NC memory will change depending on the value set in the parameter "#19006 EOR Disable".

The head line will not be transferred.

Up to "%" in the second line onward will be transferred, and data after "%" will not be transferred.

If there is no "%", all data will be transferred.

All file contents will be transferred.

(13) When a wildcard "*" is designated for the file to be transferred, the transfer is executed excluding the programs which are subject to the edit lock in accordance with the status of Edit lock B and C.

(14) If the device shown below and the directory are designated for the transfer destination, the following operation is performed depending on conditions.

When an existing file is designated: The file is transferred with a temporary file name, and changed to the designated file name after transfer processing has been completed. When a new file is designated: A new file is transferred with a temporary file name, and changed to the designated

file name after transfer processing has been completed.

(1) Transfer destination device: Memory Directory: Machining program

(2) Transfer destination device: memory card, USB memory

A temporary file is designated by the file name that consists of 11 digits, beginning with the symbol "~".

After transfer is terminated properly, the temporary file is changed to the designated file name.

A temporary file remains in the cases below, but can be deleted in the same way as for a normal file.

When the transfer has terminated abnormally, for example, because the destination's capacity became full. When the transfer has been interrupted.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

111 IB-1501453-D

4.4 Comparing Files (Compare)

This section explains method used compare files after transferring on the I/O screen of the edit (Edit) screen.

Refer to "4.2 Selecting a Device, Directory and File" for details of the device, directory, and file specification method.

(1) Files that can be compared are text files only. Correct outcome will not be obtained through binary file comparison.

(2) In a file comparison, even if "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", when comparing one separate file that contains one program, "0" at the head of the program name is not deleted. Designating the file name is required.

(3) When a wildcard "*" is designated for the transfer source file, the comparison is executed excluding the programs which are subject to the edit lock in accordance with the status of Edit lock B and C.

Operation method (1) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column

A on the I/O screen of the edit screen.

(2) Designate the device, directory and file name to be compared.

(3) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column B.

(4) Designate the other device, directory and file name to be compared.

(5) Press the menu [Compare A:B]. The file comparison starts. The input data and comparison data appear in the input/ comparison data display area. A message appears when the comparison is completed. If a comparison error occurs, the block with the error is displayed in the comparison data display column on the screen.

Edit I/O

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

112IB-1501453-D

4.5 Erasing a File

This section explains the method used to erase files on the I/O screen of the edit (Edit) screen.

Refer to "4.2 Selecting a Device, Directory and File" for details of the device, directory, and file specification method.

(1) If the file to be erased is running, an error will occur, and the file will not be erased.

(2) When a wildcard "*" is designated for the file to be erased, the erasing is executed excluding the programs which are subject to the edit lock in accordance with the status of Edit lock B and C.

Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column B, and designate the device, directory, and file name for file setting

column B. Following this, the operation method is same as for "Erasing a file in file setting column A".

Operation method (Erasing a file in file setting column A) (1) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column A on the I/O screen of the edit screen.

(2) Designate the device, directory and file name to be erased.

(3) Press the menu [Erase].

(4) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Operation method (Erasing a file in file setting column B)

Edit I/O

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

113 IB-1501453-D

4.6 Changing a File Name (Rename)

This section explains the method used to change the file name on the I/O screen of the edit (Edit) screen.

Refer to "4.2 Selecting a Device, Directory and File" for details of the device, directory, and file specification method.

(1) Make sure the original and new devices are the same.

(2) If the file to be renamed is running or program restarting, an error will occur, and the name will not be changed.

(3) If a file that does not exist is designated for the original file, or if an existing file name is designated for the new file se- lection, an error occurs, and the name is not changed.

Changing a file name (1) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column A on the I/O screen of the edit screen.

(2) Designate the original device, directory and file name.

(3) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column B.

(4) Designate the new device, directory and file name.

(5) Press the menu [Rename A->B].

(6) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Edit I/O

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

114IB-1501453-D

4.7 Creating a Directory

This section explains the method used to newly create a directory.

Refer to "4.2 Selecting a Device, Directory and File" for details of the device, directory, and file specification method.

(1) Make sure that the directory path is less than 100 characters. When the path exceeds 100 characters, it cannot be rec- ognized as a path.

Operation method (1) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column

A.

(2) Designate the device.

(3) Select a directory to be newly created from the list, or designate by inputting from the input area.

(4) Set the new directory in the file setting column A. The directory contents appear.

(5) Press the menu [Dir create]. The directory can also be created in file setting col- umn B.

The directory is created.

Edit I/O

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

115 IB-1501453-D

4.8 Other Functions

4.8.1 Merging a File

This section explains the method used to add a file in file setting column B to a file in file setting column A on the I/O screen

of the edit (Edit) screen.

Refer to "4.2 Selecting a Device, Directory and File" for details of the device, directory, and file specification method.

(1) If the merge destination file (file in file setting column A) is running, an error will occur, and the files will not be merged.

(2) Do not perform the file operation on the merge source and destination files during the merge. The file may be damaged with the file operation.

Operation method (1) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column

A on the I/O screen of the edit screen.

(2) Designate the merge destination device, directory, and file name.

(3) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column B.

(4) Designate the merge source device, directory, and file name.

(5) Press the menu [Merg B->A].

(6) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. The file merge starts. The data being merged appears in the input/comparison data display area input data dis- play column. Furthermore, a message indicating that merging is being performed, and an arrow from the merge source (file setting column B) to the merge desti- nation (file setting column A) display in the process prog- ress display area. A message appears when the merge is completed. The details of the file in file setting column A will be as follows when the merge is completed.

The details of the file in file setting column B do not change.

Edit I/O

(FILE A) G28 XYZ G90 F800 G00 X100. Y100.; (FILE B) G91 G28 XYZ F1000; G01 X200. Y200.; M02; %

Details of file in file setting

column A before merge.

Details of file in file setting

column B before merge.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

116IB-1501453-D

4.8.2 List of File Names

There is a directory for each type of data in the device [Memory].

Each directory and file name (fixed) in the device is shown below.

Do not change the extensions (.XXX) when storing in a device other than [Memory].

4.8.3 Edit Lock B and C

This function prohibits editing, erasing, etc., of the machining programs B and C, and protects the machining programs in

the device [Memory].

The operations below in the Edit MDI and the Input/Output screens are influenced by the edit lock setting.

An error will occur if operations that are not possible are attempted.

When the edit lock is valid, processing is executed (except the edit lock target program) by the input/output function.

(1) When the multiple part system specification is valid, the machining programs of all the part systems are protected by edit lock B and C.

(2) When multiple serial files or a wildcard (*) is designated for input/output function, programs except subject to edit lock will be processed.

(3) When a multiple programs are input to the memory without designating the file name like program batch input, the mes- sage "Edit lock B" or "Edit lock C" will be displayed and the input will be interrupted if the program which is subject to edit lock is detected.

Data type NC memory directory path File name Machining program /PRG/USER (Program No.)

Fixed cycle program /PRG/FIX (Program No.)

Machining program Edit Lock B Edit Lock C A 1 to 7999

10000 to 99999999 --- ---

B (user standard program) 8000 to 8999

Editing prohibited ---

C (MTB custom) 9000 to 9999

Editing prohibited Editing prohibited

: Operation possible : Operation not possible

Screen Operation Edit Lock B Edit Lock C Machining program Machining program

A B C A B C Edit Search

Edit

MDI registration

Edit (Input/Output) Transfer

Compare

Copy

Merge

Rename

Erase

Monitor Buffer Correction

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

117 IB-1501453-D

4.8.4 Program Display Lock

Program display and operation search in the device [Memory] on the monitor or edit screen are affected as follows accord-

ing to the setting of the parameter "#1122 pglk_c" (Program display lock).

(*1) When changing the edit screen, the file opened immediately before or operation searched is automatically opened.

4.8.5 Data Protection Keys

Data protection key prevents various data from being set or erased.

The key name differs according to the MTB. Refer to the instruction manual issued by the MTB for details.

The following data can be protected with the data protection key:

All tool data and the coordinate system preset data using the origin set

User parameters and common variables

Machining programs

The data protection key is enabled to prohibit the setting, erasing, etc. while the PLC signal is OFF (B contact).

Data protection key has higher protection level than that of Data protection by user's level.

Influences of program display lock parameter on monitor screen

Screen operation #1122 pglk_c 1 (Display: Prohibited, Search: Possible)

2 (Display: Prohibited, Search: Prohibited)

Buffer display of operating program The program contents are not displayed. Only "%" is displayed.

When the menu [Edit] was pressed The operation message "Program display lock C" appears. The window is opened. (When the edit lock B or C is valid, edit lock B or C is given to priority.)

When the main menu [P corr] was pressed

Search from the operation search window The search can be executed. The search cannot be executed. The operation message "Program display lock C" appears. The win- dow is not closed. The contents of input area are not cleared.

Search from the restart search window

Search from the top search window (of restart search)

Influences of program display lock parameter on edit screen

Screen operation #1122 pglk_c 1 (Display: Prohibited, Search: Possible)

2 (Display: Prohibited, Search: Prohibited)

The file is automatically opened when chang- ing the edit screen (*1)

The program contents are not dis- played. Only "%" is displayed.

- (It is not possible to search, so the file is never automatically opened when changing the edit screen.)

When the file is opened by the menu [Open]. The operation message "Program display lock C" appears. The window is not closed. (When the edit lock B or C is valid, edit lock B or C is given to priority.)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

118IB-1501453-D

4.8.6 Leading Zero

When the parameter "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", if a file name consisting only of numerical figures is input, the

file is created with "0"at the head of the file name deleted.

However, if the file name is out of the range between 1 and 99999999, the leading "0" is not deleted. This also applies to

MTB macros.

In the case of fixed cycles, regardless of the setting of "#8936 Delete leading 0", a file name to create must be 9 digits, and

it must not start from "0". Attempting to create a name not following the conditions above will cause an error.

When "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", if a file name consisting only of numerical figures is input, the leading "0" is

deleted when checking whether the file exists or not, and when checking edit lock B/edit lock C.

(Example) For a directory that has a file "1", if a file name "0001" is attempted to be input as a new file, an error will occur.

Example of deleting of leading zero

In a file transfer with "#8936 Delete leading 0" set to "1", only when the file name of the transfer destination consists only

of numerical figures, the leading "0" is deleted when the file is transferred.

However, if the file name is out of the range between 1 and 99999999, the leading "0" is not deleted. This also applies to

MTB macros.

In the case of fixed cycles, regardless of the setting of "#8936 Delete leading 0", the name of the file to transfer must be 9

digits, and it must not start from "0". Attempting to transfer a file whose name does not satisfy the conditions above will

cause an error.

In a file comparison, even if "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", when comparing one separate file that contains one

program, "0" at the head of the program name is not deleted. Designating the file name is required.

(Example 1) One file has one program

(1) The files are transferred from the USB memory to the memory.

The files are transferred to the memory as follows.

The leading zero is deleted from the file name.

(2) In order to carry out comparison, change the file name of the transfer destination to "10". (In a comparison of one separate file that has one program, as "0" at the head of the program name is not de- leted, if the file name remains "000010", it will be compared with the file "000010" of the transfer destination.)

When creating a new machining program

Input file name Created file name Remarks 0012345678 12345678 The leading "0"s are deleted

0123456789 0123456789 As this name is out of the rage between 1 and 99999999, the leading "0" is not deleted

0123A 0123A As a nonnumerical character (alphabet) is included, the leading "0" is not deleted

0123.PRG 0123.PRG As a nonnumerical character (extension) is included, the leading "0" is not deleted

When transferring, or comparing files

A device: USB memory B device: Memory

Directory: / Directory: Program

File name: 001000 File name: 000010

A device: USB memory B device: Memory

Directory: / Directory: Program

File name: 001000 File name: 10

Memory

10

(P001000)

:

%

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

119 IB-1501453-D

4.9 The Batch Input/Output the Machining Program of NC Memory

On the I/O screen of the edit (Edit) screen, one file which consists of two or more machining programs can be transferred

to NC memory by dividing the file. The machining programs united with one file can be transferred to the external device.

The targets are the machining programs of the user.

The target external devices are memory card and USB memory.

Example of "the external device -> NC memory" of machining program batch transfer

When the transfer direction file name is designated, the top program name of transfer source can be omitted ("O1000" can

be omitted in above example).

Comment is not added after a program name when a program is output to an external device, however, if there is comment

after a program name when a program is input, the comment is input to the head of the first part system.

Batch input and verify to NC memory

(1) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column A on the I/O screen of the edit screen.

(2) Designate the transfer source device and directory.

(3) Designate the file which consists of two or more ma- chining programs.

(4) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column B.

(5) Designate the transfer direction device (memory).

Edit I/O

PROCESS01 *

O1000(TEST) N1G28X0.Y0.Z0. : N999M02 OTAP.PRG(TAP01) G84W-100.R0.P2000 : M30 : : O9999 G92X0.Y0.Z0. : M30 %

1000

TAP.PRG

: : 9999

(TEST) N1G28X0.Y0.Z0. : N999M02 %

(TAP01) G84W-100.R0.P2000 : M30 %

G92X0.Y0.Z0. : M30 %

External device (USB memory etc.)

NC memory

(Blank line)

Transfer

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

120IB-1501453-D

(1) When programs are input in a batch to NC memory, always specify "Program batch" to NC memory directory as transfer direction. If "Program batch" is not specified, one file is transferred (No batch).

(2) When the program which is subject to edit lock exists in transfer source, the message "Edit lock B" or "Edit lock C" ap- pears, and transfer is interrupted. When the program which is not subject to edit lock is transferred, delete the program which is subject to edit lock in transfer source. (Refer to "4.8.3 Edit Lock B and C".)

(3) When the protection of the machining program is valid, the program cannot be transferred/verified. (Refer to "4.8.5 Data Protection Keys".)

(4) During the automatic operation, the program in program restart cannot be overwritten. The operation message "Execut- ing automatic operation" or "Program restarting" appears, and transfer is interrupted.

(5) The first line of the transfer source file is ignored.

(6) Press the menu [Program all]. When the file name is designated, only the top pro- gram of transfer source is stored in the designated file. For example of "Example of "the external device -> NC memory" of machining program batch trans- fer", when "TESTCUT" is designated as the transfer direction file name, the top program is transferred as not "1000" but "TESTCUT".

(7) Press the menu [Trnsfr A->B].

(8) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. When the same machining program already exists in transfer direction device, the operation message "Overwrite this file?(Y/N)" appears. The transferring the following program is continued by selecting [Y] or [N] key.

File transfer is commenced. Transmitting data is dis- played in input data display column. The operation mes- sage "Transfer complete" appears upon the completion of transmission.

(9) Press the menu [Compare A:B]. The file comparison starts. The verifying data is dis- played. A message appears when the comparison is completed. When the verification error occurs, the error block is displayed in verification data display column and the operation message "Compare error. Compare next file?(Y/N)" appears.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

121 IB-1501453-D

Example of "NC memory -> the external device" of machining program batch transfer

Batch output and verify from NC memory

(1) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column A on the I/O screen of the edit screen.

(2) Designate the transfer source device (memory).

(3) Press the menu [Program all]. Do not specify the file name. If the name is specified, an error will occur.

(4) Use the [] or [|] key to select file setting column B.

(5) Designate the transfer direction device and directory.

(6) Designate the transfer direction file to input multiple machining programs. When the file name is not designated, output to the file "ALL.PRG" of the designated directory.

(7) Press the menu [Trnsfr A->B].

(8) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. When the same machining program already exists in transfer direction device, the operation message "Overwrite this file?(Y/N)" appears. The transferring the following program is continued by selecting [Y] or [N] key.

File transfer is commenced. Transmitting data is dis- played in input data display column. The operation message "Transfer complete" appears upon the completion of transmission.

1000

TAP.PRG

: : 9999

(TEST) N1G28X0.Y0.Z0. : N999M02 %

(TAP01) G84W-100.R0.P2000 : M30 %

G92X0.Y0.Z0. : M30 %

PROCESS01 *

O1000(TEST) N1G28X0.Y0.Z0. : N999M02 OTAP.PRG(TAP01) G84W-100.R0.P2000 : M30 : : O9999 G92X0.Y0.Z0. : M30 %

NC memory External device (USB memory etc.)

(Blank line)

Transfer

C80 Series Instruction Manual 4 Inputting and Outputting a Machining Program

122IB-1501453-D

(1) When programs are output in a batch from NC memory, always specify "Program batch" to NC memory directory as transfer source. If "Program batch" is not specified, the program is transferred by one program per one file.

(2) When the programs which are subject to edit lock exists in NC memory, those file is not transferred. (The files are trans- ferred excluding those files.) The verification is executed excluding the programs which are subject to edit lock. (Refer to "4.8.3 Edit Lock B and C".)

(3) When the protection of the machining program is valid, the program cannot be transferred/verified. (Refer to "4.8.5 Data Protection Keys".)

(4) When the device [Memory2] is selected, the name of batch output file is "ALL2.PRG".

(1) When the machining program batch input/output function of NC memory is used, "()" cannot be used for the machining program name. It is recognized that the inside of "( )" is a comment.

(2) The file name of file which consists of two or more machining program can have up to 32 characters, including the ex- tension as well as the machining program.

(3) When the "Program batch" is designated to NC memory directory, it is not possible to delete, rename and merge files. When the files are deleted in a batch, use "Program" for directory, and a wildcard (*) for file name.

(4) For other precautions, refer to "4.3 Transferring a File".

(9) Press the menu [Compare A:B]. The file comparison starts. The verifying data is dis- played. A message appears when the comparison is completed. When the verification error occurs, the error block is displayed in verification data display column and the operation message "Compare error. Compare next file?(Y/N)" appears.

Precautions

Note

5

123 IB-1501453-D

Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

124IB-1501453-D

5Setting a Tool and a Workpiece This chapter explains the details of tools and workpieces based on respective menus on the setup (Setup) screen.

5.1 Setting a Tool Refer to the instruction manual issued by the MTB for details on the tool setting.

5.2 Registering a Tool (Tool Registration Screen)

A tool No. is assigned to each tool to make the tools installed on the machine recognizable to the NC on the tool registration

(T-reg) screen of the Setup screen. The tool No. is registered corresponding to the magazine pot and spindle where that

tool is installed, and the standby location.

When the tool No. and magazine pot are changed by a tool selection command or tool replacement command, the new tool

No. is displayed.

When not making an arbitrary setting for the number of registered tools, there are maximum 3 magazines, and up to 120

tools can be registered for each magazines. When making an arbitrary setting, there are a maximum of 5 magazines, and

up to 360 tools can be registered for all magazines.

This function differs depending on the specifications of the MTB. Refer to the instruction manual issued by the MTB for

details.

Manual numerical value command can be executed when manual numerical value command window is displayed by input-

ting an address key such as MST, etc.

Setup T-reg

(3) (1)

(2)

(4)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

125 IB-1501453-D

When the tool No. is set to the magazine pot and the spindle/standby, tool registration duplication can be checked. Either

of "Executing the duplication check for all valid magazines", "The duplication check invalid" or "Executing the duplication

check only in the selected magazine" can be selected by the parameter "#8922 T-reg-dup check".

When the value of the parameter "#8922 T-reg-dup check" is out of the range, the check of setting "0" is performed (Exe-

cuting the duplication check for all valid magazines).

Display items

Display items Details (1) Magazine This displays the currently selected magazine No.

(2) Tool No.-D A maximum of 8 digits of data can be input for a tool No. (Refer to the manual issued by the MTB for details on the "D" functions and pur- poses.) When the "Tool No." column is blank, confirm the tool first, since the tool could not be mounted, or the tool could not match the spindle. Setting "0" erases the registered tool.

(3) Spindle/Wait (used by PLC program)

This displays the magazine 1 spindle or standby tool No. (The name of this area differs depending on the output from the PLC program.)

(4) PLC command This command is used to input data and perform sequence processing using the PLC program.

Menus

Menus Details Magazines are displayed sequentially with the selected pot number on the top of them. The cursor moves to the data of the configured pot number, and tool number can be entered.

This sets or erases the tool No. of spindle and standby tools. The cursor will move to the top tool No. of the spindle and standby tools and the setting mode will be entered.

This erases all the currently selected magazine tool data (tool number and D).

Unselected magazine tool data is not erased. The spindle and standby data cannot be erased.

This designates the magazine No. to be displayed on the screen. The displayed menu differs according to the machine specifications. For example, when there are two magazines, only the menus [Magazine 1] and [Magazine 2] display.

:

The cursor moves to the PLC command setting area and the mode changes to the setting mode.

Tool registration duplication check

Operation Setting of the operation parameter "#8922 T-reg-dup check" 0: Executing the duplica-

tion check for all valid magazines

1: The duplication check invalid

2: Executing the duplica- tion check only in the se-

lected magazine Register tool to magazine pot 1. Magazine n (n =1,2)

2. Spindle/standby The duplication check is not executed.

1. Selected magazine 2. Spindle/standby(Refer to "5.2.1 Registering a

Tool in the Magazine Pot".)

Set tool No. to spindle/standby 1. Spindle/standby 2. Magazine n (n =1,2)

The duplication check is not executed.

1. Spindle/standby 2. Selected magazine(Refer to "5.2.3 Setting and

Erasing the Tool No. of Spindle/ Standby Tools".)

Pot No search

Spindle standby

Magazn clear

Magazn 1

Magazn 5

PLC command

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

126IB-1501453-D

5.2.1 Registering a Tool in the Magazine Pot

(1) The No. of magazines differs according to the machine specification.

(1) Move the cursor with key to set the "D" data. Refer to the manual issued by the MTB for details on the "D" functions

and purposes.

(2) The duplication check is executed for only the tool No. The check does not depend on the setting of "D".

(3) If parameter "#8922 T-reg-dup check" is set to "1", the operation message will not appear even when the tool No. du- plicates.

(4) The magazine to be checked varies depending on the setting of the parameter "#8922 T-reg-dup check".

5.2.2 Setting the PLC Command

(1) Select the menu [PLC Command] again before pressing the [INPUT] key, then the menu highlight returns to normal, and the PLC command setting mode becomes disable.

Operation method (Selecting a magazine No.) (1) Press the menu [Magazn 2]. The tool data of the set magazine No. appears.

Operation method (Registering the tool in the magazine pot) (1) Designate the pot No.

[Pot No search] 21 [INPUT]

(2) Input the tool number.

50 [INPUT]

When the [INPUT] key is pressed without setting a

value, the tool number does not change and the cur-

sor moves to the "tool number" for the next pot num-

ber.

When the duplication check is valid, the operation mes- sage "Exists in magazine 1. Set?(Y/N)" or "Exists in spindle/standby. Set?(Y/N)", etc. appears if the input tool No. already exists invalid magazine, spindle/stand- by.

Operation method (Setting the PLC command) (1) Set the value after the menu [PLC command].

[PLC command] 12 [INPUT] The set value displays in the PLC command setting field, and the PLC command setting mode is enabled. The function of the command depends on the MTB specifications.

(2) Press the menu [PLC command], or the key to

complete the setting.

The PLC command setting mode is released, and the menu highlight returns to normal.

Note

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

127 IB-1501453-D

5.2.3 Setting and Erasing the Tool No. of Spindle/Standby Tools

(1) When the menu [Spindle standby] or key is pressed before pressing the [INPUT] key, the spindle/standby setting

mode will be canceled and the set data will be ignored.

(2) Move the cursor with key to set the "D" data.

(1) Move the cursor with key and set "0" to erase the "D" data as the same manner as the tool No.

5.2.4 Erasing the Tool Registration Data

Operation method (Setting the tool No. of spindle/standby tools) (1) Press the menu [Spindle standby].

(2) Move the cursor to the data to be set using the [], [] keys.

(3) Input a new tool No.

50 [INPUT]

(4) Press the menu [Spindle standby] or to complete

the setting.

The spindle/standby setting mode is canceled.

Operation method (Erasing the tool No. of spindle/standby tools) (1) Press the menu [Spindle standby].

(2) Move the cursor to the tool No. to be erased and in- put "0".

0 [INPUT]

Operation method (Selecting a magazine number and erasing the tool registration data.) (1) Press the menu [Magazn 2].

(2) Press the menu [Magazn clear].

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. All selected magazine tool data (tool number and D) is erased. Spindle/standby tool data is not erased.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

128IB-1501453-D

5.3 Measuring a Tool (Tool Measurement Screen)

5.3.1 Tool Measurement (M System)

On the tool registration (T-reg) screen of the setup (Setup) screen, the movement distance from the basic point to the mea-

surement point is measured by moving the tool to the measurement point manually, and this value can be set as the tool

compensation amount.

Manual numerical value command can be executed when manual numerical value command window is displayed by input-

ting an address key such as MST, etc.

There are two types of tool measurement: Tool length measurement I, Tool length measurement II.

Tool length measurement I

When the tool is at the machine coordinate zero point, the distance from the tool tip to the measurement point (workpiece

upper end) is measured, and can be set as tool compensation data.

Setup T-meas

Machine coordinate zero point

Workpiece

Table

Movement

amount

(Tool compensation

data)

Using a reference position return, etc., position the tool at the basic point.

Select the measurement tool.

Turn ON the TLM switch of the machine operation board.

When the measurement is completed, designate the tool compensation No.

Using JOG feed, manual handle feed, etc., move the tool to the measurement point.

Start

Finish

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

129 IB-1501453-D

Tool length measurement II

When the tool is at the machine coordinate zero point, the distance from the machine coordinate zero point to the tool tip

is measured, and can be set as tool compensation data.

(1) The tool measurement type is determined based on TLM reference length (parameter "#2016 tlml+" (TLM standard length)) of measurement axes (tool length measurement axis and tool radius measurement axis) at each measurement mode. When parameter "#2016 tlml+" (TLM standard length) is set to "0", and "Surface hight #0 = 0" is set, the tool measurement type is tool length measurement I.

Screen image

Machine coordinate zero point

Gauge block

Table

Tool compensation

data

(internal computing)

Movement amount

Reference surface height

tl m

l

(o p e ra

ti o n p

a ra

m e te

r) Confirm the value of the operation parameter "tlml".

When using the gauge block, etc., set the value of the reference surface height.

Using a reference position return, etc., position the tool at the basic point.

Turn ON the TLM switch of the machine operation board.

Select the measurement tool.

Start

Finish

When the measurement is completed, designate the tool compensation No.

Using JOG feed, manual handle feed, etc., move the tool to the measurement point.

Note

(4) (2)

(5)

(3)

(1)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

130IB-1501453-D

(*1) The TLM value counter differs according to the parameter "#1328 TLM type" value.

0: The position when the measurement switch was turned ON is displayed as 0. 1: The display is based on the machine zero point.

(1) If the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" is set to "1", the tool compensation amount data can be measured in the au- tomatic operation mode or operation pause mode.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Manual measurement

status display This displays the manual measurement status. Refer to "Manual measurement status display" described later in this section.

(2) Reference surface height

This displays a value for the reference surface height. Setting range: -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

(3) Counter display TLM value: This displays the value during measurement. (*1)

This will be the same as the machine position until the sensor is contacted.

This will be the skip coordinate position after the sensor is contacted.

Measurement value:

For tool length measurement type I: TLM value - Reference surface height

For tool length measurement type II: TLM value - Reference surface height + TLM ref-

erence length

For tool radius measurement, measurement result is displayed in absolute position.

L meas: (Axis name) R meas: (Axis name)

The axis selected in the parameters "#8711 TLM L meas axis" and "#8712 TLM D meas axis" is the target axis for the measurement.

(4) Guide graphic Displays the measurement image. The contents of the guide drawing will differ de- pending on the tool length measurement ( I or II).

Tool length measurement I guide drawing Tool length measurement II guide drawing

(5) Tool compensation data Displays the tool compensation data. The contents of the tool compensation data to be displayed vary depending on the tool compensation type (I, II, or III). When tool compensation type III is selected, the display is the same as for tool com- pensation type II. Cursor movement, data input and part system changing operation are same as tool compensation types I and II.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

131 IB-1501453-D

Menus

Menus Details This writes the value displayed in "Mea value" as the tool compensation amount.

The wear amount is cleared to "0" for the tool compensation type II.

The tool compensation amount cannot be written in when the menu [Offset No.] or [Surface hight] is

highlighted.

When the parameter "#8924 Meas. confirm msg" is "1", this menu is highlighted and the operation message "OK?(Y/N)" appears. The measurement result is written as tool compensation amount by pressing [Y] or [INPUT] key. Even if other key is pressed, the result is not written. When this menu is pressed again while displaying the message, the highlighting is canceled and the operation mes- sage is erased.

When the compensation No. is set and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the tool compensation data with that number at its head appears. The cursor moves to the length dimension data of the top line of that data.

This sets the reference surface height data. (The cursor moves to the reference surface height.) When the data is set in the input area and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the reference surface height is set.

This changes the mode to the tool length measurement mode. This mode is enabled when turning ON the power. (The cursor moves to the length dimension position for tool compensation type II or III.)

This changes the mode to the tool radius measurement mode. (The tool measurement type is valid only for tool length measurement II.) (The cursor moves to the radius dimension position for tool compensation type II or III.)

Carrying out tool length measurement (1) Turn ON the measurement switch.

Refer to "PLC Interface Manual" for details on mea- surement switch signals.

The message "On mea 0" appears.

(2) Press the menu [T-leng measure]. The menu is highlighted, and the tool length measure- ment starts. The measurement values are displayed in "Meas value" during the measurement. The menu [T-leng measure] is highlighted as a default after the power is turned ON.

(3) Contact the measurement tool against the sensor, using manual feed and manual handle feed. Stop the feed when the tool contacts the sensor.

When the measurement tool contacts the sensor, the skip position displayed in the measurement values counter.

(4) The cursor moves to the compensation No. that sets the measurement results. (Example) [Ofs No search] 12 [INPUT] The cursor display position differs depending on the measurement mode. Tool length measurement mode: Length dimension Tool radius measurement mode: Radius dimension

(5) Press the menu [Offset write]. The measurement values are written as a tool compen- sation amount. The wear amount is cleared to "0" for the tool compen- sation type II.

(6) Turn OFF the measurement switch to finish measur- ing.

Offset write

Ofs No search

Surface hight

T-leng measure

T-rad. measure

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

132IB-1501453-D

(1) The measurement values are not written if the cursor is in a position other than "Length" or "Radius".

(2) The axis returns and stops after contacting the sensor, but be careful not to move the axis after that. If the axis moves after contacting the sensor, the distance that was actually moved will be added to the measurement values counter, and the skip position will not be held.

The display will change as shown below during manual measurement.

The operating procedure of the tool radius measurement and submenu details are the same as when measuring tool length.

(Use [T-rad. measure] instead of [T-leng measure].)

Manual measurement status display

Display Meaning On mea 1 This state is entered if a skip signal is input during manual measurement.

The "On mea 2" state is shifted to after deceleration stop is confirmed.

On mea 2 This is the state during the first retract operation. The "On mea 3" state is shifted to after retracting the retract amount.

On mea 3 This is the state in which retract by the retract amount has completed. If the skip after deceleration stop confirmation signal is ON, the status display will remain the same. The "On mea 0" state is shifted to when this state is reset.

On mea 4 This is the state during the second measurement. If the skip signal is not input even after moving to the specified position, a warning will appear, and the status display will remain the same. The "On mea 0" state is shifted to when this state is reset.

On mea 5 This state is entered when the skip signal is input during the second measurement. The "On mea 6" state is shifted to after deceleration stop is confirmed.

On mea 6 This is the state during the second return operation. The "On mea 0" state is shifted to after retracting the retract amount.

On mea 0 This state is entered when not in the "On mea 1" to "On mea 6" states.

Carrying out tool radius measurement

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

133 IB-1501453-D

5.3.2 Tool Measurement (L System)

Manual tool length measurement I or II can be performed on the tool registration (T-reg) screen of the setup (Setup) screen.

Either one is selected depending on the setting of measurement switch and operation mode.

Manual numerical value command can be executed when manual numerical value command window is displayed by input-

ting an address key such as MST, etc.

There are two types of key operation for Manual tool length measurement I: normal operation mode and simple operation

mode, which can be selected by the parameter "#8957 T meas (L)-Simple".

Manual tool length measurement I (when measurement switch is ON)

This is the function to calculate the tool length compensation amount automatically by moving the tool to the measurement

point with manual feed.

Move the tool to the face or side, and calculate the tool compensation amount from the measurement position (machine

position) and program zero point offset (L).

The tool length is automatically calculated by the following formula:

Tool length = Measurement position - Program zero point offset (L)

(1) For the program zero point offset (L), set the diameter value for a diameter axis (#1019 dia = 1) or the radius value for a radius axis (#1019 dia = 0).

#8957 Manual tool length measurement I operation mode 0 Normal operation mode

1 Simple operation mode

Machine zero point Machine zero point

X-axis measurement value

Program zero point offset

Program zero point Program zero point Z-axis measurement value (= Tool length Z)

Workpiece Workpiece

Tool length X

Jog or handle feed Jog or handle feed

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

134IB-1501453-D

Manual tool length measurement II

being ON>

By using a device having a touch probe, the tool compensation amount can be calculated just by contacting the tool nose

against the touch probe with manual feed.

Set the measurement basic position (sensor position) with the parameter "#2015 tlml-" and "#2016 tlml+" when using the

main spindle side, "#2097 tlml-" and "#2098 tlml+" when using the sub spindle side.

[Setting the measurement basic position]

When measured at the main spindle side:

Xm: - sensor machine coordinate position X axis (position measured by moving in - direction) -> #2015 tlml- X axis

Zm: - sensor machine coordinate position Z axis (position measured by moving in - direction) -> #2015 tlml- Z axis

Xp: + sensor machine coordinate position X axis (position measured by moving in + direction) -> #2016 tlml+ X axis

Zp: + sensor machine coordinate position Z axis (position measured by moving in + direction) -> #2016 tlml+ Z axis

When measured at the sub spindle side:

Xm: - sensor machine coordinate position X axis (position measured by moving in - direction) -> #2097 tlml2- X axis

Zm: - sensor machine coordinate position Z axis (position measured by moving in - direction) -> #2097 tlml2- Z axis

Xp: + sensor machine coordinate position X axis (position measured by moving in + direction) -> #2098 tlml2+ X axis

Zp: + sensor machine coordinate position Z axis (position measured by moving in + direction) -> #2098 tlml2+ Z axis

Tool compensation amount = Machine coordinate position (machine coordinate position at the time of skip input) - Mea-

surement basic position (sensor position)

The expression above is used for automatic calculation in Manual tool length measurement II.

When the tool touches the touch probe while measurement switch is ON, the calculation result is set in the tool data of the

compensation No. specified with "Tool No. (Tool length measurement 2)" (PLC device), and the wear data of the compen-

sation No. set in "Wear compensation No. (Tool presetter)" (PLC device) is cleared.

X axis

Z axis

Zm Xp

Xm

Zp X axis

Z axis

Z axis tool compensation amount

Program basic position

X axis tool compensation amount

Z axis - contact surface

X axis + contact surface

X axis contact surface

Z axis + contact surface

Z-axis tool length

X-axis tool length

Tool nose

Tool length

basic point

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

135 IB-1501453-D

(1) The compensation No. cannot be selected by using [], [] or page changeover keys while the measurement switch is being ON. Operations such as selecting an axis, and moving cursor to the wear data or the tool length data, are available by using said keys.

When measuring the tool length of the basic axis and inclined axis during the inclined axis control, the measurement basic

position (sensor position) is set on the sensor position within the orthogonal coordinate, not the position within the machine

coordinate.

(Example) When X axis is the basic axis and Y axis is the inclined axis.

X: Actual X axis

Y: Actual Y axis

y: Orthogonal coordinate

: Inclined angle

Note

Only Y axis travels

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

136IB-1501453-D

Screen image

[Manual tool length measurement I]

[Manual tool length measurement II]

(4)

(2)

(3) (5)

(1) (4)

(5)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

137 IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) On mea "On mea" is displayed when the measurement switch is ON.

This is displayed only in "Manual tool length measurement II".

(2) Measure posn When "Manual tool length measurement I" is performed, the measurement result and

measurement axis are displayed.

Measurement result is displayed by pressing the menu [Meas memory] when the

cursor is placed at the axis to be measured.

Measurement Position: Machine position when the menu operation is performed.

Measurement result for the axis selected using either the menu [Measure X] or the

axis address key.

Measurement Position: Machine position when the menu operation or address key

operation is performed.

This is displayed only in "Manual tool length measurement I". The data of maximum 3 axes displays when "Manual tool length measurement I

(Simple operation mode)" is selected. The axis names set in the parameter "#1022 axname2" are displayed.

(3) Prg zero offset (L) Workpiece measurement result is set and displayed.

Setting range: -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm)

Setting is possible by pressing the menu [Zero-ptoffset] or touching the value area of

the "Prg zero offset (L)".

Select the axis to measure using either the menu [Measure X] or the axis address

key. Then the cursor moves to "Prg zero offset (L)", where setting a measured value

is enabled.

The data of maximum 3 axes displays when "Manual tool length measurement I (Simple operation mode)" is selected.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

138IB-1501453-D

(1) The values of "Measure posn" and "Prg zero offset (L)" will be cleared when changing of part systems, screens and measurement modes are carried out.

(2) When the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" (Tool compensation amount setting during automatic operation enabled) is set to "1", the tool compensation amount data can be set even during automatic operation or operation pause.

(4) Guide graphic Displays the measurement image. The contents of the guide drawing will differ de-

pending on which measurement type (Manual tool length measurement I or II) is se-

lected.

Normal operation mode The guide drawing is switched to the axis pointed by the cursor in the tool com- pensation data. Simple operation mode

The guide drawing is switched to the selected axis, when the handle mode is se- lected.

The guide drawing when using the touch probe is displayed.

(5) Tool compensation data Displays the tool compensation data.

Cursor movement, data input and part system changing operation are same as "Tool compensation type III (L system)". Automatically jumps to the compensation No. registered in "Tool No. (Tool length

measurement 2)" (PLC device) during manual tool length measurement II. (Jumps

even when the wear data is being displayed.) Note that the [], [], and

keys are disabled.

Display items Details

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

139 IB-1501453-D

(1) The data displayed on the tool offset screen are not linked with the tool offset data on the tool measurement screen. (If the tool measurement screen is opened with tool wear data shown on the tool offset screen, the wear data will not al- ways appear on the tool measurement screen.)

Menus (Manual tool length measurement I (normal operation mode) and manual tool length measurement II)

Menus Details Depending on the mode, the following value is input as the tool compensation amount at the cursor po-

sition, and the wear amount is cleared to "0".

Manual tool length measurement I

Tool compensation amount = "Measure posn" value - "Prg zero offset (L)" value

The values of "Meas posn" and "Prg zero offset (L)" will be cleared after compensation amount is writ-

ten in "Manual tool length measurement I".

Tool compensation amount cannot be written in the following cases:

- When the menu [Offset No.] and [Zero-ptoffset] are highlighted - When the wear data is being displayed - When the measurement result exceeds the setting range If "Manual tool length measurement II", this is grayed out and non-selectable. When the parameter "#8924 Meas. confirm msg" is "1", this menu is highlighted and the operation

message "OK?(Y/N)" appears. The measurement result is written as tool compensation amount by pressing [Y] or [INPUT] key. Even if other key is pressed, the result is not written. When this menu is pressed again while displaying the message, the highlighting is canceled and the operation mes- sage is erased.

When the compensation No. is set and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the tool compensation data with that

number at its head appears.

If the measurement switch is turned ON, this is grayed out and non-selectable.

This sets the "Prg zero offset (L)" value. If this menu is pressed, the cursor moves to the "Prg zero offset

(L)" value.

Point the cursor to the axis to be set, and set the data in the data setting area. Press the [INPUT] key

to set the "Prg zero offset (L)" value.

If any mode other than "Manual tool length measurement I" is selected, this is grayed out and non- selectable.

Measurement result is calculated from the current machine position and displayed.

If any mode other than "Manual tool length measurement I" is selected, this is grayed out and non- selectable.

Wear data is displayed in tool compensation data.

Tool length data is displayed in tool compensation data. This is the default mode when the power is initially turned ON.

Offset write

Ofs No search

Zero-pt offset

Meas memory

Wear data

Length data

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

140IB-1501453-D

(*1) The axis name to be displayed follows the parameter "#1022 axname2".

(1) The data displayed on the tool offset screen are not linked with the tool offset data on the tool measurement screen. (If the tool measurement screen is opened with tool wear data shown on the tool offset screen, the wear data will not al- ways appear on the tool measurement screen.)

Menus (Manual tool length measurement I (simple operation mode))

Menus Details The following value is written as the tool compensation amount, and the wear is cleared to "0".

Tool compensation amount = "Measure posn" value - "Prg zero offset (L)" value

When the tool offset is written, the "Measure posn" and "Prg zero offset (L)" are cleared. The cursor moves to the tool compensation data.

The offset cannot be written in the following state. The operation message - "Can't write compensation data" is displayed.

(a) When the menu [Offset number] is highlighted

(b) During wear data display

(c) When the measurement axis is not selected

If the tool compensation amount is outside the setting range, the offset writing fails. The operation message "Setting error" is displayed.

When the parameter "#8924 Meas. confirm msg" is set to "1", the menu "Offset write" is highlighted and confirmation message "OK?(Y/N)" is displayed. When you press the [Y] (or [INPUT]) key, the measurement position is written as the tool compensation amount. When you press any other key, the offset is not written. At this time, menu highlighting is canceled and the operation message is erased. If you press the menu [Offset Write] again during operation message display, the reverse display is released and the operation message is also erased.

When the compensation No. is set and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the tool compensation data with that number at its head appears. This operation will not change the column where the cursor is placed. If this operation is carried out with the cursor placed at "Prg zero offset (L)", the cursor will remain dis- played at "Prg zero offset (L)".

Select the axis to measure. The menu is highlighted when it is selected. Multiple axes can be selected. To cancel, press the menu key again or press [Cancel value]. (*1)

Select the axis to measure. The menu is highlighted when it is selected. Multiple axes can be selected. To cancel, press the menu key again or press [Cancel value]. (*1)

Select the axis to measure. The menu is highlighted when it is selected. Multiple axes can be selected. To cancel, press the menu key again or press [Cancel value]. (*1)

Wear data is displayed in tool compensation data.

Tool length data is displayed in tool compensation data. This mode is enabled when turning ON the power.

This cancels displaying the value of the measurement result and "Prg zero offset (L)". The cursor moves from "Prg zero offset (L)" to the tool compensation data. If any mode other than "Manual tool length measurement I" is selected, this menu will be grayed out and non-selectable.

Offset write

Ofs No search

Measure X

Measure Z

Measure C

Wear data

Length data

Cancel value

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

141 IB-1501453-D

Normal operation mode

(Example) Carrying out tool measurement for compensation No.3, X axis

Carrying out tool measurement (Manual tool length measurement I)

(1) Select the tool to be measured with manual numeri- cal value command. (Refer to "8.4 Manual Numerical Value Command" for details.)

(2) Point the cursor to the position (compensation No. 3, X axis) where the measurement result are to be set.

The cursor is displayed at compensation No.3, X axis.

In order to measure a different axis, point the cursor to the axis to be measured and perform the follow- ing operations.

(3) Move the tool to the side surface of the workpiece. (In the case of Z-axis move the tool to the end surface of the workpiece.)

(4) The menu [Meas memory] is pressed without retract- ing the tool.

Save the measurement result. Saved value is displayed

in the measurement area.

(5) Retract the tool and measure the workpiece. And then press the menu [Zero-ptoffset].

The menu [Zero-ptoffset] is highlighted and the cursor moves to the program zero-point offset (L) value.

(6) Measure the workpiece and set the offset value from

the tool position (side surface of the workpiece) to the

program zero-point.

10 [INPUT]

10 is set for the "Prg zero offset (L)" value.

Highlight of the menu [Zero-ptoffset] is canceled and the

cursor moves to the tool compensation data.

Compensation amount is written in diameter value for diameter command, or in radius value for radius command.

(7) Press the menu [Offset write]. "Measurement result - workpiece measurement value" is set to compensation No.3, X axis.

The values of "Measure posn" and "Prg zero off- set (L)" are cleared.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

142IB-1501453-D

Simple operation mode

(Example) Carrying out tool measurement for compensation No. 3, X axis

(1) Select the tool to be measured with manual numeri- cal value command. (Refer to 8.4 Manual Numerical Value Command" for details.)

(2) Move the cursor to the position to input the measure- ment result (compensation No.3).

The cursor is displayed at compensation No.3.

(3) Move the tool to the side surface of the workpiece. (In the case of Z-axis move the tool to the end surface of the workpiece.)

(4) Press the address key of the axis to measure or the menu [Measure X], without retracting the tool.

Save the measurement result. The memorized value is displayed at "Prg zero offset (L)", and the cursor moves to "Work meas". The operation message "Input program Z-point offset" displays.

(5) To measure the other axes at the same time, repeat (3) to (4).

Save the measurement value of the selected axis. Saved value is displayed in the measurement area. The cursor will not move from the top line.

(6) Retract the tool and measure the workpiece.

(7) Measure the workpiece and set the offset value from the tool position (side surface of the workpiece) to the program zero-point. (Example) 10 [INPUT]

The value 10 is set in the top line of "Prg zero offset (L)". If there are two or more axes to measure, the cursor moves down to the next line.

Compensation amount is written in diameter value for diameter command, or in radius value for radius command.

(8) To set the "Prg zero offset (L)" of the other axes, re- peat (7). (Example) 5 [INPUT]

The value "5" is set to the 2nd line of "Work meas".

Compensation amount is written in diameter value for diameter command, or in radius value for radius command.

(9) Press the menu [Offset write]. The result of "Meas val - Prg zero offset (L)" will be set as the compensation amount for X and Z axes of the compensation No.3 (where the cursor is currently posi- tioned).

The values of "Measure posn" and "Prg zero offset (L)" are cleared, and the highlighted menus ([Mea- sure X] - [Measure C]) will return to original status.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

143 IB-1501453-D

(1) When compensation amount is written for an axis that has not completed zero point return, the operation message "TLM axis not returned to ref. position" will appear.

(2) When the parameter "#8924 Meas. confirm msg" is set to "1", the menu "Offset write" is highlighted and confirmation message "OK?(Y/N)" is displayed. When you press the [Y] (or [INPUT]) key, the measurement position is written as the tool compensation amount. When you press any other key, the offset is not written. At this time, menu highlighting is canceled and the operation message is erased.

(3) When the parameter "#1124 ofsfix" is set to "0", the cursor moves to the next offset No. However, when "#1124 ofsfix" is "1", the cursor does not move to the next offset No.

(4) When the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" (Tool compensation amount setting during automatic operation enabled) is set to "1", the tool compensation amount data can be set even during automatic operation or operation pause.

(1) When entering the sensor area, the axis can be moved only in one direction selected from +X, -X, +Z, -Z, (+Y, -Y). If two axes are moved simultaneously, measurement will not be carried out. However the axis movement stops for safety with displaying "TLM axis is illegal".

(2) If the tool nose is contacting the sensor, the axis can be moved only in the direction moving away from the sensor. Whether or not the tool nose is detached from the sensor can be judged by the following conditions.

The sensor signal has been turned OFF for 500 ms or more.

The tool nose is moved 100 m or more after the sensor signal has turned OFF.

The above conditions are set with parameter "#1227 aux11/bit2" (measures against tool setter chattering).

Precautions for manual tool measurement l

Carrying out tool measurement (Manual tool length measurement II) (1) Select the tool to be measured with manual numeri-

cal value command. (Refer to 8.4 Manual Numerical Value Command" for details.)

(2) Set the compensation No. of the compensation data to be set in "Tool No. (Tool length measurement 2)" (PLC device).

(3) Set the compensation No. of the wear data to be cleared in "wear compensation No. (tool presetter)" (PLC device).

(4) Turn ON the measurement switch. "On mea" is displayed. Guide drawing for manual tool length measurement II is displayed. Tool compensation data is displayed, placing the com- pensation No. set in "Tool No. (Tool length measure- ment 2)" (PLC device) at the top.

The row at the cursor position will not be changed.

(5) Move the additional axis in the minus direction by manual feed and have the tool nose contact with the touch probe.

Measurement value is set for the additional axis of the compensation No. set in "Tool No. (Tool length mea- surement2)" (PLC device).

(6) Turn the measurement switch OFF. "On mea" disappears.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

144IB-1501453-D

5.4 Setting Tool Compensation Amount (Tool Offset Screen)

The tool compensation data can be set and displayed tool offset (T-ofs) screen of the setup (Setup) screen.

Depending on the value of the parameter "#1037 cmdtyp", there are three types of tool compensation: M system tool com-

pensation type I (cmdtyp=1), tool compensation type II (cmdtyp=2), and L system tool compensation type III (cmdtyp=3).

The tool radius compensation can be carried out using the diameter value if the parameter "#8117 OFS Diam DESIGN" is

set to ON.

The number of tool compensation sets to be designated or displayed varies depending on the specifications.

Tool compensation data can be set or displayed on the monitor (Monitr) screen.

(1) When the tool compensation amount setting during automatic operation is enabled ("#11017 T-ofs set at run" = "1"), the tool compensation amount data can be set even during automatic operation or operation pause.

Setup T-ofs

Monitr Offset

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

145 IB-1501453-D

[Tool compensation type I] (M System): Parameter "#1037 cmdtyp" = 1

The combined amount of the shape compensation and wear compensation are set as the compensation data, with no

distinction between shape compensation memory and wear compensation memory. (The tool compensation data is the

shape compensation amount + wear compensation amount.)

The compensation data is used commonly for the tool length compensation, tool position offset, tool radius compensa-

tion, and 3-dimensional tool radius compensation.

[Tool compensation type II] (M System): Parameter "#1037 cmdtyp" = 2

The shape compensation amount and wear compensation amount are set separately. The shape compensation amount

is furthermore divided into length and radius dimensions.

Of the compensation data, the length dimension data is used for the tool length compensation and tool position offset,

and the radius dimension data is used for the tool radius compensation and 3-dimensional tool radius compensation

(compensation vector designation).

(1)

(1)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

146IB-1501453-D

[Tool compensation type III] (L System): Parameter "#1037 cmdtyp" = 3

This type has 3 kinds of display such as wear data, tool length data, and nose data. The display can be switched by the

sub menu.

Wear data

Set the wear amount of nose for each tool you use.

When a tool compensation number is designated by the tool command (T command), the wear data is offset together

with the tool length data and nose data.

Tool length data

Set the tool length according to the reference position of program for each tool used.

When a tool compensation number is designated by the tool command (T command), the tool length data is offset

together with the wear data and nose data.

(1)

(1)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

147 IB-1501453-D

Nose data

Set the radius (Nose R), wear radius (R-wear), and point (Point) of the nose that is mounted on the tool for each tool

used.

When a tool compensation number is designated by the tool command (T command), the nose data is offset together

with the tool length data and wear data.

CAUTION If the tool compensation amount or workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during automatic oper- ation (including during single block stop), the changes will be valid from the command in the next block or after sev- eral subsequent blocks.

(1)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

148IB-1501453-D

The display range is when the minimum command unit is 1m ("#1003 iunit"= B, "#1041 Initial inch" = 0).

(*1) Select the additional axis by specifying the parameter (#1281 ext17 bit1/#1520 Tchg34).

(*2) If the number of axes in the part system is 2 or less, the name of non-existing axis is displayed according to the param-

eter setting as follows. Setting the compensation amount to non-existing axis does not mean anything.

If "#1281 (PR) ext17/bit1" (Tool offset additional axis selection) is set to "0":

The axis name is not displayed.

If "#1281 (PR) ext17/bit1" (Tool offset additional axis selection) is set to "1":

If the 2nd axis does not exist, the axis name designated by "#1028 base_K" is displayed. If the additional axis does not exist, the axis name designated by "#1027 base_J" is displayed.

(*3) If parameter "#1019 dia" (Diameter command) is set to "0", set the radius. If it is set to "1", set the diameter.

(*4) The nose point is entered as the absolute value even if you press the menu [+ Input].

Display items

Display items Details (1) Display area Displays the tool compensation data. The cursor is displayed, and you can set the data.

The data exceeding the display area can be displayed by the following keys.

: Scroll one line at a time.

: Switches the display contents for each number of compensation data sets.

Compensation number: This is a compensation data number.

The other display items change depending on the tool compensation type. Refer to the following table for details.

Type Setting item Details Setting/display range I Compensation

data Sets the tool length compensation amount. (*5) -9999.999 to 9999.999

II Length Sets the tool length compensation amount. (*5) Length dimension/Radius di- mension -9999.999 to 9999.999 Length wear/Radius wear -9999.999 to 9999.999

L wear Set the compensation amount of tool length wear. (*5)

Radius Sets the tool radius compensation amount. (*5)

R wear Set the tool radius wear compensation amount. (*5)

III Wear data Sets the nose wear compensation of 1st axis, 2nd axis, and additional axes. (*1)(*2)(*5)

-9999.999 to 9999.999

Tool length data Sets the tool length data compensation amount of 1st ax- is, 2nd axis and additional axes. (*1)(*2)

-9999.999 to 9999.999

Nose R (*3)(*6) Sets the tool radius (Nose R). -9999.999 to 9999.999

R wear (*3)(*6) Sets the tool radius (Nose R) wear. -9999.999 to 9999.999

Point (*4) Sets the nose point (number). 0 to 9

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

149 IB-1501453-D

(*5) It may differ from the above display/setting range depending on the parameter setting of "#8010 ABS. MAX." or "#8011

INC. MAZ.".

(*6) It may differ from the above display/setting range depending on the parameter setting of "#8010 ABS. MAX..

The setting/display ranges are as follows based on the combination of "#1003 iunit" (Input unit) and "#1041 Initial inch".

When data without the decimal point is input, a set unit can be specified by the parameter "#8119 Comp. unit switch".

The standard settings and display ranges are as follows.

(*1) It is displayed when the parameter "#8117 OFS Diam DESIGN" is "1".

(*2) It is displayed at the left of axis name when the parameter "#1019 dia (Diameter command) is set to "1".

#1003 iunit #1041 I_inch

Setting/display range Type II (Length wear/Radius wear) Type I Type III (Wear data/Radius wear) Type II (Length dimension/Radius

dimension) Type III (Tool length data/Nose R)

B 0 -999.999 to 999.999

-9999.999 to 9999.999

1 -99.9999 to 99.9999

-999.9999 to 999.9999

C 0 -999.9999 to 999.9999

-9999.9999 to 9999.9999

1 -99.99999 to 99.99999

-999.99999 to 999.99999

D 0 -999.99999 to 999.99999

-9999.99999 to 9999.99999

1 -99.999999 to 99.999999

-999.999999 to 999.999999

E 0 -999.999999 to 999.999999

-9999.999999 to 9999.999999

1 -99.9999999 to 99.9999999

-999.9999999 to 999.9999999

Type Display position I Top of display area (*1)

II Left side of radius (*1)

Left side of radius wear (*1)

III Left side of axis name (*2)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

150IB-1501453-D

With type III, wear data is displayed when the power is turned ON.

After turning the power ON, the display selection for wear data, length data, and nose data will be retained.

Menus

Menus Details This executes an absolute input. When "#8929 Disable=INPUT:comp" is set to "1", this menu cannot be selected.

This executes an incremental input.

This switches to the wear data display.

This menu is displayed for type III only.

This switches to the tool length data display.

This menu is displayed for type III only.

This switches to the nose data display.

This menu is displayed for type III only.

When the compensation No. is set and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the tool compensation data with that number at its head appears. The cursor moves to the contents of that first line.

Measure the tool compensation amount.

This menu is displayed only for type III, and is valid for "L system" and "tool length data display".

This undoes the last changes to the tool compensation data. (This menu is valid for the "Data Input", "Paste Line" and "Undo" operations.)

When an operation parameter "#8939 Undo confirm msg" is set to "1", the menu is highlighted while the operation message is displayed.

This copies the contents of the tool compensation data in the selected line (one line).

The contents (one line) of the copied tool compensation data are written to the line where the cursor is. If the copied data is changed after the menu [Line copy] is pressed, the data before changing is written when pasted. The data in the copied line can be pasted as many times as is required until new data is copied.

This erases the compensation data in the selected line (multiple lines can be erased). Selection method: Select the first and the last compensation number to be erased. (Example) 1/E: Set all compensation data to "0". If the [INPUT] key is pressed without selecting a line, the compensation data in the line where the cursor is currently positioned is erased.

Switch the setting method (absolute/incremental input) for the tool compensation data by [INPUT] key.

When a parameter "#8941 ABS/INC for T-ofs" is set to "0", it is fixed to an absolute input.

=Input

+Input

Wear data

Length data

Nose data

Ofs No search

Measure

Undo

Line copy

Line paste

Line clear

Abs/Inc

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

151 IB-1501453-D

5.4.1 Setting the Tool Compensation Data

(1) If the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" is set to "1", the tool compensation amount data during automatic operation or during pause of operation can be set.

(2) When the parameter "#8929 Disable=INPUT:comp" is set to "1", the menu [=Input] will be grayed.

(3) This setting may be disabled due to the parameter "#8933 Disable lngth comp" or "8934 Disable wear comp" setting. For details, refer to "5.4.6 Disabling the Setting of Tool Compensation Amount".

(4) The above shows the setting of the tool compensation data when the parameter "#8941 ABS/INC for T-ofs" is set to "0". For details, refer to "5.4.2 Switching the Input Method for the Tool Compensation Data".

(5) Any of the menu [=Input], [+Input] or [INPUT] key is pressed when the parameter "#1124 ofsfix" is set to "0", the cursor will move to the next compensation No.

Operation method (Setting "10.000" in the length wear data of compensation No. (102)) (1) Press the menu [Ofs No search].

(2) Designate the compensation No.

102 [INPUT]

The cursor can be moved to 102 using the [], [],

, or keys.

(3) Use the [] key to move the cursor to the length wear position.

(4) Input the length wear value. 10 [INPUT] The value can also be designated by pressing the menu [=Input] instead of the [INPUT] key.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

152IB-1501453-D

(1) If the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" is set to "1", the tool compensation amount data during automatic operation or during pause of operation can be set.

(2) This setting may be disabled due to the parameter "#8933 Disable lngth comp" or "8934 Disable wear comp" setting. For details, refer to "5.4.6 Disabling the Setting of Tool Compensation Amount".

(3) Any of the menu [=Input], [+Input] or [INPUT] key is pressed when the parameter "#1124 ofsfix" is set to "0", the cursor will move to the next compensation No.

(4) When entering data without decimal points, you can select the 1-mm (or 1-inch) data input or the input in the minimum input unit (same as "#1003 iunit") by designating the "#8119 Comp. unit switch" parameter.

Operation method ("0.012" is calculated and set in the length wear data of compensation No. 102) (1) Use the same procedure as in the previous page to

move the cursor to the compensation No. 102 length wear position.

(2) Input a numeric value. The input value added to the original value is displayed.

0.012 [+Input] (Example) When the original value is 10.000, the calcu- lation formula is as follows:

10.000 + 0.012 = 10.012

<1-mm unit: "#8119 Comp. unit switch" is "0".>

Input Result

1 100 10. .012

1.000 100.000

10.000 0.012

Input Result

1 100 10. .012

0.001 0.100

10.000 0.012

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

153 IB-1501453-D

5.4.2 Switching the Input Method for the Tool Compensation Data

When a parameter "#8941 ABS/INC for T-ofs" is set to "1", the absolute/incremental input by the [INPUT] key can be

switched. When attempting to switch it, the current input mode is displayed on the upper left of the tool compensation

amount. The absolute/incremental input can be switched either by the short cut key ([I] key) or by pressing the menu [Abs/

Inc]. The chosen method is kept after switching the screen and turning the power OFF.

(1) Absolute input mode

In this mode, the absolute input is applied when the tool compensation data is input by the [INPUT] key.

(2) Incremental input mode

In this mode, the incremental input is applied when the tool compensation data is input by the [INPUT] key.

Displaying that this is the absolute input mode.

Displaying that this is the incremental input mode.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

154IB-1501453-D

5.4.3 Erasing the Tool Compensation Data

(1) If the [INPUT] key is pressed without selecting an compensation number, the line where the cursor is located is erased.

(2) If the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" is set to "1", the tool compensation amount data during automatic operation or during pause of operation can be erased.

(3) This setting may be disabled due to the parameter "#8933 Disable lngth comp" or "8934 Disable wear comp" setting. For details, refer to "5.4.6 Disabling the Setting of Tool Compensation Amount".

Operation method (Erasing one line of tool compensation data at the cursor position) (1) Move the cursor to the data to be erased using the

[], [], , or key.

(2) Press the menu [Line clear] and the [INPUT] key.

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. To cancel the erasing, press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT].

The selected line of data (one line amount) is cleared to "0". The cleared data is displayed at the top of the compen- sation data.

Operation method (Erasing the compensation data from compensation number 122 to 125.) (1) Press the menu [Line clear].

(2) Input the compensation number of the data range to be erased.

122/125 [INPUT]

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. To cancel the erasing, press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT].

The compensation data for the selected compensation number is erased, and the menu highlight returns to nor- mal. The cleared data is displayed at the top of the compen- sation data.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

155 IB-1501453-D

5.4.4 Copying and Pasting the Tool Compensation Data

(1) If the compensation data for the copied line is changed after the menu [Line copy] is pressed, the data prior to the change is written when pasted.

(2) In tool compensation type lll, the copied data cannot be pasted to the different item (Wear/Length/Nose).

(3) If the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" is set to "1", the tool compensation amount data during automatic operation or during pause of operation can be erased.

(4) This setting may be disabled due to the parameter "#8933 Disable lngth comp" or "8934 Disable wear comp" setting. For details, refer to "5.4.6 Disabling the Setting of Tool Compensation Amount".

5.4.5 Undoing Change of Tool Compensation Data

(1) This setting will be disabled due to the parameter "#8933 Disable lngth comp" or "#8934 Disable wear comp" setting. For details, refer to "5.4.6 Disabling the Setting of Tool Compensation Amount".

(2) When "#8939 Undo confirm msg" is set to "1", the menu [Undo] is highlighted and confirmation message "OK?(Y/N)" is displayed. The program returns to the previous status by pressing [Y] or [INPUT] key. If any key other than [Y] or [IN- PUT] is pressed, the operation to undo will be canceled. When the operation is canceled, the menu highlight returns to normal and the message disappears.

(3) When the program does not return to the previous status by pressing [Undo], [Undo] is not highlighted and the operation message "Data protect" or "Cannot return to origin" appears.

(4) The menu [Undo] cannot be used to clear multiple lines.

Operation method (Copying/pasting one line of tool compensation data) (1) Move the cursor to the data to be copied using the [],

[], or key.

(2) Press the menu [Line copy].

(3) Move the cursor to the line (compensation No.: 109) where the data is to be pasted.

(4) Press the menu [Line paste]. The copied compensation data is written in the line where the cursor is. The background color returns to normal. The copied compensation data is held until another line is copied.

(1) Move the cursor to the data to be set using the [], [],

, or key.

(2) Input a numeric value.

(Example) 10 [INPUT]

(3) Press the menu [Undo]. The value is returned to the previous value.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

156IB-1501453-D

5.4.6 Disabling the Setting of Tool Compensation Amount

Depending on the setting of the parameter "#8933 Disable lngth comp"/"#8934 Disable wear comp", the setting of the shape

compensation amount/wear compensation amount is disabled.

Depending on the tool compensation type, different operation will be disabled.

Tool compensation type "#8933 Disable lngth comp" = "1" "#8934 Disable wear comp" = "1" Type I ---- The menus [=Input], [+Input], [Line copy],

[Line paste], [Line clear], and [Undo] are grayed out and cannot be selected. Any setting by [INPUT] key is disabled.

----

Type II ---- The menus [Line copy], [Line paste], and [Line clear] are grayed out and cannot be selected. The length and radius setting by [=Input], [+Input], and [INPUT] keys are disabled.

The menus [Line copy], [Line paste], and [Line clear] are grayed out and cannot be selected. The length wear and radius wear setting by [=Input], [+Input], and [INPUT] keys are disabled.

Type III "Wear" ---- The menus [=Input], [+Input], [Line copy], [Line paste], [Line clear], and [Undo] are grayed out and cannot be selected. Any setting by [INPUT] key is disabled.

"Length" The menus [=Input], [+Input], [Measure], [Line copy], [Line paste], [Line clear], and [Undo] are grayed out and cannot be se- lected. Any setting by [INPUT] key is disabled.

----

"Nose" The menus [Line copy], [Line paste], and [Line clear] are grayed out and cannot be selected. The nose R setting by [=Input], [+Input], and [INPUT] keys are disabled.

The menus [Line copy], [Line paste], and [Line clear] are grayed out and cannot be selected. The R wear setting by [=Input], [+Input], and [INPUT] keys are disabled.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

157 IB-1501453-D

5.4.7 Measuring Tool Compensation Amount

Operation method (Measuring the tool compensation amount of Z axis and X axis (diameter axis))

(1) Select the tool to be measured with manual numeri- cal value command. (Refer to 8.4 Manual Numerical Value Command" for details.)

(Example) T1003

(2) Displays the tool compensation amount screen.

Menu [Offset]

The tool compensation amount screen is displayed. The tool compensation number of the selected tool is displayed at the top, and the cursor is located on the first line.

If the parameter "#8972 T code offset disp" is set to "0", the tool compensation number of selected tool is not displayed at the top. Locate the cursor onto the tool compensation number of the tool to be mea- sured.

(3) Press the menu [Length data].

(4) Select the "Manual handle feed" mode or "Jog feed" mode.

(5) Select the Z axis, and manually move the tool to the work end face (program origin).

(6) Enter the name of axis to be measured, and the mea- surement value (radius) of workpiece.

Z0.

When you enter "Z", the cursor is moved to the Z axis col- umn.

If you input an axis name that does not exist, the cur- sor does not move. The second and subsequent characters are not con-

sidered to be the axis name and, therefore, the cur- sor does not move. (Example: If you enter "XZ", the cursor moves on the X axis, but the cursor does not move on the Z axis.) Also, if anything other than tool length data is dis- played, the cursor does not move even when the first input value is the axis name.

Value "Z0." is displayed in the input column.

(7) Press the menu [Measure]. The measured value (Z axis machine position - Input val- ue (0)) is set in the tool length data at the cursor position. The input column is cleared.

Machine zero point

Program zero point Z-axis measurement value (= Tool length Z)

Workpiece

Jog or handle feed

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

158IB-1501453-D

(1) If the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" is set to "1", the tool compensation amount data during automatic operation or during pause of operation can be measured.

(2) This setting may be disabled due to the parameter "#8933 Disable lngth comp" or "8934 Disable wear comp" setting. For details, refer to "5.4.6 Disabling the Setting of Tool Compensation Amount".

(3) When entering data without decimal points, you can select the 1-mm (or 1-inch) data input or the input in the minimum input unit (same as "#1003 iunit") by designating the "#8119 Comp. unit switch" parameter.

(8) Select the X axis, and manually move the tool to the work side face.

(9) Enter the name of axis to be measured, and the mea- surement value (diameter) of workpiece.

X20.

When you enter "X", the cursor is moved to the X-axis column.

If you input an axis name that does not exist, the cur- sor does not move. The second and subsequent characters are not con-

sidered to be the axis name and, therefore, the cur- sor does not move. (Example: If you enter "XZ", the cursor moves on the X axis, but the cursor does not move on the Z axis.) Also, if anything other than tool length data is dis- played, the cursor does not move even when the first input value is the axis name.

Value "X20." is displayed in the input column.

(10) Press the menu [Measure]. The measured value (X-axis machine position - Input value (20)) is set in the tool length data at the cursor po- sition. The input column is cleared.

<1-mm unit: "#8119 Comp. unit switch" is "0".>

Input Result

1 100 10. .012

1.000 100.000

10.000 0.012

Input Result

1 100 10. .012

0.001 0.100

10.000 0.012

Machine zero point

X-axis measurement value

Workpiece measurement

Program zero point

Workpiece

Tool length X

Jog or handle feed

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

159 IB-1501453-D

5.4.8 Moving to designated Compensation Number

There are two methods to switch from the designated compensation number display. You can switch the operation by using

the "#8975 Change No. search" parameter.

(Example 1) Select compensation number 16. (If "#8975 Change No. search" is "0")

(Example 2) Select compensation number 16. (If "#8975 Change No. search" is "1")

(1) If an compensation number exceeding the limit is designated, the operation message "Setting error" is displayed.

(1) Displays the tool compensation amount screen.

(2) Press the menu [Ofs No search].

(3) Enter the compensation number you wish to display, and press [INPUT]. 16 [INPUT]

The compensation number that you have set is dis- played at the top, and the cursor is located on the first data. The highlighting of the menu [Ofs No. search] is canceled.

(1) Displays the tool compensation amount screen.

(2) Enter the compensation number you wish to display. 16

(3) Press the menu [Ofs No search]. The compensation number that you have set is dis- played at the top, and the cursor is located on the first data.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

160IB-1501453-D

5.5 Setting the Tool Management Data (Tool Management Screen)

Tool management data can be set and displayed on the tool management (T-Mng.) screen. These data are relevant to

which displayed on the [T-ofs] or [T-life] screen, that can be set the tool information. Thus the mutually-referenced data can

be set and displayed on this screen.

List view

Detailed display

Setup T-Mng.

(1)

(2)

(4)

(1)

(2)

(5)

(3)

(6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

161 IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) Tool management data

list portion The preset tool management data is listed. The tool management data list consists of the right side and left side parts. When you select the [Tool Manage Data - Detail View] and switch to the [Detail View], the right part of the tool management data list is switched to the detail view of tool man- agement data.

(2) Data No. Indicates the number of the tool management data.

(3) Display data type It indicates the item type that is displayed in the detail view of tool management data.

The display data type can be "Full view", "Basic info", "Shape info", "Cut cond.", "Off-

set", "T-life", or "Added info".

"Full view" is displayed after the power is turned ON, the view is switched by pressing

the menu [Type switch].

(4) Tool shape drawing It displays the tool shape of the tool management data at cursor position according to the tool type. The display and hiding are switched according to the display data type.

(5) Tool management data detailed portion

Displays or sets the tool data that has been selected from the tool management data list. The display items are changed depending on the tool type and the display data type.

(6) Input section This displays the input data.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

162IB-1501453-D

5.5.1 List of Display Items

(*1) In case of mill tools, lathing drill and lathing tap, "rotation" is applied, while in case of lathe turning, groove and thread

cut, "tool hand" is applied.

(*2) The display/setting contents differ depending on the tool types. Refer to "List of display items for shape info" in this

section for details of setting items.

(*3) The display/setting format and setting rage of display item names, number of items and setting values depend on MTB

specifications.

(*4) When the parameter "#1445 Tol-Custom-nondisp" is set to "1", "Added info" is not displayed.

(*5) The display/setting contents differ depending on the tool compensation type and tool life management type. Refer to

"List of display items for life data" in this section for details of setting items.

(*6) The display contents differ depending on the tool compensation type and parameter "#8969 Tool offset type 1" and

"#8970 Tool offset type 2". Refer to "List of display items for compensation data (List view)" in this section for details of

setting items.

(*7) The display/setting contents differ depending on the tool compensation type. Refer to "List of display items for compen-

sation data (Disp details)" in this section for details of setting items.

(*8) The item displays between "Material" and "Coolant M code".

: Display/setting enabled : Display only -: Non-display

Display data

Tool manage- ment data list

portion Tool management data detailed portion

Left side

Right side

Full view

Basic info

Shape info

Cut cond. Offset T-life Added

info Tool shape drawing - - - - - -

Tool man- agement data

Basic info Tool No. -

Tool name - - - - - - -

Tool type -

Use - - - - - -

Dir: Hand/ Rev (*1)

- - - - - -

Nomin - - - - - -

Num. of teeth - - - (*8) - - -

Tool ID - - - - - - -

Supp - - - - - - -

Stat - - - - - - -

Setting Angle - - - - - - -

Shape info (*2) - - - - - - -

Cut cond. Spindle rpm S

- - - - - - -

Feedrate F - - - - - - -

Material - - - - - - -

Coolant M code

- - - - - - -

Added info

Custom 1 to 12 (*3)

- - (*4) - - - - - (*4)

Life (*5) - - - - - - - -

Compensation - (*6) - - - - (*7) - -

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

163 IB-1501453-D

The display contents of shape info differ depending on the selected tools.

[Mill tools]

[Turning tools]

List of display items for shape info

: Display/setting enabled -: Not used

Item Tool type

Not set Ball end mill

Flat end mill Drill Radius end

mill Chamfer Tap Face mill

:A Length

:B Diameter

:C - - - Nose angle Corner R Tip angle Pitch Cutter L

:D - - - - - Tip dia. Root dia. Shank dia.

:E - - - - - - - -

:F - - - - - - - -

:G Holder H

:H Holder D

3D CHK Tool CR

3D CHK Tool CR

: Display/setting enabled -: Not used

Item Tool type

Lathe turning Groove Thread cut Lathing drill Lathing tap :A Tool length A

:B Tool length B

:C Nose R Nose R - Nose angle Pitch

:D Nose angle Nose width - - Root dia.

:E Cutting edge angle

Maximum groove depth

- - -

:F Tool width Tool width Tool width - -

:G Holder H

:H Holder D

3D CHK Tool CR

3D CHK Tool CR

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

164IB-1501453-D

(*1) Setting values and units are displayed.

(*2) Status is displayed under "Used".

The parameter "#8969 Tool offset type 1" enables to switch the display items for 1st and 2nd column and the parameter

"#8970 Tool offset type 2" enables to switch the display items for 3rd and 4th column on the right side of the list view.

[Tool compensation type I]

Tool compensation No. displays in the 1st column, tool compensation amount displays in the 2nd column and 3rd and 4th

column are set to blank, irrespective of the value set by the parameter.

#8969 Tool offset type 1

[Tool compensation type II]

#8969 Tool offset type 1

List of display items of life data : Display/setting enabled : Display only -: Non-display

Display data (Life data) M system L system

Tool life manage- ment I/ll

Tool life man- agement III

Tool life man- agement I

Tool life man- agement II

Life Group No. - -

Status - (*2)

Mthd -

H No. - -

L compen - -

D No. - -

R compen - -

Auxil. - -

Ofset No - - -

Life (*1) -

Used (*1) -

Usage time (*1) - - -

Life time (*1) - - -

Usage count (*1) - - -

T life count (*1) - - -

Status A - - -

Status B - - -

List of display items for compensation data (List view)

Setting value 1st column (type) 2nd column (compensation amount) 0 to 9 H tool compensation No. Length compensation

#8970 Tool offset type 2 : Blank

Setting value 3rd column 4th column 0 to 9 - -

Setting value 1st column (type) 2nd column (compensation amount) 0, 5 to 9 H tool compensation No. Length compensation

1 H tool compensation No. Length compensation

2 D tool compensation No. Radius compensation

3 +H tool compensation No. Length wear

4 +D tool compensation No. Radius wear

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

165 IB-1501453-D

#8970 Tool offset type 2

[Tool compensation type III]

#8969 Tool offset type 1

#8970 Tool offset type 2

(*1) Names set in "#1013 axname" corresponding to the axis are displayed in "*** axis name".

(1) For the compensation amount, when "#1041 I_Inch" is se to "0" (metric system), the fraction part is fixed in 3 digits and when it is set to "1" (inch system), the fraction part is fixed in 4 digits, and the values after those digits are cut off.

Setting value 3rd column (type) 4th column (compensation amount) 0, 5 to 9 D tool compensation No. R compen

1 H tool compensation No. L compen

2 D tool compensation No. R compen

3 +H tool compensation No. L wear

4 +D tool compensation No. R wear

Setting value 1st column (type) (*1) 2nd column (compensation amount) 0 "1st axis name" tool compensation No. 1st axis tool length

1 "1st axis name" tool compensation No. 1st axis tool length

2 "2nd axis name" tool compensation No. 2nd axis tool length

3 "Additional axis name" tool compensation No. Additional axis tool length

4 "+ 1st axis name" tool compensation No. 1st axis wear

5 + 2nd axis name" tool compensation No. 2nd axis wear

6 "+ Additional axis name" tool compensation No.

Additional axis wear

7 R Nose R

8 +R R wear

9 P Point

Setting value 3rd column (type) (*1) 4th column (compensation amount) 0 "2nd axis name" tool compensation No. 2nd axis tool length

1 "1st axis name" tool compensation No. 1st axis tool length

2 "2nd axis name" tool compensation No. 2nd axis tool length

3 "Additional axis name" tool compensation No. Additional axis tool length

4 "+ 1st axis name" tool compensation No. 1st axis wear

5 + 2nd axis name" tool compensation No. 2nd axis wear

6 "+ Additional axis name" tool compensation No.

Additional axis wear

7 R Nose R

8 +R R wear

9 P Point

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

166IB-1501453-D

(*1) Names set by the parameter "#1022 axname2" corresponding to the axis are displayed in "*** axis name".

(*2) If the number of axes in the part system is 2 or less, the name of non-existing axis is displayed according to the setting

of the parameter"#1281 ext17/bit1" (Selection of additional tool offset axis) as follows.

(*3) When the parameter "#8117 OFS Diam DESIGN" is set to "1", the symbol "" is displayed on the right side of the item

name.

(*4) When "#1019 dia" (Diameter specification axis) is set to "1" for the axis, the symbol "" is displayed on the right side

of the item name.

List of display items for compensation data (Disp details) : Display/setting enabled -: Non-display

Display data (Compensation data) Tool compen- sation type I

Tool compen- sation type II

Tool compensa- tion type III

Compensa- tion

H No. -

D No. - -

Length -

L wear - -

Radius (*3) - -

R wear (*3) - -

Tool L offset num - -

Wear offset # - -

Tool length "1st axis name" (*1)(*2)(*4) - -

Tool length "2nd axis name" (*1)(*2)(*4) - -

Tool length "Additional axis name" (*1)(*2)(*4) - -

Wear "1st axis name" (*1)(*2)(*4) - -

Wear "2nd axis name" (*1)(*2)(*4) - -

Wear "Additional axis name" (*1)(*2)(*4) - -

Nose R (*3) - -

R wear (*3) - -

Point - -

0: The axis name is not displayed.

1: The axis name designated by "#1028 base_K" is displayed in the 2nd axis, and the axis name designated by "#1027 base_J" is displayed in the additional axis.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

167 IB-1501453-D

5.5.2 Data Setting Range

The value of each item is maintained even after the power is turned OFF and ON.

Setting item Details Setting range Tool No. Sets the tool No.

A maximum of 8 digits of data can be input. 1 to 99999999

Name Sets the tool name. A maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be set for the name. (*1)

A maximum of 8 characters

Type Sets the tool type. The tool type will be "Drill" when no value is input.

1: Ball end mill 2: Flat end mill 3: Drill 4: Radius end mill 5: Chamfer 6: Tap 7: Face mill 51: Lathe turning 52: Groove 53: Thread cut 54: Lathing drill 55: Lathing tap

Use Sets the usage of the tool. 0: None 1: Outer diameter 2: Inner diameter 3: End face

Dir: Hand/Rev This sets the tool hand and spindle rotation direction. The items to be set vary depending on the tool type. Mill tools, lathing drill and lathing tap Lathe turning, groove, thread cut

0: CW

1: CCW

0: Right/Front (R/F)

1: Left/Front (L/F)

2: Right/Back (R/B)

3: Left/Back (L/B)

The codes in parentheses are displayed in "Tool Manage Data" section.

For turning tool or grooving tool, the tool direction will change depending on the tool hand setting.

Right hand/Back Left hand/Back

Right hand/Front Left hand/Front

Workpiece back

Workpiece front

Nomin Sets the nominal of the tools. When milling tools are selected in types, "nominal diame- ter" can be set and when turning tools are selected, "nom- inal" can be set.

Setting range varies depending on

the parameter "#1041 Initial inch".

mm: 0.0 to 999.9

inch: 0.00 to 99.99

Num. of teeth Sets the number of teeth of the tools with 1 digit. When lathe turning, groove and thread cut tools are select- ed, it is grayed out and cannot be set.

0 to 9

Tool ID Sets the information arbitrarily to identify the tools such as tool model No. described in a catalog. A maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be set for the ID. (*1)

A maximum of 8 characters

Supp Sets the supplementary information of the tools. The display/setting values depend on MTB specifications.

0x0000 to 0xFFFF

Stat Displays the status of the tools. It cannot be set and only reference is available. The displayed values depend on MTB specifications.

-

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

168IB-1501453-D

Setting Angle Sets the tool installation angle. Specifies the angle, assuming the direction perpendicular to Z axis as 0 degrees with CW as positive (+).

0 to 359.999 degrees

Setting angle = 90 Setting angle = 180

Setting angle = 270

When there is a tool rotary axis, set the angle assuming that the angle of the axis is 0 degrees.

If the directions of the tool nose and shank are different such as internal diameter machining tool, set the tool nose angle for "Setting Angle".

Tool nose direction (180)

Set 180 for "Set- ting Angle".

Shank direction (90)

Setting item Details Setting range

X

Z 0 Degree

+ Direction

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

169 IB-1501453-D

Length : A Tool type: all tools Sets the tool length.

Setting range varies depending on the parameter "#1041 Initial inch". mm: 0.000 to 9999.999 inch: 0.0000 to 999.9999 0.000 to 180.000 degrees

Diameter : B Tool type: Mill tools, lathing drill and lathing tap Sets the tool diameter. (*2)

Length : B Tool type: Lathe turning, groove, thread cut Sets the tool length.

Nose angle : C Tool type: Drill Sets the nose angle.

Corner R : C Tool type: Radius end mill Sets the corner R circular radius.

Tip angle : C Tool type: Chamfer Sets the tip angle.

Pitch : C Tool type: Tap Sets the pitch.

Cutter L : C Tool type: Face mill Sets the cutter length.

Nose R : C Tool type: Lathe turning, groove Sets the nose R.

Tip dia. : D Tool type: Chamfer Sets the tool tip diameter. (*2)

Root dia. : D Tool type: Tap Sets the root diameter.

Shank dia. : D Tool type: Face mill Sets the shank diameter. (*2)

Nose angle : D Tool type: Lathe turning Sets the nose angle.

Nose width : D Tool type: Groove Sets the nose width

Edge angle : E Tool type: Lathe turning Sets the edge angle.

Max groove D: E Tool type: Groove Sets the groove depth.

Tool width: F Tool type: Lathe turning, groove, thread cut Sets the tool width.

Holder H: G Tool type: all tools Sets the holder hight.

Holder D : H Tool type: all tools Sets the holder diameter.

3D CHK Tool CR Sets the color to be used in 3D check screen. Tool type: all tools Red will be set when no value is input.

1: Gray 2: Red 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Green 6: Light blue 7: Purple 8: Pink

Spindle rpm S Sets the spindle rotation speed. 0 to 99999999

Feedrate F Sets the tool feedrate. Setting range varies depending on

the parameter "#1041 Initial inch".

mm: 0 to 1000000

inch: 0 to 100000

Material Sets the material of the tool. A maximum of 4 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be set for the name. (*1)

A maximum of 4 characters

Coolant M code Sets the coolant M code. 0 to 99999999

Setting item Details Setting range

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

170IB-1501453-D

(*1) The symbols "/" (Slash), "\" (Backslash), """ (Double quotes) and "=" (Equals) cannot be used for names or IDs. Also,

"=" (Equals) cannot be used as the first character.

(*2) When the parameter "#8968 Tool shape radius" is set to "0", input the value of diameter. When the parameter is set

to "1", input the value of radius.

(*3) In case of tool life management I/ll for M system and tool life management ll for L system, it cannot be set in the state

that group No. is not set.

(*4) In case of tool life management I/ll for M system, it cannot be set in the state that group No. is not set.

(*5) It cannot be set with tool life management ll for L system. Only reference is available.

Custom 1 to 12 Sets the custom information. Display format and setting range vary depending on the MTB speci- fications.

Group No. Sets the group No. When the group No. is cleared, the life management data is also cleared.

0 to 99999999

Group No. is cleared when it is set

to "0".

Status Sets the status. (*3) Setting range varies depending on the tool life management method. For details, refer to "5.6 Tool Life Management".

Method Sets the method. (*4)(*5)

H No. Sets the H No. (*4)

L compen Sets the L offset. (*4)

D No. Sets the D No. (*4)

R compen Sets the R offset. (*4)

Aux. Sets the auxiliary data. (*4)

Offset num Sets the compensation No.

Life Sets the life. (*4)(*5)

Used Sets the used. (*3)

Operating time Sets the maximum life time.

Life time Sets the usage life time.

T usage count Sets the maximum life count.

T life count Sets the usage life count.

Status A Sets the status A.

Status B Sets the status B.

H No. Sets the H No. Setting range varies depending on the tool compensation type. For details, refer to "5.4 Setting Tool Compensation Amount (Tool Off- set Screen)".

D No. Sets the D No.

Length Sets the tool length compensation amount.

L wear Sets the compensation amount of tool length wear.

Radius Sets the tool radius compensation amount.

R wear Sets the compensation amount of tool length wear.

Tool L offset num Set the tool L offset No.

Wear offset # Set the wear offset No.

Tool length data Sets the tool length data compensation of 1st axis, 2nd ax- is, and additional axes.

Wear data Sets the nose wear compensation of 1st axis, 2nd axis, and additional axes.

Nose R Sets the nose R.

R-wear Sets the R-wear.

Point Sets the point.

Setting item Details Setting range

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

171 IB-1501453-D

(1) If a value outside of the setting range is entered, an error occurs, and the value cannot be set.

(2) When the sorting of tool data is in progress, the operation message "Sorting of tool data is in progress" appears, and the data cannot be set.

Refer to the figures below for the graphic and the nose position of each tool.

indicates the tool nose position.

5.5.3 Menu Configuration

Lathe turning Groove Thread cut Lathing drill Lathing tap

Ball end mill Flat end mill Drill Radius end mill Chamfer

Tap Face mill

Menus (List view)

Menus Details Displays the tool management data with the designated tool management number at top.

Displays the tool management data with the designated tool number at top.

Sorts the tool No. in ascending order.

Clears the tool management data from the cursor line.

Setting method: First data number to be cleared/last data number (Example) 10/30: The line data of data numbers 10 to 30 is cleared.

10/E: All line data that has data number 10 or less is cleared.

If you press the [INPUT] key without entering the data number, data at the current cursor line is cleared.

Copies a single line of data locating at the cursor position.

Writes the copied data (single line data) in the cursor line.

Switches to the detail view of tool management data.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Note

Mng No search

Tool No search

Tool No sort

Tool clear

Line copy

Line paste

Disp details

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

172IB-1501453-D

(1) For L system, the menus [Lathe turning] to [Lathing tap] are displayed on page 1, the menus [Ballendmill] to [Facemill] are displayed on page 2.

Menus (when the cursor is at [ToolNo.] of [Disp details])

Menus Details Switch the display data type of the detail view of tool management data by pressing the button.

Clear the tool management data of the currently selected tool number.

Switch to the tool management data list.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Menus (when the cursor is at [ToolType] of [Disp details])

Menus Details Switch the display data type of the detail view of tool management data by pressing the button.

Select the [Ball endmill]. It is also selected if the value "1" is entered.

Select the [Flat endmill]. It is also selected if the value "2" is entered.

Select the [Drill]. It is also selected if the value "3" is entered.

Select the [Bulnoseendmill]. It is also selected if the value "4" is entered.

Select the [Chamfer]. It is also selected if the value "5" is entered.

Select the [Tap]. It is also selected if the value "6" is entered.

Select the [Face mill]. It is also selected if the value "7" is entered.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Select the [Lathe turning]. It is also selected if the value "51" is entered.

Select the [Groove]. It is also selected if the value "52" is entered.

Select the [Thread cut]. It is also selected if the value "53" is entered.

Select the [Lathing drill]. It is also selected if the value "54" is entered.

Select the [Lathing tap]. It is also selected if the value "55" is entered.

Type switch

Tool clear

List view

Close

Note

Type switch

Ball endmill

Flat endmill

Drill

Bulnose endmill

Chamfer

Tap

Face mill

Close

Lathe turning

Groove

Thread cut

Lathing drill

Lathing tap

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

173 IB-1501453-D

Menus (when the cursor is at [3D CHK Tool CR] of [Disp details])

Menus Details Switch the display data type of the detail view of tool management data by pressing the button.

Select the gray color. It is also selected if the value "1" is entered.

Select the red color. It is also selected if the value "2" is entered.

Select the yellow color. It is also selected if the value "3" is entered.

Select the blue color. It is also selected if the value "4" is entered.

Select the green color. It is also selected if the value "5" is entered.

Select the aqua color. It is also selected if the value "6" is entered.

Select the purple color. It is also selected if the value "7" is entered.

Select the pink color. It is also selected if the value "8" is entered.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Menus (when the cursor is at [Use] of [Disp details])

Menus Details Switch the display data type of the detail view of tool management data by pressing the button.

Select the [Leave blank]. This column is set to blank. It is also selected if the value "0" is entered.

Select the [Outer dia.]. It is also selected if the value "1" is entered.

Select the [Inner dia.]. It is also selected if the value "2" is entered.

Select the [End face]. It is also selected if the value "3" is entered.

Switch to the tool management data list.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Type switch

Gray

Red

Yellow

Blue

Green

Light blue

Purple

Pink

Close

Type switch

Leave blank

Outer dia.

Inner dia.

End face

List view

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

174IB-1501453-D

Menus (when the cursor is at [Spindle rotation direction] of [Disp details])

Menus Details Switch the display data type of the detail view of tool management data by pressing the button.

Select the [CW]. It is also selected if the value "0" is entered.

Select the [CCW]. It is also selected if the value "1" is entered.

Switch to the tool management data list.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Menus (when the cursor is at [Tool hand] of [Disp details])

Menus Details Switch the display data type of the detail view of tool management data by pressing the button.

Select the [Right/Front]. It is also selected if the value "0" is entered.

Select the [Left/Front]. It is also selected if the value "1" is entered.

Select the [Right/Back]. It is also selected if the value "2" is entered.

Select the [Left/Back]. It is also selected if the value "3" is entered.

Switch to the tool management data list.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Menus (List Menus (when none of the above conditions is met))

Menus Details Switch the display data type of the detail view of tool management data by pressing the button.

Switch to the tool management data list.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Type switch

CW

CCW

List view

Close

Type switch

Right/ Front

Left/ Front

Right/ Back

Left/ Back

List view

Close

Type switch

List view

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

175 IB-1501453-D

5.5.4 Registering New Tool Management Data

5.5.5 Switching the Item Type of the Tool Management Data Detailed Portion

(*1) If the machine parameter "#1445 Tol-Custom-nondisp" (Hide added info on tool management screen) is set to "1", the

"Added info" type is skipped and it is switched to the next type.

Operation method (1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

If the details of tool management data is already dis- played, press the menu [List view] and switch to the display of tool management data list.

(2) Use the [] or [] key to select the data number, which the tool No. is not specified yet.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key.

(4) Input the tool number. 100 [INPUT]

The tool management data of tool number 100 is regis- tered in the selected data number, and the cursor is shifted to the next lower position.

Operation method (1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

(2) Use the [] or [] key to select the data number to be displayed its details.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key.

(4) Press the menu [Type switch]. Each time you press the menu, the item type shown in the detailed view is switched in the following sequence. "Full view" -> "Basic info" -> "Shape info" -> "Cut cond." -> "Offset" -> "T-life" -> "Added info" (*1) -> "Full view". The cursor is moved to the top of the tool management data detail view.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

176IB-1501453-D

5.5.6 Displaying Data by Designating Tool Management Data No.

There are two methods to switch the display from the designated tool management data number. You can switch the op-

eration by using the "#8975 No. search process" parameter.

(Example 1) Select data number 12. ("#8975 No. search process" is "0")

(Example 2) Select data number 12. ("#8975 No. search process" is "1")

(1) If a data number exceeding the limit is designated, the operation message "Setting error" is displayed.

Operation method

(1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

(2) Press the menu [Manage. No. search].

(3) Enter the tool management data number to display, and press the [INPUT] key. 12 [INPUT]

(1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

(2) Enter the tool management data number to be dis- played. 12

(3) Press the menu [Manage. No. search]. The specified data number is displayed at the top, and the cursor is located onto the first data.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

177 IB-1501453-D

5.5.7 Displaying Data by Designating Tool No.

The designated tool number is searched from the tool management data under the cursor position, and the tool number is

displayed at the top when it is found. If the designated tool number is not found until the end of the tool management data,

the search is performed from the head.

(Example) Search data number 12.

(1) If the tool number cannot be found, the message "Designated tool number not found" is displayed, and the input section is not cleared.

(Example) Search tool number 12.

The designated tool number is searched from the tool management data under the cursor position, and the tool number is

displayed at the top when it is found. If the designated tool number is not found until the end of the tool management data,

the search is performed from the head.

When you press the menu [Tool No. search] again after the search is completed, the search restart for the previously

searched tool No.

The previously searched tool number is maintained until the tool management screen is closed, or the display is switched

to the detailed view.

Operation method ("#8975 No. search process" is "0")

(1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

(2) Press the menu [Tool No. search].

(3) Enter the tool management data number to display, and press the [INPUT] key.

After the search is completed, the operation message "Search complete" appears. The input column is cleared. The designated tool number is searched from the tool management data under the cursor position, and first- found tool management data is displayed at the top. The cursor is shifted to the head line of the display. The highlight of the menu [Tool No. search] returns to normal.

12 [INPUT]

Operation method ("#8975 No. search process" is "1")

(1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

(2) Enter the tool number you wish to display.

12

(3) Press the menu [Tool No. search]. After the search is completed, the operation message "Search complete" appears. The input column is cleared. The designated tool number is searched from the tool management data under the cursor position, and first- found tool management data is displayed at the top. The cursor is shifted to the head line of the display.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

178IB-1501453-D

(1) If the tool number cannot be found, the message "Designated tool number not found" is displayed, and the input section is not cleared.

5.5.8 Sorting the Data by Tool No.

Sort the tool management data in ascending order of tool numbers.

(1) During data sorting in ascending order of tool numbers, you cannot stop this sorting on the way.

(2) Once you have sorted the data in ascending order of tool numbers, you cannot return them to the previous sort order.

(3) If the same tool number is found multiple times, data is sorted in the order in which they are found from the top.

(4) If no tool number is set and if data is sorted, that line is skipped during display.

(5) The tool data is sorted for the currently displayed part system.

(6) During data sorting, you cannot operate on the screen. Operate the screen after data sorting.

(4) Press the menu [Tool No. search] again. The search restart for the previously searched tool No. After the search is completed, the operation message "Search complete" appears. The input column is cleared. The designated tool number is searched from the tool management data under the cursor position, and first- found tool management data is displayed at the top. The cursor is shifted to the head line of the display.

Operation method (1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

(2) Press the menu [Tool No sort].

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. The operation message "Sorting of tool data is in prog- ress" flashes during tool data sorting. The operation message "Sorting of tool data is com- plete" is displayed after the tool data has been sorted. The tool management data is sorted in ascending order of tool numbers, and they are displayed from the begin- ning. The cursor moves to the top line. The highlight of the menu [Tool No. sort] returns to nor- mal.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

179 IB-1501453-D

5.5.9 Deleting the Tool Management Data

Method 1: Delete the tool management data of the cursor line.

Method 2: Delete the tool management data of the designated line.

(1) If a value outside of the clear range is specified, the operation message "Setting error" is displayed.

Deleting the tool management data in [List view]

(1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

(2) Use the [] or [] key to move the cursor onto the line to be deleted.

(3) Delete the selected data. Menu [Tool clear] [INPUT]

(4) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. To cancel the erasing, press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT].

Press any key except [Y] and [INPUT] keys to cancel. Once deleted, the data is empty.

(1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

If the details of tool management data is displayed, press the menu [List view] and switch to the display of tool management data list.

(2) Press the menu [Tool clear].

(3) Specify the line clear range, by separating the first and last data numbers by a slash (/) from each other, and press the [INPUT] key. 1/5 [INPUT]

To delete data down to the last line, set "E". (Example) 5/E:

(4) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. To cancel the erasing, press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT].

The tool management data, that corresponds to the des- ignated data number, is cleared and highlight of the menu display is released. Data of the cleared range is empty.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

180IB-1501453-D

(1) If you wish to change the tool data to be deleted, locate the cursor onto the tool management data list and select a tool data again.

5.5.10 Copying and Pasting the Tool Management Data

(1) Once data is copied, it is held until the next tool management data is copied or until the tool management screen is closed.

(2) For tool life management I, you cannot paste to the data that does not have the tool number. It causes a paste error.

Deleting the tool management data in [Disp details] (1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

If the details of tool management data is displayed, press the menu [Disp details] and switch to the dis- play of tool management data list.

(2) Use the [] or [] key to move the cursor onto the tool number.

(3) Delete the selected data. Menu [Tool clear]

The menu [Tool clear] is displayed only when the cur- sor is located on the tool number.

(4) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. To cancel the erasing, press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT].

The tool management data, that is displayed in the de- tailed view of tool management data, is erased.

Operation method (1) Display the tool management screen. The tool management data list is displayed.

(2) Use the [] or [] key to move the cursor onto the line to be copied.

(3) Press the menu [Line copy].

(4) Use the [] or [] key to move the cursor onto the line to be pasted.

(5) Press the menu [Line paste]. The copied data is written in the line at the cursor posi- tion. The highlighted copy line is released.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

181 IB-1501453-D

(3) The following information is not copied or pasted.

: Not copied or pasted

Display data Common Tool shape drawing

: Not copied or pasted -: Not managed

Display dada (Life data) M system L system

Tool life man- agement I/ll

Tool life man- agement III

Tool life man- agement I

Tool life man- agement II

Life Status -

Method -

H No. - -

L offset - -

D No. - -

R offset - -

Aux. - -

Offset num - - -

Life -

Used -

Operating time - - -

Life time - - -

T usage count - - -

T life count - - -

Status A - - -

Status B - - -

: Not copied or pasted -: Not managed

Display data (Compensation data) Tool compensation type I

Tool compensation type II

Tool compensation type III

Compensation Length -

L wear - -

Radius - -

R wear - -

Tool L offset num - -

Wear offset # - -

Length 1st axis name - -

Length 2nd axis name - -

Length additional axis name

- -

Wear 1st axis name - -

Wear 2nd axis name - -

Wear additional axis name

- -

Nose R - -

R-wear - -

Point - -

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

182IB-1501453-D

5.5.11 Specifying Display Format and Setting Range of Additional Information

The display format and setting range of additional information can be changed by entering tool data file (TOOLALL.DAT)

described in the specified format.

[Setting]

(1) When the illegal value is set, it is handled as 4 bytes, signed decimal data without range check.

[Setting example]

No. Addresses Details Data range (Meaning) Supplement 1 N Custom data No. 1 to 12 Custom 1 to 12

2 B Number of bytes 0: 4 bytes

1: 1 bytes

2: 2 bytes

4: 4 bytes

3 K Type 0: Signed decimal Data with decimal point is valid only when it is 4 bytes and digits information is required.

Character string is valid only when it is 4 bytes.

1: Unsigned decimal

2: Hexadecimal

3: Bit

4: With decimal point (fixed number of digits)

5: With decimal point (linked with iunit and I_inch)

6: With decimal point (linked with iunit)

7: With decimal point (linked with I_inch)

8: Character string

4 D Number of digits 0, 11 to 88 When the display data is linked with iunit and I_inch, the number of digits when iunit = B and I_inch = 0 (mm) is set.

When I_inch = 0 (inch), the integer part decreases 1 digit and the frac- tion part increases 1 digit.

When iunit = C, the fraction part in- creases 1 digit.

If the data is without decimal point, it is set to "0" is set.

High-order is the number of digits of in- teger part

Low-order is the number of fraction part

Designate the data so that the total of fraction and integer part does not exceed 10 digits.

5 L Maximum value Specify the configurable maximum value and minimum value.

In case a check is not necessary, set that minimum value is larger than maxi-

mum value.

When the kind is character string, the number of characters shall be 0 to 4.

When the data with decimal point is selected for the kind, eliminate the decimal

point from the value when iunit = B, and I_inch = 0 (mm).

(Example 1) In case of 0.000 to 99.999

Minimum value: 0, Maximum value: 99999

(Example 2) In case of -99.999 to 10.000

Minimum value: -99999, Maximum value: 10000

6 S Minimum value

N1B1K0D0L100S-100

N2B0K4D33L999999S-999999

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

183 IB-1501453-D

5.6 Tool Life Management

The life management data such as the tool usage is set and displayed on the tool life management (T-life) screen of the

setup (Setup) screen.

There are some types of the tool life management method, two for M system and three for L system.

The management method can be changed by the parameter "#1096 T_Ltyp".

L system: Tool life management I (T_Ltyp = 1) and tool life management II (T_Ltyp = 2)

M system: Tool life management I (T_Ltyp = 1), tool life management II (T_Ltyp = 2) and tool life management III (T_Ltyp

= 3)

Manual numerical value command can be executed when manual numerical value command window is displayed by input-

ting an address key such as MST, etc.

Tool life management I

This method accumulates the cutting time, the number of cuttings, or the wear amount of the tool which is commanded by

the program, and monitors the usage of the tool.

Tool life management II

This method is the same as tool life management I, but with a spare tool selection function added.

A spare tool is selected from the group of tool commands commanded in the program. Tool compensation (tool length com-

pensation and tool radius compensation) is carried out for the selected tool.

The tool life management II related parameters (basic common parameters) include the following.

Tool life management III

It is not managed by the group number.

This method accumulates the cutting time, the number of cuttings, or the wear amount of the tool which is commanded

by the program, and monitors the usage of the tool.

# Name Setting Details 1103 T_Life

T-life manage valid 0 This ignores the tool life management data.

1 This controls the tool life management.

1104 T_Com2 Tool cmd mthd 2 (When tool life management is valid.)

0 This treats the program tool command as a group No. Search for the tools that match with the group No. in the tool registration data, and select the spare tool from them.

1 This treats the program tool command as a tool No. Search for the group No. that matches with the tool No. in the tool registration data, and select the spare tool from there.

1105 T_sel2 Tool select mthd 2 (When tool life management is valid.)

0 This selects the tool from the tools in use in the same group, following the reg- istration No. order. If there are no "Tools in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use", "Normal life tools" and "Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.

1 This selects the tool with the maximum remaining life from the tools in use and not in use in the same group. When several tools have the same remaining life, the tools are selected in order of registration No. If there are no "Tools in use" or "Tools not in use", the tools are selected in order of "Tools not in use", "Normal life tools" and "Abnormal tools", following the registration No. order.

Setup T-life

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

184IB-1501453-D

Tool life management I - Tool life data display

This method accumulates the cutting time, or the number of cuttings of the tool which is commanded by the program, and

monitors the usage of the tool.

Tool life management can be performed for a maximum of 80 tools (tool Nos. 1 to 80).

(1) Time based control

After the tool selection command (T) is issued, the cutting time (G01, G02, G33 etc.) is added to that of the designated

tool. A warning appears if the actual cutting time exceeds the estimated cutting time when the tool selection command

is issued.

(2) Control based on the number of cuttings

The actual number of cuttings corresponding to the designated tool No. increases each time the tool selection command

(T) is issued.

A warning appears if the actual number of cuttings exceeds the estimated number of cuttings when the tool selection

command is issued.

Tool life management II - Tool life data display / registration group list display

This method monitors the life (cutting time, number of cuttings) of each tool. When the tool life is reached to the estimated

value, the same kind of spare tool in the group where the tool belongs is selected in sequence and exchanged.

Group count: Multi-part system spec. max. 40 groups for each part system / Single part system spec: max. 80 groups

No. of tools in group: Max. 16

The tool life management related parameters (basic shared parameters) are shown below.

The tool life management screen is made up of the group list display screen and the life management data screen.

(There is no group list display screen in L system tool life management I. Only the life management data screen exists.)

Refer to the following sections and later for details of the display contents, menus, and an explanation of the operations for

each screen.

"5.6.1 Displaying the Group List (M system: Tool life management I, II / L system: Tool life management II)"

"5.6.2 Displaying the Life Management Data in Group Units (M system)"

"5.6.3 Displaying the Life Management Data (L system: Tool life management I)"

"5.6.4 Displaying the Tool Life Management Data in Group Units (L system: Tool life Management II)"

# Name Setting Details 1096 T_Ltyp

Tool life management type 1, 3 Tool life management I

2 Tool life management II

1103 T_life Enable tool life management

0 The tool life management is not performed.

1 This controls the tool life management.

1107 Tllfsc (For L system only) Tool life management Display screen division

Set the no. of groups displayed at the tool life management II (L system) screen.

0 Displayed no. of groups: 1, Max. No of registered tools: 16

1 Displayed no. of groups: 2, Max. No of registered tools: 8

2 Displayed no. of groups: 4, Max. No of registered tools: 4

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

185 IB-1501453-D

5.6.1 Displaying the Group List (M system: Tool life management I, II / L system: Tool life management

II)

Tool life management data groups can be registered and erased. Press [Group list] when displaying the group unit.

When changing from a group unit display to the group list display, the cursor displays at the group No. at the group unit

display.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Regist group list The group Nos. registered as the tool life management data are listed in ascending or-

der.

Group Nos. can be set from 1 to 99999999, and maximum 1000 groups can be set.

Maximum 60 groups can be displayed at a time. Use the and keys to

change the display if the No. of registered groups exceeds 60.

An asterisk will be added to the No. of the group in which all tools have reached their

lives.

The maximum number of the registered groups depends on the specifications. In tool life management II, when all the tools' statuses (ST) of the target group be-

come 2 to 4, "*" is displayed.

(1)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

186IB-1501453-D

[CHOSEN TOOL]

Display items

Display items Details (1) Tool in use The life management information of the tool currently being used appears here.

(2) Regist group list The group Nos. registered as the tool life management data are displayed in a list.

Group Nos. can be set from 1 to 9999, and maximum 80 groups can be set.

An asterisk will be added to the No. of the group in which all tools have reached their

lives.

The maximum number of the registered groups depends on the specifications.

Display items Details Display range (3) Group Displays the life management group No. currently

being used. 1 to 9999

(4) Tool No. Displays the tool No. currently being used. 1 to 999999

(5) Comp No. Displays the compensation No. currently being used. 1 to 80

(6) Method Displays whether the group currently being used is controlled by the cutting time or number of cuttings.

0: Cutting time 1: Number of cuttings

(7) Used Displays the usage data for the tool currently being used.

Cutting time: 0 to 99999999 (sec) Number of cuttings: 0 to 999999

(8) Total Displays the total usage data for the tool currently being used. In the case of tools using multiple compensation Nos., the total usage data for all compensation Nos. displays. In the case of only one compensation No., the same value as "Used" displays.

Cutting time: 0 to 99999999 (sec) Number of cuttings: 0 to 999999

(9) Life Displays the life value for the tool currently being used.

Cutting time: 0 to 99999999 (sec) Number of cuttings: 0 to 999999

(10) ST Displays the status of the tool currently being used. 0: Unused tool 1: Used tool 2: Normal life tool 3: Skipped tool

(1)

(7) (8)

(10)

(2) (9)

(3)

(4) (5) (6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

187 IB-1501453-D

(1) An error occurs if the group No. duplicates a pre-existing group No.

(2) The group is not registered if one of the operations below is performed after registering a new group No.

If the application is exited without registering even 1 item of tool life data.

The screen is changed to that of other than the group unit display.

The part system is changed.

If nothing is input in the input area, the group at the cursor location is erased.

Menus (M system/L system)

Menus Details Creates a new group and adds the group No. to the list.

This erases all of the tool life management data included in the designated group No. If the group No. is not designated, the tool life management data for the group No. indicated by the cur- sor will be erased.

This erases all groups and their tool life management data registered in the part system which is cur- rently selected.

This changes a group No. Specify a new group No. and press the [INPUT] key to change the group No. and then change the con- tents of the list. An error occurs if an existing group No. is specified.

The tool life data for the group No. indicated by the cursor is displayed. This changes to the mode enabling tool life management data to be set and displayed with group unit Nos.

Operation method (Registering a group) (M system/L system) (1) Press the menu [Group regist].

(2) For L system, set group No./method/life value. (Example) 25/1/3000 [INPUT] For M system, designate the group No. to be registered. 25 [INPUT]

Operation method (Erasing a group) (M system/L system) (1) Press the menu [Group delete].

(2) Designate the group to be erased. 72 [INPUT]

The selected group No. is erased.

Group regist

Group delete

Grp all delete

Grp No. change

T-life group

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

188IB-1501453-D

(1) If no group has been registered, the operation message "Can't delete all groups" will appears.

Operation method (Erasing all groups) (M system/L system) (1) Press the menu [Grp all delete].

(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. All the registered groups and their tool life management data is erased.

Operation method (Changing the group No.) (M system/L system) (Example) Changing the group No. from 5 to 20

(1) Use the [], [], , and keys to move the cur-

sor to group No. 5.

(2) Press the menu [Grp No.change]. The menu is highlighted.

(3) Designate the group No. after changing. 20 [INPUT]

The group No. changes to "20".

Operation method (Changing to the group unit display) (M system/L system) (Example) Displaying the group No. 5 tool life data.

(1) Use the [], [], , and keys to move the cur-

sor to group No. 5.

(2) Press the menu [T-life group] or [INPUT] keys. The screen changes to the group unit display and the group No. "5" tool life management data displays.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

189 IB-1501453-D

5.6.2 Displaying the Life Management Data in Group Units (M system)

The tool life management data of an arbitrary group is set and displayed. Press the menu [T-life group] when the group list

is displayed.

Use the and keys to scroll between screens if all of the registered tools cannot be displayed on one screen.

(1)

(2)

(3) (4) (5)

(6) (8) (10)

(12)

(11)

(7) (9)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

190IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details Setting range (1) Group No. This is the group No. of the tool for which tool life management is per-

formed. (*1)

Tools with the same group No. are regarded as spare tools.

1 to 99999999

(2) # This is the data setting No. This is not the magazine pot No.

(3) Tool No. This is the No. corresponding to the each individual tool. Maximum 1000 tools can be registered. This is a fixed tool No. actually output for the tool command and so on.

1 to 99999999

(4) ST

Tool status 0: Unused tool Normally set to "0" when the tool is replaced with a new tool. 1: Tool in use This becomes "1" when the cutting actually starts. 2: Normal life tool This becomes "2" when the usage data (usage time and No. of uses) exceeds the tool life data. 3: Tool abnormality 1 tool (*2) 4: Tool abnormality 2 tool (*2)

Tool status

MTB release

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

191 IB-1501453-D

(5) Method

(a) Tool life management method

0: Cutting time This manages by the cutting execution time.

1: Number of mounting times This manages by the number of times the tool is treated as a spin- dle tool at the tool replacement, etc. However, in case when no cut- ting feed command (G01, G02, G03 etc.) is issued for the spindle tool, the number of mounting times is not counted.

2: Number of cuttings This is counted when the rapid traverse command (G00 etc.) is changed to the cutting feed command (G01, G02, G03 etc.). How- ever, this is invalid in the case of a rapid traverse or cutting feed command with no movement.

(b) Tool radius compensation data format

(c) Tool length compensation data format

0, 2: Length dimension/Radius dimension Displays the length dimension or radius dimension of the tool com- pensation amount of the compensation number designated by HNo. or Dno. in the display item "L compen" or "R compen". If the value of the display item "L compen" or "R compen" is changed, the length dimension or radius dimension of the tool com- pensation amount is rewritten.

1: Length wear/Radius wear Displays the length wear or radius wear of the tool compensation amount designated by HNo. or Dno. in the display item "L compen" or "R compen". If the value of the display item "L offset" or "R offset" is changed, the length wear or radius wear of the tool compensation amount is rewritten.

(6) HNo. Length compensation number. Entering a new tool number automatically assigns the same compen- sation number as the tool number. If a new tool number is entered that is outside the allowable compen- sation number range, the compensation number is assigned to "0". The compensation number can also be changed to any number as needed.

1 to 999

(7) L compen Length compensation value. One of the following values is displayed depending on the tool length compensation data format utilized by the method. The value can be changed as needed. 0, 2: Length dimension of tool compensation amount of the compen- sation number designated by HNo. 1: Length wear of tool compensation amount of the compensation number designated by HNo.

(*3)

Display items Details Setting range

(a) Tool life management method

(b) Tool radius compensation data format

(c) Tool length compensation data format

G00 G01 G00 G04 G01 G04 G01 G00

+1 During cutting feed +1

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

192IB-1501453-D

(*1) The group No. is not displayed for the tool life management III.

(*2) This action differs depending on MTB specifications

(*3) The "Length compensation" and "Radius compensation" calculation/direct compensation amount setting/display range

are as follows based on a combination of settings of "#1003 iunit" (input setup unit) and "#1041 Initial inch".

When data without the decimal point is input, a set unit can be specified by the parameter "#8119 Comp. unit switch".

(8) DNo. Tool radius compensation number. Entering a new tool number automatically assigns the same compen- sation number as the tool number. If a new tool number is entered that is outside the allowable compen- sation number range, the compensation number is assigned to "0". The compensation number can also be changed to any number as needed.

1 to 999

(9) R compen Tool radius compensation value. One of the following values is displayed depending on the tool radius compensation data format utilized by the method. The value can be changed as needed. 0, 2: Radius dimension of tool compensation amount of the compen- sation number designated by DNo. 1: Radius wear of tool compensation amount of the compensation number designated by DNo.

(*3)

(10) Aux. This depends on the MTB specifications. 0 to 65535

(11) Life Set one of the cutting time (minutes), number of mounting times (to spindle), or number of cuttings (holes to be drilled) to this column in ac- cordance with the manner set in the "Method" column.The tool life is in- finite when "0" is set.

Cutting time: 0 to 4000 (min) Number of mounting times: 0 to 65000 (set) Number of cuttings: 0 to 65000 (set)

(12) Used This displays the usage data for individual tools based on the method

specified for the tool life management method.

This data is not counted during machine lock, auxiliary function lock, dry run or for a single block.

Cutting time: 0 to 4000 (min) Number of mounting times: 0 to 65000 (set) Number of cuttings: 0 to 65000 (set)

#1003 iunit #1041 I_inch Setting/display range B 0 -9999.999 to 9999.999

1 -999.9999 to 999.9999

C 0 -9999.9999 to 9999.9999

1 -999.99999 to 999.99999

D 0 -9999.99999 to 9999.99999

1 -999.999999 to 999.999999

E 0 -9999.999999 to 9999.999999

1 -999.9999999 to 999.9999999

Display items Details Setting range

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

193 IB-1501453-D

(1) When the part system is changed while displayed on the group unit display, the registered data is not displayed because the screen enters the "data unregistered" state. To display the group unit of the changed part system, return to the group list display screen and execute the group unit display again.

(2) If "Cutter compen. data format" or "T-length compen data format" is set to "0", "2" (Length/radius), or "1" (Length wear/ radius wear), the tool compensation amount to be displayed by "L compen" and "R compen" are switched as follows:

Tool compen- sation type

Item Method Setting/display range

I

L compen

0 The compensation amount that is set in the designated compensation number

1

2

R compen

0 The compensation amount that is set in the designated compensation number

1

2

II

L compen

0 The compensation amount that is set in the length of the designated compensation number

1 The compensation amount that is set in the length wear of the desig- nated compensation number

2 The compensation amount that is set in the length of the designated compensation number

R compen

0 The compensation amount that is set in the radius of the designated compensation number

1 The compensation amount that is set in the radius wear of the desig- nated compensation number

2 The compensation amount that is set in the radius of the designated compensation number

III

L compen

0 The compensation amount that is set in the Z axis of tool length data of the designated compensation number

1 The compensation amount that is set in the Z axis of wear data of the designated compensation number

2 The compensation amount that is set in the Z axis of tool length data of the designated compensation number

R compen

0 The compensation amount that is set in nose R of the designated com- pensation number

1 The compensation amount that is set in the R wear of the designated compensation number

2 The compensation amount that is set in nose R of the designated com- pensation number

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

194IB-1501453-D

(*1) This menu is not valid for the tool life management III.

(*2) This menu is not displayed for the tool life management III.

(1) If a group No. that does not exist is designated, a message appears to confirm the creation of a new No. A new group is created if [Y] or [INPUT] is pressed.

Menus

Menus Details This displays the data of a group when that group No. of tool life management data is set and the [IN- PUT] key is pressed. (*1) The group No. can be referred to in the group list.

Copies one line of tool life management data where the cursor is located.

The copied tool life management data is written to the data in the line where the cursor is located. If the copied data is changed after the menu [Line copy] is pressed, the data before changing is written when pasted. The copied data can be pasted as many times as is required until new data is copied.

This erases a designated line (multiple lines possible) of tool life management data. The first and the last line No. of the data to be erased is specified with a "/" separating the Nos.. If the [INPUT] key is pressed without specifying a line, the data in the line where the cursor is located is erased.

This changes a group No. (*1) If a new group No. is set and the [INPUT] key pressed, the group No. changes. An error occurs if an existing group No. is specified.

Displays the pop-up window for details of the selected group.

Displays the previous group No. data. (*1)

Displays the next group No. data. (*1)

This displays the list of tool life data groups. (*1)

This creates a new group. (*2)

This erases all tool life management data contained in the currently displayed group No. (*2)

This closes the pop-up window for details of the selected group.

Operation method (Designating a group No.) (1) Press the menu [Group No.].

(2) Designate the group No. to be displayed.

12 [INPUT]

Group No.

Line copy

Line paste

Line clear

Grp No. change

Disp details

Prev group

Next group

Group list

Group regist

Group delete

Close

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

195 IB-1501453-D

(1) An error occurs if the group No. duplicates a pre-existing group No.

(1) The other settings will be invalid when the tool ST (status) setting data are not set.

(2) The same tool cannot be registered in more than one group.

(3) If the tool No. is not set, the other data cannot be set.

(4) Change the "Method" to initialize the related items. Change the tool life management method (the 1st digit) to clear the "Life" and "Usage", and also change the units. Change the tool radius compensation data (the 2nd digit) to clear the "Radius Compensation". Change the tool length compensation data (the 3rd digit) to clear the "Length Compensation". Figures after the decimal point are also changed in line with the specifications.

(1) It is not possible to paste into a line for which a tool No. has not been set.

(2) Once copied, the data is held until a new data item is copied.

Operation method (Changing a group No.) (1) Press the menu [Grp No.change].

(2) Designate the group No. after changing.

112 [INPUT]

Operation method (Setting the tool life data) (1)

Move the cursor to the data to be set using the , , [], [], [|] or [|] key.

It is possible to move to the line after the registered line. Set a tool No. for this line to newly register tool life management data.

(2) Set a value.

20 [INPUT]

Operation method (Copying/pasting the tool life data) (1) Move the cursor to the line to be copied.

(2) Press the menu [Line copy].

(3) Move the cursor to the line where the data is to be pasted.

(4) Press the menu [Line paste].

Operation method (Erasing one line of tool life management data) (1) Move the cursor to the line to be erased.

(2) Press the menu [Line clear] and [INPUT] keys.

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT] in order not to erase the data.

Note

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

196IB-1501453-D

(1) An error occurs if the group No. duplicates a pre-existing group No.

(2) The group is not registered if one of the operations below is performed after registering a new group No.

If the application is exited without registering even 1 item of tool life data. The screen is changed to that of other than the group unit display. The part system is changed.

Operation method (Designating and erasing the multiple lines) (1) Press the menu [Line clear].

(2) Set the range to be erased by marking the first and last # Nos. with a "/".

122/125 [INPUT]

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT] in order not to erase the data.

Operation method (Registering a group) (1) Press the menu [Group regist].

(2) Set the No. of the group to be registered.

25 [INPUT]

Operation method (Erasing a group) (1) Move the cursor to the group No. to be erased.

(2) Press the menu [Group delete] and [INPUT] key.

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

197 IB-1501453-D

5.6.3 Displaying the Life Management Data (L system: Tool life management I)

The tool life management data can be set and displayed. Use the and keys to scroll between screens if all of the

registered tools cannot be displayed on one screen.

Display items

Display items Details Setting range (1) # Tool No.

The # No. is highlighted in the following cases. - The actual cutting time reaches the estimated tool life time. - The actual number of cuttings exceeds the estimated number of cuttings.

(2) Time Used The integrated time the tool is used.

The count goes up during cutting.

0:0 to 99:59 (h:min)

Life Estimated tool life time

Set the estimated maximum tool life time. Unit of second is set to "0".

0:0 to 99:59 (h:min) (0:0 = no warning given)

(3) Count Used The integrated count the tool is used.

The count goes up during cutting.

0 to 65000 (times)

Life Setting for estimated number of cuttings

Set the estimated maximum number of cuttings.

0 to 65000 (times) (0:0 = no warning given)

(4) Status A The tool life management status is indicated. 0: Not used 1: Current tool (tool being used) 2: Estimated tool life time is exceeded.

0 to 2

B (Used by MTB) 0 to 99

Menus

Menus Details Copies one line of tool life management data where the cursor is located.

The copied tool life management data is written to the data in the line where the cursor is located. If the copied data is changed after the menu [Line copy] is pressed, the data before changing is written when pasted. The copied data can be pasted as many times as is required until new data is copied.

This erases a designated line (multiple lines possible) of tool life management data. The first and the last line No. of the data to be erased is specified with a "/" separating the Nos.. If the [INPUT] key is pressed without specifying a line, the data in the line where the cursor is located is erased.

(2) (3) (4)

(1)

Line copy

Line paste

Line clear

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

198IB-1501453-D

(1) Once copied, the data is held until a new data item is copied.

(1) If the [INPUT] key is pressed without setting a # No., the line at the cursor is erased.

Operation method (Setting the tool life data) (1)

Move the cursor to the data to be set using the , , [], [], [|] and [|] keys.

It is possible to move to the line after the registered line.

(2) Input the value. 20 [INPUT]

Operation method (Copying/pasting the tool life data) (1) Move the cursor to the line to be copied.

(2) Press the menu [Line copy].

(3) Move the cursor to the line where the data is to be pasted.

(4) Press the menu [Line paste].

Operation method (Erasing one line of tool life management data) (1) Move the cursor to the line to be erased.

(2) Press the menu [Line clear] and [INPUT] keys.

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT] in order not to erase the data.

Operation method (Designating and erasing the multiple lines) (1) Press the menu [Line clear].

(2) Set the erasing range by marking the first and last # Nos. with a "/", and press the [INPUT] key. 122/125 [INPUT]

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT] in order not to erase the data.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

199 IB-1501453-D

5.6.4 Displaying the Tool Life Management Data in Group Units (L system: Tool life Management II)

The tool life management data of an arbitrary group is set and displayed.

Use the and keys to scroll between screens if all of the registered tools cannot be displayed on one screen.

This screen is enabled only for tool life management II ("#1096 T_Ltyp" = 2).

By setting parameter "#1107 Tllfsc", it is possible to select the life management data display mode for multiple groups.

(#1107 Tllfsc = 0)

(#1107 Tllfsc = 1)

"#1107 Tllfsc" setting value 0 1 2

No. of display groups 1 2 4

Max. No. of registered tools 16 8 4

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

200IB-1501453-D

(#1107 Tllfsc = 2)

In the M system, if a part system is switched when the group unit is being displayed, registered data is not displayed, and

you need to return to the group list once. However, in the L system: tool life management II, registered data is displayed,

so you do not need to return to the group list.

Display items

Display items Details Setting range Group Life management group No. 1 to 9999

Method This displays whether the group currently being displayed is controlled by the cutting time or num- ber of cuttings.

0: Cutting time 1: Number of cuttings

Life This sets the tool life data for the currently dis- played group. The following tool life data units display based on the control method. Cutting time: (s) Number of cuttings: (set)

Cutting time: 0 to 99999999 (sec) Number of cuttings: 0 to 999999 (set)

Display items Details Setting range # This displays whether the tool for which the # No.

is highlighted is a life tool (ST=2) or a skip tool (ST=3).

Tool No. This sets the tool No. 1 to 999999

Comp No. This sets the compensation No. 1 to 80

Used This sets the estimated data in case when the tool is not an unused tool, etc. When the data is not set, the value is "0". The following units for the estimated data is dis- played based on the control method. Cutting time: (s) Number of cuttings: (set)

Cutting time: 0 to 99999999 (s) Number of cuttings: 0 to 999999 (set) (Setting can be omitted.)

ST This sets the tool status. This becomes "0" when the tool status is not set. 0: Unused tool 1: Used tool 2: Normal life tool 3: Skipped tool

0 to 3 (Setting can be omitted.)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

201 IB-1501453-D

(1) If a group No. that does not exist is set, a message appears to confirm the creation of a new No. A new group is created if [Y] or [INPUT] is pressed. When creating a new group, set the method and life data at the end of the group No., separating the data with a "/". If the method and life data are omitted, a new group is created with method = 0 (cutting time), and tool life data = 0.

(1) An error occurs if the group No. duplicates a pre-existing group No.

Menus

Menus Details This displays the data of a group when that group No. of tool life management data is set and the [IN- PUT] key is pressed. The group No. can be referred to in the group list.

Copies one line of tool life management data where the cursor is located.

The copied tool life management data is written to the data in the line where the cursor is located. If the copied data is changed after the menu [Line copy] is pressed, the data before changing is written when pasted. The copied data can be pasted as many times as is required until new data is copied.

This erases a designated line (multiple lines possible) of tool life management data. The first and the last line No. of the data to be erased is specified with a "/" separating the Nos.. If the [INPUT] key is pressed without specifying a line, the data in the line where the cursor is located is erased.

This changes a group No. If a new group No. is specified and the [INPUT] key pressed, the group No. changes. An error occurs if an existing group No. is specified.

The group active area is changed if parameter "#1107 Tllfsc" is set to "1" or "2".

Changes to the multiple group life management data display mode based on the parameter "#1107 Tllfsc" setting value.

This creates a new group and displays the life management data containing no data.

This displays the list of tool life data groups.

The multiple group life management data display mode is canceled.

Operation method (Designating a group No.) (1) Press the menu [Group No].

(2) Designate the group No. to be displayed. 12 [INPUT]

Operation method (Changing a group No.) (1) Press the menu [Grp No.change].

(2) Designate the group No. after changing. 112 [INPUT]

Group No.

Line copy

Line paste

Line clear

Grp No. change

Group change

Multi group

Group regist

Group list

Close

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

202IB-1501453-D

(1) It is not possible to set any other data if the tool No. and compensation No. have not been set.

(1) Once copied, the data is held until a new data item is copied.

(1) If the [INPUT] key is pressed without setting a # No., the line at the cursor is erased.

Operation method (Setting the tool life data) (1)

Move the cursor to the data to be set using the , , [], [], [|] and [|] keys.

It is possible to move to the line after the registered line. Set a tool No. for this line to newly register tool life management data.

(2) Set a value. 20 [INPUT]

Operation method (Copying/pasting the tool life data) (1) Move the cursor to the line to be copied.

(2) Press the menu [Line copy].

(3) Move the cursor to the line where the data is to be pasted.

(4) Press the menu [Line paste].

Operation method (Erasing one line of tool life management data) (1) Move the cursor to the line to be erased.

(2) Press the menu [Line clear] and [INPUT] keys.

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. Press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT] in order not to erase the data.

Operation method (Designating and erasing the multiple lines) (1) Press the menu [Line clear].

(2) Set the range to be erased by marking the first and last # Nos. with a "/". 1/5 [INPUT]

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. Press a key other than [Y] or [INPUT] in order not to erase the data.

Note

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

203 IB-1501453-D

(1) If the method and life data are omitted, a new group is created with method = 0 (cutting time), and tool life data = 0.

(2) An error occurs if the group No. duplicates a pre-existing group No.

(3) The group is not registered if one of the operations below is performed after registering a new group No.

If the application is exited without registering even 1 item of tool life data.

The screen is changed to that of other than the group unit display.

The part system is changed.

Operation method (Registering a group) (1) Press the menu [Group regist].

(2) Set the No. of the group to be registered. 25/1/3000 [INPUT]

Operation method (Changing the active area for multiple group displays) (1) Press the menu [Group change]. The cursor indicating the active status moves to the next

group.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

204IB-1501453-D

5.7 Setting and Measuring a Workpiece 5.7.1 Workpiece Measurement (M System)

The coordinate point for each axis can be measured on the workpiece measurement screen of the Setup screen. Install the

sensor on the spindle, turn the measurement switch ON, and select manual feeding or handle feeding on the workpiece

position measurement screen to bring the sensor into contact with the workpiece. Then, measure the coordinate point of

each axis.

To make surface, hole, and width measurements, calculate each center coordinate from the measured coordinate, and set

the obtained value to the workpiece coordinate system offset.

For the rotation measurement, the measurement result is set in the workpiece coordinate system offset (rotation center)

and parameters "#8623 Coord rot centr(H)", "#8624 Coord rot centr(V)", and "#8627 Coord rot angle".

For surface measurement (As for the hole or width measurement, the guide drawing (3) differs.)

For rotation measurement

Manual numerical value command can be executed when manual numerical value command window is displayed by input-

ting an address key such as MST, etc.

Setup W-meas

(1)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(7)

(9)

(8)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

205 IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) Measurement counter Displays the measurement position.

The measurement axis is compatible with parameters "#1026 base_I", "#1027 base_J", and "#1028 base_K". (Hereafter indicated as I=X, J=Y, and K=Z axes in this manual.)

The measurement position becomes blank when setting the coordinate system offset amount, resetting the NC, or changing the measurement mode (when the menu [Face meas], [Hole meas], [Width meas], or [Rotate measure] is selected). The display contents differ depending on the measurement pattern (surface measure- ment, hole measurement, width measurement, or rotation measurement).

Surface measurement counter

Displays the calculated measurement position from the skip position for each axis (X- , Y-, Z-axes).

Hole measurement counter

Displays 3 (A, B, C) measurement positions.

Width measurement counter

Displays 2 (A, B) measurement positions.

Rotation measurement counter

Displays 3 (A, B, C) measurement positions (X-, Y-axes).

(2) Display of measure- ment in progress

"On mea" is displayed when the measurement switch on the machine operation board is ON. Refer to "Manual measurement status display" in "5.3.1 Tool Measurement (M Sys- tem)" for details.

(3) Guide graphic Displays the measurement image. The contents of the guide drawing differ depending on the measurement pattern (sur- face measurement, hole measurement, width measurement, or rotation measure- ment).

(4) Sensor length and di- ameter

Sensor length: Displays the length to the tip of the touch probe. ("#8701 Tool Length" setting value) Sensor diameter: Displays the diameter of the ball at the tip of the touch probe. ("#8702 Tool Dia" setting value)

(5) Coordinate system off- set

Displays the currently selected coordinate system offset.

(6) Measurement position counter

Displays the measurement position for all axes. X axis: X axis machine position + sensor radius +center compensation (Horizontal) Y axis: Y axis machine position + sensor radius +center compensation (Vertical) Z axis: Z axis machine position - sensor length 4th axis and over: Respective machine position

Sensor length: "#8701 Tool Length" Sensor radius: "#8702 Tool Dia" /2 Center compensation (H): "#8703 OFFSET X" Center compensation (V): "#8704 OFFSET Y"

(7) Center shift amount Displays the shift amount of the coordinate rotation center.

(8) Coordinate rotation cen- ter

Displays the coordinates that are the center during coordinate rotation. This is the setting value of "#8623 Coord rot centr (H)" and "#8624 Coord rot centr (V)".

(9) Coordinate rotation an- gle

Displays the rotation angle during coordinate rotation. This is the setting value of "#8627 Coord rot angle".

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

206IB-1501453-D

Menus

Menus Details The results calculated from the measurement counter are set in the displayed workpiece coordinate sys-

tem offset. Only the axis for which a value is displayed in the measurement counter can be set.

If the workpiece coordinate system to be set is G54 to G59, the local coordinate system offset value will be zero. (Only for the measured axis.) When the parameter "#8924 Meas. confirm msg" is "1", this menu is highlighted and the operation

message "OK?(Y/N)" appears. The measurement result is written as tool compensation amount by pressing [Y] or [INPUT] key. Even if other key is pressed, the result is not written. When this menu is pressed again while displaying the message, the highlighting is canceled and the operation mes- sage is erased.

This selects the displayed workpiece coordinate system from the sub-menu (G54 - G59). Select the workpiece coordinate system to display the selected workpiece coordinate system offset in the coordi- nate system offset section. (Perform the offset amount setting at the menu [Coord write].)

Input the P number to display the selected extended workpiece coordinate system (G54.1 Pn) offset in the coordinate system offset section. (Perform the offset amount setting at the menu [Coord write].) This menu is not displayed if the extended workpiece coordinate system offset specification is disabled.

This displays the external workpiece coordinate system offset in the coordinate system offset section. (Perform this setting at the menu [Coord write].)

This creates a false signal when performing simple measurement (measurement without using the touch probe) and reads the skip position. Press this menu to display the measurement position mea- sured from the machine position of the axis moved last (axis 1 or 2) at the measurement counter. The skip position cannot be read for an axis of auxiliary axis state.

This enables surface measurement. Surface measurement is possible when the power is turned ON.

This enables hole measurement. (The cursor moves to the measurement counter point A.)

This enables width measurement. (The cursor moves to the measurement counter point A.)

This enables rotation measurement. (The cursor moves to the measurement counter point A.)

This changes the axes displayed at the coordinate system offset and measurement position counter ev-

ery 5 axes.

This displays when the number of enabled axes is 6 or over.

This sets the center shift amount. (The cursor moves to the 1st axis of "C shift (S)" when this is select- ed.)

This sets the coordinate rotation center. (The cursor moves to the 1st axis of "Coord center" when this is selected.)

This sets the coordinate rotation angle. (The cursor moves to "Coord rot angle" when this is selected.)

Coord write

Coord G54-G59

Coord G54.1 P_

Coord EXT

SkipPos take in

Face meas

Hole meas

Width meas

Rotate measure

Next axis

Center shift

Rotate center

Rotate angle

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

207 IB-1501453-D

Details of the "Measurement counter" and "Guide drawing" display areas

Menus Measurement counter Guide graphic

Face meas

Hole meas

Width meas

Rotate measure

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

208IB-1501453-D

5.7.1.1 Carrying Out Surface Measurement

When carrying out surface measurement, the position of each axis is measured and the measurement results are set in the

workpiece coordinates system offset. The measurement position displays at the measurement counter.

Measurement counter X = X axis skip position + sensor radius (*1)

Measurement counter Y = Y axis skip position + sensor radius (*1)

Measurement counter Z = Z axis skip position - sensor length

(*1) The sign (+ and -) changes depending on the direction of the axis moved last.

Measurement counter X: X axis measurement position

Measurement counter Y: Y axis measurement position

Measurement counter Z: Z axis measurement position

Item Reference Sensor radius "#8702 Tool Dia"/2

Sensor length "#8701 Tool Length"

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Face meas].

(2) Perform the reference position return command, etc. to position the tool at the basic point.

(3) Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.

(4) Move the tool near the workpiece using manual feed and manual handle feed.

(5) Move the tool in the X-direction until the sensor con- tacts the workpiece.

Upon contact, the axis automatically contacts the work- piece again. The measurement position measured from the skip position displays in the measurement counter X axis section.

X

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

209 IB-1501453-D

5.7.1.2 Carrying Out Hole Measurement

For hole measurement, measure the measurement position coordinate of two axes (X and Y) at three points, calculate the

center of the hole, and set the result to the designated workpiece coordinate offset. The measurement position coordinate

is displayed on the measurement counter.

Measurement counter X = X axis skip position

Measurement counter Y = Y axis skip position

Measurement counter X = X axis machine position + center compensation (H) + skip past amount (Horizontal axis) (*1)

Measurement counter Y = Y axis machine position + center compensation (V) + skip past amount (Vertical axis) (*1)

(*1) The skip past amount is added for only the axis that moved last.

The sign ( + or - ) of the past amount depends on the movement direction of the axis.

(5) Move the tool in the X-direction to the arbitrary posi- tion and press the menu [SkipPos take in].

The skip position is calculated and the result displays in the measurement counter X axis section.

(6) Select the workpiece coordinate system offset in which the measurement data will be set. (Example) To select G55 Press the menus [Coord G54-G59] [G55].

(7) Press the menu [Coord write]. The value achieved by adding or subtracting the external workpiece offset to or from the X axis measurement po- sition based on the "#8709 Ext work sign rvs" is set in workpiece coordinate system selected at (6). The measurement counter displays blank.

(8) Carry out the operations in steps (4) to (7) in the same way for the Y and Z axes.

(9) Return the tool to the reference position, and turn the measurement switch OFF.

Item Reference Center compensation (H) "#8703 OFFSET X"

Center compensation (V) "#8704 OFFSET Y"

Skip past amount (H) "#8707 Skip past amout(H)"

Skip past amount (V) "#8708 Skip past amout(V)"

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

210IB-1501453-D

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Hole meas]. The menu is highlighted and the cursor displays at point

A. Use the [] or [] key to move to points B and C.

(2) Perform the reference position return command, etc. to position the tool at the basic point.

(3) Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.

(4) Move the tool into the hole using manual feed and manual handle feed.

(5) Position the tool against the inner wall of the hole. Contact is performed by moving a single axis.

Upon contact, the axis automatically contacts the work- piece again. The skip position displays in the measure- ment counter point A, X and Y axis section. The cursor moves to point B. For point C, the cursor moves to point A.

(5) Move the tool to the arbitrary position and press the menu [SkipPos take in].

The skip position is calculated and the result is displayed for X and Y axes in the measurement counter A. The cursor moves to point B. For point C, the cursor moves to point A.

(6) Measure points B and C in the same way.

(7) Select the workpiece coordinate system offset in which the measurement data will be set. (Example) To select G55 Press the menus [Coord G54-G59] [G55].

(8) Press the menu [Coord write]. The hole center position is measured, and based on the "#8709 Ext work sign rvs", value achieved by adding or subtracting the external workpiece to or from the mea- surement result is set in workpiece coordinate system selected at (7). The measurement counter displays blank.

(9) Return the tool to the reference position, and turn the measurement switch OFF.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

211 IB-1501453-D

5.7.1.3 Carrying Out Width Measurement

With width measurement, two points of the measurement position coordinate for each axis are measured, and then calcu-

lates the center between the points to set it as the workpiece coordinate offset. The measurement position displays at the

measurement counter.

Measurement counter X = X axis skip position

Measurement counter Y = Y axis skip position

Measurement counter Z = Z axis skip position - sensor length

Measurement counter X = X axis machine position + center compensation (H) + skip past amount (Horizontal axis) (*1)

Measurement counter Y = Y axis machine position + center compensation (V) + skip past amount (Vertical axis) (*1)

Measurement counter Z = Z axis machine position - sensor length

(*1) The skip past amount is added for only the axis that moved last.

The sign ( + or - ) of the past amount depends on the movement direction of the axis.

Item Reference Sensor length "#8701 Tool Length"

Center compensation (H) "#8703 OFFSET X"

Center compensation (V) "#8704 OFFSET Y"

Skip past amount (H) "#8707 Skip past amout(H)"

Skip past amount (V) "#8708 Skip past amout(V)"

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Width meas]. The menu is highlighted and the cursor displays at point

A. Use the [] or [] key to move to points A and B.

(2) Perform the reference position return command, etc. to position the tool at the basic point.

(3) Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.

(4) Move the tool to the center of the groove using man- ual feed or manual handle feed.

(5) Position the tool against the inner wall of the groove. Contact is performed by moving a single axis.

Upon contact, the axis automatically contacts the work- piece again. The skip position displays in the measure- ment counter point A. The cursor moves to point B. For point B, the cursor moves to point A.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

212IB-1501453-D

(5) Move the tool to the arbitrary position and press the menu [SkipPos take in].

The skip position is calculated and the results displays in the movement axis section of the measurement counter A point. The cursor moves to point B. For point B, the cursor moves to point A.

(6) Similarly, position the tool against the opposite side. Upon contact, the axis automatically contacts the work- piece again. The skip position displays in the measure- ment counter point B.

(7) Select the workpiece coordinate system offset in which the measurement data will be set. (Example) To select G55 Press the menus [Coord G54-G59] [G55].

(8) Press the menu [Coord write]. The width center position is measured, and based on the "#8709 Ext work sign rvs", value achieved by adding or subtracting the external workpiece offset to or from the measurement result is set in workpiece coordinate sys- tem offset G55 (coordinate system selected at (7)). The measurement counter displays blank.

(9) Carry out the operations in steps (4) to (8) in the same way for the Y and Z axes.

(10) Return the tool to the reference position, and turn the measurement switch OFF.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

213 IB-1501453-D

5.7.1.4 Carrying Out Rotation Measurement

When carrying out rotation measurement, the offset (rotation center and rotation angle) of the rotary coordinate system is

measured, and the results are set to the workpiece coordinate system offset (rotation center) and the parameters "#8623

Coord rot centr(H)", "#8624 Coord rot centr(V)", and "#8627 Coord rot angle".

Measurement counter X = X axis skip position

Measurement counter Y = Y axis skip position

Measurement counter X = X axis machine position + center compensation (H) + skip past amount (Horizontal axis) (*1)

Measurement counter Y = Y axis machine position + center compensation (V) + skip past amount (Vertical axis) (*1)

(*1) The skip past amount is added for only the axis that moved last.

The sign ( + or - ) of the past amount depends on the movement direction of the axis.

Item Reference Center compensation (H) "#8703 OFFSET X"

Center compensation (V) "#8704 OFFSET Y"

Skip past amount (H) "#8707 Skip past amout(H)"

Skip past amount (H) "#8708 Skip past amout(H)"

Operation method (Setting the center shift amount) (1) Press the menu [Rotate measure].

(2) Press the menu [Center shift].

(3) Input the center shift amount (Si). 10.000 [INPUT]

(4) Input the center shift amount (Sj). -5.000 [INPUT]

(5) Press the menu [Center shift].

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

214IB-1501453-D

The setting of the parameters "#8623 Coord rot centr(H)", "#8624 Coord rot centr(V)", and "#8627 Coord rot angle" can be

changed.

(1) Set the angle of the coordinate rotation in the same manner.

(*1) These parameter should be set to "0" to set the measured value to them.

If the value other than "0" has been set, an error occurs when writing to the coordinate system.

Operation method (Setting the center and angle of the coordinate rotation)

(1) Press the menu [Rotate measure].

(2) Press the menu [Rotate center].

(3) Input data in the 1st axis of "Coord center" column. 0 [INPUT]

(4) Input data in the 2nd axis of "Coord center" column. 0 [INPUT]

(5) Press the menu [Rotate center].

Operation method (Carrying out the rotation measurement using touch probe to set the measurement results to the workpiece coordinate offset)

(1) Press the menu [Rotate measure]. The menu is highlighted and the cursor displays at point A. The cursor can be moved to A, B, or C, using the [] or [] key.

(2) Set the parameter "#8116 Coord rot para invd" to "1" (invalid).

(3) Turn the manual absolute switch ON.

(4) Set the following parameters to "0". #8623 Coord rot centr(H) #8624 Coord rot centr(V) #8627 Coord rot angle (*1)

(5) Perform the reference position return command, etc. to position the tool at the basic point.

(6) Turn ON the measurement switch on the machine operation board.

(7) Referring to "Setting the center shift amount", set the center shift amount. This setting is not necessary if the coordinate rotation center is served as the workpiece coordinate zero point.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

215 IB-1501453-D

(8)

Make the spindle contact the workpiece using manu- al feed or manual handle feed.

Upon contact, the skip position displays in the measure- ment counter point A. The cursor moves to point B. For point C, the cursor moves to point A.

Move the spindle to the arbitrary position and press the menu [SkipPos take in].

The skip position is calculated and the results appear in the measurement counter point A. The cursor moves to point B. For point C, the cursor moves to point A.

(9) Measure points B and C in the same way.

(10) Select the workpiece coordinate system offset in which the measurement data will be set. (Example) To select G55 Press the menus [Coord G54-G59] [G55].

(11) Press the menu [Coord write]. The hole center position is measured. Based on the parameter "#8709 Ext work sign rvs" set- ting, the value achieved by adding or subtracting the ex- ternal workpiece offset to or from the measurement result is set in workpiece coordinate system selected at (10). The parameters "#8623 Coord rot centr(H)", "#8624 Co- ord rot centr(V)", and "#8627 Coord rot angle" are updat- ed. The measurement counter displays blank.

(12) Return the tool to the reference position, and turn the measurement switch OFF.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

216IB-1501453-D

5.7.1.5 Performing Automatic Recontact When Contacting the Workpiece

When performing workpiece position measurement in either the JOG or handle mode, the following operations (automatic

recontact) are performed after contacting the workpiece.

The return speed for (3) and (6) is 40 times the measurement parameter feedrate (#8706). However, if the return speed is

faster than rapid traverse rate (override 100%), the rapid traverse rate will become the return speed.

(1) Moves to the measurement point using either the JOG or handle mode.

(2) Stops at the measurement point.

(3) Returns by the measurement parameter return amount (#8705).

(4) Moves to measurement point again at the measure- ment parameter feedrate (#8706).

(5) Stops at the measurement point. (The skip position is read.)

(6) Returns by the measurement parameter return amount (#8705).

(7) The next measurement can be performed after auto- matically contacting the workpiece again.

Skip

Return amount

Skip

Return amount

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

217 IB-1501453-D

5.7.2 Workpiece Measurement (L System)

The external workpiece coordinate offset data for the Z axis can be set by cutting the workpiece face by means of manual

operations and inputting the workpiece measurement signal. By pressing the menu key, data can be set in the Z axis of an

arbitrary coordinate offset.

Coordinate offset setting for the Z axis (2nd axis) of the part system 1 to 4 is possible.

Note that the workpiece coordinate offsets for multiple part systems cannot be measured at the same time.

For signals and R registers, refer to the instruction manual issued by the MTB.

(1) Measurement is disabled for the part system with one-axis structure.

Example of measurement of external workpiece coordinate offset data for Z axis

Manual numerical value command can be executed when manual numerical value command window is displayed by input-

ting an address key such as MST, etc.

Note

Z axis

Workpiece coordinate zero point

Machine zero point

Workpiece

X axis

Tool post

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3) (6)

(5)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

218IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) External workpiece co-

ordinate offset This displays the external workpiece coordinate offset.

When the workpiece measurement signal is input, the measurement result is set to

2nd axis of the external workpiece coordinate.

The 5th axis and following are not displayed.

(2) Tool L offset num This displays the compensation No. of tool length data used by automatic calculation.

If an illegal value is set, the value is blank. ("0" is displayed.)

(3) Wear offset num This displays the compensation No. of tool nose wear data used by automatic calcu-

lation.

If an illegal value is set or tool nose wear data is not used for measurement ("#1226 aux10/bit0" is 1), the value is blank. ("0" is displayed.)

(4) Coordinate system off- set

This displays the coordinate system offset in which the measurement result is written

when the menu [MeasVal take in] is pressed. G54 is displayed in default.

When the menu [MeasVal take in] is pressed, the measurement result is set to 2nd

axis of the external workpiece coordinate.

The 5th axis and following are not displayed. The display of coordinate system offset area is switched by page up/down keys.

For details, refer to "5.8.4 Changing the Coordinate System Display".

(5) On mea When the measurement switch is ON and the operation mode is manual mode (han- dle, jog, rapid traverse, or step), "On mea" is displayed, and the workpiece can be measured by the workpiece measurement signal.

(6) Guide graphic This displays the measurement area.

Menus

Menus Details This selects the coordinate system offset which sets the measurement value when [MeasVal take in] is executed from sub-menu (G54 - G59). The workpiece coordinate system offset data is displayed after selected. However, the cursor is not displayed and the data cannot be set.

This selects the coordinate system offset which sets the measurement value when [MeasVal take in] is executed. Input the P No. to display the selected external workpiece coordinate system (G54.1 Pn) off- set in the coordinate system offset area. However, the cursor is not displayed and the data cannot be set. If the extended workpiece coordinate system offset specification is invalid, this menu is grayed out and non-selectable.

This measures G54 - G59 and G54.1Pn. When this menu is pressed, the workpiece coordinate offset data is calculated from the machine coordinate, the used tool length, the tool nose wear compensation amount and the external workpiece coordinate offset, and the data is stored in Z axis of the selected coordinate system offset.

Coord G54-G59

Coord G54.1 P_

MeasVal take in

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

219 IB-1501453-D

Operation method (When the workpiece measurement signal is used) (1) Execute the reference position return. The coordinate system is established.

If the workpiece is measured without establishing the reference position return, the operation mes- sage "Meas axis not returned to ref. position" ap- pears.

(2) Set the mode selection switch to the manual mode (handle, jog, rapid traverse, or step).

(3) Set the tool length measurement signal to "1".

(4) Select whether to measure the workpiece coordinate on the main spindle side or sub-spindle side by using tool presetter sub-side valid signal.

Hold the state of this signal until the measure- ment with the selected tool is completed.

(5) Issue the T command with MDI operation, etc. The tool is selected.

Set the selected tool compensation No. in R regis- ter. The set R register differs according to parame- ter setting and the state of the tool presetter sub- side valid signal. Set the "tool length/wear data" for the tool being

used beforehand.

(6) Cut the workpiece face slightly to even it.

Do not move the tool in the Z axis direction after cutting the workpiece face. If the workpiece does not need to be cut, carry

out positioning to the measurement position.

(7) Input the workpiece measurement signal. The Z axis external workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated from the tool compensation data of the used tool and the machine value at the point this signal is input. The results are set as the data.

(8) Set the tool length measurement signal to OFF.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

220IB-1501453-D

Operation method (When the menu [MeasVal take in] is used) (1) Execute the reference position return. The coordinate system is established.

If the workpiece is measured without establishing the reference position return, the operation mes- sage "Meas axis not returned to ref. position" ap- pears.

(2) Set the mode selection switch to the manual mode (handle, jog, rapid traverse, or step).

(3) Select an arbitrary coordinate system offset. The designated coordinate system offset is selected.

When switching to an arbitrary coordinate system offset display, press one of these menus; [Coord G54 - G59] [Coord G54.1P] or page key.

(4) Select whether to measure the workpiece coordinate on the main spindle side or sub-spindle side by using tool presetter sub-side valid signal.

Hold the state of this signal until the measure- ment with the selected tool is completed.

(5) Issue the T command with MDI operation, etc. The tool is selected.

Set the selected tool compensation No. in R regis- ter. The set R register differs according to parame- ter setting and the state of the tool presetter sub- side valid signal. Set the "tool length/wear data" for the tool being

used beforehand.

(6) Cut the workpiece face slightly to even it.

Do not move the tool in the Z axis direction after cutting the workpiece face. If the workpiece does not need to be cut, carry

out positioning to the measurement position.

(7) Press the menu [MeasVal take in]. The workpiece measurement is executed. The operation message "OK?(Y/N)" appears, so press the [Y] or [INPUT]. The Z axis external workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated from the tool compensation data of the used tool and the machine value at the point this signal is input. The results are set as the data.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

221 IB-1501453-D

The external workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated with the following expression.

The tool compensation data used for the measurement is selected with the parameter "#1226 aux10/bit0".

The workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated with the following expression.

The calculation formula changes depending on the parameter "#8709 Ext work sign rvs".

When "#8709" is "0":

When "#8709" is "1":

The tool compensation data used for the measurement is selected with the parameter "#1226 aux10/bit0".

Details of automatic calculation formula (When the workpiece measurement signal is used)

External workpiece coordinate offset = Machine coordinate value - Tool compensation data

#1226 aux10/bit0 Tool compensation data 0 Tool length data + nose wear data

1 Tool length data

Details of automatic calculation formula (When the menu [MeasVal take in] is used)

Workpiece coordinate offset = Machine coordinate value - External workpiece coordinate offset - Tool compensa- tion data

Workpiece coordinate offset = Machine coordinate value + External workpiece coordinate offset - Tool compensa- tion data

#1226 aux10/bit0 Tool compensation data 0 Tool length data + nose wear data

1 Tool length data

Tool compensation amount

External workpiece coordinate offset

Machine value

Tool rest Basic machine coordinate zero point

Workpiece coordinate zero point

Tool compensation amount

Workpiece coordinate offset External workpiece

coordinate offset

Basic machine coordinate zero point

Machine value

Tool rest

Workpiece coordinate zero point

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

222IB-1501453-D

For the compensation No. of the tool length and tool nose wear data used by automatic calculation, the No. set in R register

in the following table is used.

(1) When the compensation No. is 0, the compensation amount will be calculated as "0".

(2) If the compensation No. exceeds the number of specified offset sets, the operation message "Offset No. not found" ap- pears. However, when the workpiece measurement screen is not displayed, the message will not appear.

(3) If the input data exceeds the setting range, the operation message "Data range error" appears. However, when the workpiece measurement screen is not displayed, the message will not appear.

(4) If the data protection is valid, the operation message "Data protect" appears. However, when the workpiece measurement screen is not displayed, the message will not appear.

(5) Whether to use the main side or sub-side is selected with the tool presetter sub-side valid signal. (OFF: Main side, ON: Sub-side) However, when the workpiece measurement screen is not displayed, the message will not appear.

(6) Set the compensation No. in R register by the BCD code.

The selected tool compensation No.

#1098 Tlno. #1130 set_t #1218 aux02 / bit4

Tool L offset num Wear offset num Main side Sub-side Main side Sub-side

0 0/1 0/1 R2600, R2601 R2604, R2605 R2600, R2601 R2604, R2605

1 0 0 R536, R537

1 R2602, R2603 R2606, R2607

1 0/1

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

223 IB-1501453-D

5.8 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System Offset

The coordinate system offset controlled by the NC can be set and displayed on the monitor (Monitr) screen or the Setup

screen.

Depending on the specifications, the number of coordinate system offset sets can be increased by 48, 96, or 300 sets.

(1) The G92/G52 coordinate system offset cannot be set.

Manual numerical value command can be executed when manual numerical value command window is displayed by input-

ting an address key such as MST, etc.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Coordinate system off-

set area This sets and displays the offset amount for the workpiece coordinate system (G54 - G59), or the extended workpiece coordi- nate system (G54.1Pn). Use the menu operation or page up/down keys to specify which workpiece coordi- nate system offset to display or set.

The workpiece coordinate system offset data can be set in absolute or incremmen- tal mode.

(2) EXT offset area This displays or sets the offset data for the external workpiece system.

(3) G92/G52 offset area This displays the offset amount for G92 or the local coordinate system. The offset amount of the corresponding local coordinate system (G52) is displayed only when the cursor is at G54 to G59.

Setup Coord

Monitr Coord

Note

(1)

(2)

(3)

Basic machine coordinate system

External workpiece coordinate system

G55 workpiece coordinate system

G54 workpiece coordinate system

Reference position

M

R

W2

W1

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

224IB-1501453-D

CAUTION If the tool compensation amount or workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during automatic oper- ation (including during single block stop), the changes will be valid from the command in the next block or after sev- eral subsequent blocks.

Menus

Menus Details This executes an absolute input.

When "#8929 Disable=INPUT:comp" is set to "1", this menu cannot be selected.

This executes an incremental input.

This sets the workpiece coordinate system offset so that the current machine coordinate becomes the workpiece coordinate zero point. Only the axis at the cursor position is set. When "#8935 W COORD CONFIRM" is set to "1", a operation message is displayed, and the menu is highlighted.

This displays the G54 - G59 workpiece coordinate system offset amount. The cursor moves to the G54 offset. This menu can be used when the G54 - G59 offsets are not displayed.

Enter the P number displayed at the screen to display the extended workpiece coordinate (G54.1 Pn) offset in the coordinate system offset area. This menu is not displayed if the extended workpiece coor- dinate system offset specification is disabled. If the local coordinate system offset (G52) displays in the G92/G52 area, the display changes to G92.

This displays the G92 or G52 coordinate system offset amount. The G92 offset data is always displayed when the cursor is not at the G54 to G59 offset data.

Coordinate system offset

All coordinate system offset amounts for all axes are erased with the exception of G92 and EXT.

Coordinate system offset

This erases the local offset data for all axes corresponding to the offset data of the coordinate system where the cursor is located.

This changes the axes displayed at the coordinate system offset and measurement position counter ev-

ery five axes.

This displays when there are 6 or more axes.

=Input

+Input

Easy setting

G54-G59

G54.1 P

Coord G92/G52

All clear

All axs clear

Next axis

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

225 IB-1501453-D

5.8.1 Setting the Coordinate System Offset Amount

(1) It is possible to perform incremental input by pressing the menu [+Input] key instead of the [INPUT] key or the menu [=Input]. (Example) If the original data is 122.000: 1.234 [+Input] -> 122.000 + 1.234 = 123.234

Set the external coordinate system offset amount to keep the current workpiece coordinate system offset amounts from

G54 to G59, and also apply an offset to the entire system.

Furthermore, it is also possible to use the data transfer function to write data directly to the external coordinate system offset

(EXT). (Refer to "Chapter 11 Performing a Backup Operation" for details of the data transfer function.)

Operation method (Setting the workpiece coordinate system G54 - G59 offset amount) (1) Press the menu [G54-G59]. The G54 - G59 workpiece coordinate system offset dis-

plays.

(2) Use the ( ) keys to move the cursor to the

workpiece coordinate system offset to be set.

Use the and page keys to change the co-

ordinate system display. Refer to "Changing the coordinate system offset us-

ing the page up/down keys (previous page: ,

next page: )" in "5.8.4 Changing the Coordinate

System Display" for details.)

(3) Use the [] or [] key to move the cursor to the axis for which data is to be set.

(4) Set the offset amount.

122 [INPUT]

The value can also be designated by pressing the menu [=Input] instead of the [INPUT] key.

(5) Set other data using the same method.

Setting the external coordinate system offset amount

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

226IB-1501453-D

5.8.2 Erasing the Coordinate System Offset Amount

(1) G92 data cannot be erased.

5.8.3 Setting the Workpiece Coordinate Origin

Press the menu [Easy setting] to set the coordinate system offset so that the current machine position (for all axes) be-

comes the workpiece coordinate origin. It is only possible to set those axes where the cursor is located.

If the menu [Easy setting] is pressed when there is the cursor in coordinate system offset (G54 to G59), the local offset

(G52) data of the axis will be also erased.

Operation method (Erasing the coordinate system (excluding G92) offset amount where the cursor is displayed for all axes.)

(1) Press the menu [All axs clear]. A message displays confirming whether it is okay to erase the data.

(2) Press the [Y] key. All of the coordinate system indicated by the cursor is cleared to zero. In addition, all axes data of the local offset (G52) for the coordinate system will be erased.

Operation method (Erasing all axis offset data of all coordinate systems (excluding G92 and EXT)) (1) Press the menu [All clear]. A message displays confirming whether it is okay to

erase the data.

(2) Press the [Y] key. All coordinate system data is erased. In addition, all axes data of the local offset (G52) for the G54 to G59 coordinate systems will be erased.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

227 IB-1501453-D

5.8.4 Changing the Coordinate System Display

The counter on which the cursor is displayed can be switched using the tab keys as shown below.

The coordinate system offset display can be switched using the page changeover keys as shown below.

The additional specification is required for the G54.P1 - P300 workpiece coordinate system offset display.

Using the tab keys ( / ) to change cursor position

Using the page changeover keys (previous page: , next page: ) to change counter display

G54 G55 G56

EXT G92

G54 G55 G56

G57 G58 G59

G54.P1 G54.P2 G54.P3

G54.P4 G54.P5 G54.P6

G54.P7 G54.P8 G54.P9

PAGE

PAGE

Coordinate system display

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

228IB-1501453-D

5.9 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System Shift

This function allows you to shift the workpiece coordinate system.

Workpiece coordinate system that is created at the machining program creation may not match to the coordinate system

that actually programmed or programmed by automatic coordinate system setting. This function allows you to machine with-

out changing the machining program by shifting from the measured coordinate system to the coordinate system that is as-

sumed when the program is created. In addition, workpiece can be machined using the same program even if their shapes

are changed.

The workpiece coordinate system shift value can be designated by manual setting or automatic setting.

Manual setting: Allows you to directly input the workpiece coordinate system shift value from the workpiece coordinate sys-

tem shift screen or select the menu [Measure] to designate the workpiece coordinate system shift value.

Automatic setting: Allows you to designate the workpiece coordinate system shift value with the workpiece measurement

signal.

The manual setting and automatic setting to designate the workpiece coordinate system shift value using the menu [Mea-

sure] are additional specifications.

When this function is enabled, the menu [W-shift] is displayed on the monitor (Monitr) screen. If the menu [W-meas] is se-

lected on the setup (Setup) screen, the setting screen for the workpiece coordinate system shift screen is displayed.

(1) When this function is disabled, the menu [W-shift] is not displayed on the monitor (Monitr) screen. If the menu [W-meas] is selected on the setup (Setup) screen, the external workpiece setting screen is displayed.

Set the shift value to O'- O as the shift value of the workpiece coordinate system shift value.

X' - Z': Measured coordinate system

X - Z: Coordinate system established when the program is created

Monitr W-shift

Setup W-meas

Note

Z

Z

X

X

O

O

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

229 IB-1501453-D

X - Z: Coordinate system established when the program is created

wk_z: The degree of change of the workpiece shape

Z

X

O

wk_z wk_z

O O Z Z

X X

O

Workpiece shape during program creation

Workpiece shape during actual machining

Set "wk_z" in the workpiece coordinate system shift value.

(7)

(5)

(6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

230IB-1501453-D

(*1) If an illegal value is set, the value is blank ("0" is displayed).

(*2) If an illegal value is set or tool nose wear data is not used for measurement (parameter "#1226 aux10/bit0" is "1"), the

value is blank ("0" is displayed).

(*3) When the workpiece coordinate offset measurement specification is invalid, the value is not displayed during measure-

ment even if the measurement switch is set ON.

(*4) To display the 9th axis and after, use the menu [Next axis].

Display items

Display items Details (1) Tool L offset num This displays the compensation No. of the tool length data used in the automatic set-

ting. (*1)

(2) Wear offset num This displays the compensation No. of the tool nose wear data used in the automatic setting. (*2)

(3) On mea When the measurement switch is ON and the operation mode is manual mode (han- dle, jog, rapid traverse, or step), "On mea" is displayed, and the workpiece can be measured by the workpiece coordinate system shift write mode signal. (*3)

(4) Guide graphic This displays the measurement area.

(5) Work shift value This displays the currently designated workpiece coordinate system shift value. (*4) The initial cursor position is located at the 1st axis in all part systems. If the cursor position is changed using cursor movement keys or the menu [Next axis], it is held until the program is placed into the following status. Monitor screen: The cursor position is not held. Setup screen: The cursor position is held until the power is turned on again.

(6) Meas posn The measurement position (machine position - tool length compensation amount of the T-commanded tool) is displayed. (*4)

(7) Input section This displays the input data.

(7)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

231 IB-1501453-D

Menus

Menus Details This executes an absolute input. When the parameter "#8929 Disable=INPUT:comp" is set to "1", this menu is disabled.

This executes an incremental input.

The workpiece coordinate system shift value is measured.

This changes the workpiece shift value and the axes displayed at the measurement position on a 8-axis

basis. The cursor of the workpiece shift value then jumps to the top row.

When nine or more axes are included in a part system, this menu is enabled.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Menus Details This executes an absolute input. When the parameter "#8929 Disable=INPUT:comp" is set to "1", this menu is disabled.

This executes an incremental input.

The workpiece coordinate system shift value is measured.

This changes the workpiece shift value and the axes displayed at the measurement position on a 8-axis

basis. The cursor of the workpiece shift value then jumps to the top row.

When nine or more axes are included in a part system, this menu is enabled.

=Input

+Input

Measure

Next axis

Close

=Input

+Input

Measure

Next axis

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

232IB-1501453-D

5.9.1 Manually Setting the Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Value

(1) If the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" (Tool compensation amount setting during automatic operation enabled) is set to "1", the workpiece coordinate system shift value can also be designated in the automatic operation mode or op- eration pause mode.

(1) If the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" (Tool compensation amount setting during automatic operation enabled) is set to "1", the workpiece coordinate system shift value can also be designated in the automatic operation mode or op- eration pause mode.

Operation method (Set the absolute position "10.000" to the workpiece coordinate system shift value of the Z axis (2nd axis) on the Monitor screen.)

(1) This displays the workpiece coordinate system shift. Press the menu [W-shift]. Press the menu [W-meas].

The workpiece coordinate system shift screen is dis- played.

(2) Use the [] or [] key to move the cursor onto the Z axis.

The cursor moves to the Z axis.

(3) Designate the workpiece coordinate system shift val- ue. 10 [INPUT] The value can also be designated by pressing the menu [=Input] instead of the [INPUT] key.

The designated value appears. The cursor moves to the next axis.

Operation method (Add the value "1.234" to the workpiece coordinate system shift value of the C axis (3rd axis) on the Monitor screen.)

(1) This displays the workpiece coordinate system shift. Press the menu [W-shift]. Press the menu [W-meas].

The workpiece coordinate system shift screen is dis- played.

(2) Use the [] or [] key to move the cursor onto the C axis.

(3) Input a numeric value. 1.234 [+Input]

The input value added to the original value is displayed. (Example) When the original value is set to "10.000", "10.000 + 1.234 = 11.234" is displayed.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

233 IB-1501453-D

Operation method (Measure the workpiece coordinate system shift value of the Z axis (2nd axis) on the Monitor screen.)

(1) Select the basic tool used to measure the workpiece shift value with the manual numerical value com- mand. T1003 The T command can also be issued with MDI opera- tion, etc. If one block contains multiple T commands, the last T command is used as the selected tool.

The Manual numerical value command screen is dis- played, and tool 1003 is selected.

(2) This displays the workpiece coordinate system shift. Press the menu [W-shift]. Press the menu [W-meas].

The workpiece coordinate system shift screen is dis- played.

(3) Select the "Manual handle feed" mode or "Jog feed" mode.

(4) Select the Z axis, and manually move the tool to the work end face (program origin).

(5) Input the name of the axis to be measured, and the measurement value from the workpiece to the tool nose. Z0.

When you input "Z0", the cursor moves to the Z axis col- umn. Value "Z0." is displayed in the input column. If you input an axis name that does not exist, the cursor does not move. The second and subsequent characters are not consid- ered to be the axis name and, therefore, the cursor does not move. (Example: If you enter "XZ", the cursor is moved on the X axis, but the cursor does not move on the Z axis.)

(6) Press the menu [Measure]. The measurement result is set to the workpiece coordi- nate system shift value pointed by the cursor. The input column is cleared.

Machine zero point

Jog or

handle feed

Workpiece

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

234IB-1501453-D

The measurement result is calculated in the following formula.

When the parameter "#8709 Ext work sign rvs" is set to "0":

When the parameter "#8709 Ext work sign rvs" is set to "1":

Select the tool compensation data used for the measurement with the parameter "#1226 aux10/bit0".

(1) If the parameter "#11017 T-ofs set at run" (Tool compensation amount setting during automatic operation enabled) is set to "1", the tool compensation amount data can be input in the automatic operation mode or operation pause mode.

(2) If you press the menu [Measure] while the axis name designated in the input section is different from that pointed at the cursor, the operation message "Setting error" is displayed.

5.9.2 Automatically Setting the Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Value

Carry out the automatic setting for the workpiece coordinate system shift value using the workpiece measurement signal.

The PLC device is set to the value of the 1st part system. For information on how to carry out automatic setting in another

part system, refer to "PLC Interface Manual".

Measurement result = (Machine position of Z axis) - (Tool length compensation data of T-command tool) - (Input value)

Measurement result = (Machine position of Z axis) - (Tool compensation data of T-command tool) * (-1) - (Input value)

#1226 aux10/bit0 Tool compensation data 0 Tool length data + nose wear data

1 Tool length data

Operation method

(1) Carry out the reference position return. If the workpiece is measured without establishing the reference position return, the operation message "Meas axis not returned to ref. position" appears. However, when the setup workpiece coordinate sys- tem shift screen is not displayed, the message will not appear.

After the power is turned on, carry out the dog-type ref- erence position return, and establish the coordinate sys- tem. In the absolute position detection specification, config- ure the initial setting in advance if the absolute position is not established.

(2) Select the mode. Set the mode selection switch to the manual mode (han- dle, jog, rapid traverse, or step).

(3) Input the tool measurement mode signal (YC21). Set the tool length measurement signal to "1". "On mea" is displayed on the setup workpiece coordinate system shift screen.

(4) Select the main or sub part system. Select whether to measure the workpiece coordinate system shift value on the main spindle side or sub-spin- dle side by using tool presetter sub-side valid signal (YCDA). Hold the status of this signal until the workpiece coordi- nate system shift value measurement with the selected tool is completed.

(5) Select a tool. Issue the T command by MDI operation, etc., then select tool.Set the selected tool compensation No. in R register.

The set R register differs according to parameter set- ting and the state of the tool presetter sub-side valid signal. Set the "tool length/wear data" for the tool be- ing used beforehand.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

235 IB-1501453-D

The workpiece coordinate system shift value is automatically calculated with the following expression:

When the parameter "#8709 Ext work sign rvs" is set to "0":

When the parameter "#8709 Ext work sign rvs" is set to "1":

Select the tool compensation data used for the measurement with the parameter "#1226 aux10/bit0".

The compensation number of the tool length and nose wear data used for automatic calculation is determined by the PLC ladder.

When the compensation No. is 0, the compensation amount will be calculated as "0". If the compensation No. exceeds the number of specified offset sets, the operation message "Offset No. not

found" appears. However, when the setup workpiece coordinate system shift screen is not displayed, the mes- sage will not appear. If the input data exceeds the setting range, the operation message "Data range error" appears. However, when

the setup workpiece coordinate system shift screen is not displayed, the message will not appear. If the data protection is valid, the operation message "Data protect" appears. However, when the setup workpiece

coordinate system shift screen is not displayed, the message will not appear. Measurement is disabled for the part system with one-axis structure. The operation message "Can't measure" is

displayed. However, when the setup workpiece coordinate system shift screen is not displayed, the message will not appear. Whether to use the main side or sub-side is selected with the tool presetter sub-side valid signal (YCDA). (OFF:

Main side, ON: Sub-side)

(1) When the automatic setting is carried out for the workpiece coordinate system shift value without displaying the setup workpiece coordinate system shift screen, the message is not displayed even if an error occurs.

(6) Cut the workpiece face. If the workpiece does not need to be cut, carry out positioning to the measurement position.

If the workpiece face is not cut, cut the workpiece face slightly to even it. Do not move the tool in the Z axis direction after cutting the workpiece face.

(7) Input the workpiece measurement signal (Y9E1). Input the workpiece measurement signal. The Z axis ex- ternal workpiece coordinate offset data is automatically calculated from the tool compensation data of the used tool and the machine value at the point this signal is in- put. The results are set as the data.

Workpiece coordinate system shift amount = Machine coordinate value - Tool compensation data

Workpiece coordinate system shift value = -(Machine coordinate value - Tool compensation data) * (-1)

#1226 aux10/bit0 Tool compensation data 0 Tool length data + nose wear data

1 Tool length data

(8) Set the tool length measurement signal to OFF.

Select the tool compensation data used for the mea-

surement with the parameter "#1226 aux10/bit0".

The measurement of the workpiece coordinate system shift value is completed.

Precautions

C80 Series Instruction Manual 5 Setting a Tool and a Workpiece

236IB-1501453-D

6

237 IB-1501453-D

Setting Parameters

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

238IB-1501453-D

6Setting Parameters The parameters contain the user and machine parameters.

This chapter explains the details and operations for the user parameters on the Setup screen.

Refer to "Alarm/Parameter Manual" for details of each parameter.

Parameters can be set on the maintenance (Mainte) screen.

6.1 Setting User Parameters

Press the menu [User] on the Setup screen to display various user parameters.

Display example by part system (Switch the part system using the key.)

Display example by axis (Switch the fourth axis and after on the menu [Next axis].)

Setup User

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

239 IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) Parameter display area Press the parameter selection menu [Process param] or [Hi-prec param] etc. to

change the parameter display contents. The screen layout can be switched by part system (with [$] key) or by axis.

(2) Input section The set key displays. Press the [INPUT] key to set the display data in the parameter where the cursor is located.

Menus

Menus Details This changes the display of each parameter type.

The barrier data appears only for L system. [Menu select] is displayed only when the parameter "#11032 Menu sel para lkof " (Menu select

param setting enabled) is set to "1" or "2".

This selects an arbitrary parameter number. Set the parameter number and press the [INPUT] key to move that number to the top and display the parameter. The cursor also moves to that number.

This copies the parameter setting values in the designated range. The range is designated with num- bers.

This pastes the range of parameters designated in area copy. They are pasted in a parameter corre-

sponding to the axis or part system where the cursor is. Once copied, a parameter can be pasted any

number of times until a new parameter is copied.

This can be selected if the total number of part system display axes is 4 or more. This is used at the parameter screen with the array structure for each axis.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Process param

Fix Cycle

Ctrl param 1

Ctrl param 2

Ethrnet param

Axis param

Barrier data

Hi-prec param

Hi-prec axis

Operate param

Menu select

Para No search

Area copy

Area paste

Next axis

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

240IB-1501453-D

6.1.1 Selecting the Parameter Number

There are two switching methods to display a screen by designating the parameter No. Use the parameter "#8975 No.

search process" to switch the operation

(1) When the parameter "#8975 No. search process" is set to "1" and the cursor is at the parameter to be echoed back, the set value is displayed in the input column. Delete the set value in the input column, and then perform the menu [Para No search] operation.

Operation method ("#8975 No. search process" is "0") (Select "#1041 Initial inch") (1) Press the menu [Para No search].

(2) Enter a parameter No. to be displayed, and then press the [INPUT] key.

"#1041 Initial inch" is displayed at the head. The cursor moves to "#1041 Initial inch".

1041 [INPUT]

Operation method ("#8975 No. search process" is "1") (Select "#1041 Initial inch") (1) Enter a parameter No. to be displayed.

1041

(2) Press the menu [Para No search]. "#1041 Initial inch" is displayed at the head. The cursor moves to "#1041 Initial inch".

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

241 IB-1501453-D

6.1.2 Setting the Parameters

The method of setting the parameters is explained. Refer to "Alarm/Parameter Manual" for details of each parameter setting

range.

(1) When a parameter is changed and [PR] displays at the top of the screen, reboot the machine to enable that parameter change.

(2) When the [INPUT] key is pressed without inputting a value, the parameter setting value is not changed, and the cursor moves.

(3) Parameters that can be set simultaneously must display within the currently displayed three columns.

(4) If parameter values are simultaneously input in multiple columns, settings are made from the currently displayed column on the left side, no matter which column the cursor is positioned.

Operation method (Normal) (Set "100" for Y1 axis of "#2001 rapid") (1) Press the menu [Hi-prec axis].

(2) Use the [], [], [|] and [|] keys to move the cursor to the setting position.

(3) Input the value.

100 [INPUT]

Operation method (Batch data setting) (Set "4000" for Y1 axis and "3000" for Z1 axis for "#2002 clamp") (1) Press the menu [Hi-prec axis].

(2) Use the [], [] keys to move the cursor to the setting position.

(3) Input the value.

Input format: 1st column/2nd column/3rd column

/4000/3000 [INPUT]

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

242IB-1501453-D

6.1.3 Copying and Pasting Parameters

Parameters can be copied and pasted in a parameter with the same number for another axis or part system.

(1) The selected area color of the copied area returns to normal when the copied data is pasted. However, the copied range can still be pasted until the parameter type display is changed.

(2) Only the currently displayed parameter type can be copied.

(1) If the relevant parameter is changed after specifying the range to be copied, the value after the change is pasted.

Operation method (Specifying and copying the parameter where the cursor is located) (1) Press the menu [Area copy].

(2) Move the cursor to the position of the parameter to be copied and press the [INPUT] key.

Operation method (Copying parameter numbers in a specific range) (1) Move the cursor to the display area of the axis or part

system to be copied.

(2) Press the menu [Area copy].

(3) Designate the copy range. Format: First No./Last No. 8701/8705 [INPUT]

An "E" can be used if the last number to be copied is the last number in the currently displayed parameter type. (Example) 8701/E

Operation method (Pasting the copied parameters) (1) Move the cursor to the axis or part system display

area where the data will be pasted.

(2) Press the menu [Area paste].

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. The copied data is written to the parameter with the same number in the area where the cursor is positioned.

The copied data is not written in when the [N] key is pressed.

The menu highlight returns to normal.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

243 IB-1501453-D

6.1.4 Parameter Configuration

The parameter number range and permissible operations for all parameter types are shown below.

(*1) This is valid only when the total number of valid NC axes and PLC axes in the entire part system is four or more.

(*2) This is valid only when the total number of valid NC axes and PLC axes in the entire part system is two or more.

(*3) This is valid only when the number of valid part systems is two or more.

(*4) The barrier data appears only for L system.

6.1.5 Echoback

Some parameters (e.g. #1953 used for IP address setting) echo back their setting value in the input area when they are

selected. You can reset the echo backed value.

6.1.6 Ethernet parameter

If the Ethernet parameter "Host 1 password" to "Host 4 password" is set, "********" displays regardless of the password char-

acters set in that data field.

6.1.7 Precautions

When the data protection is valid, the value cannot be set (including paste operation) for the high-accuracy control param-

eters (part system based) and high-accuracy control axis parameters.

: Can be used : Operable under certain conditions (Refer to the section below for conditions.)

Parameter type Menu [Next axis] System change key Menu [Area copy] Menu [Area paste] Fixed cycle parameter - (*3) (*3) (*3)

Fixed cycle - (*3) (*3) (*3)

Control parameter 1 - - - -

Control parameter 2 - (*3) (*3) (*3)

Ethernet parameter - - - -

Axis parameter (*1) - (*2) (*2)

Barrier data (*4) - (*3)

High-accuracy control pa- rameter

- (*3) (*3) (*3)

High-accuracy control axis parameter

(*1) - (*2) (*2)

Operation parameter - - - -

Menu selection parameter - - - -

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

244IB-1501453-D

6.2 Selecting High-accuracy Control Parameters (Machining Cond I Screen)

A machining which meets the machining purpose or machining process can be performed by switching the high-accuracy

parameter set according to the machining object on the Machining cond (MacCond) screen.

Multiple sets of high-accuracy parameter (parameter related to the high-accuracy control) can be configured in advance for

each machining purpose (such as parts machining or die machining) and machining process (such as rough or finishing).

Procedure for using this function is as follows:

(1) Initializing the machining condition parameter set

Initializing the machining condition parameter set in the "Machining cond" screen Initializing the machining condition parameter set by data input/output

(2) Setting the machining condition parameter set

Set the total of nine sets of machining condition parameter sets of "three applications x three conditions" in the "Ma- chining cond" screen

(3) Switching the machining condition parameter set

Switching the machining condition parameter set in the "Machining cond" screen Switching the machining condition parameter set by G code command in the machining program

MTB password is required for operating this screen.

Machining condition selection I screen

Setup MacCond

(2) (3)

(5)

(6)

(1)

(4)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

245 IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) During machining

condition Displays the applications and conditions used for the current machining. This shows No. 0 through 3 of the machining applications and conditions, which you have selected on the [Machining condition selection] screen or switched with a G code command. While standard parameter is being selected, "0" is displayed on the applications and con- ditions.

(2) Application name Displays the application name set in the menu [AppName set] in the "Machining cond screen".

(3) Application Displays Application 1 to 3.

(4) Ref. param "Set" is displayed in this column while the standard parameter is being selected.

(5) Machining condition parameter set

Displays the machining condition parameter set of application 1 to 3. "Set" is displayed in the column of the selected machining condition parameter set.

(6) Set "Set" is displayed in the column of the selected machining condition parameter set. It will not update if an application/condition is switched by G code command. It will update when selected on the machining condition selection screen.

Menus

Menus Details Switches machining condition to standard parameter. After the menu is highlighted and the cursor moves to standard parameter, the confirmation message "Change to standard parameters?(Y/N)" will appear. If you press [Y] (or [INPUT]), the status of standard parameter changes to "Set". If you press any key other than [Y] (or [INPUT]), it will be canceled. The cursor will remain on standard parameter even when canceled.

Changes to the "Machining cond" screen.

MTB password is required for the maintenance screen.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Std prm select

Cond set

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

246IB-1501453-D

Machining condition setting screen

The machining condition parameter to be displayed is switched by enabling or disabling tolerance control.

(1)

(2)

(5)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

247 IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) Application Displays the application being set.

To change to the next machining purpose, press the menu [App change]. When machining purpose being selected, the background is emphasized in red. The background is not highlighted while the Standard parameter is selected.

(2) Parameter No. Displays the number of a standard parameter.

(3) Parameter name Displays the name of a standard parameter.

(4) Ref. param Displays the value of the standard parameter designated on the parameter screen.

This item is not displayed when the machining parameter "#12066 Tolerance ctrl ON"

is set to "0".

"#2659 tolerance" indicates the setting value of the 1st axis in the 1st part system.

(5) Machining condition parameter set

Displays three sets of machining condition parameter set which belongs to the appli- cation purpose being set. The background of the selected machining condition is highlighted in red. The background is not highlighted while the Standard parameter is selected.

Menus

Menus Details Switches the application being set to other application. It switches from Application1 -> Application2 -> Application3 -> Application1 -> each time this menu key is pressed.

Sets the application name for the application being set.

The name with up to 12 one-byte characters of numeric, English capital letter, and symbol can be set.

However, "\", "/", ",", "*", """, "<", ">", "|", and "space" cannot be used as a one-byte symbol.

Copies the setting values corresponding to the standard parameters to the all machining condition pa- rameter sets.

Changes to the machining condition selection screen.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Initializing the machining condition parameter set (1) Press the menu [MacCond] in the setup screen.

(2) Select the menu [Cond set] in the "Machining cond" screen.

(3) Select the menu [Execute init].

(4) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. The setting value for the standard parameters corre- sponding to each machining condition parameter will be copied.

App change

AppName set

Execute init.

Cond select

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 6 Setting Parameters

248IB-1501453-D

(1) It cannot be set without initializing the machining condition parameter set.

(1) The machining condition which is selected on the Machining cond screen applies to all part systems.

(2) When the machining condition parameter set is switched, for the parameter "#2010 fwd_g" (Feed forward gain) and "#2659 tolerance", the same value is applied to all NC axes in the switched part system.

Setting the machining condition parameter set (1) Press the menu [MacCond] in the setup screen.

(2) Select the menu [Cond set] in the "Machining cond" screen.

(3) Move the cursor to the position of the parameter to be set.

(4) Input the value, and then press [INPUT].

Switching the machining condition parameter set (1) Place the cursor on the position of the machining condition parameter set (application/condition) to be switched in

the "Machining cond" screen.

(2) Press the [INPUT] key.

(3) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Canceling the machining condition parameter set and switch to standard parameter (Switch by cursor) (1) Move the cursor to the standard parameter and press [INPUT] key on the "Machining cond" screen.

(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Canceling the machining condition parameter set and switch to standard parameter (Switch by menu [Std prmselect]) (1) Select the menu [Std prmselect] in the "Machining cond" screen.

(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Note

Note

7

249 IB-1501453-D

Setting Machine Movable Area

C80 Series Instruction Manual 7 Setting Machine Movable Area

250IB-1501453-D

7Setting Machine Movable Area This chapter describes the contents which can be set with the user parameters.

7.1 Setting the Stored Stroke Limit The tool entry prohibited ranges can be set with stored stroke limit II or IIB.

Set the parameters to select the entry prohibited range, stored stroke limit II or IIB.

(A): Entry prohibited range by stored stroke limit II (outside)

(B): Entry prohibited range by stored stroke limit IIB (inside)

If the axis is moving over the set range, an alarm will appear and the axis will decelerate to a stop.

If the prohibited range is entered and an alarm occurs, movement will be possible only in the direction opposite the entry

direction.

Enabling conditions of stored stroke limit

When using the relative position detection system, the stored stroke limit is invalid until the reference position return is com-

pleted after the power is turned ON.

(1) If the absolute position detection is valid when using the absolute position detection system, the stored stroke limit will be validated immediately after the power is turned ON.

Stored stroke limit coordinates

The stored stroke limit check is carried out in the basic machine coordinate system established by the reference position

return.

When the stored stroke limit has been validated while the reference position return has not been completed, the stored

stroke limit check is executed with the basic machine coordinate system at the time of last power-OFF as temporary one.

When the 1st dog-type reference position return is completed after the power is turned ON, the proper coordinate system

is established.

(1) While the reference position return has not been completed, only the manual and handle feed mode allow the axis move- ment. Automatic operation is validated after the reference position return is completed.

: Movable range

: Prohibited range

(B)

(A)

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 7 Setting Machine Movable Area

251 IB-1501453-D

The stored stroke limit sets a prohibited range with the parameters or program command. The minimum and maximum val-

ues of the prohibited range are set as the coordinate value (radius value) on the machine coordinate system for each axis.

The stroke check will not be executed when both maximum and minimum value are set to the same value. This function is valid after the reference position return if the system does not apply the absolute position detection system. Before the machine enters the prohibited range, an error "M01 Operation error 0007" (S/W stroke end) will occur, and the

machine movement will stop. The alarm can be reset by moving the erroneous axis in the opposite direction. During automatic operation, if an alarm occurs with even one axis, all axes will decelerate to a stop. During manual operation, only the axis that caused the alarm will decelerate to a stop. The axis will always stop at a position before the prohibited range. The distance between the prohibited range and stop position will depend on the feedrate, etc.

The stored stroke limits II and IIB are handled as follows.

7.1.1 Stored Stroke Limit II

The boundary is set with the axis parameters "#8204 OT-CHECK-N" and "#8205 OT-CHECK-P" or with program com-

mands. Either the inside or the outside of the set boundary is the prohibited range. Whether the inside or outside of the

range is prohibited is determined by "#8210 OT-INSIDE". When the inside is selected, this function is called stored stroke

limit IIB.

When using program commands, entry of the tool into the prohibited range is prohibited with G22, and entry into the pro-

hibited range is enabled with G23.

The stored stroke limit II can be invalidated for each axis with setting "#8202 OT-CHECK OFF" to "1".

Prohibited range

CAUTION Always set the stored stroke limit. Failure to set this could result in collision with the machine end.

Type Prohibited range

Details Range setting parameters Enabling conditions

II Outside Select II or IIB with the parameters.

"#8210 OT INSIDE" = "0" Used with I.

"#8204 OT-CHECK-N" "#8205 OT-CHECK-P"

Reference position return is completed. #8204 and #8205 are not

set to the same value. "#8202 OT-CHECK OFF"

= "0"

IIB Inside "#8210 OT INSIDE" = "1"

X: Outside Z: Outside X: Inside Z: Outside X: Inside Z: Inside

: Movable range : Prohibited range

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

C80 Series Instruction Manual 7 Setting Machine Movable Area

252IB-1501453-D

(1) Stored stroke limit II (When prohibited range is on outside)

When used with the stored stroke limit I function, the narrow range designated by the two types becomes the movement

valid range.

The stored stroke limit I function is set by MTB.

(A): Set value for (-) side

(B): Set value for (+) side

(C): The following ranges prohibited by stored stroke limit II are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine co-

ordinate system.

Point 3: "#8205 OT-CHECK-P"

Point 4: "#8204 OT-CHECK-N"

Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set by MTB using the stored stroke limit I.

(2) Stored stroke limit IIB (When prohibited range is on inside)

A range except for that of the stored stroke limit I becomes the movement prohibited range.

(A): Set value for (-) side

(B): Set value for (+) side

(C): The following ranges prohibited by stored stroke limit IIB are set with the coordinate values in the basic machine

coordinate system.

Point 3: "#8205 OT-CHECK-P"

Point 4: "#8204 OT-CHECK-N"

Points 1 and 2 are the prohibited range set by MTB using the stored stroke limit I.

: Movable range

: Prohibited range

: Movable range

: Prohibited range

(A) (B)

3

4

(C)

2

1

1

2

3

4

(A) (B)

(C)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 7 Setting Machine Movable Area

253 IB-1501453-D

7.2 Chuck Barrier/Tailstock Barrier (L System)

Use this function to set and display the chuck barrier and tailstock barrier.

By limiting the tool nose movement range, the chuck barrier and tailstock barrier prevent the tool from colliding with the

chuck and tailstock due to programming errors.

Three points can be input for both the chuck barrier and tailstock barrier. Select either [Enter length] or [Enter coordin] to

input (set) the barrier data.

(1) Enter length: To set the barrier position of the chuck or tailstock with the length (length between P points).

(2) Enter coordin: To set the barrier positions of the chuck and tailstock with the distance from the workpiece center coor- dinates (P0). Input the radius value to set the X axis.

(1) Enter length

(2) Enter coordin

Setup Barrier

C80 Series Instruction Manual 7 Setting Machine Movable Area

254IB-1501453-D

The barrier data which is set on this screen will be set to NC by converting to the parameter "#8301 P1" to "#8306 P6".

Specify the workpiece center coordinates (P0) of X axis for the chuck and tailstock in advance with the parameter "#8300

P0" on the menu [Barrier data] of parameter screen. The workpiece center coordinates (P0) of Z axis are the machine co-

ordinates zero point.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Guide graphic This displays the guide drawing of barrier type. The guide drawing is switched according

to the selected barrier form. The drawing is the left-side barrier guide drawing.

Chuck type 1 guide drawing Chuck type 2 guide drawing

(3) (4)

(2)

(1)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 7 Setting Machine Movable Area

255 IB-1501453-D

(1) Guide drawing (continued)

Tailstock type 1 guide drawing Tailstock type 2 guide drawing

(2) Barrier data This displays the barrier data. The display items differ depending on the length/coordi- nates value input and left/right-side barrier. The setting range is from -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm). However, minus data cannot be input for length data. Set the chuck or tailstock position with the length (length between P points). When the value is set, the coordinates data is also updated.

Chuck barrier Tailstock barrier

Set the chuck or tailstock position with the distance from the workpiece center coordi- nates (P0). When the value is set, the length data is also updated.

Chuck barrier Tailstock barrier

(3) Error message This is displayed when barrier data setting is illegal.

(4) Input section This displays the input data.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 7 Setting Machine Movable Area

256IB-1501453-D

Menus when the menu [Left barrier] or [Right barrier] is pressed

(*1) This menu can be selected when the parameter "#8315 BARRIER TYPE (L)" or "#8316 BARRIER TYPE (R)" is "1".

(*2) This menu can be selected when the parameter "#8315 BARRIER TYPE (L)" or "#8316 BARRIER TYPE (R)" is "2".

Menus

Menus Details This executes an absolute input.

This executes an incremental input.

This changes to the length input.

This changes to the coordinates value input.

This changes to the left-side barrier data setting. When the parameter "#8315 BARRIER TYPE (L)" is "0", this menu cannot be selected.

This changes to the right-side barrier data setting. When the parameter "#8316 BARRIER TYPE (R)" is "0", this menu cannot be selected.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Menus Details This changes the barrier form to the chuck barrier type 1. (*1)

This changes the barrier form to the chuck barrier type 2. (*1)

This changes the barrier form to the tailstock barrier type 1. (*2)

This changes the barrier form to the tailstock barrier type 2. (*2)

=Input

+Input

Enter length

Enter coordin

Left barrier

Right barrier

Close

Chuck type 1

Chuck type 2

T-stock type 1

T-stock type 2

C80 Series Instruction Manual 7 Setting Machine Movable Area

257 IB-1501453-D

Setting the barrier position with length (length between P points) (1) Press the menu [Enter length]. The mode is switched to the length input mode. The

highlight of the menu [Enter coordin] is canceled and the [Enter length] is highlighted. The cursor is displayed at CX, and the length data can be set.

(2) Select whether the barrier to be set is right side or left side with the menu. (Example) Press the menu [Left barrier].

The display is switched to the menu of the barrier form.

(3) Select the chuck type with the menu. (Example) Press the menu [Chuck type 2].

The drawing is switched to the chuck barrier type 2 guide drawing.

(4) Input the value to CX. 20.000 [INPUT] The setting can be performed also by pressing the menu [=Input] or [+Input] instead of the [INPUT] key. When the menu [+Input] is pressed, the value ob- tained by adding the input value to the original value is set.

The value "20.000" is set to the cursor position (CX), and the coordinates value is also updated. The cursor moves to CZ. Consistency check is performed for respective setting data, and an error message is displayed when an illegal- ity is detected.

(5) Input the values to CZ to W3 in the same way.

Setting the barrier position with coordinates value (distance from the work center coordinates (barrier P0)) (1) Press the menu [Enter coordin]. The mode is switched to the coordinates input mode.

The highlight of the menu [Enter length] is cancelled and the menu [Enter coordin] is highlighted. The cursor is displayed at P1 X, and the coordinates data can be set.

(2) Select whether the barrier to be set is right side or left side with the menu. (Example) Press the menu [Right barrier].

The display is switched to the menu of the barrier form.

(3) Select the tailstock type with the menu. (Example) Press the menu [T-stock type 1].

The drawing is switched to the tailstock barrier type 1 guide drawing.

(4) Input the value to P1 X. 30.000 [INPUT] The setting can be performed also by pressing the menu [=Input] or [+Input] instead of the [INPUT] key. When the menu [+Input] is pressed, the value ob- tained by adding the input value to the original value is set.

The value "30.000" is set to the cursor position (P1 X), and the length is also updated. The cursor moves to P1 Z. Consistency check is performed for respective setting data, and an error message is displayed when an illegal- ity is detected.

(5) Input the values to P1 Z to P3 Z in the same way.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 7 Setting Machine Movable Area

258IB-1501453-D

(1) When the parameter "#8310 Barrier ON" is set to "0", the chuck and tailstock barriers settings are disabled.

(2) The parameter "#8300 P0" and "#8311 P7" to "#8314 P10" cannot be set on this screen. Set the parameters with the menu [Barrier data] on the parameter screen.

(3) When the parameters "#8315" and "#8316" are both "0", the barrier data is handled as left barrier and chuck type 1. The chuck type cannot be changed.

(4) When the parameter for chuck or tailstock is set to both right and left barriers, an error message appears.

(5) When multiple errors are occurred, an error concerning the X axis is preferentially displayed.

Precautions

8

259 IB-1501453-D

Other Setups

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

260IB-1501453-D

8Other Setups 8.1 Integrated Time 8.1.1 Integrated Time Display

The integrated time (date, time, power ON time, automatic operation time, automatic start time, external integrated time 1,

external integrated time 2, cycle time) controlled by the NC can be set and displayed.

Note that the cycle time cannot be set.

The integrated times displayed in cycle time display area on the Monitor screen can be set.

(1) When the #3 Power ON to #8 Cycle time displays reach the maximum value (9999:59:59), the count stops, and the maximum value remains displayed.

Display items

Display items Details #1 Date The current date set in the NC is displayed.

Year: 4 digits, Month: 2 digit, Date: 2 digit (YYYY.MM.DD)

2 Time The current time set in the NC is displayed using the 24-hour system. (HH:MM:SS)

3 Power ON This displays the total integrated time of the time from NC power ON to OFF. (HHHH:MM:SS)

4 Auto oper This displays the total integrated time of the work time from automatic start button pressing in the memory mode or MDI to M02/M30 or reset button pressing. (HHHH:MM:SS)

5 Auto strt This displays the total integrated time during automatic starting from automatic start button pressing in the memory mode or MDI to feed hold stop, block stop, or reset button pressing. (HHHH:MM:SS)

6 Ext time 1 This content differs depending on MTB specification. (HHHH:MM:SS)

7 Ext time 2 This content differs depending on MTB specification. (HHHH:MM:SS)

8 Cycle time This displays the time that automatic operation is started from when the automatic start but- ton is pressed in the memory mode or MDI to when feed hold stop or block stop is applied or the reset button is pressed.

Input section This displays details of the key input.

Monitr Time

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

261 IB-1501453-D

8.1.2 Setting the Integrated Time

(1) The data delimiters are as shown below:

(2) If the [Time setting menu] or key is pressed again during the time setting mode, the time setting mode will be can-

celed.

Menus

Menus Details This sets the integrated time.

The time that is displayed in upper line on cycle time display area is selected.

The time that is displayed in bottom line on cycle time display area is selected.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Time setting]. The mode changes to the time setting mode. The cursor

appears at the "#1 Date" position in the integrated time display.

(2) Input today's date. (Example) 2015/4/1 [INPUT]

"2015.04.01" appears at "#1 Date", and the cursor moves to "#2 Time".

(3) Set the data for each item, and press the [INPUT] key. If the item does not need to be set, press the [] key and move the cursor.

When "#7 External integrated time 2" has been set, the cursor disappears, and the time setting menu highlight is turned OFF.

Note that #8 Cycle time cannot be set, so the cursor will not move.

Item Valid delimiters during setting Delimiters in display #1 Date " ." or " / " " ."

#2 Time to #7 Ext time2 " : " or " / " " : "

#8 Cycle time " : "

Setting range

Display items Range #1 Date 1980.1.1 to 2069.12.31

2 Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59

3 Power ON 00:00:00 to 59999:59:59

4 Auto oper

5 Auto strt

6 Ext time 1

7 Ext time 2

Time setting

Time select1

Time select2

Close

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

262IB-1501453-D

8.1.3 Setting the Time Display Selection

The displayed time is set on cycle time display area.

(1) The displayed time is held even after the power is turned OFF and ON.

(2) The displayed time is common for part systems.

Operation method (1) Press the menu "Time select1". The time selection mode is activated.

(2) Press the time type for the mode to display. (Example) [Auto oper]

The automatic operation time is displayed in upper line on cycle time display area. The menu display returns to integrated time sub-menu.

(3) Press the menu "Time select2". The time selection mode is activated.

(4) Press the time type for the mode to display. (Example) [Power ON]

The automatic operation time is displayed in bottom line on cycle time display area. The menu display returns to integrated time sub-menu.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

263 IB-1501453-D

8.2 Counter Setting

An arbitrary value can be set in the relative position counter which opens as a pop-up window.

The counter cannot be set for an axis of auxiliary axis state.

It also can be set on the setup (Setup) screen.

Menus

Menus Details This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

This switches the axis to be displayed on the counter.

This menu is grayed out and non-selectable in the following cases: - The number of enabled axes is 8 or less. - The number of enabled axes is 9 or more, however, the number of displayed axes is 8 or less

according to the parameter "#1069 no_dsp Axis with no counter display" setting.

Monitr Cnt set

Setup Cnt set

Close

Next axis

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

264IB-1501453-D

(1) When an address such as "S", "M", "T" or "B" is used for the first character of axis name of the parameter "#1022 ax- name2", not the MSTB window but the Counter set window is displayed for address key input.

Operation method (1) Press the main menu [Counter set]. The relative position counter opens as a pop-up window.

The cursor appears at the 1st axis of the relative position counter.

Instead of the operation above, the axis name ad- dress key can be pressed to set the counter. (Example) [Z]

The relative position counter opens as a pop-up window. The cursor appears at the designated axis (Z axis).

(2) Using the [], [], or the axis name address key, move the cursor to the axis to be set.

The cursor moves.

If two axes or more of the same name exist such as mixed control (cross axis control), the cursor moves to the axis corresponding to the address key to the axis name input first.

(3) Input a numeric value. (Example) 100.000 [INPUT] If the [INPUT] key is pressed without inputting a val- ue, zero (0) will be set.

The set value "100.000" appears at the cursor position. The cursor moves to the next axis.

(4) Repeat step (3) for each axis. For axes that are not to be operated, press the [] key and move the cursor.

The pop-up window closes when the counter has been set for the last axis.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

265 IB-1501453-D

8.3 Origin Set, Origin Cancel

Origin set and origin cancel can be executed.

Origin set and origin cancel cannot be executed for an axis of auxiliary axis state.

Menus

Menus Details The origin is set. When main menu [G92 set] is pressed, the menu [Origin set] is highlighted and the origin set mode is activated.

The origin is canceled. The origin cancel mode is activated when this menu is pressed.

This switches the axis to be displayed on the counter.

This menu is grayed out and non-selectable in the following cases: - The number of enabled axes is 8 or less. - The number of enabled axes is 9 or more, however, the number of displayed axes is 8 or less

according to the parameter "#1069 no_dsp Axis with no counter display" setting.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Monitr G92 set

Origin set

Origin cancel

Next axis

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

266IB-1501453-D

(1) An error will occur if a value other than 0 is set.

Differences between origin set and origin cancel

Origin set Origin cancel Function The coordinate system is shifted so the current

position becomes the designated position of the workpiece coordinate system. This is equivalent to "G92 X0". (When X is the target axis.)

The coordinate system is shifted so the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system matches the zero point of the basic machine coordinate sys- tem. This is equivalent to "G92 G53 X0". (When X is the target axis.)

Changes in the counter value

The relative position counter and workpiece coor- dinate counters become "0".

The relative position counter matches the ma- chine coordinate counter.

Offset The G92 shift amount is updated. The G92 shift amount and the G52 shift amount for the G54 to G59 coordinate system becomes "0".

Operation method (Setting the origin) (1) Press the main menu [G92 set]. The relative position counter opens as a pop-up window.

The menu [Origin set] is highlighted. The cursor appears at the 1st axis of the relative position counter.

(2) Using the [], [], or the axis name address key, move the cursor to the axis to be set.

The cursor moves.

If two axes or more of the same name exist such as mixed control (cross axis control), the cursor moves to the axis corresponding to the address key to the axis name input first.

(3) Input 0, and then press the [INPUT] key. If the [INPUT] key is pressed without inputting a val- ue, zero (0) will be set. (Origin zero)

"0.000" appears at the cursor position. The cursor moves to the next axis.

(4) Repeat step (3) for each axis. For axes that are not to be operated, press the [] key and move the cursor.

The pop-up window closes when the origin has been set for the last axis.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

267 IB-1501453-D

Operation method (Canceling the origin) (1) Press the main menu [G92 set], and then press the

menu [Origin cancel]. The relative position counter opens as a pop-up window. The menu [Origin cancel] is highlighted. The cursor appears at the 1st axis of the relative position counter.

(2) Press the [INPUT] key. The same value as the machine position appears at the cursor position. The cursor moves to the next axis.

(3) Repeat step (2) for each axis. For axes that are not to be operated, press the [] key and move the cursor.

The pop-up window closes when the origin has been canceled for the last axis.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

268IB-1501453-D

8.4 Manual Numerical Value Command

The spindle function (S), miscellaneous function (M), tool function (T) and 2nd miscellaneous function (B) commands can

be executed.

The manual numerical value command can be executed by inputting an address such as S, M, T or B, as well.

It also can be commanded on the setup (Setup) screen.

Display items

Display items Details S (spindle function) com- mand value

The command value of S (spindle rotation command value) is displayed. The number of displays varies depending on the value of the parameter "#1039 spinno" (Number of spindles). However, if the value of the parameter "#1300 ext36/bit0" (Multiple-spindle control) is set to "1" (Multiple-spindle control II), the number of displays is set to "1" regardless of the val- ue of the parameter "#1039 spinno" (Number of spindles).

M (miscellaneous function) command value

The command value of M (miscellaneous function command value) is displayed. The number of displays is set to "1" regardless of the value of the parameter "#12005 Mfig" (M count).

T (Tool function) command value

The command value of T (Tool function command value) is displayed. The number of displays is set to "1" regardless of the value of the parameter "#12009 Tfig" (T count). Only the tool number is displayed regardless of the value of the parameter "#11038 T disp type".

B (second (2nd) miscella- neous function) command value

The command value of B (second (2nd) miscellaneous function command value) is dis- played. The number of displays is set to "1" regardless of the value of the parameter "#12011 Bfig" (B count). However, the value is displayed or hidden depending on the value of the parameter ("#1170 M2name" (2nd miscellaneous code)).

Monitr MST

Setup MST

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

269 IB-1501453-D

(1) If the number of spindles is 5 or less, the scroll bar is not displayed.

(1) The cursor moves to the first line when the part system is changed while displaying the manual numeric command win- dow.

The manual numerical value command mode is canceled by carrying out one of the following operations before pressing

the [INPUT] key.

Press the menu [Close].

Press the key.

Change the screen.

Menus

Menus Details This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Operation method (Executing T31 with a manual numerical value command) (1) Press the main menu [MST]. The S, M, T, B display opens as a pop-up window.

Using the [] or [] key, move the cursor to the setting position.

The cursor moves.

(2) The manual numerical value command can also be issued by using the address keys instead of the op- eration above. (Example) [T]

The S, M, T, B display opens as a pop-up window. The cursor appears at T.

(3) Input a numeric value. 31 [INPUT]

The input value is set.

Operation method (Canceling the manual numerical value command)

Note

Close

S 100 M 50 T 4 B 1000

S 100 M 50 T 4 B 1000

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

270IB-1501453-D

For each S, M, T, G and B command, the data type to output to PLC program is designated by parameters "#12006 Mbin"

(M binary), "#12008 Sbin" (S binary), "#12010 Tbin" (T binary) and "#12012 Bbin" (B binary). The output data type and the

manual numerical value command setting/output range are shown below:

(*1) Even if the parameter "#12008 Sbin" (S binary) is set to "0" (BCD), the signed binary output is applied to S. BCD output

is not applied.

(*2) If a negative value is set when the data type is "BCD type" or "No-signed binary type", a value converted into positive

value is output to PLC program.

(1) Add a "-" sign before the value to set a negative value. The display will be a positive value.

(2) A value larger than the limit rotation speed (parameters "#3001 slimt1" to "#3004 slimt4") or the maximum rotation speed (parameters "#3005 smax1" to "#3008 smax4") cannot be output for S. Select a gear with "Spindle gear selection input" of Y device.

Setting/output range of manual numerical value command

BCD No-signed binary Signed binary Output range

S -99999999 to 99999999 (*1) 0 to 99999999 -99999999 to 99999999

M 0 to 99999999

T B

Setting range

S -99999999 to 99999999 (*2)

M T B

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

271 IB-1501453-D

8.5 MDI Program Editing

Press the main menu [MDI] to display the contents of the MDI program in a pop-up window.

When the parameter "#1144 mdlkof" is "0" (MDI setting impossible), switch to the MDI mode once to press the menu [MDI].

For details on editing of MDI program, refer to "3.6 Editing Operations" and the following descriptions.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Path display The path of the currently opened program file (memory:/program) is displayed.

(2) File name display This displays the file name of the program currently being edited (MDI).

(3) Status

Displayed when the program is edited after it was displayed.

< Insert mode display>

"INS" appears when the mode is switched to overwrite mode by pressing the [INSERT]

key.

(4) Top line of the displayed program

The No. of the top line of the program is displayed.

(5) Line number

This displays the last 3 digits of the program line number. When over two or more lines are displayed on the screen because one line is long, the line No. does not attach to the beginning of the next line.

Program display

This displays the contents of the MDI program currently being edited.

(6) Input section This displays details of the key input.

Setup MDI

(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

272IB-1501453-D

Menus

Menus Details When the character string is designated and the [INPUT] key is pressed, that character string is searched for.

If the character string to be searched for and the character string to be replaced are separated with a "/ " and designated, when the [INPUT] key is pressed, the character string is replaced.

The program data from the top line is displayed on the screen. The cursor moves to the left side of the top line.

The program data from the last line is displayed on the screen. The cursor moves to the left side of the last line.

When the line number is set and the [INPUT] key is pressed, the program data for the set number and later is displayed on the screen. The cursor moves to the No. of designated line.

This copies the designated line (multiple lines can be copied.)

This copies the character string designated by the cursor (multiple lines can be copied.)

This inserts the most recently copied contents to the line before the cursor or the position before the cursor.

This menu cannot be selected when parameter "#8910 Edit undo" is set to "0".

When the parameter "#8939 Undo confirm msg" is set to "1", the menu is highlighted while the con- firmation message is displayed.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

This erases the designated line (multiple lines can be erased).

String search

String replace

Top jump

Bottom jump

Line jump

Line copy

Char copy

Paste

Undo

Close

Line clear

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

273 IB-1501453-D

8.6 Thread Recutting Function

This function stores the thread groove position to enable thread re-machining.

Using this function allows the tool to pass through the machined thread groove by storing the lead axis machine position

and the spindle angle to fit the groove position of the re-chucked workpiece.

This function is an additional specification.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Thread recutting status Displays the status to suit the thread recutting machining status.

Status Details

Thread recutting pos unspeci- fied

Displays the status in which the thread recutting position is not stored. When the menu [Thrdre- cut ON] is pressed in this status, thread recutting is not enabled.

Thread recutting pos specified Displays the status in which the thread recutting position is stored. When the menu [Thrdrecut ON] is pressed under this status, thread recut- ting is enabled. If thread cutting is commanded before the menu [Thrdrecut ON] is pressed, thread recutting is not carried out.

In thread recutting Displays the status in which thread recutting is possible. When thread cutting is commanded under this status, thread recutting is carried out.

(2) Stored thread groove position

Displays the currently stored thread groove position. When the power is turned ON, "0" is displayed. Once the thread groove position is stored, it is held until the power is turned OFF or data is cleared.

Z1 Lead axis machine position The target axis follows the setting of the parameter "#8714 Thrdrecut lead ax".

S1 Spindle angle The target spindle follows the setting of the parameter "#8715 Thread recut SP#".

Setup Storage

(1)

(2)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

274IB-1501453-D

Menus

Menus Details This executes an absolute input.

This executes an incremental input.

Press this menu to automatically input the lead machine position or spindle angle in the stored rethread position window and store data.

This changes the status to "In thread recutting", enabling thread recutting using the stored data. If this menu is not pressed, thread recutting is not carried out. If this menu is pressed while thread recutting is disabled, the message "Thread recut position is unspecified" is displayed.

This changes the thread recutting status from "In thread recutting" to "Re-thread position specified", dis- abling thread recutting.

This erases all data of the stored positions.

This closes the pop-up window.

=Input

+Input

Set for all axs

Thrdrec ut ON

Thrdrec ut OFF

All axs clear

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

275 IB-1501453-D

8.6.1 Storing the Thread Groove Position

Two methods are available to store the thread groove position: manual input and automatic input.

Operation method

(1) Using the [] or [] key, switch the lead axis machine position (Z1) and the spindle angle (S1).

The cursor appears at the lead axis machine position (Z1) or the spindle angle (S1).

(2) Input the value in the item indicated by the cursor. Z1: Lead axis machine position S1: Spindle angle

The input value is displayed in the input area.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key or the menu [=Input]. The input value is displayed in the input area. The value is stored at the position indicated by the cur- sor, and the cursor then moves down. However, if the cursor is at the spindle angle (S1), press the [INPUT] key to move the cursor to the lead axis machine position (Z1).

It is possible to perform incremental input by pressing the menu [+Input] key instead of the [INPUT] key or the menu [=Input]. (Example) If the original data is 200: 250 + [+Input] -> 200 + 250 = 450

(1) Manually move the nose of the thread cutting tool to the thread recutting groove.

(2) Press the menu [Set for all axs]. The thread cutting status is changed to "Thread recut- ting pos specified", and the current lead axis machine position (Z1) and spindle angle (S1) are stored collec- tively.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 8 Other Setups

276IB-1501453-D

8.6.2 Switching the Stored Thread Groove ON/OFF

8.6.3 Erasing the Stored Thread Groove Position

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Thrdrecut ON] in the state "Thread

recutting pos specified". The thread cutting status is changed to "In thread recut- ting". In this state, retract the tool and start the thread recutting program to enable the same thread machining as that carried out for the original thread.

(2) Press the menu [Thrdrecut OFF] in the state "In thread recutting".

The thread recutting status returns to the "Thread recut- ting pos specified" status, and thread recutting is dis- abled.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [All axs clear]. The menu [All axs clear] is highlighted.

A message displays confirming whether it is okay to erase the data.

(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. The lead axis machine position (Z1) or the spindle angle (S1) is cleared to "0".

9

277 IB-1501453-D

Machining a Workpiece

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

278IB-1501453-D

9Machining a Workpiece This chapter mainly describes the functions set on the monitor (Monitr) screen.

9.1 Operation Search

On this screen, the program can be called from the program storage site, such as a memory, by designating the program

(program No.) to be automatically run and the program start position (sequence No., block No.).

When the multi-part system program management is valid (#1285 ext21/bit0 =1, ext21/bit1 =1) and [Memory] is selected

as a device, the program search is executed across all part systems in batch.

The device [Memory card] and [USB Memory] are not selectable with this function.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Device name, directory

display This displays the device and directory where the searched machining program is lo- cated.

(2) Capacity display This displays the capacity of the device displayed in (1).

(3) List of directories and files

This displays a list of the contents contained in the device or directory displayed in (1).

Use and to scroll the displayed list.

The comment of the machining program is displayed in the column.

Whether to show or hide the comment field can be selected by pressing the menu

[Comment switch]. When the comment field is hidden, the file name field will be en-

larged. (Up to 13 characters can be displayed in the file name field when the comment

is shown, and 32 when the comment is hidden.)

If the file name exceeds the maximum number of characters, "*" will appear at the last

character.

(4) Input section This displays details of the key input.

Monitr Search

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

279 IB-1501453-D

(*1) When the multi-part system program management is enabled (#1285 ext21/bit0 = 1) for the device [Memory], the last

updated date/time of the file is not displayed.

Menus

Menus Details This selects the device for searching for the program.

The menu [Memory2] is grayed out and non-selectable, when the specification of program memory capacity 1000kB[2560m] or 2000kB[5120m] is invalid.

Display starts from the first page of the directory/list of files. The cursor moves to the top line.

The last page of the directory/list of files is displayed. The cursor moves to the bottom line.

Pressing this menu switches display/non-display status and the display contents of the "Date/Comment" column of the program list as follows:

Program comment -> the last updated date/time of the file (*1) -> not displayed

This updates the list contents. (The latest contents of the currently selected device and directory are listed.)

This changes the method of sorting the list.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Memory

Memory2

Top jump

Bottom jump

Comment switch

List update

Sort change

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

280IB-1501453-D

9.1.1 Executing an Operation Search

When designating the sequence number and block number and searching for the program, input the search conditions in

the input area.

The program No. is categorized according to the presence of an extension.

(1) The maximum number of digits is eight for the sequence No. and five for the block No.

(2) Program after operation search

(a) Operation search is canceled if the following operations are carried out on the edit screen after operation search. Execute restart search in this case.

If the searched program is erased.

If the searched sequence No. is erased.

If the block corresponding to the searched block No. is erased.

(b) Operation search cannot be executed in another mode during MDI operation even if the block is stopped. Wait for MDI operation to end or reset the NC before searching.

Operation method (1)

Press the to select the part system to run. The selected part system appears on the upper left of the screen.

(2) Press the main menu [Search]. The sub-menu is displayed. The list appears as a pop-up window.

(3) Select the device. The selected device name and root directory (memory:/) are displayed in the device name and directory display fields.

(4) Press the [], [], or key to move the cursor

to the directory containing the file to be set.

Moves into the directory.

(5) Press the [INPUT] key.

If the list contents differ from the actual device or di- rectory, press the menu [List Update].

(6) Press [], [], or key to move the cursor to

the machining program to be edited.

(7) Press the [INPUT] key. The search starts. When the search is completed, the searched device and program position appear in the display area for the ma- chining program currently being executed.

Input details (Program No.) Sequence number Block No. 1001/1/2 O1001 N1 B2

1001.PRG/1/2 O1001.PRG N1 B2

/1/2 (Currently searched O No.) N1 B2

1001/2 O1001 N0 B2

1001/1 O1001 N1 B0

1001 O1001 N0 B0

/1 (Currently searched O No.) N1 B0

//2 (Currently searched O No.) N0 B2

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

281 IB-1501453-D

(3) A program with 33 or more file name characters cannot be searched.

(4) Searched program No. is memorized in NC even after the power is turned OFF. When NC starts up after the power is turned ON again, the program which has the previously searched program No. will be operated.

9.1.2 Changing Whether to Show or Hide the Comment Field

You can switch to show or hide the "Date/Comment" column by pressing the menu [Comment switch].

(Example) When the file name is "123456789A123456789B123456789C12"

When the comment field is displayed: The file name display is omitted and "*" is attached.

When the comment field is hidden: The file name is displayed up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols.

(1) The set status is held even if the NC power is turned OFF.

(2) The set status is common for list view of operation screen, restart search screen, etc.

(3) The cursor moves to the head when display/non-display in the comment field is switched.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

282IB-1501453-D

9.1.3 Changing the Sorting Method

Sorting method changes to 1 -> 2 -> 3 -> 4 -> 5 -> 1every time the menu [Sort change] is pressed.

When the sorting method 1, 2, or 3 is selected, "File name" column is highlighted. The sorting method 4 or 5 is selected, "Date/Comment" column is highlighted. ("1. File name No. ascending order" is selected by default setting.)

The method is common for all the devices.

You can sort up to the sortable number of files (the total number of files and directories, including current directory "." and one directory above "..") within a directory.

"List updating" is displayed in flickering during sorting.

If it exceeds the sortable number of files, the menu [Sort change] is grayed out and changing the sorting method is impos- sible. Program is displayed with "1. File name No. ascending order". In this case, "File name" column is highlighted.

Sortable number of files: 64 files

Sorting method

(1) The selected sorting method is held even after the power is turned OFF.

(2) The selected sorting method is common for list view of the Monitor screen, Restart search screen, etc.

(3) The character code ascending (descending) order is the method in which file names are compared one by one using the ASCII code. (Example) If the ascending order is applied, the appropriate order would be 1 to A because "1" equals to "0x31" and "A" equals to "0x41".

(4) When the device is "Memory", display for "current directory" and "one directory above" is not available.

(5) When comments are the same, sorting is carried out by the file name character code ascending (descending) order.

No. Sorting method Priority 1 File name No. ascending order 1. "." for current directory, ".." for one directory above

2. Numerical value (excluding the case where "0" is put at the beginning) ascending order 3. Character code ascending order

2 File name character code ascending order

1. "." for current directory, ".." for one directory above 2. Character code ascending order

3 File name character code descending order

1. Character code descending order 2. "." for current directory, ".." for one directory above

4 Comment ascending order "Date/comment" character code ascending order

5 Comment descending order "Date/comment" character code descending order

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

283 IB-1501453-D

9.2 Checking the Movement under Machining (Monitor Screen)

Various information related to operation, such as the axis counter, speed display and MSTB command are displayed on

the Monitor screen. In addition, you can perform various monitoring operations, as shown below.

(1) Search

(2) Research

(3) Editing the searched machining program

(4) Correction of operating program's buffer

(5) Counter set

(6) Manual numerical value command, etc.

9.2.1 Screen Layout

The screen layout varies depending on whether the 2-part system simultaneous display (#11019 2-system display) is valid

or invalid, operation mode, and the number of NC axes. Refer to the table below for details.

Screen Number of counter display axes

Select display Reference

1-part system display Normal view Up to 5 axes Hidden Screen 1

Display Screen 2

6 axes or more Hidden Screen 3

Display -

Simple view Up to 5 axes Display not possible Screen 4

6 axes or more Display not possible Screen 5

2-part system simultane- ous display

Counter1 (expand) Up to 4 axes Display not possible Screen 6

Dual counter Up to 4 axes Display not possible Screen 7

5 axes or more Display not possible Screen 8

Quad counter Up to 4 axes Display not possible Screen 9

Monitr

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

284IB-1501453-D

[1-part system display] (Parameter "#11019 2-systm display" = 0)

There are two types of screen displays: "Monitor screen (Normal view)" and "Monitor screen (Simple view)". This display

can be switched using the menu [Dsp sw.]. However, the content of the display varies depending on the specification

of NC axes.

When displaying monitor screen (normal view), display item on the bottom right of the screen can be changed, such as

common variable, work coordinate system offset or tool compensation amount. To change the display, the parameter

settings for "#8940 Selectable display" and "#8973 Set select display" are required.

(1)

(7)

(6)

(5)

(4)

(8)

(2)

(3)

(9)

(10)

(14)

(11)

(15)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

285 IB-1501453-D

(1) The maximum number of axes that can be displayed is 10 axes. Press the menu [Next axis] to switch display to display the subsequent axes.

Note

(2)

(1)

(3)

(4)

(6)

(7) (5)

(14) (8)

(11)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

286IB-1501453-D

(1) When the number of axes is 6 or more or the input unit is a maximum 0.01 m in any one of the part systems, the screen display will change to the example shown above for all part systems. In this case the maximum number of axes that can be displayed are 8 axes.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

287 IB-1501453-D

[2-part system simultaneous display] (Parameter "#11019 2-systm display" = 1, 2)

Counter1 (expand)

In "Counter1" (expand) display, single counter, MSTB display and currently executing program, etc. are displayed for

each part system.

(1) The maximum number of axes that can be displayed is 4 axes. Press the menu [Next axis] to switch display to display the subsequent axes.

Dual counter display

In "Dual counter" display, two counters, MSTB display and currently executing program, etc. are displayed for each part

system.

(1)

Note

(1) (7)

(2)

(12)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

288IB-1501453-D

(1) The maximum number of axes that can be displayed is 8 axes. Press the menu [Next axis] to switch display to display the subsequent axes.

Quad counter display

In "Quad counter" display, quad counter and currently executed program, etc. are displayed for each part system.

In "Quad counter" display, the counter can display 0.001 m or more.

(1) The maximum number of axes that can be displayed is 4 axes. Press the menu [Next axis] to switch display to display the subsequent axes.

Note

(13)

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

289 IB-1501453-D

Display items

Display items Details (1) Counter display This area displays the counter of the relative position or workpiece coordinate position.

If each axis is at a specific position or in a specific status, the following status abbreviations

are displayed.

#1 to #8: 1st to 8th reference position

][: Servo OFF state MR: Mirror image ><: Axis removed state CT: Auxiliary axis state

(Displayed when an axis that can be switched between the NC axis and auxiliary axis is set

to the auxiliary axis state.)

You can designate whether to consider the tool length compensation or tool radius compen-

sation depending on the value of the parameter "#1287 ext23/bit4".

The axis counter can be displayed or hidden depending on the value of the parameter

"#1069 no_dsp".

Also, if the axis is set to the diameter axis or uncontrol axis, the following symbol is displayed

on the right of the axis name.

*: Uncontrol axis (axis where any part system does not have control rights)

: Diameter axis

(When the target axis is equivalent to both the uncontrol axis and diameter axis, the symbol

of the uncontrol axis is displayed.)

(2) Currently executed machining program (*1)

Main O10...

Displays the currently executed program number, sequence number, and block number.

Sub O1234...

While a subprogram is executed, its program number, sequence number, and block number are displayed.

(3) Buffer display This displays the contents of the machining program currently being executed.

The block being executed is highlighted.

When the parameter "#1122 pglk_c" is enabled, the contents of the program are not dis-

played. Only "%" is displayed.

If the program comment includes the double-byte width character for one character code, the program may not be displayed correctly.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

290IB-1501453-D

Display items Details (4) Tool No. display This area displays the tool number, standby tool number and T command value of the cur-

rently selected tool.

Tool No.: Displays the tool number of the currently selected tool.

Standby tool No.: Displayed only when standby tool 1 is designated.

This is not displayed on the monitor screen (simple view).

Tool command value [T]: Displays the T command value that is commanded last.

In the L system, when "#11038 T disp typ" is set to "1", the diameter is displayed, includ- ing the compensation number.

(5) Spindle rotation speed display

This area displays the actual number of spindle rotation speed as well as the spindle com- mand value.

On the prototype or mass production screen, the values above vary depending on the value of the parameter "#1039 spinno".

(6) Load meter display This area displays the spindle load value (%) with a bar graph and numeric values. The simple view shows the load meter of up to two spindles.

The graph display color varies depending on the spindle load value. This item blinks when a warning occurs. The caution and warning thresholds conform to the parameters #3192 to #3194.

Tool No.

Tool command value [T]Standby tool No.

Tool command value [T]

Tool No.

Actual number of spindle rotation speed

Spindle command value [S] display

Spindle load percentage (%) display

Bar graph display

Numeric value display

80 130 175 (Normal) (Caution) (Warning)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

291 IB-1501453-D

(7) Speed display Interpolation feeding: Displays the vector-direction speed (FA), dwell time, etc. of the axis currently being moved. Each axis independent feeding: Displays the speed of the axis with the highest speed des- ignated. In the L system, the surface speed is displayed. When the parameter "#1125 real_f" is set to "1", the actual machine feedrate is displayed.

(8) Cycle time display This area displays the automatic operation time and cycle time. The display item can be switched in the integrated time window. DAT: Date TIM: Time PON: Power ON OP: Automatic operation STL: Automatic start EX1: Ext time1 EX2: Ext time2 CYC: Cycle time

(9) Control mode dis- play

This area displays the NC control mode. HTP: High-speed synchronous tapping MOR: Manual arbitrary reverse run mode SSS: SSS control CSC: Corner smooth control VAC: Variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration EAC: Allowable acceleration for each axis (*3) SFR: Smooth fairing FRG: Fairing

Up to six control modes are displayed beginning at the top.

(10) G modal simple dis- play

This area displays the following modal status. G command modal status of G code group 1 G command modal status of G code group 3 Currently selected workpiece coordinate system offset Tool radius compensation modal, compensation number, tool shape amount, and tool ra-

dius wear Tool length compensation modal, compensation axis name, compensation number, tool

shape amount, and tool length wear

(11) M and B commands This area displays the command value for each of the M (miscellaneous function command value) and B (2nd miscellaneous function command value) functions. The M (miscellaneous function command value) and B (2nd miscellaneous function com- mand value) displays vary depending on the values of the parameters "#12005 Mfig" and "#1170 M2name".

(12) M, S, T, and B com- mands

(2-part system simul- taneous display)

Using the menu [MST Chg] allows you to switch the MSTB display in the area to be operat- ed. (For details, refer to "Changing MSTB display" in "9.2.5 Operation of 2-part System Si- multaneous Display".)

(13) Spindle rotation speed display

(2-part system simul- taneous display)

This area displays the spindle rotation speed and the spindle command value that are des- ignated in the parameters "#8925 to #8928" ("SP on 1st part sys" to "SP on 4th part sys") and "#8958 to 8960" ("SP on 5th part sys" to "SP on 7th part sys").

(14) Workpiece machin- ing count display

This area displays the current number of workpiece machining. The display varies depending on the setting of the parameter #8001 to #8003. However, when the parameter "#8001 WRK COUNT M" is set to "0", the number of work- piece machining is not counted, and it is not displayed on the screen. The setting value of the parameter "#8001 WRK COUNT M" is displayed up to high-order two digits.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

292IB-1501453-D

(*1) If the program number (program name) exceeds the number of digits that can be displayed, the last digit is indicated

by an asterisk (*).

The device name displays the device name detected by operation search.

If the sequence number exceeds six digits, only the low-order six digits are displayed.

(*2) If the data of the designated tool number has not been registered on the tool management screen, the tool icon is not

displayed.

(*3) When the variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is enabled, the allowable acceleration

speed for each axis is always enabled, and "EAC" is not displayed while the control mode "VAC" is being displayed.

Sub-menus displayed by pressing the menu [Dsp sw.], when 2-part system simultaneous view is valid (#11019=0).

(*1) This menu cannot be operated in simple view mode.

(*2) This menu cannot be operated in normal view mode (6 axes or more).

(*3) This menu cannot be operated in normal view mode.

(1) The selected display format is also held when the power is turned on again.

(15) Selective display area

This area displays NC data that is selected in the parameter "#8940 Set select display".

Depending on the selected NC data, you can press the , , [], [], [], [], [|],

or [|] key to scroll pages. Pressing the [INPUT] key displays the window that allows you to operate NC data displayed in the selective display area.

The selective display area is displayed on the monitor screen. The monitor screen can be switched when the parameter "#8973 Selective display" is set to "1".

Sub-menus displayed by pressing the menu [Dsp sw.]

Menus Details Switches the display format to the normal view.

Switches the display format to the simple view.

Switches counter type 1. (*1)

Switches counter type 2. (*1) (*2)

Switches counter type 3. (*1)

Switches counter type 4. (*1) (*2)

Switches counter type 5. (*3)

Display items Details

Normal view

Simple view

Counter #1

Counter #2

Counter #3

Counter #4

Counter #5

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

293 IB-1501453-D

Sub-menus displayed by pressing the menu [Dsp sw.], when 2-part system simultaneous display is valid (#11019 = 1)

(*1) This menu cannot be operated in single counter mode.

(*2) This menu cannot be operated in dual counter mode (5 axes or more).

(*3) This menu cannot be operated in dual counter mode.

(1) The selected display format is also held when the power is turned on again.

Menus Details Switches the counter display format to counter1 (expand).

Switches the counter display format to dual counter.

Switches the counter display format to quad counter.

Switches the MSTB display for the area to be operated.

Switches counter type 1.

Switches counter type 2. (*1) (*2)

Switches counter type 3. (*1) (*3)

Switches counter type 4. (*1) (*3)

Counter expand

Dual counter

Quad counter

MSTB view

Counter #1

Counter #2

Counter #3

Counter #4

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

294IB-1501453-D

9.2.2 Switching the Display Format

The monitor screen display format can be switched using the menu [Dsp sw.]. The switchable display format varies depend-

ing on the value of the parameter "#11019 2-system display".

(1) In the 1-part system display (#11019 = 0), switch the display format between the normal view and simple view or among single counter, dual counter, and quad counter.

(2) In the 2-part system simultaneous display (#11019 = 1), switch the display format among the counter1 (expand), dual counter and quad counter.

When the parameter "#11019 2-system display" (2-part system simultaneous display) is disabled, you can press the sub

menu [Normal view] or [Simple view] in the [Dsp sw.] to switch the screen to the normal view or simple view.

When the parameter "#11019" (2-part system simultaneous display) is enabled, the counter display format can be switched

to the following three modes.

Counter1 (expand): Displays one counter (Counter type 1) for each part system.

Dual counter: Displays two counters (Counter types 1 and 2) for each part system.

Quad counter: Displays four counters (Counter types 1 to 4) for each part system.

(1) For details on the screen image, refer to Screens 6 to 9 in "9.2.1 Screen Layout". You can press the sub-menu [Counterexpand], [Dual counter], or [Quad counter] in the menu [Dsp sw.] to switch the display format.

Switching the normal view and simple view

Switching the Counter Display Format

Monitr Dsp sw.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

295 IB-1501453-D

9.2.3 Switching the Counter Types

The counter mode on the monitor screen (monitor screen (normal view), monitor screen (simple view), and 2-part system

simultaneous display screen) can be switched using the parameter or the menu [Counter].

(1) Switching the counter type in the parameter setting

(2) Switching the counter type in the menu [Counter]

The type of the counter to be displayed on the monitor screen can be switched using each of the counter type parameters

"#8901" to "#8905". The figure below shows the relationship between counters and parameters using arrows.

Switching in the parameter setting

Monitr Dsp sw.

#8901 Counter type 1 #8903 Counter type 3

#8902 Counter type 2 #8904 Counter type 4

#8905 Counter type 5

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

296IB-1501453-D

The following counter type is displayed in the target operation area on the left.

Also, the same counter type is displayed in the target operation area on the right.

[Counterexpand]

[Dual counter]

[Quad counter]

#8901

Counter type 1

#8901

Counter type 1

#8902

Counter type 2

#8901

Counter type 1

#8902

Counter type 2

#8903

Counter type 3

#8904

Counter type 4

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

297 IB-1501453-D

The type of the counter to be displayed on the monitor screen can be changed using the sub-menu [Counter] under the

menu [Dsp sw.]. If the counter type is switched using the menus [Counter #1] to [Counter #5], the values of the parameters

"#8901 Counter type 1" to "8905 Counter type 5" are rewritten.

However, when data protection is valid, the displayed counter type can be switched using the menu, but the value of each

parameter cannot be rewritten. In this case, if the display returns to the monitor screen after switching to another screen

while the displayed counter type is different from the parameter value, the displayed counter is set to the counter type that

matches the parameter value.

The figure below shows the counter types that can be displayed using the menu [Counter] as well as the switching order.

(*1) If a counter other than the 13 types of counters above ("Relative position" to "Inclined surface coordinate position") is

set to the parameter ("#8901 Counter type 1" to "#8905 Counter type 5") before the counter type is switched using the

menu [Counter], the counter type is switched among 14 types of counters, including that counter. When the counter

type is switched to a counter type other than the 13 counter types above, it is held until the power is turned OFF.

Furthermore, if the 13 counter types above are designated in parameters before the counter type is switched using the

menu, the counter type is switched among these 13 counter types.

(*2) "Tip workpiece position", "Tip machine position", "Tool axis movement", "Table coordinate position", "Workpiece set

position" and "Inclined surface coordinate position" counters can be switched when any of the following specifications

is valid.

Tool center point control

Tool length compensation along the tool axis

Tool handle feed & interruption

Inclined surface machining command

3-dimensional tool radius compensation (tool's vertical-direction compensation)

3-dimensional manual feed

Switching the counter type using the menu

Relative position

Workpiece coordinate position

Machine position

Remaining command

Next command Manual interruption

amount

Program position

Tip workpiece position

Tip machine position

Tool axis movement

Table coordinate position

Workpiece set position

Inclined surface coordinate

position

(1)

(2)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

298IB-1501453-D

9.2.4 Switching the Spindle No. to be Displayed on Counter

The number of counter axes that can be displayed on the monitor screen is as follows. To refer to the subsequent axes,

select the menu [Next axis].

Monitor screen in 1-part system view (normal view): Up to 10 axes

Monitor screen in 1-part system view (simple view): Up to 5 axes

2-part system simultaneous view (Counter1 (expand)): Up to 4 axes

2-part system simultaneous view (Dual counter): Up to 8 axes

2-part system simultaneous view (Quad counter): Up to 4 axes

(1) When the mixed control (cross axis control) function is enabled, the menu [Next axis] is displayed even if there is no axis to be switched.

9.2.5 Operation of 2-part System Simultaneous Display

The area to be operated (right/left) can be switched by touching in the area using the tab key ( ) or on the touch-

screen.

When the area to be operated is switched, the part system name to be operated is displayed on the selection bar. At NC

startup, the left side is set as the area to be operated.

(1) The area to be operated cannot be switched while the pop-up window is being displayed.

(2) The area to be operated can be switched while the software keyboard is being displayed.

The part system is switched for the area to be operated (right/left).

When the part system displayed in the non-target area is designated by incrementing displayed part systems by one each

time you press the key, the area to be operated is switched.

If the available number of displayed part systems is reached, the first part system is displayed.

(1) The same operation is also applied when you click a part system name in the selection bar on the touchscreen.

(2) If the base common parameter "#11035 Sys. change limit" is set to "1", it disables part systems from being switched

using the key or on the touchscreen.

Switching the area to be operated (right/left)

Switching the display part system No.

Monitr Next Ax

Note

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

299 IB-1501453-D

On the monitor screen in 2-part system simultaneous view, you can press the [MST Chg] main menu to change the MSTB

display for the area to be operated.

The MSTB display type is held for each part system when the screen is switched or the power is turned ON again.

<2-part system simultaneous view: Counter1 (expand) / Quad counter>

There are the following two types of MSTB displays, which are toggled each time the menu [MST Chg] is pressed.

MSTB display type (*1) (*2) (*3)

MSTB + Workpiece machining count display type (*1) (*2)

(*1) The S command is used to designate the spindle to be displayed for each part system using parameters (#8925 to

#8928 ("SP on 1st part sys" to "SP on 4th part sys") and #8958 to #8960 ("SP on 5th part sys" to "SP on 7th part sys")).

Up to two spindles can be designated in each part system. The M (miscellaneous function command value), T (tool

command value), and B (2nd miscellaneous function command value) functions are displayed one by one regardless

of the value of the parameter "#12005 Mfig" (M count), "#12009 Tfig" (T count), or "#12011 Bfig" (B count). However,

the B (2nd miscellaneous function command value) function is displayed or hidden depending on the value of the pa-

rameter "#1170 M2name" (2nd miscellaneous code).

(*2) The menu [MST Chg] is not available in the following cases:

The parameter "#8001 WRK COUNT M" is set to "0".

"F" is set to the low-order byte of parameters #8925 to #8928 ("SP on 1st part sys" to "SP on 4th part sys") and #8958 to #8960 ("SP on 5th part sys" to "SP on 7th part sys"), or the parameter "#1039 spinno" is set to "1".

(*3) When the number of spindles is set to "1" or only one spindle is displayed depending on the operation parameters

(#8925 to #8928 ("SP on 1st part sys" to "SP on 4th part sys") and #8958 to #8960 ("SP on 5th part sys" to "SP on 7th

part sys"), the load meter of the target spindle is displayed at the position at which the second spindle is to be displayed.

<2-part system simultaneous view: Dual counter>

There are the following six types of MSTB displays, which are toggled each time the menu [MST Chg] is pressed.

MSTB display type (*1)

S display type 1

S display type 2

MTB display type

MTB + Workpiece machining count display type

MSTB + Workpiece machining count display type (*1)

(*1) When the number of spindles is set to "1" or only one spindle is displayed depending on the operation parameters

(#8925 to #8928 ("SP on 1st part sys" to "SP on 4th part sys") and #8958 to #8960 ("SP on 5th part sys" to "SP on 7th

part sys"), the load meter of the target spindle is displayed at the position at which the second spindle is to be displayed.

A part of the monitor screen (normal view) can be customized to suit user's need (to display data which a user always needs

to refer to). The select display area shows the screen that is selected using the parameter "#8940 Set select display".

Changing MSTB display

Customizing the screen display (Select display area (parameter "#8973 Selective display" = "1"))

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

300IB-1501453-D

9.2.6 Counter All-axis Display

A counter for all axes opens as a pop-up display.

The type of displayed counter can be selected with the menu.

Menus

Menus Details This displays the currently executed position.

This displays the G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate system modal No. and the workpiece coordinate position in that workpiece coordinate system.

This displays the coordinate position of each axis in the basic machine coordinate system having a char- acteristic position, specified by the machine, as a zero point.

This displays the remaining distance of the movement command being executed during automatic start or automatic halt. (The remaining distance is the incremental distance from the current position to the end point of that block.)

This displays the details of the command in the block executed after the block currently being executed.

This displays the amount moved with the manual mode while the manual absolute switch was OFF. When the parameter "# 8173 Hold intr amount" is set to "0", interrupt amount is cleared by pressing the reset button.

This displays the value obtained by subtracting the tool compensation amount compensated for that axis from the position actually being executed for each axis. When the parameter "# 8173 Hold intr amount" is set to "0", interrupt amount is cleared by pressing the reset button.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

This displays the position of the tool center from the workpiece coordinate reference position in the se- lected workpiece coordinate system.

Monitr Cnt exp

Relat posn

Work co posn

Machine posn

Remain command

Next command

Manual int amt

Program posn

Close

Tip wk posn

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

301 IB-1501453-D

(1) The type of counter displayed first when the pop-up display appears is the relative position. However, when any of the targeted specifications (*1) is valid, "Tip workpiece position" is displayed. The counter which appears next is the type selected previously.

(2) The menus [Tip wk posn], [Tip machine], [Pulse] and [Table co posn] appear when any of the targeted specifications (*1) is valid.

(3) The menu [Incline co posn] is displayed when the additional specification of the inclined surface machining command is valid.

(*1) Targeted specifications

Tool center point control

Tool length compensation along the tool axis

Tool handle feed & interruption

Inclined surface machining command

3-dimensional tool radius compensation (tool's vertical-direction compensation)

3-dimensional manual feed

This displays the position of the tool center from the machine coordinate system reference position in the machine coordinate system.

This displays the amount moved in the selected axis direction using the manual pulse generator in the hypothetical machine coordinate system. Basically this is updated only when manual ABS is OFF. If "#7905 NO_ABS" is set to "1", this will be updated regardless of the manual ABS ON/OFF.

This displays the table coordinate.

This displays the inclined surface coordinate.

This switches the axis to be displayed on the counter. This switches the axes to be displayed on the counter between "1st axis to 12th axis" and "13th axis or after".

Menus Details

Tip machine

Pulse

posn Table co

co posn Incline

Next axis

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

302IB-1501453-D

9.2.7 Modal Display

The state of each modal during automatic operation is displayed.

The displayed details differ for the M system and L system.

Even if operating area is switched in the 2-part system simultaneous display, the position of the pop-up window will not

change. It is always displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Display items

Display items Details (1) G modal list The list below shows the G command modal status of the currently executed groups 1 to

20.

Each item displays the following information.

G00: Displays the G command modal status of the currently executed group 1.

G17: Displays the G command modal status of the currently executed group 2.

: Displays the G command modal status of each group in sequence.

G50.1: Displays the G command modal status of the currently executed group 19.

Monitr Modal

(1)

(2)

(3) (4)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

303 IB-1501453-D

(2) Details of G modal This item displays detailed information of the G command modal status of the currently executed group. Each item displays the following information.

G50 :P= 0.000000 Scaling factor

G54.1:P1 Workpiece coordinate system offset No.

G42 : D 10= 0.000000: 0.000000

G42: Tool radius compensation modal

D10: Offset num

= 0.000000: Shape compensation amount of tool radius

0.000000 Tool radius wear amount

G69 :R = 0.000 Coordinate rotation angle

(Displayed in the range of 360.)

G43 :ZH 50= 0.000000: 0.000000

G43: Tool length compensation modal

Z Compensation axis name

H50 Offset num

= 0.000000: Offset

0.000000 Tool length wear amount

G43 :ZH 50= 0.000000: 0.000000

G43: Tool length compensation modal

Z Compensation axis name

H50 Offset num

= 0.000000: Offset

0.000000 Tool length wear amount

G05.1:P1000

(Display example)

G05 :P0 High-speed machining mode

G05.1: Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I

G05.1: Q2 Spline interpolation

G05 :P10000 High-speed high-accuracy control II (SSS control OFF)

G05 :P1 High-speed machining mode I

G05 :P2 High-speed machining mode II

VAC Variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/ deceleration enabled

CSC Corner smooth control enabled

SFR Smooth fairing ON

SSS (*1) SSS enabled

G120.1 P1 Q1 Machining Condition Selection I

(Display example)

G120.1 P0 Reference parameter selected

G120.1 P1 Q2 (*2) Each machining condition parameter selected Pn: (n=1 to 3) Machining purpose Qm: (m=1 to 3) Condition

G07.1: ON G07.1: OFF

Cylindrical interpolation modal (Fixed to G07.1) Cylindrical interpolation mode (ON/OFF)

G08: P0 G08: P1

High-accuracy control mode OFF High-accuracy control mode ON

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

304IB-1501453-D

(*1) Displays the current control mode. When multiple control modes are enabled simultaneously, one of them is displayed

in the order in which the priority is higher. (The priority is higher beginning at the top.)

(*2) G121 command: Machining Condition Selection I Cancel

Changes to the machining condition selection command that is selected in [Setup] - [MacCond] screen.

(3) MSTB display area This area displays the program command modal value for each of the currently executed

commands.

Each item displays the following information.

S command M command T command 2nd miscellaneous function (B) command

The number of S displays varies depending on the value of the parameter "#1039 spinno"

(Number of spindles).

The number of M displays varies depending on the value of the parameter "#12005 Mfig"

(M count).

The number of T or B displays is set to "1" regardless of the value of the parameters

"#12009 Tfig" (T count) and "#12011 Bfig" (B count). However, for the B display, the value

is displayed or hidden depending on the value of the parameter (#1170 M2name 2nd mis-

cellaneous code).

For the T display, only the tool number is displayed regardless of the value of the param-

eter "#11038 T disp type".

(4) F modal display area This area displays the F modal value and manual feedrate. FA: Displays the program command F modal value of the currently executed command. FM: Displays the manual feedrate.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

305 IB-1501453-D

Even if operating area is switched in the 2-part system simultaneous display, the position of the pop-up window will not

change. It is always displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Display items

Display items Details (1) G modal list The list below shows the G command modal status of the currently executed groups 1

to 20.

Each item displays the following information.

G00: Displays the G command modal status of the currently executed group 1.

G17: Displays the G command modal status of the currently executed group 2.

: Displays the G command modal status of each group in sequence.

G43.1: Displays the G command modal status of the currently executed group 19.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

306IB-1501453-D

(2) Details of G modal This item displays detailed information of the G command modal status of the currently executed group. Each item displays the following information.

G54.1:P10 Workpiece coordinate system offset No.

The data format of the workpiece coordinate system offset number is as follows:

G5x :P (x = 4 to 9)

G54 Workpiece coordinate system selection 1 G55 Workpiece coordinate system selection 2 G56 Workpiece coordinate system selection 3 G57 Workpiece coordinate system selection 4 G58 Workpiece coordinate system selection 5 G59 Workpiece coordinate system selection 6

G54.1: Pyy (yy = 1 to 96)

G54.1 Workpiece coordinate system selection The number of extension sets is assigned to 0, 48, or 96 sets depending on the additional specifications.

When the high-speed machining mode, high-speed high-accuracy control, or direct command mode specification is enabled, the status of the high-speed machining mode, high-speed high-accuracy control, or direct command mode is displayed.

G05 :P0 OFF

G05 :P1 High-speed machining mode I ON

G05 :P2 High-speed machining mode II ON

G05.1: Q0 High-speed high-accuracy control I OFF

G05.1: Q1 High-speed high-accuracy control I ON

G05 :P10000 High-speed high-accuracy control II ON

G05 P4 Direct command mode ON

Displays the current control mode. When multiple control modes are enabled simultaneously, one of them is displayed in the order in which the priority is higher. (The priority is higher beginning at the top.)

VAC Variable-acceleration pre-interpolation acceleration/de- celeration enabled

CSC Corner smooth control enabled

SFR Smooth fairing ON

SSS SSS enabled

When the high-accuracy control specification is enabled, the status of the high-accuracy control mode is displayed.

G08:P0 High-accuracy control mode OFF

G08:P1 High-accuracy control mode ON

Displays the currently selected machining condition parameter group. * If the reference parameter is selected, "G120.1 P0" is displayed.

G120.1 P1 Q2 Machining Condition Selection I

(Display example)

G120.1 P0 Reference parameter selected

G120.1 P1 Q1 (*1) Each machining condition parameter selected Pn: (n=1 to 3) Machining purpose Qm: (m=1 to 3) Condition

(3) Tool length and wear compensation amount display area

This area displays the tool length and wear compensation amount.

TX: Displays the sum of the tool length and wear compensation amount of the first axis for the tool in use. (*2) TZ: Displays the sum of the tool length and wear compensation amount of the second axis for the tool in use. (*2) TY: Displays the sum of the tool length and wear compensation amount of the addi- tional axis for the tool in use. (*3)

(4) Compensation num- ber display area

This area displays the compensation number. TG: Displays the tool length compensation number. TW: Displays the wear compensation number.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

307 IB-1501453-D

(*1) G121 command: Machining Condition Selection I Cancel

Changes to the machining condition selection command that is selected in [Setup] - [MacCond] screen.

(*2) Displays the axis name that is set to the first and second axes in the part system for the base axis specification param-

eter "#1013 axname". (If no axis name is set to "#1013 axname", the axis name item is blank.)

(*3) When the parameter "#1281 ext17 bit1" (tool offset additional axis selection) is set to "0", the display will change as

follows by the parameter "#1520 Tchg34" (additional axis tool) setting.

#1520 Tchg34 = 0: Displays the axis name configured as the third axis in the part system by the parameter "1013 ax-

name".

#1520 Tchg34 = 1: Displays the axis name configured as the 4th axis in the part system.

(If no axis name is set to "#1013 axname", the axis name item is blank.)

When the parameter "#1281 ext17 bit1" (tool offset additional axis selection) is set to "1", the name of the axis desig-

nated by the parameter "#1027 base_J" (basic axis J) is displayed. (If the axis name designated in "#1027 base_J" is

not set to "#1013 axname", the axis name item is blank.)

In the two-axis configuration system, the third row is not displayed.

(1) The menu is common for the M system and L system.

(5) F modal area This area displays the F modal value and manual feedrate. FA: Displays the program command asynchronous feedrate modal value of the currently executed command. FM: Displays the manual feedrate. FS: Displays the program command synchronous feedrate modal value of the currently executed command. FE: Displays the thread lead command synchronous feedrate modal value of the cur- rently executed command.

(6) MSTB area and con- stant surface speed control (constant sur- face speed S) area

This area displays the program command modal value for each of the currently executed

commands.

Each item displays the following information:

S command M command T command 2nd miscellaneous function (B) command

The number of S displays varies depending on the value of the parameter "#1039 spin-

no" (Number of spindles).

The number of M displays varies depending on the value of the parameter "#12005 Mfig"

(M count).

The number of T or B displays is set to "1" regardless of the value of the parameter

"#12009 Tfig" (T count) and "#12011 Bfig" (B count). However, for the B display, the

value is displayed or hidden depending on the value of the parameter (#1170 M2name

2nd miscellaneous code).

For the T display, only the tool number is displayed regardless of the value of the param-

eter "#11038 T disp type".

Menus

Menus Details This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Display items Details

Close

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

308IB-1501453-D

9.2.8 Program Tree Display

This displays the main program, subprogram, MDI interrupt and user macro call nesting structure.

This also displays the execution position of the main program and the subprogram (the lowest level of the nest only) as a

percentage during the automatic operation.

Display items

Display items Details (1) O Program No. (0 to 15 characters) If the program No. (program name) exceeds 15 char-

acters, "*" will appear at the 15th character.

(2) N Sequence No. (0 to 99999999)

(3) B Block No. (0 to 99999)

(4) L Remaining number of subprogram repetitions (0 to 99)

(5) Devices Operation device (0 to 7 characters)

Displays the program storage device and MDI interruption.

Memory Memory2 MDI (MDI interruption)

(6) (%) Program execution rate display Assuming the whole machining program size as 100%, the execution position during an automatic operation is displayed in % (percentage). When the automatic operation is not executed, 0% is displayed for the main program's percentage display. The subprogram's percentage is displayed only for the lowest level of the nest and oth- er subprograms will display blank.

(7) Main Main program

(8) 1 to 8 Called subprogram, user macro call and MDI interrupt

Menus

Menus Details This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Monitr Tree

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

309 IB-1501453-D

9.2.9 Integrated Time Display

For details, refer to "8.1.1 Integrated Time Display".

9.2.10 Load Meter Display

The spindle load and Z axis load, etc., are displayed.

Display items

Display items Details (1) NC axis load meter Up to eight NC axes loads (%) are displayed.

The display color of graph is switched in accordance with the NC axis load. The thresh- old values of cautions (yellow) and warning (red) are determined according to the pa- rameters (#2643 to #2645).

(2) Spindle load meter Up to eight spindles loads (%) are displayed. The graph display color varies depending on the spindle load value. The threshold val- ues of cautions (yellow) and warning (red) are determined according to the parameters (#3192 to #3194).

(3) NC axis name This displays the axis name set with the parameter "#1022 axname2".

(4) Spindle name This displays "S" + "Spindle No.".

Monitr Time

Monitr LdMeter

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

(5) (6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

310IB-1501453-D

(1) Due to the specifications issued by MTB, pressing the menu [LdMeter] without setting ON load meter display causes an error.

9.2.11 Spindle, Standby Display

The current spindle tool No. and the standby tool No. (a maximum of 4 tools) are displayed.

(5) Load current (%) This displays the NC axis load current.

(6) Load(%) This displays the spindle motor load.

Menus

Menus Details This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Spindle standby This item is not displayed.

(2) Tool No. This displays No. of the tool that is attached to the spindle or standby position in the

magazine 1.

(3) -D For D data function and purpose, refer to the instruction manual issued by the MTB.

Menus

Menus Details This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Display items Details

Close

Note

Monitr Sp-stby

(1)

(3)

(2)

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

311 IB-1501453-D

9.2.12 Tool Center Coordinate Display

The tool center coordinates, handle interrupt amount (tool axis movement) and tool center point speed are displayed by the

following functions: the tool center point control function, the tool length compensation along tool axis function and the tool

handle feed & interrupt function (handle feed along the tool axis, tool handle interrupt, tool diameter direction handle feed,

nose center rotation handlefeed)

This function is an additional specification. Any of the following specifications is required.

Tool center point control

Tool length compensation along the tool axis

Tool handle feed & interruption

Inclined surface machining command

3-dimensional tool radius compensation (tool's vertical-direction compensation)

3-dimensional manual feed

Display items

Display items Details (1) Tip Mach posn This displays the position of the tool center from the machine coordinate system ref-

erence position in the machine coordinate system.

(2) Tip wk G54 This displays the position of the tool center from the workpiece coordinate reference position in the selected workpiece coordinate system.

(3) Mech axis angle This displays the rotation angle when using the mechanical axis. 1st rotary axis angle: R2628 (L)/R2629 (H) 2nd rotary axis angle: R2630 (L)/R2631 (H)

(4) Tip speed This displays the movement speed of tool center. By the parameter "#1125 real_f", ac- tual feedrate and command speed can be switched.

(5) Counter display1 The counter type can be selected from the menu. The following counters are displayed by default. Counter display 1: Machine position counter Counter display 2: Workpiece position counter Counter display 3: Tool axis movement counter

(6) Counter display2

(7) Counter display3

Monitr TipDisp

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(3)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

312IB-1501453-D

(1) Status abbreviations are displayed only in "Tip Mach posn" counter area. They are not displayed in other counter area.

(2) The data for 5 axes can be displayed in each counter. In case the number of valid axis is 6 or more, and you want to display the 6th and subsequent axes, press the menu [Next axis] to switch display.

(*1) It cannot be selected when the inclined surface machining command is not valid.

Menus

Menus Details Select the counter type to display on "the counter display 1 to 3".

It is valid after the power is turned ON again.

The counters shown below can be selected.

Machine position counter Workpiece coordinate position counter Inclined surface (*1) Tool axis movement

This changes the displayed axes each counter.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Note

Counter select1

Counter select2

Counter select3

Next axis

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

313 IB-1501453-D

9.2.13 All Spindles' Rotation Speed Display

The command rotation speed and actual rotation of all spindles are displayed.

This function only displays the value. It is not possible to operate here.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Spindles' command ro-

tation speed This displays the spindles' command rotation speed (S command value).

(2) Spindles' actual rotation speed

This displays the spindles' actual rotation speed (r/min).

Menus

Menus Details This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Monitr All Sp

(1) (2)

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

314IB-1501453-D

9.3 Restart Search

With this function, the program search can be executed while updating the coordinate values and the modal information in

the same manner as an actual program operation.

Therefore, this function enables machining from a block in the middle of the program as if the actual machining was carried

out from the beginning.

This function is used to restart machining when a machining program is to be resumed after it has been suspended midway

due to tool damage or for some other reason.

The device [Memory card] and [USB Memory] are not selectable with this function.

There are two types of restart, type 1 and type 2.

The validity of the automatic top search can be changed with control parameter "#8914 Auto Top search".

Restart method Details Restart type 1 After machining is reset due to a tool breakage, etc., machining is restarted from the desig-

nated sequence number and/or block number.

Only the program which had been executed just before can be restarted.

Even after the power is turned ON again, the program can be restarted if the program has

been executed before the power supply is turned OFF.

In case that NC has been reset or the power supply has been turned OFF while fixed cy- cle, custom fixed cycle, MTB macro, or macro interruption is executed, the search with no input to the setting will be performed for each source program. When the user macro is executed, the user macro execution position is searched.

Restart type 2 If a machining program different from the machining program to be restarted was run before starting restart search, specify the sequence No. and block No. before restarting the machin- ing.

Automatic top search OFF

A top search must be executed from the screen. Then, command a se- quence No. and block No., and restart a program.

Automatic top search ON

A top search may not be executed from the screen. A top search is au- tomatically executed, so it is not necessary to execute a top search from the screen. Command a sequence No. and block No., and restart a ma- chining. An arbitrary program can be restarted by designating the program No. When a program No. is omitted, the program currently searched is re- started.

Monitr Reserch

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

315 IB-1501453-D

(1) In the following cases, the screen cannot be switched to top search screen.

Restart type 1 The parameter "#8914 Auto Top search" is "1" (automatic top search)

Screen transition

[Top search]

[Search exec] / [Top search] / [INPUT] /

[File set]

[Retn] / / File input operation

[MSTB history]

[MSTB history] /

(Note)

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

316IB-1501453-D

(1) Set the tool offset amounts and parameters before proceeding the program restart search. If they are not set before- hand, the axes will not return to the proper machining start position.

(2) The axes will not return to the proper machining start position if a program using the user macro external signal input, machine coordinate readout or external mirror image command executes the restart search.

(3) If an attempt was made to shift the coordinate systems by manual or MDI interrupt the last time the machining program was being executed, the axes will not return to the proper machining position.

(4) When using the type 1, a top search for the head of the program is not available. Restart search of the type 1 searches from the previous operation start block and locates the designated block as it memorizes the operation start block pre- viously operated.

(5) When "#8914 Auto Top search" is set to "0" for the type 2, an error message "Top search not completed" appears if the search is attempted directly with the type 2 without executing the top search. Conduct the top search first.

(6) The macro statement blocks cannot be searched for both type 1 and type 2. It is possible to execute the restart search if the control parameter "#8101 MACRO SINGLE" is set to ON. However, note that the tool path may change because of the radius compensation, the corner R/C, and geometric read ahead blocks.

(7) In a multi-part system, perform restart search operation in each part system.

(8) When the linear-type rotary axis returns to the restart position, control returns to the workpiece coordinate position.

(9) A program restart search is not available at the head of the program. Restart search settings are possible, but control may not return to the correct position when the head of the program is searched.

(10) If the parameter "#1151 rstini" is set to "0" (No reset initial) in the program without the sequence number, a restart search (type 1) may not function properly after reset 1 has been executed. Therefore, assign a sequence number to each program.

(11) If INPUT/search is carried out without designating any value in the input area, a restart search is performed using the previously executed ONB number (type 1 only). If a reset is executed during MDI interruption processing, a restart search is performed using the previous ONB number for MDI interruption.

(12) If INPUT/search is carried out without designating any value in the input area, the position of the ONB number that first matches the designated condition is searched at restart, regardless of the number of repetitions.

(13) When the operation mode is set to the MDI mode, a restart search is not available. If an attempt is made to carry out a restart search, the operation message "Can't search in MDI mode" is displayed.

(14) Restart search is available for a program that has a file name consisting of up to 32 characters. Restart search is not available for a program that has a file name consisting 33 or more characters.

(15) A search error will occur if an intended ONB is not found even M99 block is detected in the main program.

(16) A error will occur if the M99 block in the main program is searched.

(17) When "#1122 pglk_c" (Program display lock C) is set to "2", the restart search cannot be executed as "Program display lock C" is applied.

(18) If both N and B are omitted, it will be assumed as the head of the program and the number of repetitions is considered as "1" even the P number is designated.

(19) When either N or B is omitted, the omitted one is assumed as "0".

(20) Restart search cannot be carried out for a block executing 3-dimensional circular interpolation, cylindrical interpolation, polar coordinate interpolation, milling interpolation or tool center point control. A program error (P49) will occur.

(21) When you execute the restart search to a block in synchronous tapping cycle modal, issue the S code for a tapping spindle from MSTB history menu. If it is not issued, the tapping spindle execute the synchronous tapping with current gear step without changing the gear.

(22) The number of program repetitions, "P", can be designated up to the total value of the same number of sub-program repetitions, "L", described on the program.

(23) When "#8129 Subpro No. select" is set to "1" or "2", it triggers a restart search on a sub-program with the O number. Therefore, to designate the program number, it must be prefixed by an "O".

Precautions

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

317 IB-1501453-D

(1) If any ONBP is designated, restart search is only carried out in the displayed part system. (This operation is available when this function is invalid.)

(2) The type 2 restart search cannot be carried out without ONBP designation; therefore, only the type 1 restart search be- comes available for all part systems in batch.

(3) The top search and type 2 restart search are carried out only in the displayed part system.

(4) If an error occurs during a restart search for all part systems in batch, the numbers of all the part systems that are judged to be abnormal are displayed in the format "$ + part system number" following the "Search error" message.

(5) If the O number of the currently searched machining program is inconsistent in all part systems during the restart search for all part systems in batch, a restart search is carried out in the displayed part systems (a restart search in individual part systems). When the restart search is completed, the number of the searched part system is displayed in the format "$ + part sys- tem number" following the "Search completed" message.

(6) When "#1285 ext21/bit1" is set to OFF (search by part system), restart search is only carried out in the displayed part systems even if search conditions (the O numbers of the machining programs in the NC memory and of the searched machining program are consistent in all the part systems with type 1 and no ONBP designation) are satisfied in all part systems.

(7) When "#1285 ext21/bit1" is ON, the message "Executing automatic operation", "Program restarting", or "Program checking" is displayed while any part system is under automatic operation, program restarting, or program checking.

(8) When "#1285 ext21/bit1" is OFF, the message "Executing automatic operation" or "Program restarting" is displayed while the displayed part system is under automatic operation or program restarting.

(9) In multi-part system, carry out restart search for the queued blocks. If a restart search is carried out in a block other than the queued blocks, the block execution timing is off between the 1st part system and 2nd part system, and the machine is in danger of collision.

Precautions (For multi-part system)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

318IB-1501453-D

9.3.1 Main Screen

The type 1 and type 2 restart search can be executed from the main screen.

(*1) If the sequence number exceeds six digits, only the low-order six digits are displayed.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Device name, directory

display This displays the device and directory where the searched machining program is lo- cated.

(2) Research position This displays the researched main program position (program No., sequence No.(*1), repeat count, block No.).

(3) Restart type This displays the restart search type.

(4) Position when restart search is completed

This displays the position on the local coordinate system when the restart search is completed.

(5) Remaining distance when restart search is completed

This displays the remaining distance when the restart search is completed.

(6) Input section This displays details of the key input.

(4)

(5)

(1) (2)

(6)

(3)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

319 IB-1501453-D

(*1) The menu will be grayed out and cannot be selected when the number of valid axes is six or less.

Menus

Menus Details This starts the restart search based on the designated device, directory, program number (O), se- quence number (N), block number (B) and number of block execution times (P).

This changes to the pop-up window for executing top search, and enables top search. When the type 1 is selected or the parameter "#8914 Auto Top search" is set to "1", this menu cannot be selected.

This selects the restart search type. Restart search is executed with the highlighted restart type. The type 1 or type 2 menu is always highlighted. When restart search is executed, the selected restart type is displayed at the display item (3) "Restart type".

This changes to the pop-up window for setting the file, and enables the file to be selected.

This switches the axis to be displayed on the counter. (*1)

This opens the MSTB history screen as a pop-up window. The M, S, T and B command used in the machining program are listed on the MSTB history screen. If the cursor is moved to the listed M, S, T or B command and the [INPUT] key is pressed, that command will be executed.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Search exec

Top search

Type1

Type2

File set

Next axis

MSTB history

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

320IB-1501453-D

9.3.2 Top Search Screen

Same as "Operation Search".

(*1) When the multi-part system program management is enabled (#1285 ext21/bit0 = 1) for the device [Memory], the last

updated date/time of the file is not displayed.

Display items

Menus

Menus Details This starts the top search based on the designated device, directory, program number (O), sequence number (N), block number (B) and number of block execution times (P).

When the menu is highlighted, it indicates that the top search pop-up window is open. If pressed again when highlighted, the top search pop-up window closes, and the main pop-up window opens.

This displays the device menu. Select which device program to search for from this menu. When a device with directory is selected, the route is selected first.

Display starts from the first page of the directory/list of files. The cursor moves to the top line.

The last page of the directory/list of files is displayed. The cursor moves to the bottom line.

Pressing this menu switches display/non-display status and the display contents of the "Date/Comment" column of the program list as follows:

Program comment -> the last updated date/time of the file (*1) -> not displayed

This updates the list contents. (The latest contents of the currently selected device and directory are listed.)

This changes the method of sorting the list.

Search exec

Top search

Device select

Top jump

Bottom jump

Comment switch

List update

Sort change

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

321 IB-1501453-D

9.3.3 File Setting Screen

Same as "Operation Search".

(*1) When the multi-part system program management is enabled (#1285 ext21/bit0 = 1) for the device [Memory], the last

updated date/time of the file is not displayed.

Display items

Menus

Menus Details This selects the device for searching for the program.

The menu [Memory2] is grayed out and non-selectable, when the specification of program memory capacity 1000kB[2560m] or 2000kB[5120m] is invalid.

Display starts from the first page of the directory/list of files. The cursor moves to the top line.

The last page of the directory/list of files is displayed. The cursor moves to the bottom line.

This returns the main menu.

Pressing this menu switches display/non-display status and the display contents of the "Date/Comment" column of the program list as follows:

Program comment -> the last updated date/time of the file (*1) -> not displayed

This updates the list contents. (The latest contents of the currently selected device and directory are listed.)

This changes the method of sorting the list.

Memory

Memory2

Top jump

Bottom jump

Retn

Comment switch

List update

Sort change

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

322IB-1501453-D

9.3.4 MSTB History Screen

Display items

Display items Details (1) MSTB history The MSTB codes used for the machining are listed after the restart search is complet-

ed. The displayed value can be set (manual numerical value command) as the current modal value until the reset or starting is applied. The character color is changed for the value which is once set. The number of displayed codes is as follows: M: up to 35, S1 to S8: 3 each, T: 3, B:3. If the number of codes used for the machining exceeds the displayable number of codes, the codes which have been used in the beginning is not displayed. Address T will display only the tool number regardless of the parameter (#11038 T disp type).

Menus

Menus Details When this is highlighted, it indicates that the MSTB history pop-up window is open. If the menu is pressed when this menu is highlighted, the system will close the MSTB history pop-up window, and the main pop-up window opens.

(1)

MSTB history

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

323 IB-1501453-D

9.3.5 Operation Sequence for Program Restart

There are two types of restart, type 1 and type 2.

When feed hold has been applied and reset because the tool has broken, etc., restart with restart type 1.

(1) When single block signal is OFF, the machining is restarted without stopping temporarily after the axes return to the restart position. (The cycle starts when the automatic return by program restart is valid.)

(2) Execute "reset & rewind" for resetting.

(3) Restart search is not available for a program that has a file name consisting 33 or more characters.

Restart type 1

The following items are displayed when restart search is completed. Remaining distance when the restart search

is completed Restart position (on local coordinates) Each command value of the SMTB

functions.

"RP" is displayed for the axes that have moved to the restart position. After this, the axis does not move in either the + or - direction.

If the cycle starts when the "Automatic return by program restart" parameter ("#1302 AutoRP") is ON, the processing is restarted after all axes return to the restart position at the same time.

(Refer to "Returning to the Restart Position")

Start

End

Feed hold reset

Machining restart

Machining program

If the tool compensation amount (tool length, tool radius) is changed, change the tool on tool compensation screen.

Operation on program restart screen

Press the RESET key and suspend the present processing.

Press the feed hold button and retreat to the tool change position by manual means or MDI.

Replace with a new tool.

Search the block to be restarted.

Turn the program restart switch ON.

Execute the manual numerical value command (S,M,T,B)

Turn the program restart switch OFF.

Return to the automatic operation mode.

Press the cycle start button.

In the manual (JOG/rapid traverse) mode, move the axes to the restart return position.

(Refer to "Executing Restart Search (Restart type 1)")

(Refer to "Executing the MSTB Commands")

(Refer to "Returning to the Restart Position")

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

324IB-1501453-D

If a machining program differing from the machining program to be restarted was run before starting restart search, restart

with restart type 2.

When the coordinate system of the automatic operation last time and the coordinate system of the machining restart are

changed, it is possible to restart.

(1) The necessary matters for starting the machining program, such as setting the coordinate system, must be completed before starting restart search.

(1) When single block signal is OFF, the machining is restarted without stopping temporarily after the axes return to the restart position. (The cycle starts when the automatic return by program restart is valid.)

(2) Restart search is not available for a program that has a file name consisting 33 or more characters.

(3) When the searched program do not exist, the operation message "Search error" appears.

Restart type 2

Note

The following items are displayed when restart search is completed. Remaining distance when the restart search is

completed Restart position (on local coordinates) Each command value of the SMTB functions.

"RP" is displayed for the axes that have moved to the restart position. After this, the axis does not move in either the + or - direction.

If the cycle starts when the "Automatic return by program restart" parameter ("#1302 AutoRP") is ON, the processing is restarted after all axes return to the restart position at the same time.

(Refer to "Returning to the Restart Position")

Start

End

Machining stop

Machining program Running of other program

If the command at the head of the program is an incremental command or G92 command, and none of the axes are at the program start position, the program does not restart properly.

Operation on program restart screen

Move each axis to the program start position.

In the MDI mode, set the coordinate system to be used when starting the program to be restarted.

Search for the block to be restarted.

Turn the program restart switch ON.

Execute the manual numerical value command (S,M,T,B)

Turn the program restart switch OFF.

Return to the automatic operation mode.

Press the cycle start button.

In the manual (JOG/rapid traverse) mode, move the axes to the restart return position.

(Refer to "Executing Restart Search (Restart type 2)")

(Refer to "Executing the MSTB Commands")

(Refer to "Returning to the Restart Position")

Machining restart

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

325 IB-1501453-D

9.3.6 Executing Restart Search (Restart Type 1)

When feed hold has been applied and reset because the tool has broken, etc., restart with Restart type 1.

When the following conditions are met, the program search is executed across all part systems in batch.

The parameter "#1285 ext21/bit0" (Multi-part system program management) is set to "1".

The parameter "#1285 ext21/bit1" (Program search type switch) is is set to "1".

The machining program is stored in the device [Memory].

ONBP is not used.

(Example) When tool breakage during execution of O1000 N7 occurred, and restarting from the O1000 N6 block

(*1) The maximum number of digits is eight for the sequence No. and five for the block No.

(1) When the sorting of tool data is in progress, the operation message "Sorting of tool data is in progress" appears, and the search cannot be executed.

Operation method

(1) Press the feed hold button and retreat to the tool change position by manual means or MDI. Press the reset key and suspend the present processing.

(2) Replace with a new tool.

(3) Press the main menu [Reserch]. The sub-menu is displayed. The main screen for restart search appears as a pop-up window.

(4) Press the [Type 1]. Set the position to restart search in the setting area.

Delimit the ONB number in the setting area using /. The main or sub program is targeted. (Example) 1000/6/0 The program currently searched is targeted. (Example) /6/0

When the [INPUT] key is pressed without entering data in the input area, restart search will be carried out for the last executed block.

(5) Press the [INPUT] key or the menu [Search exec]. Restart search is executed. (*1) The message "Executing restart search" appears during the search process, and the message "Restart search is completed" appears when completed. Each axis' restart position and the restart remaining dis- tance are displayed. When the menu [MSTB history] is pressed, the MSTB history screen will open as a pop-up window, and the M, S, T, B command used in the machining program will be listed.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

326IB-1501453-D

9.3.7 Executing Restart Search (Restart Type 2)

If a machining program differing from the machining program to be restarted was run before starting restart search, restart

the respective machining program with restart type 2.

The restart type 2 operation sequence is the same as restart type 1, but necessary matters for starting the machining pro-

gram, such as setting the coordinate system, must be completed before starting restart search.

When the parameter "#8914 Auto Top search" is "0", execute the top search for the machining program.

(Example) When restarting from subprogram O123 N6 B2 called from main program O1000

Operation method (When the parameter "#8914 Auto Top search" is "0")

(1) Turn the power ON, and return all axes to the refer- ence position.

(2) In the MDI mode, set the coordinate system to be used when starting the program to be restarted.

(3) Move each axis to the program restart position.

(4) Press the main menu [Reserch]. The sub-menu is displayed. The main screen for restart search appears as a pop-up window.

(5) Press the [Type 2].

(6) Press the sub-menu [Top search]. The window for top search appears as a pop-up window.

(7) Press the sub-menu [Device select]. Select a device and press the menu key.

(8) Press the [], [], or key to move the cursor

to the directory to which the file to be set belongs. Press the [INPUT] key.

(9) Press [], [], or key to move the cursor to

the machining program to be edited.

Set the cursor to 1000.

(10) Press the [INPUT] key. The search can be executed by pressing the menu [Search exec] instead of the [INPUT] key.

The top search starts. When the top search is completed, the operation mes- sage "Top search completed" appears. The top search pop-up window closes, and the main screen for restart search appears as a pop-up window.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

327 IB-1501453-D

(*1) The maximum number of digits is eight for the sequence No. and five for the block No.

(1) When the sorting of tool data is in progress, the operation message "Sorting of tool data is in progress" appears, and the search cannot be executed.

(11) Set the position to restart search in the setting area. Delimit the ONBP number in the setting area using /. The restart search is executed at designated position by NBP No. with the set O No. at the head. (Example) 123.PRG/6/2/1 The program currently searched is targeted. (Example) /6/2/1

Set the number of times which the block to be searched appears in "P".

For example, if a block in a subprogram is searched, and the subprogram is called out several times, the block to be searched is also executed several times. Thus, which execution block to be searched must be set. (If "0" is set, it is handled in the same manner as "1".) To search the first execution block, or to search for a block executed only once, this item does not need to be set.

(12) Press the [INPUT] key or the menu [Search exec]. Restart search is executed. (*1) The message "Executing restart search" appears during the search process, and the message "Restart search is completed" appears when completed. Each axis' restart position and the restart remaining dis- tance are displayed. When the menu [MSTB history] is pressed, the MSTB history screen will open as a pop-up window, and the M, S, T, B command used in the machining program will be listed.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

328IB-1501453-D

(Example) When restarting from subprogram O123 N6 B2 called from main program O1000

Operation method (When the parameter "#8914 Auto Top search" is "1")

(1) Turn the power ON, and return all axes to the refer- ence position.

(2) In the MDI mode, set the coordinate system to be used when starting the program to be restarted.

(3) Move each axis to the program restart position.

(4) Press the main menu [Restart]. The sub-menu is displayed. The main screen for restart search appears as a pop-up window.

(5) Press the [Type 2].

(6) Press the sub-menu [File set]. The window for file set appears as a pop-up window.

(7) Select a device and press the menu key.

(8) Press the [], [], or key to move the cur-

sor to the directory to which the file to be set belongs. Press the [INPUT] key.

(9) Press [], [], or key to move the cursor to

the machining program to be edited.

Set the cursor to 1000.

(10) Press the [INPUT] key. The screen for restart search appears as a pop-up win- dow.

(11) Set the position to restart search in the setting area. Delimit the ONBP number in the setting area using /. The restart search is executed at designated position by NBP No. with the set O No. at the head. (Example) 123.PRG/6/2/1 The program currently searched is targeted. (Example) /6/2/1

(12) Press the [INPUT] key or the menu [Search exec]. Restart search is executed. The message "Executing re- start search" appears during the search process, and the message "Restart search is completed" appears when completed. Each axis' restart position and the restart remaining dis- tance are displayed. When the menu [MSTB history] is pressed, the MSTB history screen will open as a pop-up window, and the M, S, T, B command used in the machining program will be listed.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

329 IB-1501453-D

9.3.8 Returning to the Restart Position

The axis is returned to the restart position after restart search is completed.

The method for returning to the restart position (manual/automatic) can be selected with the parameters "#1302 AutoRP".

0: Manual restart position return

1: Automatic restart position return

(1) When the restart switch is ON, move the axis in the same direction as the restart direction. If moved in the reverse di- rection, the operation error "M01 R-pnt direction illegal" occurs. If the tool needs to be retracted once, such as if the tool is interfering with the workpiece, turn the restart switch OFF and retract the axis manually.

(2) After restart position return is completed, the axis cannot be moved if the restart switch is ON. If the axis is moved, the operation error "M01 restart switch ON" occurs.

(3) If even one axis has not completed return to the restart position at cycle start, the error "M01 Restart pos. return incom- plete" occurs. Note that if the axis has been returned to the restart position once and is not at the restart position during cycle start, the alarm does not occur.

(4) If the axis to be returned to the restart position is a machine lock axis, the operation error "M01 program restart machine lock" occurs. Release the machine lock before returning to the restart position.

(5) If the restart switch is turned to ON after the axis is returned to the restart position with the restart switch OFF, "PR" may not be displayed. Return to the restart position after the restart switch is turned ON.

(6) After restart search had been completed, if the movement command is issued by MDI before automatic restart position return has been started, the program error (P48) occurs. Perform the operation again after reset.

(7) After restart search had been completed, if the T command different from the program is issued by MDI before the searched program has been started, the program error (P48) may occur. Perform the operation again after reset. T commands which result in errors are shown below. (Only L system)

When "#1100 Tmove" = "0" T command that selects a tool with different tool length/wear amount than the tool selected by the program. When "#1100 Tmove" = "1"

A program error (P48) will not occur by T command. When "#1100 Tmove" = "2"

T command that selects a tool with different wear amount than the tool selected by the program.

(8) After restart search had been completed, if the handle interruption is performed before the searched program has been started, always the same operation as manual absolute ON is executed regardless of "Manual absolute" signal.

Operation method (manual restart position return) (1) Turn the restart switch ON.

(2) Enter the manual (JOG/rapid traverse) mode.

(3) Move the axis in the restart return direction. The restart position and "RP" appear sequentially from the axes that have been returned. The Restart remaining distance is "0".

(4) When all axes have been returned, turn the restart switch OFF.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

330IB-1501453-D

If the parameter "#1302 AutoRP" is set to "1", each axis returns to the restart position with dry run at cycle start. Machining

restarts after returning. The order that the axes return follows parameter "#2082 a_rstax".

(1) Manually move the axis to a position where the tool does not interfere with the workpiece before starting the cycle.

(2) Even if the parameter "#1302 AutoRP" is to "1", the axes can be returned manually to the restart position by turning the restart switch ON. In this case, move the axes in the order of manual restart position return -> automatic restart position return. After completing automatic restart position return, if the operation is stopped temporarily and the restart switch is turned ON, the operation error "M01 restart switch ON" occurs.

(3) Once the axis has been manually returned to the restart position, if it is moved from the restart position, it will not return to the restart position even if automatic restart position return is executed.

(4) The axis for which parameter "#2082 a_rstax" is set to "0" does not return to the restart position. Note that if "0" is set for all axes, all axes simultaneously return to the restart position. Designate the axes in part system units. If the axis for which parameter "#2082 a_rstax" is set to "0" has not completed manual restart position return when automatic restart position return is started, an error occurs. The error "M01 Restart pos. return incomplete" is displayed.

(5) After automatic restart position return had been started, if the automatic start is executed during MDI mode before not all axes have yet to complete automatic restart position return, the error "M01 Restart pos. return incomplete" occurs.

(6) After restart search had been completed, if the movement command is issued by MDI before automatic restart position return has been started, the program error (P48) occurs. Perform the operation again after reset.

(7) After restart search had been completed, if the T command different from the program is issued by MDI before the searched program has been started, the program error (P48) may occur. Perform the operation again after reset. T commands which result in errors are shown below. (Only L system)

When "#1100 Tmove" = "0" T command that selects a tool with different tool length/wear amount than the tool selected by the program. When "#1100 Tmove" = "1"

A program error (P48) will not occur by T command. When "#1100 Tmove" = "2"

T command that selects a tool with different wear amount than the tool selected by the program

(8) After restart search had been completed, if the handle interruption is performed before the searched program has been started, always the same operation as manual absolute ON is executed regardless of "Manual absolute" signal. When manual interruption is executed to the automatic restart position return completed axis, the axis never returns the auto- matic restart position again.

(9) When an axis moved to return is operated manually, the axis cannot return to correct position.

Automatic restart position return

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

331 IB-1501453-D

9.3.9 Executing the MSTB Commands

If the menu [MTB history] is pressed after restart search is completed, the MSTB commands used for machining program

appear. If the cursor is moved to the listed M, S, T or B command and the [INPUT] key is pressed, that command will be

executed.

Up to 35 M commands, 3 commands each for S1 to S8, 3 T commands and 3 B commands are displayed.

If many MSTB commands are used for machining, the MSTB commands used at first will not appear.

Operation method (1) Press the sub-menu [MSTB history]. The pop-up window changes to the MSTB history win-

dow. The MSTB commands used for machining program are listed.

(2) Using the [], [], [] or [] key, move the cursor to the position of the data to set.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key. The designated command is executed. A value, which has been commanded once, is grayed out. The cursor will move to the next item.

(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3).

(5) When completed with all settings, press the menu [Close] or [MSTB history].

The MSTB history pop-up window closes and the restart search main window appears as a pop-up window.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

332IB-1501453-D

9.4 Collation and Stop

The machining program operation can be block stopped at a registered collation and stop position. The registered collation

and stop position can be canceled.

When the specified block appears, NC status will change single block stop after the execution of the block.

The device [Memory card] and [USB Memory] are not selectable with this function.

When collation and stop is registered

When collation and stop position is displayed

Monitr Col stp

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

333 IB-1501453-D

(*1) When the multi-part system program management is enabled (#1285 ext21/bit0 = 1) for the device [Memory], the last

updated date/time of the file is not displayed.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Collation and stop de-

vice name This is the name of the device to be stopped for collation.

(2) Collation and stop posi- tion

This is the position of the program where collation and stop is to be executed. This display is cleared when program stop is completed, or NC is reset or canceled. If the program No. (program name) exceeds 24 characters, "*" will appear as the 24th character.

(3) Display during collation This is displayed during collation.

Menus (When collation and stop is registered)

Menus Details This selects the device to be stopped for collation.

The menu [Memory2] is grayed out and non-selectable, when the specification of program memory capacity 1000kB[2560m] or 2000kB[5120m] is invalid.

This opens the collation and stop position display window as a pop-up window.

Display starts from the first page of the directory/list of files. The cursor moves to the top line.

The last page of the directory/list of files is displayed. The cursor moves to the bottom line.

Pressing this menu switches display/non-display status and the display contents of the "Date/Comment" column of the program list as follows:

Program comment -> the last updated date/time of the file (*1) -> not displayed

This updates the list contents. (The latest contents of the currently selected device and directory are listed.)

This changes the method of sorting the list.

This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Menus (When collation and stop position is displayed)

Menus Details This cancels the collation and stop setting. Note that automatic operation is not reset.

This returns the list when collation and stop is registered.

Memory

Memory2

Stop posn

Top jump

Bottom jump

Comment switch

List update

Sort change

Close

Stop cancel

Retn

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

334IB-1501453-D

(1) The maximum number of digits is eight for the sequence No. and five for the block No.

(2) Collation and stop can be canceled during automatic operation.

Operation method (Registering the collation and stop) (1)

Press the key to select the part system to be

stopped for collation.

The currently selected part system is displayed at the upper left of the screen.

(2) Press the main menu [Col stp]. The mode changes to the buffer correction mode.

(3) Select the device. The selected device name and root directory (memory:/ ) are displayed in the device name and directory display fields. The menu [Memory] is highlighted.

(4) Press the [], [], , or key to move the cur-

sor to the directory containing the file to be set.

If the list contents differ from the actual device or di- rectory, press the menu [List update].

(5) Press the [INPUT] key. Moves into the directory.

(6) Input the program No., sequence No. and block No. using / as a delimiter. (Example) 1001/1/2 [INPUT] When carrying out collation and stop of MDI pro- gram, set "0" as the program No. If pointing the cursor to a file name, the file name is echoed back to the input area.

The collation and stop position is displayed, and the pro- gram No. ("MDI" for MDI mode), sequence No., block No. and "Verifying" appear.

(7) Start the automatic operation. When the collation and stop is completed, a message in- dicating the end appears. The stop position displayed on the screen is cleared, and the "Verifying" display is erased.

Press the menu [Stop cancel] to cancel the collation and stop.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

335 IB-1501453-D

(1) When registering the stop position (O, N, B values), confirm that the block exists in the searched program. Collation and stop will not be executed if the corresponding block is not found at the registered stop position.

(2) Always set one of the O, N or B numbers. If nothing is set, a setting error will occur.

(3) If the O No. is not set, the O No. used during operation search will be used.

(4) If the N and B numbers are not set, the block will be searched using the O No.

(5) If there are several sequences and blocks with the same number in one program, collation and stop will be executed after executing the first block that matches in the execution order.

(6) The settings are canceled when collation and stop is executed.

(7) The settings are canceled when reset is executed.

(8) If only the program number is set, collation and stop will take place at the head of the program only when there is a program number at the first line.

(9) Collation and stop cannot be performed or canceled for blocks being executed or blocks already read into the preread buffer.

(10) Collation and stop is not performed in the tapping mode.

(11) Collation and stop is possible in a subprogram, but is not possible in a MTB macro program.

(12) If collation and stop is set for a fixed cycle block, it will be executed after the positioning block is completed.

(13) Collation and stop is possible even when editing is locked.

(14) Collation and stop is executed after executing the block set for the collation and stop position. If the position is set in a program call (M98) block, collation and stop will be executed before the subprogram is called.

(15) If the set block is set to be skipped, collation and stop will not be executed.

(16) The collation and stop position can be registered for each part system.

(17) The stop position cannot be registered during verification.

(18) Registration of collation and stop position is not possible for a program with 33 or more file name characters.

Precautions

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

336IB-1501453-D

9.5 Correcting the Machining Program

9.5.1 Program Editing

If you press the [Edit] main menu or set the edit/search signal ON, the program editing window appears to enable you to

edit a program. However, if the target program is not found (displays "O0"), the editing window does not appear. The pro-

gram is opened on the unselected side for the 2-part system simultaneous display.

When the program is edited, the key input data is directly written into the program display area. All data is overwritten from

the cursor position. "Editing" appears on the right side of the file name display once input is started.

When the [INPUT] key is pressed, the program is saved in the NC memory and the "Editing" message disappears.

A program to be edited can be switched to the other part system's program with key when a parameter "#8952 Edit-

win $ switch" is set to "1".

For information on editing operations, refer to "3.2 Creating and Editing a Machining Program".

Monitr Edit

(1) (2)

(5)

(3) (4)

(6)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

337 IB-1501453-D

A selection part system operation search can be carried out using the block with the cursor as the top.

There are 2 ways to search cursor position, "INPUT search" and "Edit/search signal search".

Display items

Display items Details (1) Path display The path of the currently opened program file is displayed.

(If the path is too long, the portion exceeding single-byte 49 characters is not dis- played.) (Example) Memory: /Program

(2) Current edit display "Ed-

iting"

Displayed when the program is edited after it was displayed.

Insert mode display The overwrite mode and insert mode are switched by pressing the [INSERT] key. During insert mode: "INS" appears. During overwrite mode: Nothing appears.

(3) File name display This displays the file name of the program currently being edited. "MDI" appears when the MDI program is edited.

(4) Top line of the displayed

program The top line of the program to be displayed is displayed.

(5) Line number Each line of the program is numbered, and only the last three digits are displayed. If a line is wrapped because a line is too long, no number is assigned to the top of the next line.

Program display This displays the contents of the program (machining program, MDI program) currently

being edited.

The line that the cursor is on is highlighted.

If the value of the parameter "#8952 Edit-win $ switch" is set to "1" and a part system

is switched while the window is displayed, the display is changed to the program of the

part system.

Machining program editing:

Switch the mode selection switch to other than "MDI mode" and press the [Edit] main

menu.

However, to edit data, designate the machining program to execute a search.

MDI program editing:

Switch the mode selection switch to "MDI mode" and press the main menu [Edit].

(6) Input section This displays details of the key input.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

338IB-1501453-D

By pressing [INPUT] key when it is in the normal status (not being in status such as editing or character searching, etc.),

operation search of the selected part system is carried out starting from the block that has the cursor.

This is enabled when "1" is set to the parameter "#11031 Cursor pos search".

(1) When operating character string search, string replace, cursor on input unit, or editing it will not start cursor position search by pressing [INPUT] key.

(2) A selection part system operation search can be carried out using the block with the cursor as the top.

(3) Operating search program will be the program that was searched when program edit window was open.

(4) Cursor position search is disabled during automatic operation or restart search. However, it is enabled when the param- eter "#11039 Cusr pos srch type" is 1 even if the operation is under single block stop. For details, refer to "Search during single block stop" in "9.5.1 Program Editing".

(5) When MDI program is displayed, the block with the cursor will be set for MDI by pressing [INPUT] key.

(6) If the [INPUT] key is pressed when the data protection is valid, the cursor position search will be executed without dis- playing the message "Data protect", and the message "Search completed" will appear upon completion.

(7) If the INPUT key is pressed during automatic operation or restart search while the program currently being displayed is not in a selected part system, message "Executing automatic operation" or "Program restarting" is not displayed. The cursor position search is carried out, and message "Search completed" is displayed.

(8) If the N number of the block to be searched exceeds the maximum value or is set to "0", it causes a search error in all blocks that belong to the N number.

(9) If characters other than digits follow "N" of the block to be searched, "N**" of the program is handled as a normal block, not a sequence number. Therefore, if the target block is searched, it is handled as a block that belongs to the previously searched N number.

INPUT search

(1) Carry out the operation search to find the program to carry out the cursor position search.

(2) Press the menu [Edit]. The program edit window appears. The program is displayed starting from the block current- ly searched.

(During automatic operation, the program is displayed

from its top.)

(3) Move the cursor to the block to be carried out the cur- sor operation search.

(4) Press the [INPUT] key. Operation search is carried out starting from the block that the cursor is positioned. During the search "Searing" will display blinking. When the search is completed, "Search completed" is displayed.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

339 IB-1501453-D

This is enabled when "2" or "3" is set to the parameter "#11031 Cursor pos search".

(1) If the "edit/search signal" is set to ON on a screen other than the monitor screen, the "Edit/Search" window is not dis- played. To display the "Edit/Search" window, switch to the monitor screen. Switching to the monitor screen automatically displays the "Edit/Search" window.

(2) If a window (operation search window, menu list, guidance, etc.) other than the program edit window is displayed while the monitor screen is being displayed, the "Edit/Search" window is not displayed even if the edit/search signal is set to ON. To display the "Edit/Search" window, close the currently displayed window. When the currently displayed window is closed, the "Edit/Search" window is displayed automatically.

(3) If the edit/search signal is set ON during display of the program edit window on the monitor screen, the display changes to the "Edit/Search" window while the editing contents, cursor position, and menu etc. remain unchanged.

(4) If the "Edit/Search" window is attempted to be closed during editing, a message to confirm whether to save the data will appear. When it appears, if save is carried out by pressing the [Y] or [INPUT] key, the operation search will be carried out starting from the block that has the cursor. If save is not carried out, the edited data will be aborted, and the operation search will not be carried out.

(5) If the "Edit/Search" window is closed while the cursor is positioned in the input area during string searching or string replacement, the operation is canceled, and the cursor returns to the editing area. After this, an operation search is car- ried out with the block located by the cursor at the top. However, during editing, the cursor returns to the editing area, and the same operation as that described in (3) is performed.

Edit/search signal search

(1) Carry out the operation search to find the program to carry out the cursor position search.

(2) Turn ON the edit/search signal. The "Edit/Search" window is displayed. The program is displayed starting from the block current- ly searched.

(During automatic operation, the program is displayed from its top.)

(3) Move the cursor to the block to be carried out the cur- sor operation search.

(4) Turn OFF the edit/search signal. The "Edit/Search" window is closed, and the operation search is carried out starting from the block that has the cursor. When the search is completed, "Search completed" is displayed. (Also in the case where the screen is changed with a function key, etc. and the "Edit/Search" window is closed, the operation search is carried out.)

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

340IB-1501453-D

(6) If the "Edit/Search" window is displayed while the automatic operation or restart search is in process in the selected part system, message "Executing automatic operation" or "Program restarting" is displayed. However, when "#11039 Cusr pos srch type" is set to "1", cursor position search is possible even in the single block stop state. For details, refer to "Search during single block stop" in "9.5.1 Program Editing".

(7) If the "Edit/Search" window is closed during automatic operation or restart search in the selected part system, message "Executing automatic operation" or "Program restarting" is displayed, but an operation search is not carried out. How- ever, when "#11039 Cusr pos srch type" is set to "1", cursor position search is possible even in the single block stop state. For details, refer to "Search during single block stop" in "9.5.1 Program Editing".

(8) If the "Edit/Search" window is opened while the operation mode is set to the MDI mode, the MDI program is displayed in the "Edit/Search" window. In this state, if the "Edit/Search" window is closed, the MDI setting at the cursor position is executed.

(9) The part system that is selected when the "Edit/Search" window is opened is to be searched when the "Edit/Search" window is closed.

(10) The program that is searched when the "Edit/Search" window is opened is to be searched when the "Edit/Search" win- dow is closed.

(11) In the following cases, edit/search is not available with the "Edit/Search" window. After an error is displayed, a blank "Edit/Search" window is displayed.

Edit lock B, C is enabled Operation search is not carried out Edit file size exceeded

(12) If the edit/search signal is set ON at power ON, the "Edit/Search" window is displayed.

(13) The "Edit/Search" window cannot be closed with the cancel key. To open another window of the monitor screen, either turn OFF the edit/search signal or use the direct screen selection in the menu list.

(14) If you switch to the monitor screen to edit using the direct screen selection while the "Edit/Search" window is displayed, the "Edit/Search" window is closed once, a search is carried out, and then the "Edit/Search" window is displayed again.

(15) If the N number of the block to be searched exceeds the maximum value or is set to "0", it causes a search error in all blocks that belong to the N number.

(16) If characters other than digits follow "N" of the block to be searched, "N**" of the program is handled as a normal block, not a sequence number. Therefore, if the target block is searched, it is handled as a block that belongs to the previously searched N number.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

341 IB-1501453-D

Cursor position search can be operated during single block stop when "1" is set to the parameter "#11039 Cusr pos srch

type". By pressing menu [Edit] during single block stop, single block stop position becomes top of the program display.

(1) Blocks lower than the point of the single block stop only are eligible for cursor position search designation during single block stop. "Search error" will display and the search will fail when cursor position search is attempted at an already executed block.

(2) The blocks between single block stop position and search position block will be ignored when cycle start is operated after cursor position search is operated during single block stop.

(3) While the part system with a cursor position search to be performed is in block stop state in arbitrary reverse run mode (including a case in which the reverse run control mode signal is set ON), message "search error" is displayed, and a cursor position search cannot be carried out.

(4) If the part system with a cursor position search to be performed is placed in block stop state due to a program error, message "During automatic operation" is displayed, and an operation search is not carried out.

(5) If cursor position search is commanded at a block that causes a program error, the block of the single block stop, instead of the cursor position search target block, will appear on the top of program buffer display upon automatic start up.

(6) If cursor position search is commanded at a block that comes later than a fixed cycle while stopped with single block stop in the midst of the fixed cycle, the cursor position search target block will appear on the top of the program buffer display. However, automatic operation will start from the top of the remaining of the fixed program, and after finishing the fixed cycle, will move on to executing the cursor search target program.

(7) If a cursor position search is carried out for blocks after the MTB macro program while the MTB macro program is inter- rupted by a single block stop, a program buffer is displayed from a search block. However, when the system is started automatically, the MTB macro program is executed continuously, and the block detected by a cursor position search is processed after the MTB macro program has been completed.

Search during single block stop

(1) Pause automatic operation with single block stop.

(2) Press the menu [Edit]. The program edit window appears. The block where the operation is stopped due to single block stop is displayed on the top.

If the operation has been stopped in a subprogram, that subprogram is displayed.

(3) Move the cursor to the block to be carried out the cur- sor operation search.

(4) Press the [INPUT] key. The search will operate by single block stop position with top. During the search "Searing" will display blinking. When the search is completed, "Search completed" is displayed.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

342IB-1501453-D

9.5.2 Buffer Correction

The next command can be corrected and changed by block stop during the automatic operation in the memory mode or

the operation in the MDI mode.

When a program error occurs, the block in which the error occurred can be corrected without resetting the NC, and opera-

tion can be continued.

(1) The next command can be corrected in the following two cases.

When single block stop is applied, and there is a command block to be corrected in the next command. When there is an error (program error) in the next command and automatic operation is stopped.

(2) Not only the displayed buffer data but also the contents in the device are corrected with the buffer corrections. (The corrected data is reflected.)

(3) Several blocks following the next command can be corrected simultaneously.

Menus

Menus Details This closes the pop-up window and quits this function.

Monitr P corr

MDI

Memory Preread

block Execution

block NC operation Machine control

Buffer correction

Close

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

343 IB-1501453-D

During a single block stop or when a program error stop occurs, the buffer can be corrected with the following operations,

and operation can be continued.

The normally executed program appears in the buffer correction area.

Operation method

(1) Press the main menu [Prg correct]. The mode changes to the buffer correction mode.

The display changes so that the next command is at the head of the area. The buffer correction area becomes the valid area, and the keys can be input or the cursor moved. The cursor can be moved freely within the buffer correc- tion area using the cursor keys.

(2) Correct the program with the same method as a nor- mal program editing.

(3) Press the [INPUT] key. The buffer correction mode ends, and the corrected data is written into program. If a program error has occurred, the error display is erased.

(4) Confirm that the corrected data is correct, and then restart.

The program execution resumes from the currently stopped position.

Previous command Command in execution

Next command and subsequent commands

Previous command Command in execution

Buffer correction area (white portion Next command and subsequent commands

16 lines

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

344IB-1501453-D

Buffer correction mode will not be applied in the following cases: (1) Machining program for buffer corrections is in edit lock or program display lock state.

(2) When the data protection is valid.

(3) Machining program for the device in write-protection state

(4) Machining program in read-only state

(5) During the compound type fixed cycle, the tool center point control or executing the MTB macro program

Starting and ending buffer corrections (1) If automatic operation is started or there is no next command data, the buffer correction mode is not entered even if

the menu key is pressed.

(2) To stop or to cancel the buffer corrections, press the menu [Close] again, or press the key.

(3) If another menu key, etc., is pressed before pressing the [INPUT] key, the corrected buffer contents return to the orig- inal data.

(4) If changing to another screen or resetting the NC during buffer correction or changing system, the buffer correction is canceled. In this case, the corrected contents are not saved, and the buffer correction mode ends.

Display data during buffer correction (1) The key operations used for corrections in the buffer correction mode are the same as the operations when editing a

program. Up to 16 blocks can be displayed. Even when a block is displayed over several lines, all 16 blocks can be displayed by scrolling the buffer correction area.

(2) Number of characters in one block is max. 256 (including ";" (EOB)). If exceeds 256 characters, the block will be split into two.

(3) Up to 4096 characters can be edited with buffer corrections.

Operations during buffer correction (1) If there is no ";" (EOB) at the data in the last block corrected when the [INPUT] key is pressed, it is added automatically.

(2) When the buffer correction mode is set, the last block displayed in the buffer correction area may not fit in if the block is long, etc. To correct this type of block, take care to the following points.

If a ";" (EOB) is added to the end of the displayed data, the section following the incomplete display becomes an- other block. If ";" (EOB) is not added, the following section stays the same, and is handled as the continuation of the displayed section.

If one block is deleted by pressing the [C.B] key, the block is deleted up to the section following the incomplete display (up to the ";").

(3) Operation cannot be started during buffer correction. An alarm occurs.

(4) If NC is reset during buffer correction, buffer correction mode will be canceled, although buffer correction window is left opened. At this time, editing operation is not possible. Close the correction window.

(5) Buffer correction writing is not interrupted by NC reset.

(6) The operation message "Can't write into file" appears at any attempt of the buffer mode correction to write into the program being operated, which had stopped when the buffer correction mode started.

For multi-part system (1) When a machining program under buffer correction is called by another part system, a file input/output error occurs

to the caller-side part system, and restart of the operation will be disabled.

(2) Note that if the same program is executed in another part system after a buffer correction, there may be some changes in paths, etc.

(3) The program which has searched for the sequence No. while operating in another part system cannot be buffer cor- rection. The operation message "Buffer correct not possible" appears.

Precautions

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

345 IB-1501453-D

Previous command and command in execution (1) When the buffer is corrected following the operation mode change at single block stop, nothing will be displayed in

previous command and command in execution.

(2) When there is no block after sub program call or user macro call, a program error occurs at the last block of the des- tination program. If a buffer correction is made in this state, the destination program will be displayed in the buffer correction window, but the actual correction result will be reflected on the source program.

(3) The buffer cannot be corrected when the block where the buffer is corrected is in the forward side from the block called at another nest level. The operation message "Buffer correct not possible" appears. The buffer can be corrected when the block where the buffer is corrected is in the rear side from the block called at another nest level.

M98 H 111

M30

N999

G00 X10.

G04

Z20.

G04.

Y30.

G04.

M99

N111

N112 G00 X5.0

M98 H999

M21

G01 X100.

(a)

(c)

(b)

(d)

(a) : The buffer can be corrected.

(b)(d) : The buffer can be corrected

because the block is in the

rear side from (a).

(c) : The buffer cannot be corrected

because the block is in the

forward side from (b).

C80 Series Instruction Manual 9 Machining a Workpiece

346IB-1501453-D

10

347 IB-1501453-D

Troubleshooting

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

348IB-1501453-D

10Troubleshooting This chapter explains remedies when any alarm message is displayed, and how to check the NC status.

The operations are mainly performed on the diagnosis (Diagn) or maintenance (Mainte) screen.

10.1 Confirming the NC Message (Alarm Screen)

A list of currently occurring alarms or messages can be displayed on this screen.

The displayed messages include the NC alarms, stop codes, alarm messages, operator messages, etc.

A history of alarm information can be displayed also.

NC message

PLC message

Diagn Alarm

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

349 IB-1501453-D

The messages are color-coded in the following manner:

The axis name is displayed in messages for each axis. The axis name is displayed as shown below according to the axis

type.

If the same message occurs for different axis types, they will appear as separate messages.

The part system name is also displayed if the message is output for each part system. The part system name set in "#1169

system name" is displayed. The part system name does not appear for the 1-part system.

Display items

Display items Details (1) NC message This displays the operation alarms, program errors, MCP alarms, servo alarms, sys-

tem alarms, etc. Up to 10 messages are displayed in order of priority.

(2) Stop code This displays the automatic operation status or stop status during automatic operation. Up to 4 messages are displayed in order of priority.

(3) Alarm message The alarm messages for PLC are not displayed.

(4) Operator message The macro alarm messages are displayed.

Up to 4 messages are displayed.

Message display colors

Message type Character color Background color NC message Alarm White Red

Warning Black Yellow

Stop code Black Yellow

Operator message Black Yellow

Axis name display

Axis type Axis name display Display example

Remarks

NC axis Control axis name (Name of axis in part system)

XYZ If the same message occurs for each part system, several NC axes are displayed together.

Spindle 'S' + spindle No. S1S2 If the same message occurs, several spindles are displayed together.

PLC axis 'P' + PLC axis No. P1P2 If the same message occurs, several PLC axes are displayed together.

Part system display

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

350IB-1501453-D

10.1.1 Alarm History

When an alarm occurs, the alarm information is recorded. When the NC power is ON, an alarm is automatically recorded

in alarm history. Alarm information is recorded from the latest alarm to 512.

Alarm information recorded in the history is NC message displayed on "NC message" screen and alarm messages dis-

played on "PLC message" screen.

The range etc. of record are shown as follows:

Record condition: When an alarm occurs (When two or more alarms occur at the same time, up to five alarms are recorded.)

With multi-part system, 1st part system is given priority and recorded. (Following 2nd part system, 3rd

part system...)

Number of history: 512 alarms (Whole)

Range of record: NC alarm (alarm, warning)

(1) The following alarms are not recorded on the alarm/warning screen.

Operation alarm

- External interlock axis exists (M01 0004) - Cutting override zero (M01 0102) - External feed rate zero (M01 0103) - Block start interlock (M01 0109) - Cutting block start interlock (M01 0110) - Rapid override zero (M01 0125) - Sp-Sp polygon (G51.2) cut interlock (M01 1033)

"U50 PLC stopped" before the HMI screen starts up

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

351 IB-1501453-D

(1) The menus [History start], [History stop], [History update] and [History clear] are valid when the alarm history function is valid and the menu [Alarm history] is selected.

(2) When the alarm history function is used for the first time, clear the alarm history contents by pressing the menu [History clear]. Unnecessary data may be recorded in the alarm history.

(1) If the recording of the alarms is stopped with the menu [History stop] in the alarm history screen, alarms are not recorded in the history even after the NC power is turned OFF and ON. In this case, the recording of the alarms must be started with the menu [History start] in the alarm history screen.

(2) If the time and date are changed, the change is not reflected to the time and date of the history data recorded before the change. Therefore, if the time and date are changed, clear the history with the menu [History clear].

(3) If an alarm occurs while the alarm history is displayed, the display is not updated. Update the history by switching the screen with the menu [History update].

(4) Depending on the part system setting of "Sampling spec" in the maintenance diagnostic data collection setting, the part systems to be recorded in the alarm history vary. If "0" is set, alarms of all part systems are recorded.

(5) The alarm history data collection start/stop operation is switched using the menu [Start] or [Stop] of data collection re- gardless of whether "Alarm history" is set to "0" or "1" in "Collecting data select" in the maintenance diagnostic data collection setting.

Menus

Menus Details This displays the first page of the alarm history. The history sequentially displays 16 alarms per page from the latest alarm. If there are two or more NC alarms of same day and time, the alarms are sequentially displayed from the alarm and warning of the

1st part system. To display the old history, press the key. To display the new history, press the

key.

The data collection of the alarm history is started (restarted). The operation message "The collection begin?(Y/N)" appears. When the [Y] or [INPUT] key is pressed, the data collection is started after the operation message "The collection begin" appears. Press the [N] or other than [INPUT] key when the data collection will be not started/restarted.

The data collection of the alarm history is stopped. The operation message "The collection stop?(Y/N)" appears. When the [Y] or [INPUT] key is pressed, the data collection is stopped after the operation message " The collection stop" appears. Press the [N] or other than [INPUT] key when the data collection will be not stopped.

The alarm information of history is updated. When the history is updated, the page with latest alarm information (first page) is displayed. The history is updated even if changing to another screen, and returning to the alarm history screen.

The alarm information of history is cleared. The operation message "Execute the collection data clear?(Y/N)" appears. When the [Y] or [INPUT] key is pressed, the alarm information of history is cleared after the operation message "Data clear complete" appears. The first page is displayed when the history is cleared.

Precautions

Alarm history

History start

History stop

History update

History clear

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

352IB-1501453-D

10.2 Checking Machine Status 10.2.1 System Configuration Screen

Select the menu [Config] on the diagnosis (Diagn) screen to display the hardware configuration (card name and sub-num-

ber), software configuration (software number and sub-number), and PLC program configuration (file name, file label, and

execution type).

Software configuration

Hardware configuration

Diagn Config

(1) (2)

(4)

(3)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

353 IB-1501453-D

10.2.2 Option Display Screen

Select the menu [Option] on the diagnosis (Diagn) screen to display the contents of the additional specifications registered

in the NC.

The additional specification items are displayed by name. If all of the additional specifications cannot be seen in one screen,

the rest of items can be displayed by pressing the page up/down keys.

Display items

Display items Details Remarks (1) Software list This displays a list of the software being used.

Use / keys to change the pages and refer it.

(2) Installed lang This displays a list of installed languages.

: English : Swedish

: Japanese : Hungarian

: German : Polish

: French : Simplified Chinese

: Italian : Russian

: Spanish : Turkish

: Traditional Chinese : Czech

: Korean

: Portuguese

: Dutch

(3) NC serial No. This displays the NC model name, serial No, system type, and unit type.

NC TYPE: NC type

MODEL NAME: System type name

SERIAL NO.: Serial No.

UNIT NAME: Unit type

(4) Hardware list The hardware names are displayed.

Use / keys to change the pages and refer it.

CNC This displays the CPU model name.

ATT CARD Not displayed.

EXT Not displayed.

DISPLAY Not displayed.

KEYBOARD Not displayed.

Menus

Menus Details This displays the software list.

This displays the hardware list.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Option items The list of currently usable additional specifications is displayed.

As for the currently usable items, the background color is displayed in blue. The items set when the power supply was turned ON can be currently used.

S/W config

H/W config

Diagn Option

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

354IB-1501453-D

10.2.3 Drive Monitor Screen (Servo Unit)

The various data related to the servo axis (NC axis, PLC axis) can be monitored by selecting the menus [Drv mon] -> [Servo

unit] on the diagnosis (Diagn) screen.

Change the display item with or .

The axis name set in the base axis specification parameter "#1022 axname2" appears at the axis name.

Display items

Display items Details Gain (1/s) This displays the position loop gain. The position loop gain is obtained by the following

formula:

Droop (i) The error of the actual machine position to the command position is called droop. This error is proportional to command speed value. This follows the setting and display unit (#1003 iunit).

Speed (r/min) This displays the actual rotation speed of motor.

Feedrate (mm/s) This displays the feedrate on the machine side.

Load current (%) This displays the FB value of the motor current in terms of continuous current during stalling.

Max current 1 (%) This displays the motor current command in terms of continuous current during stall- ing. An absolute value of the current command peak value sampled after the power ON is displayed.

Max current 2 (%) This displays the motor current command in terms of continuous current during stall- ing. An absolute value of the current command peak value sampled in most recent 2 sec- onds is displayed.

Diagn Drv mon

Feedrate (mm/s) Tracking delay error (mm)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

355 IB-1501453-D

Max current 3 (%) This displays the FB value of the motor current in terms of continuous current during stalling. An absolute value of the current FB peak value sampled in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.

Overload(%) This is the data used to monitor the overload of motor and drive unit.

Regen load (%) This is the data used to monitor the resistance overload state when the resistance re- generative power supply is connected.

Est disturb torq (%) This displays the estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated torque when the disturbance observer is valid.

Max disturb torq (%) This displays the estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated torque when the collision detection function is adjusted. An absolute value of the estimated disturbance torque peak value sampled in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.

Load inertia R. (%) This displays the estimated load inertia ratio when the collision detection function is adjusted.

AFLT frequency (Hz) This displays the current operation frequency of the adaptive filter.

AFLT gain (dB) This displays the current filter depth of the adaptive filter.

Gain mag. (%) While Real-time tuning 1 is valid, the currently applied speed control gain is displayed with the magnification for the setting value of speed loop gain 1 (parameter "#2205 SP005 VGN1").

LED display This displays the 7-segment LED of the driver.

Alarm This displays the alarms and warnings other than the LED display (displayed on drive unit side).

Cycle counter (p) This displays the position within one rotation of the encoder detector. The position is displayed within one rotation in the range of "0" to "RNG (movement units) 1000" using the grid point value as "0".

Grid space This displays the grid space for the reference position return. (Command unit)

Grid amnt This displays the distance from the dog-off point to the grid point when the dog-type reference position return is displayed. The grid mask amount is not included. (Com- mand unit)

Machine position This displays the NC basic machine coordinate system position. (Command unit)

Motor end FB This displays the feedback value of the motor side position detector. (Command unit)

Machine end FB This displays the feedback position of the machine side position detector. (Command unit)

FB error (i) This displays the error of the motor side FB and machine side FB. This follows the setting and display unit (#1003 iunit).

DFB compen amnt (i) This displays the compensation pulse amount during dual feedback control. This follows the setting and display unit (#1003 iunit).

Remain command The remaining movement distance of one block is displayed. (Command unit)

Currnt posn (2) The value of the tool compensation amount subtracted from the current position is dis- played. (Command unit)

Man int amt The amount of interrupt movement in the manual absolute OFF state is displayed. (Command unit)

Abs pos command The absolute position that does not include the machine error compensation amount is displayed. (Command unit)

Superimp syn er (mm) This displays the current value of the synchronous error between the reference axis and the synchronized axis during control axis synchronization between part systems, control axis superimposition, or arbitrary axis superimposition.

Superimp err +P (mm) This displays the maximum value of the distance in which the synchronized axis ad- vances beyond the reference axis during control axis synchronization between part systems, control axis superimposition, or arbitrary axis superimposition.

Superimp err -P (mm) This displays the maximum value of the distance in which the synchronized axis lags behind the reference axis during control axis synchronization between part systems, control axis superimposition, or arbitrary axis superimposition.

Superimp errP-P (mm) This displays the synchronous error width between the reference axis and the syn- chronized axis during control axis synchronization between part systems, control axis superimposition, or arbitrary axis superimposition.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

356IB-1501453-D

Motor temp. (C) This displays the motor temperature.

Power cycles (p) This displays the power cycle counter. (Number of times)

Insul resist. (MOhm) The insulation degradation status is displayed.

FAN1 rot. state (%) The detected rotation speed of the unit cooling fan is displayed by converting it into percentage format (converted with the rated speed of the fan as 100%).

FAN2 rot. state (%) The detected rotation speed of the unit cooling fan is displayed by converting it into percentage format (converted with the rated speed of the fan as 100%).

Battery voltage (V) This displays the voltage of the connected battery.

AUX current sta No. (*1) This displays the current station No.

AUX current posn (*1) This displays the current coordinates position.

AUX inst station No. (*1) This displays the command station No. of automatic operation or the nearest station No. to stop by manual operation etc.

AUX inst posn (*1) This displays the coordinates position corresponding to target station No.

Mach err comp val This displays the machine error compensation amount. (Command unit)

Control input 1L This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: READY ON command Bit1: Servo ON command Bit4: Position loop gain changeover command Bit6: Excessive error detection width changeover command Bit7: Alarm reset command

Control input 1H This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit8: Current limit selection command

Control input 2L This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit0 to bit7)

Control input 2H This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit9: Speed monitor command valid BitA: In door closed (controller) BitB: In door closed (all drive units)

Control input 3L This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: Control axis detachment command

Control input 3H This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit8 to bitF)

Control input 4L This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit0 to bit7)

Control input 4H This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit8 to bitF)

Control input 5L This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit0 to bit7)

Control input 5H This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit8 to bitF)

Control input 6L This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: OMR-FF control request

Control input 6H This indicates the control signal input from NC to servo. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit8: Drivers communication control request

Control output 1L This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: In READY ON Bit1: In Servo ON Bit4: In position loop gain changeover Bit6: In excessive error detection width changeover Bit7: In alarm

Control output 1H This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit8: In current limit selection BitC: In-position BitD: In current limit BitE: In absolute position data loss BitF: In warning

Control output 2L This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: Z-phase passed Bit3: In zero speed Bit7: In external emergency stop

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

357 IB-1501453-D

Control output 2H This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit9: In speed monitor BitA: In door closed (controller) BitB: In door closed (self drive unit)

Control output 3L This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: In control axis detachment

Control output 3H This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Control output 4L This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Control output 4H This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Control output 5L This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Control output 5H This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Control output 6L This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: In OMR-FF control

Control output 6H This indicates the control signal output from servo to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit8: In drivers communication control

Detection system This displays the detector type symbol of the absolute position detection system.

ES: Semi-closed encoder EC: Ball screw side encoder LS: Linear scale MP: MP scale ESS: Semi-closed high-speed serial encoder ECS: Ball screw side high-speed serial encoder INC: Incremental

Power OFF posn This displays the coordinate at NC power OFF in the basic machine coordinate sys- tem. (Command unit)

Power ON posn This displays the coordinate at NC power ON in the basic machine coordinate system. (Command unit)

Current posn This displays the current coordinate in the basic machine coordinate system. (Com- mand unit)

R0 This displays the multi-rotation counter value of the detector stored in the memory during basic point setting.

P0 This displays the position within one rotation of the detector stored in the memory during basic point setting.

E0 This displays the absolute position error stored in the memory during basic point set- ting.

Rn This displays the multi-rotation counter value of the current detector.

Pn This displays the position within one rotation of the detector.

En This displays the absolute position error during NC power OFF.

ABS0 This displays the absolute position reference counter.

ABSn This displays the current absolute position.

MPOS This displays the offset amount of the MP scale when the power is turned ON.

Unit type This displays the servo driver type.

Unit serial No. This displays the servo driver serial No.

Software version This displays the servo side software version.

Control method SEMI: Semi-closed loop CLOSED: Closed loop DUAL: Dual feedback

Motor end detector This displays the motor side detector type.

Motor end detect No. This displays the motor side detector serial No.

Machine end detector This displays the machine side detector type. The type is displayed when the control method is CLOSED or DUAL. * is displayed when the method is SEMI.

Mach. end detect No This displays the machine side detector serial No.

Motor This displays the motor type.

Work time This displays the READY ON work time. (Units: 1 hr)

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

358IB-1501453-D

(*1) Data (station No./current position/command position) is displayed for axes of auxiliary axis state.

"-" is displayed for axes of non-auxiliary axis state (NC axis or during PLC axis control).

Alarm history 1: Time 1: Alarm

This displays servo alarms that occurred in latest order with the following formats.

Time: Work time when the alarm occurred Alarm No.: Number of the servo alarms that occurred

8: Time 8: Alarm

Maint hist 1 This displays the maintenance dates.

Year: One digit Month: 1 to 9, X (Oct.), Y (Nov.), Z (Dec.)

Maint hist 4

Maint status This displays the maintenance status.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

359 IB-1501453-D

10.2.4 Drive Monitor Screen (Spindle Unit)

The various data related to the spindle can be monitored by selecting the menus [Drv mon] -> [Spindle unit] on the diagnosis

(Diagn) screen.

Change the display item with or .

Display items

Display items Details Gain (1/s) This displays the position loop gain. The position loop gain is obtained by the following

formula:

Droop (i) The error of the actual machine position to the command position is called droop. This error is proportional to command speed value. (*1)

Speed (r/min) This displays the actual rotation speed of motor.

Load (%) This displays the motor load.

Max current 1 (%) This displays the motor current command in terms of continuous current during stalling. An absolute value of the current command peak value sampled after the power ON is dis- played.

Max current 2 (%) This displays the motor current command in terms of continuous current during stalling. An absolute value of the current command peak value sampled in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.

Max current 3 (%) This displays the FB value of the motor current in terms of continuous current during stall- ing. An absolute value of the current FB peak value sampled in most recent 2 seconds is dis- played.

Overload(%) This is the data used to monitor the overload of drive unit.

Regen load (%) This is the data used to monitor the resistance overload state when the resistance regen- erative power supply is connected.

Est disturb torq (%) This displays the estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated torque when the dis- turbance observer is valid.

Diagn Drv mon

Feedrate (mm/s) Tracking delay error (mm)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

360IB-1501453-D

Max disturb torq (%) This displays the estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated torque when the col- lision detection function is adjusted. An absolute value of the estimated disturbance torque peak value sampled in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.

Load inertia R. (%) This displays the estimated load inertia ratio when the collision detection function is ad- justed. The ratio is displayed according to the parameter setting of "#1251 set23/bit0".

Temperature (C) This displays the thermistor temperature.

AFLT frequency (Hz) This displays the current operation frequency of the adaptive filter.

AFLT gain (dB) This displays the current filter depth of the adaptive filter.

Gain mag. (%) While Real-time tuning 1 is valid, the currently applied speed control gain is displayed with the magnification for the setting value of speed loop gain 1 (parameter "#13005 SP005 VGN1").

LED display This displays the 7-segment LED of the driver.

Alarm This displays the alarms and warnings other than the LED display (displayed on drive unit side).

Cycle counter (p) This displays the position within one rotation of the encoder detector. The position is displayed within one rotation in the range of "0" to "RNG (movement units) 1000" using the grid point value as "0".

Grid space This displays the grid space for the reference position return. (Command unit) (*1)

Grid amnt This displays the distance from the dog-off point to the grid point when the dog-type ref- erence position return is displayed. The grid mask amount is not included. (Command unit) (*1)

Machine position This displays the NC basic machine coordinate system position. (Command unit) (*1)

Motor end FB This displays the feedback value of the motor side position detector (Command unit) (*1)

FB error (i) This displays the error of the motor side FB and machine side FB. (*1)

DFB compen amnt (i) This displays the compensation pulse amount during dual feedback control. (*1)

Tap error (mm) (*2) This displays the current value of the synchronous error between the tapping spindle and the drilling axis during synchronous tapping. (When the parameter "#1041 Initial inch" is set to "1", "Tap error (inch)" is displayed.) (*1)

Tap error +P (mm) (*2) This displays the maximum value of the distance in which the drilling axis advances be- yond the tapping spindle during synchronous tapping. (When the parameter "#1041 Initial inch" is set to "1", "Tap error +P (inch)" is displayed.) (*1)

Tap error -P (mm) (*2) This displays the maximum value of the distance in which the drilling axis lags behind the tapping spindle during synchronous tapping. (When the parameter "#1041 Initial inch" is set to "1", "Tap error -P (inch)" is displayed.) (*1)

Tap error P-P (mm) (*2) This displays the synchronous error width between the spindle and the drilling axis during the synchronous tapping. (When the parameter "#1041 Initial inch" is set to "1", "Tap error -P (inch)" is displayed.) (*1)

Tap error (deg) (*2) This displays the current value of the synchronous error angle between the tapping spin- dle and the drilling axis during synchronous tapping. (99999.999 deg) (*1)

Tap error +P (deg) (*2) This displays the maximum value of the angle at which the tapping spindle advances be- yond the drilling axis during synchronous tapping. (99999.999 deg) (*1)

Tap error -P (deg) (*2) This displays the maximum value of the angle at which the tapping spindle lags behind the drilling axis during synchronous tapping. (99999.999 deg) (*1)

Tap error P-P (deg) (*2) This displays the synchronous error angle between the spindle and the drilling axis during the synchronous tapping. (deg) (*1)

SP sync error (deg) This displays the current value of the synchronous error between the reference spindle and the synchronized spindle during spindle synchronization I, tool spindle synchroniza- tion IA/IB, or tool spindle synchronization II. (99999.999 deg)

SP sync err +P (deg) This displays the maximum value of the angle at which the synchronized spindle advanc- es beyond the reference spindle during spindle synchronization I, tool spindle synchroni- zation IA/IB, or tool spindle synchronization II. (99999.999 deg)

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

361 IB-1501453-D

SP sync err -P (deg) This displays the maximum value of the angle at which the synchronized spindle lags be- hind the reference spindle during spindle synchronization I, tool spindle synchronization IA/IB, or tool spindle synchronization II. (99999.999 deg)

SP syn err P-P (deg) This displays the synchronous error width between the reference spindle and the syn- chronized spindle during spindle synchronization I, tool spindle synchronization IA/IB, or tool spindle synchronization II. (99999.999 deg)

SP syn phas er (deg) This displays the phase difference stored in the memory by calculating the phase shift value. (99999.999 deg)

SP sync ph1 FB (deg) This displays the current value of the feedback phase difference that includes the phase difference stored in the memory by calculating the phase shift value during spindle syn- chronization I, tool spindle synchronization IA/IB, or tool spindle synchronization II. (99999.999 deg)

SP sync ph2 FB (deg) This displays the current value of the feedback phase difference that does not include the phase difference stored in the memory by calculating the phase shift value during spindle synchronization I, tool spindle synchronization IA/IB, or tool spindle synchronization II. (99999.999 deg)

SP syn er comp (deg) This displays the error compensation amount during spindle synchronization I, tool spin- dle synchronization IA/IB, or tool spindle synchronization II. (99999.999 deg)

GB sync error (deg) This displays the current value of the synchronous error between the reference spindle and the guide bushing spindle during guide bushing spindle synchronization. (99999.999 deg)

GB sync err +P (deg) This displays the maximum value of the distance in which the guide bushing spindle ad- vances beyond the reference spindle during guide bushing spindle synchronization. (99999.999 deg)

GB sync err -P (deg) This displays the maximum value of the distance in which the guide bushing spindle lags behind the reference spindle during guide bushing spindle synchronization. (99999.999 deg)

GB sync err P-P (deg) This displays the synchronous error width between the reference spindle and the guide bushing spindle during guide bushing spindle synchronization. (99999.999 deg)

Motor temp. (C) This displays the motor temperature.

Power cycles (p) This displays the power cycle counter. (Number of times)

Insul degrade (%) The insulation degradation status is displayed.

FAN1 rot. state (%) The detected rotation speed of the unit cooling fan is displayed by converting it into per- centage format (converted with the rated speed of the fan as 100%).

FAN2 rot. state (%) The detected rotation speed of the unit cooling fan is displayed by converting it into per- centage format (converted with the rated speed of the fan as 100%).

Battery voltage (V) This displays the battery voltage.

Control input 1L This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: READY ON command Bit1: Servo ON command Bit7: Alarm reset command

Control input 1H This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit8 to BitA: Torque limit selection command

Control input 2L This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit0 to bit7)

Control input 2H This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit9: Speed monitor command valid BitA: In door closed (controller) BitB: In door closed (all drive unit)

Control input 3L This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit0 to bit7)

Control input 3H This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit8 to bitF)

Control input 4L This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0 to Bit2: Spindle control mode selection command Bit4: In gear changeover command Bit5 to Bit6: Gear selection command

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

362IB-1501453-D

Control input 4H This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit8 to bitF)

BitC: M coil selection command BitD: L coil selection command BitE: Sub-motor selection command

Control input 5L This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit0 to bit7)

Control input 5H This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit8 to bitF)

BitB: Minimum excitation 2 changeover request BitC: Speed gain set 2 changeover request BitD: Zero point re-detection request BitE: Increase holding power of spindle

Control input 6L This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: OMR-FF control request

Control input 6H This indicates the control signal input from NC to spindle. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit8: Drivers communication control request

Control output 1L This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: In READY ON Bit1: In Servo ON Bit7: In alarm

Control output 1H This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit8 to BitA: In torque limit selection BitC: In-position BitD: In torque limit BitF: In warning

Control output 2L This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: Z phase passed Bit3: In zero speed Bit7: In external emergency stop

Control output 2H This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit9: In speed monitor BitA: In door closed (controller) BitB: In door closed (self drive unit)

Control output 3L This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Control output 3H This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Control output 4L This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0 to Bit2: In spindle control mode selection Bit4: In gear changeover command Bit5 to Bit6: In gear selection Bit7: Magnetic pole position not set

Control output 4H This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

BitD: In L coil selection

Control output 5L This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: Current detection Bit1: Speed detection Bit6: In coil changeover

Control output 5H This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit9: 2nd speed detection BitB: In minimum excitation rate 2 selection BitC: In speed gain set 2 selection BitD: Zero point re-detection complete BitF: In 2nd in-position

Control output 6L This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit0 to bit7)

Bit0: In OMR-FF control

Control output 6H This indicates the control signal input from spindle to NC. (bit8 to bitF)

Bit8: In drivers communication control

Unit type This displays the spindle type.

Unit serial No. This displays the spindle serial No.

Software version This displays the software No. and version on the spindle side.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

363 IB-1501453-D

(*1) These follow the setting and display unit (#1003 iunit) of the 1st part system.

(*2) Synchronous tapping error

This displays the maximum values of the synchronous tapping error that occur during the synchronous tapping.

The synchronous tapping error means the motor tracking delay for the commanded positions of the spindle and the

tapping axis.

The positive synchronous tapping error means that the tapping axis is delayed responding to the spindle, and the neg-

ative synchronous tapping error means that the spindle is delayed responding to the tapping axis.

Motor end detect No This displays the motor side detector serial No.

Mach. end detect No This displays the machine side detector serial No.

Motor It displays the motor type which is set for the spindle specification parameter "#3138 mo- tor_type". The maximum of 26 words are displayed with 2 lines and left aligned.

Work time This displays the READY ON work time. (Units: 1 hr)

Alarm history 1: Time 1: Alarm

This displays servo alarms that occurred in latest order with the following formats.

Time: Work time when the alarm occurred Alarm No.: Number of the servo alarms that occurred

8: Time 8: Alarm

Maint hist 1 This displays the maintenance dates.

Year: One digit Month: 1 to 9, X (Oct.), Y (Nov.), Z (Dec.)

4

Maint status This displays the maintenance status.

Data name Details Synchronous tapping error width (Max value)

This outputs the data of which absolute value is the largest among the synchronous tapping error width (-99999.999 to 99999.999 mm) during the synchronous tapping modal. This data will be initialized to "0" when entering the synchronous tapping modal or restoring

the power. Other than that, the data continues to display the maximum value.

Synchronous tapping error angle (Max value)

This outputs the data of which absolute value is the largest among the synchronous tapping error angle (-99999.999 to 99999.999) during the synchronous tapping modal. This data will be initialized to "0" when entering the synchronous tapping modal or restoring

the power. Other than that, the data continues to display the maximum value.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

364IB-1501453-D

10.2.5 Drive Monitor Screen (Power Supply Unit)

The various data related to the power supply can be monitored by selecting the menus [Drv mon] -> [Power unit] on the

diagnosis (Diagn) screen.

Change the display item with or .

Display items

Display items Details Unit type This displays the power supply unit type.

Unit serial No. This displays the serial No. of the power supply unit.

Software version This displays the software version.

Connected drive This displays the I/F channel No. (mcp_no, smcp_no) of the drive unit connected to each power supply unit.

Recovery energy (KW) This displays the regenerative power every two seconds. (0 to 999 kW)

Pw. sply volt (Vrms) This displays the effective value of the power supply voltage. (0 to 999 Vrms)

PN bus voltage (V) This displays PN bus voltage. (0 to 999V)

Min PN bus volt (V) This displays the minimum PN bus voltage after the NC power ON. (0 to 999V)

Min PN current (%) This displays the bus current when PN bus voltage is at minimum. (driving: +, regen- erative: -) (0 to 999%)

Bus current (%) This displays the bus current. (driving: +, regenerative: -) (0 to 999%)

Max current1 (%) This displays the maximum driving current after the NC power ON. (0 to 999%)

Max current2 (%) This displays the maximum driving current in most recent 2 seconds. (0 to 999%)

Max rgn current1 (%) This displays the maximum regenerative current after the NC power ON. (0 to 999%)

Max rgn current2 (%) This displays the maximum regenerative current in most recent 2 seconds. (0 to 999%)

No. of instant stop This displays the number of instantaneous power interruption exceeding 1 cycle of the power. (0 to 9999 times)

Work time This displays the READY ON work time. (Units: 1 hr)

Power-run pwr (kW) The power-run power is calculated and displayed. (0.01 kW)

Regenerate pwr (kW) The regenerated power is calculated and displayed. (0.01 kW)

Diagn Drv mon

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

365 IB-1501453-D

Consumed power (kW) The power consumption is calculated and its integrated value is displayed. (0.01 kWh)

Pwr. distortion (V) The amount of power distortion (harmonic voltage value) is calculated and displayed. (V)

Supplied power (kW) The supplied power is calculated and displayed. (kW)

Accum. power (kWh) The accumulated power is calculated and displayed. (kWh)

Harmonic volt. (V) The power line harmonic voltage is displayed. (V)

CV margin (%) The CV margin is calculated and displayed. (%)

FAN1 rot. state (%) The detected rotation speed of the unit cooling fan is displayed by converting it into percentage format (converted with the rated speed of the fan as 100%).

FAN2 rot. state (%) The detected rotation speed of the unit cooling fan is displayed by converting it into percentage format (converted with the rated speed of the fan as 100%).

Alarm history 1: Time 1: Alarm

This displays servo alarms that occurred in latest order with the following formats.

Time: Work time when the alarm occurred Alarm No.: Number of the servo alarms that occurred

8: Time 8: Alarm

Maint hist 1 This displays the maintenance dates.

Year: One digit Month: 1 to 9, X (Oct.), Y (Nov.), Z (Dec.)4

Maint status This displays the maintenance status.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

366IB-1501453-D

10.2.6 Drive Monitor Screen (Synchronous Error)

The "Synchronous error" appears only when the synchronous control axis specification is valid.

The various data related to the synchronous error can be monitored by selecting the menus [Drv mon] -> [Synchro error]

on the diagnosis (Diagn) screen.

Display items

Display items Details Slave axis This displays the slave axis name which is controlled following the master axis.

The axis name corresponding to the axis No. set in the axis specification parameter "#1068 slavno" (slave axis No.) is displayed. The name set in the base axis specification parameter "#1022 axname2" (2nd axis name) is displayed for the slave axis.

Command error This is the deviation of the slave axis machine position in respect to the master axis. The error of the commanded position to the servo control section before pitch error compensation, relative position compensation and backlash compensation is dis- played. If this error occurs, the parameters that should be the same for the synchronous axes are different. Command error = Command s - command m - Command s: Slave axis commanded position Command m: Master axis commanded position : Command s - command m at start of synchronous control

FB error This is the deviation of the slave axis feedback position in respect to the feedback po- sition from the master axis servomotor. The actual error of the machine position is dis- played. The synchronous error check is carried out on this error. FB error = FBs - FBm - FBs: Slave axis feedback position FBm: Master axis feedback position : FBs - FBm at start of synchronous control

FB error MAX1 This displays the maximum FB error after the start of the synchronous control.

FB error MAX2 This displays the maximum FB error approx. every 30 seconds after the start of the synchronous control.

Machine position This displays the commanded machine position for the master axis.

Diagn Drv mon

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

367 IB-1501453-D

10.2.7 Clearing the Alarm History on Drive Monitor Screen

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Servo unit], [Spindle unit] or [Power

unit].

(2) Using the menu [Next axis], tab keys and ,

select the axis (device) from which to clear the alarm history.

(3) Press the menu [Alarm his clr]. The menu is highlighted, and a message appears to confirm the erasing. The alarm history1: Time appears at the head.

(4) Press the [Y] key. All alarm history data for the selected axis (device) are cleared to "0".

Diagn Drv mon

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

368IB-1501453-D

10.3 Diagnosis Screens 10.3.1 Self Diagnosis Screen

The hardware state and NC operation state can be confirmed by selecting the menu [Selfdia] on the diagnosis (Diagn)

screen.

Display items

Display items Details (1) H/W state (common for

part systems) This displays the hardware state of the NC unit and display unit. (*1)

(2) Operation state (De- pends on part system)

This displays the state when the operation seems to be stopped in spite that the alarm does not occur. (*2)

Diagn Selfdia

(1) (2)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

369 IB-1501453-D

(*1) As for the NC unit, the contents are as follows depending on the condition:

NC

Communication between NC unit and display unit

(*) The remote I/O communication error of the safety signal unit is the target. When the error occurs, the channel No. is

fixed to "1".

Item Details Battery vol state CPU module does not use the battery. This item is not displayed.

The PLC CPU and the servo drive unit use batteries, but the states of these batter- ies are not displayed in the screen.

Battery used years

NC : Temp. 1 (C) This displays the current temperature of the control unit.

Condition Class 94.5C < Control unit temp. <= 96.5C Caution (gray)

96.5C < Control unit temp. Warning (yellow)

NC :Fan rev The fan is not mounted. This item is not displayed.

Item Details Servo comm err Num1 This displays the count of occurrence for "Y51 SV commu er: Recv frame No. xx04"

after the power ON.

Servo comm err Acc1 This displays the cumulated count of occurrence for " Y51 SV commu er: Recv frame xx04". Press the menu [Servo clear] to clear the cumulated count to "0".

Servo comm err Num2 This displays the count of occurrence for "Y51 SV commu er: Data ID error xx03" after the power ON.

Servo comm err Acc2 This displays the cumulated count of occurrence for "Y51 SV commu er: Data ID er- ror xx03". Press the menu [Servo clear] to clear the cumulated count to "0".

RIO channel/station1 This displays the Channel No./Station No. of occurrence for continuous error after the power ON. (*)

RIO retry count max 1 This displays the maximum value of the continuous error after the power ON. (*)

RIO channel/station 2 This displays the Channel No./Station No. held even if the power OFF. Press the menu [RIO clear] to clear the Channel No./Station No. to "0/0". (*)

RIO retry count max 2 This displays the count held even if the power OFF. (*) Press the menu [RIO clear] to clear the count to "0".

Ether comm err Num This displays the number of Ethernet communication error after PLC program is ex- ecuted once.

Ether comm err Acc This displays the cumulated count of occurrence for Ethernet communication error. Press the menu [Ether clear] to clear the cumulated count to "0".

Overvoltage Acc This displays the cumulated count of detection frequency of overvoltage after the power ON.

Power losses Num This displays the count of detection frequency of instantaneous power interruption after the power ON.

Power losses Acc This displays the cumulated count of detection frequency of instantaneous power interruption after the power ON. Press the menu [Clear pw loss] to clear the cumulated count to "0".

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

370IB-1501453-D

(*2) The following state can be confirmed.

(Example) Clearing the cumulated count of the servo communication error

State Details In-position This displays "1" (in-position state) when the following conditions are satisfied for

even one axis.

There is a control axis whose acceleration/deceleration is not zero. There is a control axis whose servo error exceeds the range designated with the

parameter.

Interlock (+) When the auto interlock +n-th axis signal or the manual interlock +n-th axis signal is OFF, "1" appears for the n-th axis.

In the above case, the 2nd axis is interlocked. Even when the number of usable axes is less than 8 in 1 part system, this displays 8 axes fixed.

Interlock (-) When the auto interlock -n-th axis signal or the manual interlock -n-th axis signal is OFF, "1" appears for the n-th axis. The explanation of the display is same as for the "Interlock (+)".

ExtDcc (+) When the control axis is moving in (+) direction, "1" appears for the axis if the exter- nal deceleration speed is valid, and the feedrate is clamped, exceeding the set value of the external deceleration speed.

In the above case, the 1st axis and the 3rd axis are in external deceleration speed. Even when the number of usable axes is less than 8 in 1 part system, this displays 8 axes fixed.

ExtDcc (-) When the control axis is moving in (-) direction, "1" appears for the axis if the exter- nal deceleration speed is valid, and the feedrate is clamped, exceeding the set value of the external deceleration speed. The explanation of the display is same as for the "ExtDcc(+)".

Menus

Menus Details This clears the cumulated count of the servo communication error 1 and 2 to "0".

This clears the cumulated count of the RIO communication error to "0".

This clears the cumulated count of the Ether communication error to "0".

This clears the accumulated number of instantaneous power interruption detection times to "0".

Clearing the cumulated counter to zero

(1) Press the menu [Servo clear]. An operation message appears.

(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. The cumulated count of the servo communication error 1 and 2 will be cleared to "0". When other keys are pressed, it will not clear to "0".

This also applies to menus [RIO clear], [Ether clear], [Battery clear] and [Clear pw loss].

(Explanation of the display) o o o o o o 1 o

8th axis 1st axis

(Explanation of the display) o o o o o 1 o 1

8th axis 1st axis

Servo clear

RIO clear

Ether clear

Clear pw loss

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

371 IB-1501453-D

10.3.2 Checking Alarms of Drive Unit

You can confirm the following information on the servo diagnosis screen by pressing [Mainte] -> [Servo diagn] on the diag-

nosis (Diagn) screen:

- The number of alarms of servo/spindle drive unit

- DA output information

- PLG diagnosis (spindle)

- The maintenance diagnosis information of servo/spindle unit such as alarm cause counter

This operation is protected according to the operation level.

Servo unit

Spindle unit

(1) Display of the DA output data

Mainte Mainte

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(3)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

372IB-1501453-D

(2) Display of the spindle PLG diagnosis information

(1) PLG (pulse generator) detects the pulse signal and it is used to detect the rotation state of the motor.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Alarm times This displays the data for each axis or unit.

There are Alarm times 1 to 32, and there are switched with the page up/down keys. The number of times can be cleared for each axis or each column.

Alarm No: Servo alarm No. (unit: ASCII) No. of times: The number of times of meeting the servo alarm condition after the servo drive unit ON. (Units: Number of times)

(2) Alarm cause counter An alarm occurs when the specified number of conditions are met. This counter dis- plays the number of times in which the alarm occurrence condition is met since the drive unit power was turned ON. The number of times can be cleared for each axis with [All cnt clr].

accu: Displays the number of times in which the alarm occurrence condition was met since the drive unit power was turned ON. freq: Displays the peak hold value when the alarm occurrence condition is met per constant cycle.

(3) DA output This displays the data for each axis or unit.

DA Address 1: Servo parameter sv061 set value (address) (unit: ASCII) DA output 1: Servo parameter sv061 set address data (unit: pulse) DA Address 2: Servo parameter sv062 set value (address) (unit: ASCII) DA output 2: Servo parameter sv062 set address data (unit: pulse)

(4) Spindle PLG diagnosis in- formation (Spindle drive unit only)

Displays the data for each axis

Encoder Diagn L: Displays the output signal (Low) of the motor side PLG Encoder Diagn H: Displays the output signal (High) of the motor side PLG Sub Encoder Diagn L: Displays the output signal (Low) of the machine side PLG Sub Encoder Diagn H: Displays the output signal (High) of the machine side PLG

(4)

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

373 IB-1501453-D

Menus

Menus Details Displays the servo unit diagnosis information in the data display area.

Displays the spindle unit diagnosis information in the data display area.

When the parameter "#1039 spinno" is set to "0", this menu is not displayed.

Switches the display between the DA output and the spindle PLG diagnosis information.

Pressing this button again after this menu is highlighted, the display switches to the DA output.

When the parameter "#1039 spinno" is set to "0", this menu is not displayed. Even when the parameter "#1039 spinno" is set to other than "0", this menu will be grayed out and

non-selectable. while displaying the servo unit diagnosis information.

This clears the number of alarms of the axis at the cursor position to "0".

This clears the number of alarms at the cursor position to "0".

When the cursor is on "AL cause cnt accu" or "freq", this menu is grayed out and non-selectable.

Clears the all values of "AL cause cnt accu" and "freq" of the axis where the cursor is placed to 0.

Displays the data of four axes from the next axis. This menu is displayed only when there are five or more servo axes or spindle.

Servo unit

Spindle unit

PLG diagn

All num clr

Alarm num clr

All cnt clr

Next axis

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

374IB-1501453-D

10.3.3 Collecting the Data on the Diagnosis Data Collection Setting Screen

The NC automatically collects diagnosis data based on the "Sampling spec" and "Collecting data select" settings specified

on the diagnosis data collection (Collect set) screen of the maintenance (Mainte) screen.

This operation is protected according to the operation level.

(1) Make sure to use this function under our instructions. It may cause misoperation if you use the function based on your own judgments.

Display items

Display items Details (1) State Display the history data and sampling data collection status.

History data Display the history data collection status.

History collecting: History data collection is in progress. History stop: History data collection is stopped.

Sampling data Display the sampling data collection status.

Sampling: Sampling data collection is in progress. Sampling stop: Sampling data collection is stopped. Sampling invalid: Sampling data collection is disabled.

Mainte Mainte

Note

(1)

(2)

(3)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

375 IB-1501453-D

(1) The alarm history data collection start/stop operation is switched using the menu [Start] or [Stop] of data collection re- gardless of whether "Alarm history" is set to "0" or "1".

(2) Sampling specifications Specify the part system, spindle, and servo axes where sampling data is to be collect- ed.

System Specify the part systems where sampling data is not to be collected. Specify the part system in HEX. When "0" is set, sampling is carried out for all part systems. This setting is ignored if a non-existent part system is specified.

Spindle Specify the spindle where sampling data is not to be collected. Specify the part system in HEX. When "0" is set, sampling is carried out for all spindles. This setting is ignored if a non-existent spindle is specified.

Servo Specify the servo axes where sampling data is not to be collected. Specify the part system in HEX. This setting is not system-specific. When "0" is set, sampling is carried out for all axes. This setting is ignored if a non-existent servo axis is specified.

(3) Collecting data select This selects the diagnosis data to be collected.

0: Collected. 1: Not collected.

Key history This selects whether or not key history data is collected.

Alarm history This selects whether or not alarm history data is collected.

PLC I/O history This selects whether or not PLC input/output signal history data is collected.

AC alarm history This selects whether or not AC power ON/OFF history data is collected.

Touch history This selects whether or not touchscreen history data is collected.

Pert program history This selects whether or not the data of the machining program No. and the PLC No. is collected.

Menus

Menus Details This begins collecting sampling data and history data.

This stops the sampling data and history data collection operation.

This stops the sampling data and history data collection operation, and clears the collected data. This is not displayed when "#1263 bit1" is ON.

Display items Details

Start

Stop

Data clear

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

376IB-1501453-D

(1) Data collection starts even if "Alarm history" is set to "1" (not collected).

(1) Data collection stops even if "Alarm history" is set to "1" (not collected).

Operation method (Start of data collection) (1) Press the menu [Start].

(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Operation method (Stop of data collection) (1) Press the menu [Stop].

(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Operation method (Clear of collected data) (1) Press the menu [Data clear].

(2) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Note

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

377 IB-1501453-D

10.4 Advanced Diagnosis Be sure to perform the operations in this section under the MTB instructions.

10.4.1 Displaying and Setting the PLC Device Data (I/F Diagnosis Screen)

The various input/output signals for the PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) control can be displayed and set in this

screen.

These signals can be used in confirmation of the machine sequence operation during PLC development, and in confirma-

tion and forced output, etc., of the input/output data between the NC and PLC.

(1) Pay close attention to the sequence operation when using these functions during machine operation.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Project This displays the currently displayed project.

(2) Device No. and input/ output signal value (bi- nary/hexadecimal dis- play)

This displays the data from the device Nos. designated in the setting area in numerical order. The data is displayed as binary (bit units) and hexadecimal values. Individual device Nos. can be displayed separately in the left area and right area. Se-

lect the display area with the and key when operations such as display

changeover and data setting are carried out. Target device: X, Y, M, L, F, SB, B, SM, V, SW, SD, TI, TO, TS, TA, STI, STO, STS, STA, CI, CO, CS, CA, D, R, ZR, W The common devices for each project are X, Y, R, and ZR.

(3) Modal output This displays the data and device to carry out modal output. The details to be defined are set here when carrying out the modal type forced output of PLC interface signals. For details, refer to "Carrying Out Modal Output".

Diagn I/F dia

Note

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

378IB-1501453-D

(*1) These menus are grayed out ordinarily, and cannot be operated.

A device is an address for classifying a signal handled in the PLC. A device No. is a series of numbers attached to that

device.

(4) 1-shot output This displays the data and device to carry out one-shot output. The details to be defined are set here when carrying out the one-shot type forced out- put of PLC interface signals. For details, refer to "Carrying Out One-shot Output".

Menus

Menus Details This changes the setting area to an input standby status. The signal is forcibly output (modal).

This changes the setting area to an input standby status. The signal is forcibly output (one-shot).

A confirmation message appears, and the machine turns into standby status. The force OP (one-shot output) of all I/O signals are canceled. (*1)

How to read the device No. and display data

Display items Details

Modal output

1-shot output

Modal all clr

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 Low-order 8 bits

High-order 8 bits

Device No. (bit-type)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

X0008 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

XF XE XD XC XB XA X9 X8

X0010 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

X0018 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

X1F X1E X1D X1C X1B X1A X19 X18

Signal status display corresponding to each device No. (I/O)

Device No. (word-type)

R0010

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

379 IB-1501453-D

10.4.1.1 Displaying the PLC Device Data

The various status signals and register data used in the PLC can be monitored and displayed.

When this screen is first selected, the respective 16-byte amounts of input/output data are displayed from device "X0000"

on the left display area, and from device "Y0000" on the right side.

This screen constantly monitors and displays the PLC signal statuses. Consequently, when signals are changed in the PLC,

the display is changed according to the changes.

Note that because time differences occur between the PLC signal change and the signal display, there may be a delay in

the display. The machine may also not be able to correspond to extremely brief signal changes.

(1) When setting the device No., an error will occur if a number exceeding the specifications or an illegal address is set.

(2) The input/output signals of X, Y, R, and ZR are the same for all projects.

The valid area device Nos. change in page units when / is pressed. Changing of the pages stops within the range

of device numbers of which the device has.

Displaying the data of a arbitrary device No. "X0020" (1)

Press the menu tab key / , and select the

area to display the data.

(2) Set the device No. (X0020), and press the [INPUT] key.

The device "X0020" appears at the head of the valid dis- play area.

Changing the display with the page keys

(1) Press the key.

The data is displayed from the next number currently dis- played.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

380IB-1501453-D

10.4.1.2 Carrying Out Modal Output

Modal type forced output of PLC interface signals is carried out. Once set, this data is held until cancelled, the power is

turned ON/OFF, or other data is overwritten. There are four sets of devices that modally output. If this number is exceeded,

the previously existing data is overwritten.

(1) The data of the modally output device is displayed in order in the selected area. This modal output is held until the output is canceled or the power is turned OFF.

(2) When no data is set (Example: "X0048/","X0048"), the operation message "Setting Data not found" is displayed.

(3) The X, Y, R, and ZR devices are modally output for all projects.

(4) The devices other than X, Y, R, and ZR are modally output for the currently displayed project.

Menus used in modal output

Menus Details This releases the modal output for the device at the cursor position in the modal output area. The released data is erased from this area.

Modally outputting data "1" to device "X0048" (1) Press the menu [Modal output]. The mode changes to the modal output mode, and the

cursor appears at the modal output area.

(2) Using the [] and [] keys, move the cursor to the set- ting position.

(3) Set the device and data, and press the [INPUT] key. Modal output is executed, and the cursor disappears. The data that was in the cursor position is overwritten by the input data, and is invalidated.

X0048/1 [INPUT]

The modal output mode is canceled by pressing

the key.

Releasing the modal output (1) Press the menu [Modal output]. The mode changes to the modal output mode, and the

cursor appears at the modal output area.

(2) Using the [] and [] keys, move the cursor to the data to be released.

(3) Press the menu [Modal clear]. The data that was in the cursor position is released from modal output. The "DEV" and "Data" columns become blank.

The modal output mode is canceled by pressing

the key.

CAUTION Pay close attention to the sequence operation when carrying out forced data setting (forced output) in the I/F diag- nosis screen during machine operation.

Modal clear

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

381 IB-1501453-D

10.4.1.3 Carrying Out One-shot Output

The one-shot type PLC interface signal forced output is forcibly output only once during the screen operations. Thus, it may

not be possible to confirm the PLC interface signals updated with the PLC on the screen.

(1) Because the input signal (X, etc.) to the PLC is updated at the head of each PLC cycle, the machine immediately returns to the normal state, even if one-shot type forced output is carried out.

(2) When no data is set (Example: "X0048/","X0048"), the operation message "Setting Data not found" is displayed.

(3) The X, Y, R, and ZR devices are one-shot output for all projects.

(4) The devices other than X, Y, R, and ZR are one-shot output for the currently displayed project.

One-shot outputting data "1" to device "X0042" (1) Press the menu [1-shot output].

(2) Set the device and data, and press the [INPUT] key. The input data is overwritten in the one-shot output area, and is one-shot output. The cursor in the one-shot output area disappears. The data of the one-shot output device is displayed in or- der in the selected area.

X0042/1 [INPUT]

The one-shot output mode is canceled by pressing

the key.

CAUTION Pay close attention to the sequence operation when carrying out forced data setting (forced output) in the I/F diag- nosis screen during machine operation.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

382IB-1501453-D

10.4.2 Writing and Reading the Data Using the NC Data Designation (NC Memory Diagnosis Screen)

The NC internal data can be displayed and rewritten on the NC memory diagnosis (Mem dia) screen of the diagnosis (Di-

agn) screen. The custom API library's NC data read/write interface is used to display and rewrite the NC's internal data.

The contents of the NC data can be displayed by designating the part system No., section No., sub-section No. and axis

No. on this screen.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Index No. This displays the registration No. of the NC memory data. When one of the "2. Data

contents" is set, the number is highlighted indicating that the normal display of the data contents has stopped.

(2) Data contents Part system No.

Designate the part system No. (1: 1st part system). Designate "0" to designate the data

common for the part systems.

Section/sub-section/axis:

Designate the section No., sub-section No. and axis No. of the data to be set and dis-

played. The setting format is, section No./sub-section No./axis No.

The axis No. "1" is handled as the first axis. Designate "0" for the data which does not require an axis designation.

(3) Memory data This displays the contents of the data.

Diagn Mem dia

(1)

(2) (3)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

383 IB-1501453-D

(*1) Decimal, hexadecimal, floating point data and character string data writing is possible. Note that hexadecimal, floating

point data and character strings may not be settable depending on the data.

Decimal: Integers without decimal points (Example) -1234 Hexadecimal: An "H" is necessary at the end (Example) 1234H Floating point data: Data with a decimal point (Example) -12.3 Character string data: Character string (Example) X

Menus

Menus Details This erases the information in the line where the cursor is. (One entire line becomes blank.) The cursor does not move at this time.

The contents of the set address data (Part system No, Section/sub-section/axis) for all the lines are con- stantly displayed. The Index No. highlight (indicating data is being set) is released. The cursor appears in "Part system No" of that line.

This writes the data in the setting area to the NC memory indicated by address data at the cursor posi- tion. (*1) The Data No. highlight (indicating data is being set) is released, and constant display is started. After writing, the cursor moves to "Part system No" of the next line.

Based on the data of the address data where the cursor is, this displays the continuous data to which the sub-section No. has been added to the address data from the line where the cursor is. The cursor moves to "Part system No " of that line.

Based on the data of the address data where the cursor is, this displays the continuous data to which the axis No. has been added to the address data from the line where the cursor is. The cursor moves to "Part system No " of that line.

Line clear

Data read

Data write

Subsect continu

Axis continu

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

384IB-1501453-D

10.4.3 Collecting the NC Data (Data Sampling Screen)

Sampling start/stop, sampling state display, setting the sampling parameters necessary for sampling are performed in the

data sampling screen. The NC internal data (speed output from NC to the drive unit, or feedback data from the drive unit,

etc.) can be sampled.

Also, the sampling data can be output externally on the I/O screen on the maintenance (Mainte) screen.

For the details, refer to "C80 Series Data Sampling Specification Manual (BNP-C3077-034)".

Diagn NC Smp

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

385 IB-1501453-D

10.5 Safety Observation

The configuration, signal status, drive status and version in use of the smart safety observation function are displayed on

the safety observation screen.

10.5.1 Safety Observation Screen (Configuration Diagnosis)

The available/unavailable states of the smart safety observation function are displayed on the configuration diagnosis

screen.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Active function The drive safety functions which are enabled with the parameters are highlighted.

SIO: Safety-related I/O observation, emergency stop observation SLS: Safety-limited speed observation SLP: Safety-limited position observation SSM: Safe speed monitor SCA: Safe cam SOS: Safe operating stop observation SS1: Safe stop 1 SS2: Safe stop 2 STO: Safe torque OFF SBC: Safe brake control SCN: Safety communication network

(2) NC-DRV safety communi- cation

This displays the safety communication status of the drive unit. To perform the safety drive communication, the smart safety observation target axis needs to be set by the parameter, and the connected channel with the drive unit needs to be optical communication and configured only with drive units MDS- E Series. Valid prm ax: Out of the axes connected to each channel, the axes that the parameter "#51101 SF_Disable" (Disable smart safety observation) is OFF are highlighted. For the axis with safety encoder, "*" appears at the top of the axis name.

Diagn Safety

(1)

(2)

(3)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

386IB-1501453-D

(3) NC-I/O safety communica- tion

This displays the communication status of the safety I/O communication. To perform the safety I/O communication, at least one of remote I/O channels needs to be configured with the safety I/O devices (safety remote I/O unit, opera- tion panel equipped with safety I/Os) and RIO2.0 unit alone. Writing safety PLC: This displays the status (Done/Not yet) whether the PLC ladder for safety is written. Safety I/O comm: "OK" is displayed when the channel is configured only with RIO2.0 units. Safety I/O connect: "Yes" is displayed when connected to the safety I/O devices (safety RIO unit, op- eration panel equipped with safety I/O).

Menus

Menus Details This switches the screen to the configuration diagnosis display of the smart safety observation.

This switches the screen to the signal monitor display of the smart safety observation.

This switches the screen to the drive monitor display of the smart safety observation.

This switches the screen to the version display of the smart safety observation.

This switches the drive monitor diagnosis information to the servo unit information. Only when the drive monitor is displayed, the menu appears, and the operation can be performed.

This switches the drive monitor diagnosis information to the spindle unit information. Only when the drive monitor is displayed, the menu appears, and the operation can be performed.

This switches the axis to be displayed on the drive monitor. Only when the number of axes is five or more on the drive monitor screen, the menu appears, and the operation can be performed.

Display items Details

Config diag

Signal monitor

Drive monitor

Version

Servo unit

Spindle unit

Next axis

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

387 IB-1501453-D

10.5.2 Safety Observation Screen (Signal Monitor)

The signal monitor screen displays the safety PLC signal status. The safety PLC signal displays both of the duplex PLC

signals to identify the incongruous state. With the initial display, the input/output signal status from the device "X0000" is

displayed on the left side and the input/output signals from the device "Y0000" is displayed on the right side.

Note that because time differences occur between the PLC signal change and the signal display, there may be a delay in

the display. The machine may also not be able to correspond to extremely brief signal changes.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Device No. and input/out-

put signal value (binary/ hexadecimal display)

This displays the duplex safety PLC signals (A, B) from the designated device No. in order. The input/output signal is displayed in binary and hexadecimal (bitwise). The device to be displayed can be switched individually for the left area and right ar-

ea. The operation target (right or left) can be switched with the and keys.

The head device and the operation target area are held until the power OFF.

The displayable devices are X, Y, and ZR.

If there is a comparison error with duplex safety PLC signals, the background color becomes yellow.

List of displayable PLC devices

Devices Device No. No. of points Units Details X X0 to X1FF 512 1-bit Input signals to PLC, machine input, etc.

Y Y0 to Y1FF 512 1-bit Output signals from PLC, machine output, etc.

ZR ZR0 to ZR3071 3072 16-bit File register, CNC word I/F

(1)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

388IB-1501453-D

To refer the arbitrary input/output signal status, enter the target device No. to the input area, and the display will be

switched.

(Example) For displaying the input/output signal of the arbitrary device No. "X0020"

(1) Press the tab key or to select the area where the data is displayed.

(2) Set the device No. (X0020), and then press the [INPUT] key.

(1) Setting a device No. which exceeds the specification or setting an illegal address causes a setting error.

The operation target device Nos. change in page unit when / is pressed. Changing of the pages stops within the

range of device numbers of which the device has.

Displaying the PLC device input/output signal

Changing the display with the page keys

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

389 IB-1501453-D

10.5.3 Safety Observation Screen (Drive Monitor)

The safety communication state with servo drive (NC axis, PLC axis) and spindle drive can be monitored. Only the safety

drive communication parameter enabled axes are displayed on this screen.

Display items

Display items Details Safety command 1L This displays the data sent to the drive.

Bit Details

1L 0 STO command (0: No command, 1: With command)

1

2

3

4

5

Safety command 1H 6

7

1H 8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

390IB-1501453-D

Safety command 2L This displays the data sent to the drive.

Bit Details

2L 0

1

2 SBC command (0: No command, 1: With command)

3 SBC command for SBT (1CH side) (0: No command, 1: With command)

4 SBC command for SBT (2CH side) (0: No command, 1: With command)

5

Safety command 2H 6

7

2H 8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

Safety status 1L This displays the data received from the drive.

Bit Details

1L 0 STO status (0: No operation, 1: In operation)

1

2

3

4

5

Safety status 1H 6

7

1H 8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

391 IB-1501453-D

Safety status 2L This displays the data received from the drive.

Bit Details

2L 0

1

2 SBC status (0: No operation, 1: In operation)

3 SBC status for SBT (1CH side) (0: No operation, 1: In opera- tion)

4 SBC status for SBT (2CH side) (0: No operation, 1: In opera- tion)

5

Safety status 2H 6

7

2H 8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

Safe position FB This displays the encoder position information from the drive to NC.

Saf detector connect This displays the safety encoder connection status. 0: No connection 1: With connection

Safety status 2L This displays the data received from the drive.

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 10 Troubleshooting

392IB-1501453-D

10.5.4 Safety Observation Screen (Version Display)

Software version about smart safety observation is displayed on the version display screen.

Display items

Display items Details NC Safety This displays the smart safety observation software version of the NC system.

Parameters This displays the safety parameter changed date and time, and comment.

Lad 1, 2 This displays the safety PLC ladder 1, 2 changed date and time, and comment.

Servo axis (up to 32 axes) This displays the safety software version of servo axis. The version only for axis of the safety servo unit is displayed.

Change the display item with or .

Spindle (up to 8 spindles) This displays the safety software version of spindle. The version only for spindle of the safety spindle unit is displayed.

11

393 IB-1501453-D

Performing a Backup Operation

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

394IB-1501453-D

11Performing a Backup Operation

The Input/Output screen of the maintenance (Mainte) screen is used to carry out NC data input/output between the NC

internal memory and the external input/output devices.

Display items

Display items Details (1) Number of programs

registered and remain- der (*1)

This displays the registration information of machining program of the selected device. Number of programs registered : This displays the number of programs previously reg- istered as user machining programs. Remain: This displays the remaining number of programs that can be registered. When memory is selected as the device, the total of the number of programs registered and the remainder is the maximum number of registrations set in the specifications.

(2) Number of memory characters and remain- der (*1)

This displays the number of characters of the machining program of the selected device. Number of memory characters: This displays the number of characters previously reg- istered as user machining programs. Remain: This displays the remaining number of characters that can be registered. The total of the number of memory characters and the remainder is the maximum num- ber of memory characters set in the specifications.

Mainte I/O

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

395 IB-1501453-D

(*1) Some items may not be displayed depending on the device.

(*2) When the number of characters in the directory path (full path) from the root directory exceeds 100, the directory path is not retained, but a previously set directory path containing 100 characters or less retained. When the device is "Memory", the initial directory display is "Program".

(3) List This displays a contents list (directory and file name) of the directory in the setting col-

umn (file setting column A or B) where the cursor is currently located.

Program: When "Memory" is selected for the device, this displays the file name (pro-

gram No.) of the machining programs already registered.

The file names are displayed in order from the smallest number, from 1 to 99999999.

When a device other than memory is selected, this displays the file name and directory

to be included in the directory that is set in the current setting column.

When they exceed the displayable number of characters (12 characters), the excess is

abbreviated and displayed (*).

Character: The size of each file (when memory is selected for the device, the number of

characters in the machining program).

When directory is selected, this displays "DIR".

Comment: This displays the comment (up to 17 alphanumeric characters and symbols)

of each file.

The date which the file is updated is displayed for the memory card or USB memory.

When the number of characters exceeds 17, the excess is not displayed.

(4) File setting column A This sets the device, directory, and file name for which the transmission, compare, and erase functions are used. When transferring, the file name of the transfer origin file is set. When renaming, the file name before renaming is set. When erasing, the erasing range is set. When the number of characters exceeds 28, the excess is not displayed.

As for the device and directory, the setting values are retained even when the power is turned OFF. (*2)

(5) File setting column B

(6) Input data This displays the data being transferred.

(7) Comparison data This displays the data being compared. If an error occurs while comparing data, the block for which the error occurred is displayed.

: Displayed : Not displayed

Display item/Device Memory Memory2 Memory card USB memory Number of programs

registered

Remain

Number of memory characters

Remain

List

Display items Details

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

396IB-1501453-D

(*1) When the selected device is [Memory card] or [USB Memory], the program comment is not displayed.

(*2) When the multi-part system program management is enabled (#1285 ext21/bit0 = 1) for the device [Memory], the last

updated date/time of the file is not displayed.

Menus

Menus Details This changes the setting area to file setting column A (transfer origin) or file setting column B (transfer destination). The display of the valid area (A or B) is highlighted.

This displays the sub-menu of the machining program storage area. When the sub-menu is selected, the device is confirmed, and if a directory exists it is set in the root. The memory is selected as the default.

This menu sets the directory that carries out input/ output operations, and is on standby for input. Note that when memory is selected for the device, the directory can be selected from the sub-menu.

This menu sets the file name that carries out input/ output operations, and is on standby for input. When memory is selected for the device, setting is not necessary if the directory is not the program.

This updates the list. The list of the directly selected in the currently valid file setting column (A/B) is up- dated.

This copies the file in file setting column A (transfer origin) to the file setting column B (transfer destina- tion). (The transfer origin file is not changed.) A message appears during transfer and when the transfer is completed.

This compares the files in file setting column A (transfer origin) and file setting column B (transfer desti- nation).

This erases the file in file setting column A.

NC memory files other than the program cannot be erased.

This erases the file in file setting column B.

NC memory files other than the program cannot be erased.

This changes the name of the file in file setting column A (transfer origin) to the name of the file in file

setting column B (transfer destination).

The same device must be selected for A and B. NC memory files other than the program cannot be renamed.

Pressing this menu switches display/non-display status and the display contents of the "Comment" col- umn of the program list as follows:

Program comment (*1) -> the last updated date/time of the file (*2) -> not displayed

This creates a new directory in the directory of the currently valid file setting column (A/B).

The directory can be created when the memory card or the USB memory is selected for the device.

This adds the contents of the file in file setting column B to that of in file setting column A. (The file in file

setting column B is not changed.)

NC memory files other than the program cannot be merged.

This interrupts the process (transfer, compare, etc.) during its execution.

Area change

Device select

Dir

File name

List update

Trnsfr A->B

Compare A:B

Erase A

Erase B

Rename A->B

Comment switch

Dir create

Merge A->B

Stop

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

397 IB-1501453-D

When setting the file setting field A or B device, directory and file name on this screen, the area containing these must be

valid.

The display area can be changed by pressing the menu key ([Area change]) or the cursor key [] and [].

After changing, the data setting operation is valid in that area.

File setting column A is valid. File setting column B is valid.

Changing the valid file setting field When file setting column A (top) is valid

(1) Press the menu [Area change]. The file setting column B (bottom) is validated.

This can also be changed with the cursor key [].

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

398IB-1501453-D

11.1 Selecting a Device, Directory and File

Sub-menus of [Device select]

Sub-menus of [Dir] (other than memory) and [File name]

File selection sequence

Designate the device where the target file is located. Select from the sub menu.

Designate the directory with a full path. Input the full path or select from the list.

Designate the file name. Input the file name or select from the list.

Menus

Menus Details This selects the NC memory (program, parameter, PLC program, NC data).

This selects the back-side SD card of the GOT.

This selects USB memory.

This select the expanded area of NC memory. This menu is grayed out and non-selectable, when the specification of program memory capacity 1000kB[2560m] or 2000kB[5120m] is invalid.

Menus Details The cursor appears in the list display. The list contents can be selected with the [INPUT] key. When a directory is selected, the contents of the selected directory are displayed in the list. Continued selection is possible. When a file name is selected, the file name is temporarily displayed in the input area. When the [INPUT] key is pressed again, it is fixed.

[In normal mode] The contents of the first page in the list are displayed.

[When importing data from the list] The contents of the first page in the list are displayed, and the cursor moves to the top row.

[In normal mode] The contents of the last page in the list are displayed.

[When importing data from the list] The contents of the last page in the list are displayed, and the cursor moves to the bottom row.

Mainte I/O

Memory

Memory card

USB Memory

Memory2

From list

Top jump

Bottom jump

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

399 IB-1501453-D

Sub-menus of [Dir] (memory)

The device can be selected from the sub-menu. (The devices that can be used will differ depending on the specifications.)

One of the following methods can be used to designate the directory (for devices other than the NC memory) and file name.

Designate the directory path (full path) or file name in the input area and press the [INPUT] key.

Press sub-menu [From list] of the menu [Dir] or [File name]. Move the cursor to the target directory or file name, and press the [INPUT] key.

A wildcard (*) can be used when selecting a file name.

(1) During directory and file name setting, the designated directory, path or file name will be set, even if it does not actually exist. This will not cause an error. Note that the previously set directory is overwritten.

(2) When a file in the NC memory other than a machining program is designated, it is not necessary to set the file name. (The file name is fixed.)

(3) When a file name is selected from the menu, it first is displayed in the input area. However, at this time the file name has not yet been fixed. Press the [INPUT] key again to fix the file name.

(4) If you press the key when setting a file name, the file name in the input area is erased.

(5) When selecting a fixed cycle program, it is necessary to set the basic common parameter "#1166 fixpro". Furthermore, select "Memory" for the device, and "Program" for the directory.

Menus Details "Program" appears in the directory. The "File" column is blank.

"Program all" is displayed in the "Dir" column. The "File" column is blank.

"Tool offset" is displayed in the "Dir" column. "TOOL.OFS" is displayed in the "File" column.

"Variable" is displayed in the Dir column. "COMMON.VAR" is displayed in the "File" column.

"Workpiece offset" is displayed in the "Dir" column. "WORK.OFS" is displayed in the "File" column.

"All tool data" is displayed in the "Dir" column. "TOOLALL.DAT" is displayed in the "File" column.

"Parameter" is displayed in the "Dir" column. "ALL.PRM" is displayed in the "File" column.

"System config" is displayed in the "Dir" column. "ASSEMBLY.INF" is displayed in the "File" column.

"Safety parameter" is displayed in the "Dir" column. "SAFEPARA.BIN" is displayed in the "File" column.

"Smp data" is displayed in the "Dir" column. "NCSAMP.CSV" is displayed in the "File" column.

"System parameter" is displayed in the "Dir" column. "SYSTEM.PRM" is displayed in the "File" column.

"Option" is displayed in the "Dir" column. "OPTION" is displayed in the "File" column.

Notes when selecting a file

Program

Program all

Tool offset

Variabl

Coord offset

All T data

Param

System config

Safety param

Smp data

System param

Option

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

400IB-1501453-D

Selecting a NC memory program (1) Press the menu [Device select].

(2) Press the menu [Memory].

(3) Press the menu [File name].

(4) Input the file name. The selected file name appears.

Input the file name.

10013 [INPUT]

Press the menu [From list].

The cursor appears in the list.

(5) Move the cursor to the file name to be selected, and

set.

[], [] [INPUT]

Selected file name is displayed in the input area.

(6) Press the [INPUT] key. The selected file name appears.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

401 IB-1501453-D

Multiple serial files can be transferred, compared and erased in the file setting column A. Set as follows in this case.

A wildcard (*) can be used for the file name.

(1) The file name for each directory is fixed. For the file name, refer to "11.8.2 List of File Names".

(2) When the menu [Program] or [Program all] is selected, the setting of "File name" column is cleared.

Designating multiple files

File name: (Upper row) First file name (Lower row) Last file name

File: * All files will be selected.

-

Selecting a file other than a program in NC memory (1) Press the menu [Device select].

(2) Press the menu [Memory].

(3) Select the menu [Dir].

(4) Press the menu [Tool offset]. The directory and file name appear.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

402IB-1501453-D

(1) Refer to next section "Selecting a device file other than the NC memory (When simultaneously selecting the directory and file name.)" procedure (3) or later for method of file designation.

Selecting a device file other than the NC memory (When separately selecting the directory and file name.) (1) Press the menu [Device select].

(2) Select the device.

(3) Select the menu [Dir].

(4) Select a file.

Input the directory path as a full path.

/PRG/PRECUT [INPUT]

Press the menu [From list]. The cursor appears in the list.

(5) Move the cursor to the directory to be selected and

set.

[], [] [INPUT]

Repeat this operation until the cursor arrives at the

target directory.

When the target directory is reached, press the

key and quit the mode for inputting the directory.

The selected directory appears in the data setting col- umn. The contents of the selected directory appear in the list.

/PRG/PRECUT

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

403 IB-1501453-D

Selecting a device file other than the NC memory (When simultaneously selecting the directory and file name.) (1) Press the menu [Device select].

(2) Select the device.

(3) Press the menu [File name].

(4) Select a file. The selected file name appears.

Input the file name.

10013 [INPUT]

Press the menu [From list].

The cursor appears in the list.

(5) Move the cursor to directory and file name to be se-

lected, and set.

[], [] [INPUT]

This operation is repeated until the cursor reaches

the file. When only the directory is selected and key

is pressed, select the file name separately.

(6) Press the [INPUT] key. The selected file name appears.

Canceling the input mode

(1) Press the [Device Select], [Dir] or [File name].

(2) Press the key.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

404IB-1501453-D

11.2 Transferring a File

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting

column A.

(2) Designate the transfer source device, directory and file name.

The designated file appears. Multiple files can be designated in the file setting column A. Designate the first and last file name of the target range. A wildcard "*" can be designated for the file name.

(3) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting column B.

(4) Designate the transfer destination device, directory and file name.

(5) Press the menu [Trnsfr A->B].

(6) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

CAUTION

" ; ", "EOB", "%", and "EOR" are symbols used for explanation. The actual codes for ISO are "CR, LF" ("LF") and "%". "%" and "EOR" are represented by "%" in ISO. The programs created on the edit screen are stored in the NC memory in a "CR, LF" format, however, the programs created with external devices may be stored in an "LF" for- mat. The actual codes for EIA are "EOB (End of Block)" and "EOR (End of Record)".

To prevent influence from data omission and data transformation in the communication circuit, always verify the data after inputting and outputting machining programs.

Mainte I/O

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

405 IB-1501453-D

Notes related to transferring in general (1) Depending on the type of file, some data cannot be transferred during automatic operation. Do not transfer during

automatic operation.

(2) When the capacity of the transfer destination is reached during file transfer, only the data transferred up to that point is registered as a file, and an error will occur.

(3) During input to the NC memory or comparison, if the file format size on the NC memory side differs from the other side file format size (when the maximum number of registrations differs between the NC memory and the other side), processing is carried out matched to the smaller size.

(4) Do not perform any file operation on the transfer source and destination files during the file transfer. The file may be damaged with the file operation.

Notes when transferring machining program files (1) The transfer speed is slower if there are many registrations.

(2) The size of one block of the machining program should be 250 characters or less.

(3) The characters that can be used for the file name and directory path are 1-byte number, 1-byte capital alphabetical letters, and 1-byte symbols recognized by the system.

Note that the following characters cannot be used. |, /, :, "," (comma), *, ?, ", <, >, a to z (small letters), space

Up to 32 characters are allowed for the file name to create in or transfer to NC memory.

(4) If the file whose name includes lower case alphabet is transferred to NC memory, the lower case letter will be con- verted into the capital letter.

(5) When the MTB macro and fixed cycle program are input to NC memory, change the program type with the parameter "#1166 fixpro". Also, set in the Input/Output screen as follows:

Device: Memory, Directory: Program

(6) With machining program created before the MELDAS500 Series, "EOB" is registered as "LF". However, "EOB" will be converted to "CR LF", and the number of characters will increase in this Series. Thus, when all of the machining programs output from an MELDAS500 Series or earlier NC, having the same specifications as the maximum memory capacity, are stored in this Series, the memory capacity may be exceeded.

(7) If the file to be transferred (input) is running or in "program restarting" mode, the operation message "Executing auto- matic operation" or "Program restarting" is displayed, and the file will not be transferred (input).

(8) When the parameter "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", the file consisting only of numerical figures will be trans- ferred with the "0" at the head deleted. For details, refer to "4.8.6 Leading Zero".

(9) When the multi-part system program management is valid (#1285 ext21/bit0 =1) and "#1285 ext21/bit2" (Multi-part system program generation and operation) is set to "1", the file transfer to the device [Memory] from the other device is executed with the machining programs in only displayed part system. In other cases, the machining programs are transfered across all part systems in batch.

(10) When the multi-part system program management is valid (#1285 ext21/bit0 =1) and "#1286 ext22/bit5" (Selection of multi-part system program input/output method) is set to "1", the file transfer from the device [Memory] to the other device is executed with the machining programs in only displayed part system. In other cases, the machining pro- grams are transfered across all part systems in batch.

(11) The transfer range from the external device to NC memory will change depending on the value set in the parameter "#19006 EOR Disable".

The head line will not be transferred. Up to "%" in the second line onward will be transferred, and data after "%" will not be transferred. If there is no "%", all data will be transferred.

All file contents will be transferred.

Precautions

(Example 1) If a format size of 200 files is input for a format size of 1000 NC files, 200 files are registered.

(Example 2) If 1000 files are input to the NC that formatted for 200 files, the files up to the 200th file can be registered and an error message appears. (The remaining files are not registered.)

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

406IB-1501453-D

(12) If the file to be transferred (input) is targeted for edit lock (edit lock B: 8000 to 9999 or edit lock C: 9000 to 9999), the message "Edit lock B" or "Edit lock C" is displayed, causing a transfer failure. If the program name is input with only numbers when the parameter "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1", the program is checked with the leading zero deleted. (Example: If the file name to be transferred (input) is designated by "008000" while edit lock B is enabled, the message "Edit lock B" is displayed, causing a transfer failure.)

(13) Multiple successive files or wildcard (*), if designated, is transferred, excluding the programs to be edit-locked, to suit the status of edit lock B or C.

(14) If the device shown below and the directory are designated for the destination to transfer a file, the following opera- tion is performed depending on conditions.

When an existing file is designated: The file is transferred with a temporary file name, and changed to the desig- nated file name after transfer processing has been completed. When a new file is designated: A new file is transferred with a temporary file name, and changed to the designated

file name after transfer processing has been completed.

(1) [B:Dev]: Memory, Memory2 Directory: Machining program

(2) [B:Dev]: Memory card, USB memory

A temporary file is designated by the file name that consists of 11 digits, beginning with the symbol "~".

After transfer is terminated properly, the temporary file is changed to the designated file name.

A temporary file remains in the cases below, but can be deleted in the same way as for a normal file.

When the transfer has terminated abnormally, for example, because the destination's capacity became full. When the transfer has been interrupted.

Notes when transferring tool offset data files (1) If an error occurs during offset data transfer, an error message appears on the screen, and the transfer operation is

interrupted.

Notes when transferring parameter files (1) In the same manner as when setting in the Parameter screen, there are parameters validated immediately after input,

and parameters validated after a restart. Restart when a parameter file has been transferred to the NC memory.

(2) When a parameter file is transferred to the NC memory, the setting value of the input/output parameters is also changed. Before transferring next time, set the parameters again.

Notes when transferring common variable data files (1) If the variable value is 100000 or more or less than 0.0001 when transferring common variable data, it is expressed

with an exponential expression.

Notes when transferring all tool data files (1) When tool life data is output from the NC memory, the tool information data, tool compensation data, and custom data

allocation information are output per section.

Notes when transferring sampling data file (1) When the output form is set as 8-digit hexadecimal number and the parameter "#1004 ctrlunit" is set to "E (1nm)",

accurate data can be output just within 1 m. When the output data length exceeds 1 m, lower 32 bits of the sampling data will be output.

(2) Sampling data file can be transferred from NC memory to an external device (output) but cannot be transferred from an external device to NC memory (input).

Tool information data section: [TOOLINF_L1] (Tool life management I), [TOOLINF_L2] (Tool life management II), [TOOLINF_M] (Tool life management M system)

Tool compensation data section: [TOOLOFS]

Custom data allocation section: [CUSTOM]

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

407 IB-1501453-D

11.3 Comparing Files (Compare)

(1) Files that can be compared are text files only. Correct outcome will not be obtained through binary file comparison.

(2) "0" at the head of the file name will not be deleted when checking the individual file which consists of one program in one file even the parameter "#8936 Delete leading 0" is set to "1". Designating the file name is required.

(3) When multiple successive files or wildcard (*) are/is designated as the transfer source, the comparison is executed ex- cluding the programs which are subject to the edit lock according to the status of Edit lock B and C.

(4) If you attempt the file comparison during the tool data sorting, the operation message "Can't open file for dev A (or B)" appears, which disables the comparison.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting

column A.

(2) Designate the device, directory and file name to be compared.

(3) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting column B.

(4) Designate the other device, directory and file name to be compared.

(5) Press the menu [Compare A:B]. The file comparison starts. The verifying data is displayed. A message appears when the comparison is completed. If a comparison error occurs, the block with the error is displayed in the comparison data display column on the screen.

Mainte I/O

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

408IB-1501453-D

11.4 Erasing a File

(1) If the file to be erased is running or in "program restarting" mode, the operation message "Executing automatic opera- tion" or "Program restarting" is displayed, and the file will not be erased.

(2) When a wildcard "*" is designated for the file to be erased, the erasing is executed excluding the programs which are subject to the edit lock according to the status of Edit lock B and C.

The operations are the same as method "Erasing a file [Erase A] " above. Designate the target device, directory and file

name in the file setting column B, and press the menu [Erase B].

Operation method (Erasing a file in file setting column A) (1) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting

column A.

(2) Designate the device, directory and file name to be erased.

(3) Press the menu [Erase A].

(4) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. The file is erased. A message appears when the erasing is completed. The number of programs registered, number of memory characters and remainder reappear. Press the menu [List update] to update the list.

Operation method (Erasing a file in file setting column B)

Mainte I/O

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

409 IB-1501453-D

11.5 Changing a File Name (Rename)

(1) Make sure the original and new devices are the same.

(2) If the file to be renamed is running or in "program restarting" mode, the operation message "Executing automatic oper- ation" or "Program restarting" is displayed, and the name will not be changed.

(3) If a file that does not exist is designated for the original file, or if an existing file name is designated for the new file se- lection, an error occurs, and the name is not changed.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting column A.

(2) Designate the original device, directory and file name.

(3) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting column B.

(4) Designate the new device, directory and file name.

(5) Press the menu [Rename A->B].

(6) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

Mainte I/O

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

410IB-1501453-D

11.6 Creating a Directory

The directory can also be created in file setting column B.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Area change] to select the file set-

ting column A.

(2) Designate the device. The designated details appear.

The devices that can create a directory are memory card

and USB memory.

(3) Designate the directory where the new directory is to be created.

(4) Set the new directory in the file setting column A.

(5) Press the menu [Dir create].

Mainte I/O

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

411 IB-1501453-D

11.7 Restrictions (1) When multiple files are transferred to NC memory, a file in edit lock mode is not transferred, and other files are trans-

ferred.

11.7.1 Device Definition

(1) If a USB memory device formatted over FAT32 is used, it may cause a file reading and writing failure. Use a USB memory device that is formatted with FAT32.

(2) If a USB memory device is removed or inserted while data is being transferred to it, data integrity cannot be guaranteed. While message "Now, transferring data" or "Now, formatting data" is being displayed, do not remove or insert the USB memory device. After message "Transfer completed" or "Formatting completed" has been displayed, remove or insert the USB memory device.

11.7.2 List Display

(1) If the number of full path characters exceeds 128 when the directory is being moved, it results in a movement failure.

(2) In the NC memory, you cannot use the cursor movement key or [INPUT] key to move the directory.

(3) The directory name must be designated using less than 100 characters. If the directory name is designated using 100 or more characters, it will not be recognized as the directory name.

(4) If a directory that contains a double-byte code file name such as a Japanese file name is displayed in list view, such a double-byte code file name is not displayed correctly. In addition, the number of file characters, comments, and number of stored characters is not displayed correctly.

11.7.3 Program Name

The following restrictions are applied to the file name that can be created and transferred in NC memory.

(1) The file name must be designated using up to 32 characters, including an extension.

(2) Single-byte digits, single-byte uppercase alphabet characters, and Windows-recognizable single-byte symbols are available for the file name or directory name. Therefore, a double-byte code file name such as a Japanese file name cannot be used.

(3) Edit lock B, edit lock C, and program display lock are available only for files that have the file name designated only by single-byte digits in the NC memory. Example: When edit lock B (8000 to 9999) is enabled:

(4) The following names cannot be used as file names.

File name with extension "$$$", "$$0", "$$1", "$$2", "$$3", "$$4", "$$5", "$$6", "$$7", "$$8", or "$$9"

"0" (File named "single-byte zero")

File name Feature Change 8000 Single-byte digits only Disabled

8000.PRG With extension Enabled

08000 Single-byte digits only, beginning with "0" Enabled

8000A With characters other than digits Enabled

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

412IB-1501453-D

11.8 Other Functions 11.8.1 Merging a File

(1) If the merge destination file (file in file setting column A) is running or in "program restarting" mode, the operation mes- sage "Executing automatic operation" or "Program restarting" is displayed, and the files will not be merged.

(2) When the parameter "#19006 EOR Disable" is set to "1", a file is merged as it is. But the terminal character of the merge destination file (file in file setting column A) is "%", a line feed code is added and then merged.

(3) Do not perform the file operation on the merge source and destination files during the merge. The file may be damaged with the file operation.

Operation method (1) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting

column A.

(2) Designate the merge destination device, directory, and file name.

(3) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting column B.

(4) Designate the merge source device, directory, and file name.

(5) Press the menu [Merg B->A].

(6) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key. A message appears when the merge is completed. The details of the file in file setting column A will be as follows when the merge is completed.

The details of the file in file setting column B do not change.

Mainte I/O

(FILE A) G28 XYZ G90 F800 G00 X100. Y100.; (FILE B) G91 G28 XYZ F1000; G01 X200. Y200.; M02; %

Details of file in file setting

column A before merge.

Details of file in file setting

column B before merge.

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

413 IB-1501453-D

11.8.2 List of File Names

There is a directory for each type of data in the device [Memory].

Each directory and file name (fixed) in the device is shown below.

Do not change the extensions (.XXX) when storing in a device other than [Memory].

Data type NC memory directory path

Fixed file name

Machining program /PRG/USER (Program No.)

Fixed cycle program /PRG/FIX (Program No.)

MTB macro /PRG/MMACRO (Program No.)

MDI /PRG/MDI (Program No.)

Parameters /PRM

Parameters [User, machine] (Text format) ALL.PRM

System parameter SYSTEM.PRM

Safety parameter file SAFEPARA.BIN

User PLC /LAD

Safety ladder 1 SAFEPLC1.LAD

Safety ladder 2 SAFEPLC2.LAD

NC data /DAT

Tool compensation amount data TOOL.OFS

All tool data TOOLALL.DAT

Common variable data COMMON.VAR

SRAM data SRAM.BIN

Workpiece offset data WORK.OFS

System configuration data /DGN ASSEMBLY.INF

APLC data /APLC APLC.BIN

Sampling data (binary) /LOG NCSAMP.CSV

History data NCSAMP.BIN

All history ALLLOG.LOG

Key history KEYLOG.LOG

Alarm history ALMLOG.LOG

Touch history TOUCHLOG.LOG

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

414IB-1501453-D

11.8.3 Edit Lock B and C

This function prohibits editing, erasing, etc., of the machining programs B and C, and protects the machining programs in

the device [Memory].

The operations below in the Edit MDI and the Input/Output screens are influenced by the edit lock setting.

An error will occur if operations that are not possible are attempted.

When the edit lock is valid, processing is executed (except the edit lock target program) by the input/output function.

(1) When the multiple part system specification is valid, the machining programs of all the part systems are protected by edit lock B and C.

(2) When multiple serial files or a wildcard (*) is designated for input/output function, programs except subject to edit lock will be processed.

(3) When a multiple programs are input to the memory without designating the file name like program batch input, the mes- sage "Edit lock B" or "Edit lock C" will be displayed and the input will be interrupted if the program which is subject to edit lock is detected.

Machining program Edit Lock B Edit Lock C A 1 to 7999

10000 to 99999999 --- ---

B (user standard program) 8000 to 8999

Editing prohibited ---

C (MTB custom) 9000 to 9999

Editing prohibited Editing prohibited

: Operation possible : Operation not possible

Screen Operation Edit Lock B Edit Lock C Machining program Machining program

A B C A B C Edit Search

Edit

MDI registration

Input/Output Transfer

Compare

Copy

Merge

Rename

Erase

Monitor Buffer correction

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

415 IB-1501453-D

11.8.4 Data Protection Keys

Data protection key prevents various data from being set or erased.

The key name differs according to the MTB. Refer to the instruction manual issued by the MTB for details.

The following data can be protected with the data protection key:

All tool data and the coordinate system preset data using the origin set

User parameters and common variables

Machining programs

The data protection key is enabled to prohibit the setting, erasing, etc. while the PLC signal is OFF (B contact).

Data protection key has higher protection level than that of Data protection by user's level.

11.8.5 The Batch Input/Output the Machining Program of NC Memory

One file which consists of two or more machining program can be transferred to NC memory by dividing the file. The ma-

chining programs united with one file can be transferred to the external device.

The targets are the machining programs of the user.

Example of "the external device -> NC memory" of machining program batch transfer

When the transfer direction file name is designated, the top program name of transfer source can be omitted. ("O1000" can

be omitted in above example.)

Batch input and verify to NC memory

Mainte I/O

PROCESS01 *

O1000(TEST) N1G28X0.Y0.Z0. : N999M02 OTAP.PRG(TAP01) G84W-100.R0.P2000 : M30 : : O9999 G92X0.Y0.Z0. : M30 %

1000

TAP.PRG

: : 9999

(TEST) N1G28X0.Y0.Z0. : N999M02 %

(TAP01) G84W-100.R0.P2000 : M30 %

G92X0.Y0.Z0. : M30 %

External device (USB memory etc.)

NC memory

(Blank line)

Transfer

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

416IB-1501453-D

(1) When programs are input in a batch to NC memory, always specify "Program batch" to NC memory directory as transfer direction. If "Program batch" is not specified, one file is transferred (No batch).

(2) When the program which is subject to edit lock exists in transfer source, the message "Edit lock B" or "Edit lock C" ap- pears, and transfer is interrupted. When the program which is not subject to edit lock is transferred, delete the program which is subject to edit lock in transfer source. (Refer to "11.8.3 Edit Lock B and C".)

(3) When the protection of the machining program is valid, the program cannot be transferred/verified. (Refer to "11.8.4 Data Protection Keys".)

(4) During the automatic operation, the program in program restart cannot be overwritten. The operation message "Execut- ing automatic operation" or "Program restarting" appears, and transfer is interrupted.

(5) The first line of the transfer source file is ignored.

(1) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting column A.

(2) Designate the transfer source device and directory.

(3) Designate the file which consists of two or more machining programs.

(4) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting column B.

(5) Designate the transfer direction device (memory).

(6) Press the menu [Dir] - [Program all].

When the file name is designated, only the top program of transfer source is stored in the designated file. For example of "Example of "the external device -> NC memory" of machining program batch transfer", when "TEST- CUT" is designated as the transfer direction file name, the top program is transferred as not "1000" but "TESTCUT".

(7) Press the menu [Trnsfr A->B].

(8) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

When the same machining program already exists in transfer direction device, the operation message "Overwrite this file?(Y/N)" appears. The transferring the following program is continued by selecting [Y] or [N] key.

(9) Press the menu [Compare A:B].

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

417 IB-1501453-D

Example of "NC memory -> the external device" of machining program batch transfer

Batch output and verify from NC memory

(1) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting column A.

(2) Designate the transfer source device (memory).

(3) Press the menu [Dir] - [Program all].

Do not specify the file name. If the name is specified, an error will occur.

(4) Press the menu [Area change] to select file setting column B.

(5) Designate the transfer direction device and directory.

(6) Designate the transfer direction file to input multiple machining programs.

When the file name is not designated, output to the file "ALL.PRG" of the designated directory.

(7) Press the menu [Trnsfr A->B].

(8) Press the [Y] or [INPUT] key.

When the same machining program already exists in transfer direction device, the operation message "Overwrite this file?(Y/N)" appears. The transferring the following program is continued by selecting [Y] or [N] key.

(9) Press the menu [Compare A:B].

1000

TAP.PRG

: : 9999

(TEST) N1G28X0.Y0.Z0. : N999M02 %

(TAP01) G84W-100.R0.P2000 : M30 %

G92X0.Y0.Z0. : M30 %

PROCESS01 *

O1000(TEST) N1G28X0.Y0.Z0. : N999M02 OTAP.PRG(TAP01) G84W-100.R0.P2000 : M30 : : O9999 G92X0.Y0.Z0. : M30 %

NC memory External device (USB memory etc.)

(Blank line)

Transfer

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

418IB-1501453-D

(1) When programs are output in a batch from NC memory, always specify "Program batch" to NC memory directory as transfer source. If "Program batch" is not specified, the program is transferred by one program per one file.

(2) When the programs which are subject to edit lock exists in NC memory, those file is not transferred. (The files are trans- ferred excluding those files.) The verification is executed excluding the programs which are subject to edit lock. (Refer to "11.8.3 Edit Lock B and C".)

(3) When the protection of the machining program is valid, the program cannot be transferred/verified. (Refer to "11.8.4 Data Protection Keys".)

(1) When the machining program batch input/output function of NC memory is used, "()" cannot be used for the machining program name. It is recognized that the inside of "( )" is a comment.

(2) The file name of file which consists of two or more machining program can have up to 32 characters, including the ex- tension as well as the machining program.

(3) When the "Program batch" is designated to NC memory directory, it is not possible to delete, rename and merge files. When the files are deleted in a batch, use "Program" for directory, and a wildcard (*) for file name.

(4) For other precautions, refer to "11.2 Transferring a File".

Precautions

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

419 IB-1501453-D

11.9 Performing Backups of NC Memory Data Using the backup/restoration function of the GOT, the data of the NC memory can be backed up in the external device.

Also, the data can be restored from the external device to the NC memory.

This section explains the procedures to backup/restore the data using the front-side USB drive of the GOT.

The target data for the backup/restoration are as follows:

(*1) When the parameter "#1481 Enable S-safety" (Enable smart safety observation) is set to "1", and when restoring the

safety parameters and the safety ladders, release the safety password with the parameter "#51013 SF_PSWD". If the

safety password is not released, these files will not be restored (the restoration will be skipped). When the safety pass-

word of the CNC does not match that of the target file for the restoration, an error will occur during the restoration even

though the safety password has been released.

(*2) This file is valid when the specification of program memory capacity is 1000kB[2560m] or 2000kB[5120m].

(1) Make sure to complete the editing of the machining program or the data setting operation before performing the backup/ restoration.

(2) When the parameter "#1391 User level protect" (Enable Data protection by user's level) is set to "1", release the pro- tection before operating the backup/restoration.

: Targeted : Not targeted

Data outline File name Backup Restoration System file SYSPRM.BIN

Parameters ALL.PRM

Machining program ALL.PRG

ALL2.PRG (*2)

MTB macro program MACROALL.BIN

MDI program MDIALL.PRG

Tool offset data TOOL.OFS

Tool all data files TOOLALL.DAT

Workpiece offset data WORK.OFS

Common variable COMMON.VAR

Safety parameters (*1) SAFEPARA.BIN

Safety ladders (*1) SAFEPLC1.LAD

SAFEPLC2.LAD

APLC load module APLC.BIN

System data SRAM.BIN

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

420IB-1501453-D

Operation method for backup

(1) Insert a USB memory in the front-side USB drive of the GOT.

(2) Press the screen at the top left to open the utility screen.

(3) Press [Data mng.] tab - (Backup restoration).

(4) Press (Backup function).

CPU modules are selected and displayed automatically. The backup files will be created. The file names will be displayed automatically.When the confirmation message appears, press

[OK] to start the backup.

(5) When the completion window appears, press [OK].

(6) Remove the USB memory from the front-side USB drive of the GOT.

Operation method for restoring

(1) Insert a USB memory with the backup data in the front-side USB drive of the GOT.

(2) Press the screen at the top left to open the utility screen.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

421 IB-1501453-D

(3) Press [Data mng.] tab - (Backup restoration).

(4) Press (Restoration function).

The files in the USB memory are displayed in "Data list".

Data name displayed in the "Date list" column indi- cates the date of backup and the number of back- ups. (Example) The data backed up on 2016/04/05 is displayed as follows. 16040500 (1st backup) 16040501 (2nd backup)

When the device selection screen appears, select the restoration target device.

(5) Select the data to restore and the device and then press [Execute].

When the confirmation message appears, press [OK] to start the restoration.

(6) When the completion window appears, press [OK].

(7) Remove the USB memory from the front-side USB drive of the GOT.

C80 Series Instruction Manual 11 Performing a Backup Operation

422IB-1501453-D

12

423 IB-1501453-D

Appendix 1: List of Function Codes

C80 Series Instruction Manual 12 Appendix 1: List of Function Codes

424IB-1501453-D

12Appendix 1: List of Function Codes

(*1) This denotes characters (including blanks) which are stored inside and which correspond to the command codes. "@"

is not displayed.

Function code

Control unit rec- ognition

PARITY V Screen dis- play

Setting and display unit

In memory Punch-output Internal NC system func- tion

ISO V count Key-in Store ISO 0 to 9 Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored 0 to 9 Numerical data

A to Z Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored A to Z Addresses

+ Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored + Sign, variable operator (+)

- Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored - Sign, variable operator (-)

. Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored . Decimal point

, Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored ,

/ Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored / Block delete (optional block skip)

Variable operator ()

% Yes Counted Displayed (%) No Key-in (automatical- ly inserted)

Stored % End of record

LF/NL Yes Counted Displayed (;) Key-in Stored LF End of block

;/EOB

( Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored ( Control out (comment start)

;/EOB

) Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored ) Control in (comment end)

;/EOB

: Yes Counted Displayed No Key-in Stored : Program number address (instead of O.)

# Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored # Variable number

* Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored * Variable operator (X)

= Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored = Variable definition

[ Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored [ Variable operator

] Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored ] Variable operator

BS No Not displayed No Key-in Stored

HT No Not displayed No Key-in Stored

SP No Not displayed Key-in Stored SP

(T-V) Automatic adjustment

CR No Not displayed No Key-in Stored

DEL No Not Counted Not displayed No Key-in Not Stored

NULL No Not Counted Not displayed No Key-in Not Stored

Any other than the above

No Counted (*1) No Key-in Stored

13

425 IB-1501453-D

Appendix 2: Other Functions for Reference

C80 Series Instruction Manual 13 Appendix 2: Other Functions for Reference

426IB-1501453-D

13Appendix 2: Other Functions for Reference 13.1 F1-digit Feed

The feedrate registered by parameter can be assigned by designating a single digit following address F.

There are six F codes: F0 and F1 to F5. The rapid traverse rate is applied when F0 is issued which is the same as the G00

command.

When one of the codes from F1 to F5 is issued, the cutting feedrate set to support the code serves as the valid rate com-

mand.

If F6 or larger value is command, the value is regarded as the cutting feedrate which has been directly commanded with

numerical values.

When "F1-digit speed change valid" signal is valid when F1-digit feed is issued, a feedrate which is set by a parameter can

be increased or decreased by operating the manual handle.

Refer to "Programming Manual" for more details on F1-digit feed.

To validate the F1-digit feed, the parameter "#1079 f1digt" or "#8145 Validate F1 digit" must be ON.

When the F1-digit feed is valid, the feedrate of each command is as follows:

F0: Rapid traverse rate

F1 to F5: The feedrate configured by the corresponding parameter "#1185 spd_F1" to "#1185 spd_F1"(F1 digit feedrate

F1 to F5)

When the F1-digit command is valid, the feedrate can be increased/decreased by operating the first manual handle. (The

feedrate cannot be changed by the 2nd and 3rd handles.)

Changing the feedrate by the handle is available satisfying the following conditions:

(1) The operation must be in automatic start.

(2) The operation must be in cutting feed, and F1-digit feedrate command must be issued.

(3) The F1-digit feed parameter must be ON.

(4) The F1-digit feed switch must be ON.

(5) The operation must not be in handle mode.

(6) The operation must not be in dry run.

(7) Upper limit of F1-digit feedrate ("#1506 F1_FM") and F1-digit feedrate change constant("#1507 F1_K F1") are not zero.

Validate the F1-digit feedrate

Enabling conditions of the speed change with the handle

C80 Series Instruction Manual 13 Appendix 2: Other Functions for Reference

427 IB-1501453-D

Once the F1-digit feedrate is changed with manual handle, the changed feedrate is valid until parameter is changed or the

power is turned OFF. Changed feedrate can be checked only during the operation. Note that if the parameter "#1246

set18(bit16)" (switch over of the F1-digit feedrate changing method) is set to "1", even after the power is turned OFF, op-

eration is kept at the changed feedrate because the parameter of F1-digit feedrate has been changed. In this case, if the

screen is not switched, the changed parameter values are not reflected to the display.

The increase/decrease amount per handle gradient is expressed with the following equation.

(Example) When the handle scale unit is to be made 10mm/min.

If FM is made 3600mm/min, feedrate change constant (K) must be set to "360" according to the following formula.

(1) If F1-digit feedrate changing valid signal is turned ON when F1-digit feed is commanded and changing feedrate with the manual handle is valid, it is clamped at the upper limit of F1-digit feedrate if the F1-digit feedrate is greater than the upper limit of F1-digit feedrate.

(2) When the F1-digit feedrate is 0 with the handle operation during the F1-digit feedrate command, the alarm "M01 F1-digit feedrate zero 0104" will occur. This alarm can be eliminated when the F1-digit feedrate is set in larger value than 0 with the handle operation.

(3) When K is 0, the speed is not changed.

(1) The number of manual handle pulses is 1 pulse per scale unit regardless of the scaling factor.

(2) During a F1-digit feed command, the F1-digit feed number and F1-digit feed command signal are output as the PLC signals.

(3) When F1. to F5. (with decimal point) are assigned, the 1mm/min to 5mm/min (direct numerical value command) are established instead of the F1-digit feed command.

(4) When the commands are used with inch command, one-tenth of the feedrate set correspond to F1 to F5 serves at the assigned speed inch/min.

(5) When the commands are used with the millimeter or degree units, the feedrate set to correspond to F1 to F5 serves as the assigned speed mm ()/mm.

(6) When both the F1-digit feedrate changing and the manual speed command are present, the manual speed command will have the priority.

(7) In the synchronous tapping command, the speed cannot be changed with the handle.

Conversion of the F1-digit feedrate changing with handle operation

F = P FM P: Handle pulse ()) FM: Upper limit of F1-digit feedrate (#1506 F1_FM) K: F1-digit feedrate change constant (#1507 F1_K)

K

F = 10 = 1 3600

K

Precautions

Note

C80 Series Instruction Manual 13 Appendix 2: Other Functions for Reference

428IB-1501453-D

14

429 IB-1501453-D

Appendix 3: Daily Inspection of GOT

C80 Series Instruction Manual 14 Appendix 3: Daily Inspection of GOT

430IB-1501453-D

14Appendix 3: Daily Inspection of GOT The GOT does not have consumable components that shorten its life.

However, the battery and liquid crystal display have limited life. Periodical replacement of the battery is recommended.

For replacing the liquid crystal display, consult the MTB.

Daily inspection items

Cleaning the liquid crystal display Use the GOT always in a clean condition.

To clean the GOT, wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent or ethanol.

Inspection item Inspection method Criterion Corrective action Dirt on the protective sheet Visual check Not outstanding Replace the sheet with a new

sheet.

Foreign material adherence Visual check No foreign material adher- ence

Remove the foreign material. Clean the screen.

Revision History

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Oct. 2016 IB(NA)1501453-A First edition created.

Aug. 2017 IB(NA)1501453-B Added or modified the following contents corresponding to the A2 version of the system software.

Added the following contents: - 2.6.3 Operating the Screen by Touch Gestures - 5.4.5 Undoing Change of Tool Compensation Data - 8.6 Thread Recutting Function

Changed the following contents: - 1 Outline of Menu Items - 3.2 Creating and Editing a Machining Program - 3.6.1 Changing the Display - 3.8.1 Multi-part System Simultaneous Program Editing - 4.8.5 Data Protection Keys - 5.4.1 Setting the Tool Compensation Data - 5.4.3 Erasing the Tool Compensation Data - 5.4.4 Copying and Pasting the Tool Compensation Data - 5.5 Setting the Tool Management Data (Tool Management Screen) - 10.4.1 Displaying and Setting the PLC Device Data (I/F Diagnosis Screen) - 11.8.4 Data Protection Keys

Moved the following contents: - 2.8 Changing the Operation Level (Protect Setting Screen) - 13.1 F1-digit Feed

Deleted the following contents: - 9.7 Other Functions - 10.4.2.1 Writing/Reading the Data Using the NC Data Designation - Appx.2: Table of Command Value Ranges - Appx.3: Circular Cutting Radius Error

Also, corrected wrong indications.

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Aug. 2018 IB(NA)1501453-C The descriptions were revised corresponding to S/W version B0 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC C80 Series.

Changed the following contents: - 2.1.3 Messages - 2.2.3 Operation Mode/MDI Status - 2.6.2 Software Keyboard - 2.6.3 Operating the Screen by Touch Gestures - 3.2 Creating and Editing a Machining Program - 3.8 Editing a Multi-part System Program - 3.9.1 Common Variables - 4.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program - 4.3 Transferring a File - 4.9 The Batch Input/Output the Machining Program of NC Memory - 5.3.2 Tool Measurement (L System) - 6.2 Selecting High-accuracy Control Parameters (Machining Cond I Screen) - 9.1 Operation Search - 9.2.8 Program Tree Display - 9.3.3 File Setting Screen - 9.3.6 Executing Restart Search (Restart Type 1) - 9.4 Collation and Stop - 11 Performing a Backup Operation - 11.1 Selecting a Device, Directory and File - 11.2 Transferring a File - 11.8.2 List of File Names - 11.9 Performing Backups of NC Memory Data

Changed the titles of the following contents: - 10.2.3 Drive Monitor Screen (Servo Unit) - 10.2.4 Drive Monitor Screen (Spindle Unit) - 10.2.5 Drive Monitor Screen (Power Supply Unit) - 10.2.6 Drive Monitor Screen (Synchronous Error) - 10.2.7 Clearing the Alarm History on Drive Monitor Screen

Moved the following contents and changed their titles: - 10.5 Safety Observation - 10.5.1 Safety Observation Screen (Configuration Diagnosis) - 10.5.2 Safety Observation Screen (Signal Monitor) - 10.5.3 Safety Observation Screen (Drive Monitor) - 10.5.4 Safety Observation Screen (Version Display)

Also, corrected wrong indications.

Dec. 2019 IB(NA)1501453-D The descriptions were revised corresponding to S/W version B5 of Mitsubishi Electric CNC C80 Series.

Changed the following contents: - 2.1.2 Explanations of the Screens - 2.6.2 Software Keyboard - 3.2 Creating and Editing a Machining Program - 3.4 Registering and Editing the Fixed Cycle Program - 3.9.1 Common Variables - 4.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program - 5.3.2 Tool Measurement (L System) - 5.7.2 Workpiece Measurement (L System) - 5.9 Setting Workpiece Coordinate System Shift - 5.9.2 Automatically Setting the Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Value - 6.1.5 Echoback - 8.5 MDI Program Editing - 9.1 Operation Search - 9.1.2 Changing Whether to Show or Hide the Comment Field - 9.3.2 Top Search Screen - 9.3.3 File Setting Screen - 9.4 Collation and Stop - 10.2.3 Drive Monitor Screen (Servo Unit) - 10.2.4 Drive Monitor Screen (Spindle Unit) - 10.3.2 Checking Alarms of Drive Unit - 10.5.1 Safety Observation Screen (Configuration Diagnosis) - 11. Performing a Backup Operation

Also, corrected wrong indications.

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Global Service Network

AMERICA EUROPE

.V.B EPORUE CIRTCELE IHSIBUSTIM)RETNEC AF ACIREMA( .CNI NOITAMOTUA CIRTCELE IHSIBUSTIM Central Region Service Center (Chicago) European Service Headquarters (Dusseldorf, GERMANY) 500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, ILLINOIS 60061, U YNAMREG ,NEGNITAR 28804 1 ztalP-cirtcelE-ihsibustiM .A.S.

-2012-94+ :LET 0562-874-748-1+ :XAF / 0052-874-748-1+ :LET 486-5000 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910 Minneapolis, MN Service Satellite Detroit, MI Service Satellite South Germany Service Center (Stuttgart) Grand Rapids, MI Service Satellite SCHELMENWASENSTRASSE 16-20, 70567 STUTTGART, GERMANY Lima, OH Service Satellite TEL: + 49-711-770598-123 / FAX: +49-711-770598-141 Cleveland, OH Service Satellite Indianapolis, IN Service Satellite France Service Center (Paris) St. Louis, MO Service Satellite 25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE

TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 South/East Region Service Center (Georgia) 1845 SATTELITE BOULEVARD STE. 450, DULUTH, GEORGIA 30097, U.S.A. France Service Satellite (Lyon)

UQCAJ EELLA ,021 9154-852-876-1+ XAF / 9254-852-876-1+ LET ES MONOD 69800 SAINT PRIEST FRANCE Charleston, SC Service Satellite TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 / FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 Charlotte, NC Service Satellite Raleigh, NC Service Satellite Italy Service Center (Milan) Dallas, TX Service Satellite PALAZZO SIRIO INGRESSO 1, VIA COLLEONI, 7, 20864 AGRATE BRIANZA(MI), ITALY Houston, TX Service Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 Hartford, CT Service Satellite Knoxville, TN Service Satellite Italy Service Satellite (Padova) Nashville, TN Service Satellite VIA G. SAVELLI, 24 - 35129 PADOVA, ITALY Baltimore, MD Service Satellite TEL: +39-039-6053-342 / FAX: +39-039-6053-206 Pittsburg, PA Service Satellite Newark, NJ Service Satellite U.K. Service Center Syracuse, NY Service Satellite TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. Ft. Lauderdale, FL Service Satellite TEL: +49-2102-486-5000 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910 Lafayette, LA Service Satellite

Spain Service Center Western Region Service Center (California) CTRA. RUBI, 76-80 8174 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN 5900-B KATELLA AVE. - 5900-A KATELLA AVE. CYPRESS, CALIFORNI 9751-98-539-43+ :XAF / 6322-56-539-43+ :LET .A.S.U ,03609 A TEL: +1-714-699-2625 / FAX: +1-847-478-2650 San Francisco, CA Service Satellite Poland Service Center Seattle, WA Service Satellite UL.KRAKOWSKA 50, 32-083 BALICE, POLAND Denver, CO Service Satellite TEL: +48-12-347-6500 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701

Canada Region Service Center (Tronto) Hungary Service Center ZSARADAM ADANAC ,2JO R3L OIRATNO ,MAHKRAM EUNEVA HT41 9924 IRODAPARK, MADARASZ VIKTOR UT 47-49, 1138 BUDAPEST, HUNGARY

43-21-84+ :LET 5397-574-509-1+ :XAF / 5083-457-509-1+ :LET 7-6500 / FAX: +48-12-630-4701 Edmonton, AB Service Satellite Montreal, QC Service Satellite Turkey Service Center

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TURKEY A. Mexico Region Service Center (Queretaro) SERIFALI MAHALLESI NUTUK SOKAK. NO.41 34775 Parque Tecnolgico Innovacin Quertaro, Lateral Carretera Estatal 431, Km 2+200, Lote 91 Modulos 1 y 2 UMRANIYE, ISTANBUL, TURKEY Hacienda la Machorra, CP 76246, El Marqus, Quertaro, Mxic 5993-625-612-09+ :XAF / 0052-969-612-09+ :LET o TEL: +52-442-153 4250 Monterrey, NL Service Satellite Czech Republic Service Center Mexico City, DF Service Satellite AutoCont Control Systems s.r.o (Service Partner) Aguascalientes, AGS, Service Satellite KAFKOVA 1853/3, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2, CZECH REPUBLIC

TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199

BRAZIL Russia Service Center MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC RUSSIA LLC

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC DO BRASIL COMRCIO E SERVIOS LTDA. LETNIKOVSKAYA STREET 2, BLD.1, 5TH 115114 MOSCOW, RUSSIA Votorantim Office TEL: +7-495-721-2070 / FAX: +7-495-721-2071 AV. GISELE CONSTANTINO,1578, PARQUE BELA VISTA, VOTORANTIM-SP, BRAZIL CEP:18.110-650 TEL: +55-15-3023-9000 Sweden Service Center Blumenau Santa Catarina office HAMMARBACKEN 14, P.O.BOX 750 SE-19127, SOLLENTUNA, SWEDEN MAQSERVICE Canoas, RS Service Satellite TEL: +46-8-6251000 / FAX: +46-8-966877

Bulgaria Service Center AKHNATON Ltd. (Service Partner) 4 ANDREJ LJAPCHEV BLVD. POB 21, BG-1756 SOFIA, BULGARIA TEL: +359-2-8176009 / FAX: +359-2-9744061

Ukraine Service Center (Kiev) CSC Automation Ltd. (Service Partner) 4 B, YEVHENA SVERSTYUKA STR., 02002 KIEV, UKRAINE TEL: +380-44-494-3344 / FAX: +380-44-494-3366

Belarus Service Center TECHNIKON Ltd. (Service Partner) NEZAVISIMOSTI PR.177, 220125 MINSK, BELARUS TEL: +375-17-393-1177 / FAX: +375-17-393-0081

South Africa Service Center MOTIONTRONIX (Service Partner) P.O. BOX 9234, EDLEEN, KEMPTON PARK GAUTENG, 1625, SOUTH AFRICA TEL: +27-11-394-8512 / FAX: +27-11-394-8513

ASEAN CHINA

)RETNEC AF ANIHC( .DTL )ANIHC( NOITAMOTUA CIRTCELE IHSIBUSTIM)RETNEC AF NAESA( .DTL .ETP AISA CIRTCELE IHSIBUSTIM Singapore Service Center China Shanghai Service Center 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU,

C ,633002 IAHGNAHS 9347-6746-56+ :XAF / 8032-3746-56+ :LET HINA TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2322-3000*8422

Philippines Service Center China Qingdao Service Center nihC)rentraP ecivreS( noitaroproc metsys noitamotuA elbixelF a Suzhou Service Center

UNIT NO.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD China Wuhan Service Center SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY, ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771 China Ningbo Service Center TEL: +63-2-807-2416 / FAX: +63-2-807-2417 China Ningbo Service Partner

China Jinan Service Partner China Hangzhou Service Partner

VIETNAM China Suzhou Service Partner

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC VIETNAM CO.,LTD. China Beijing Service Center Vietnam Ho Chi Minh Service Center 5/F, ONE INDIGO, 20 JIUXIANQIAO ROAD CHAOYANG DISTRICT, UNIT 01-04, 10TH FLOOR, VINCOM CENTER 72 LE THANH TON STREET ANIHC ,500001 GNIJIEB ,1TCIRTSID , HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 / FAX: +86-10-6518-2938 TEL: +84-28-3910 5945 / FAX: +84-28-3910 5947 China Beijing Service Partner

Vietnam Hanoi Service Center China Tianjin Service Center 24TH FLOOR, HANDICO TOWER, PHAM HUNG ROAD, ME TRI HA, ME TRI IXEH ,DAOR IYUOY 53 ON ,REWOT YTIC NIJNAIT ,3002 TINU ,DRAW DISTRICT,

,160003 NIJNAIT MANTEIV ,YTIC ION AH ,TCIRTSID MEIL UT MAN CHINA -22-68+ :LET 6708-7393-42-48+ :XAF / 5708-7393-42-48+ :LET 2813-1015 / FAX: +86-22-2813-1017

China Xian Service Center China Changchun Service Partner

INDONESIA China Chengdu Service Center

PT. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDONESIA 1501-1503, 15F, GUANG-HUA CENTRE BUILDING-C, NO.98 NORTH GUANG HUA 3th RD, Indonesia Service Center (Cikarang) CHENGDU, 610000, CHINA JL. KENARI RAYA BLOK G2-07A, DELTA SILICON 5, LIPPO CIKARANG - BEKASI 17550, INDONESIA TEL: +86-28-8446-8030 / FAX: +86-28-8446-8630 TEL: +62-21-2961-7797 / FAX: +62-21-2961-7794

China Shenzhen Service Center LEVEL8, GALAXY WORLD TOWER B, 1 YABAO ROAD, LONGGANG DISTRICT,

MALAYSIA SHENZHEN 518129, CHINA TEL: +86-755-2399-8272 / FAX: +86-755-8229-3686

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SALES MALAYSIA SDN. BHD. China Dongguan Service Center Malaysia Service Center (Kuala Lumpur Service Center) China Dongguan Service Partner LOT 11, JALAN 219, P.O BOX 1036, 46860 PETALING JAYA, SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN. MALAYSIA China Xiamen Service Partner TEL: +60-3-7960-2628 / FAX: +60-3-7960-2629 Johor Bahru Service Satellite China Dalian Service Center

DONGBEI 3-5, DALIAN ECONOMIC & TECHNICAL DEVELOPMENTZONE, LIAONING PROVINCE, 116600, CHINA

THAILAND TEL: +86-411-8765-5951 / FAX: +86-411-8765-5952

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FACTORY AUTOMATION (THAILAND) CO.,LTD. Thailand Service Center (Bangkok) KOREA 101 TRUE DIGITAL PARK OFFICE, 5TH FLOOR, SUKHUMVIT ROAD, BANGKOK 10260, THAILAND TRUE DIGITAL PARK SUKHUMVIT 101 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD. (KOREA FA CENTER) TEL: +66-2-092-8600 / FAX: +66-2-043-1231-33 Korea Service Center Bowin Service Center (Chonburi) 8F GANGSEO HANGANG XI-TOWER A, 401 YANGCHEON-RO, GANGSEO-GU, Korat Service Center SEOUL 07528 KOREA

TEL: +82-2-3660-9609 / FAX: +82-2-3664-8668 Korea Daegu Service Satellite

INDIA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDIA PVT., LTD. TAIWAN CNC Technical Center (Bangalore) PLOT NO. 56, 4TH MAIN ROAD, PEENYA PHASE 3, MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD. (TAIWAN FA CENTER) PEENYA INDUSTRIAL AREA, BANGALORE 560058, KARNATAKA, INDIA Taiwan Taichung Service Center

NI ,1-8.ON 7412-5564-08-19+ : XAF / 1212-5564-08-19+ : LET DUSTRIAL 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTRIAL PARK, SITUN DIST., Chennai Service Satellite TAICHUNG CITY 40768, TAIWAN Coimbatore Service Satellite TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 / FAX: +886-4-2359-0689 Hyderabad Service Satellite

Taiwan Taipei Service Center North India Service Center (Gurgaon) 10F, NO.88, SEC.6, CHUNG-SHAN N. RD., SHI LIN DIST., TAIPEI CITY 11155, TAIWAN

ET ,YTIC REBYC FLD ,SNEERG REBYC FLD ,B&A REWOT ,ROOLF DN2 L: +886-2-2833-5430 / FAX: +886-2-2833-5433 DLF PHASE-III, GURGAON- 122 002, HARYANA, INDIA TEL : +91-124-4630 300 / FAX : +91-124-4630 399 Taiwan Tainan Service Center Ludhiana Service Satellite 11F-1., NO.30, ZHONGZHENG S. ROAD, YONGKANG DISTRICT, TAINAN CITY 71067, TAIWAN Panth Nagar Service Satellite TEL: +886-6-252-5030 / FAX: +886-6-252-5031 Delhi Service Satellite Jamshedpur Service Satellite Manesar Service Satellite OCEANIA

West India Service Center (Pune) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. ICC-Devi GAURAV TECHNOLOGY PARK, UNIT NO.402, FOURTH FLOOR, NORTH WING, Oceania Service Center SURVEY NUMBER 191-192 (P), NEXT to INDIAN CARD CLOTHING COMP AILARTSUA 6112 .W.S.N ,EREMLADYR ,DAOR AIROTCIV 843 ,dtL YNA OPP. VALLABH NAGAR, PIMPRI, PUNE- 411 018, MAHARASHTRA, INDI 5427-4869-2-16+ :XAF /9627-4869-2-16+ :LET A TEL : +91-20-6819 2274 / FAX : +91-20-4624 2100 Kolhapur Service Satellite Aurangabad Service Satellite Mumbai Service Satellite

West India Service Center (Ahmedabad) 204-209, 2ND FLOOR, 31FIVE, CORPORATE ROAD PRAHLADNAGAR, AHMEDABAD -380015, GUJARAT, INDIA TEL : + 91-79-6777 7888 Rajkot Service Satellite

Notice

Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product.

Duplication Pr

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the C80 Series Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series Instruction Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Instruction Manual for Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Instruction Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series Instruction Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series Instruction Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series Instruction Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series Instruction Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric C80 Series Instruction Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.